User's Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
System Settings Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
2
Table of Contents
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
• Manuals Provided with the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1
SYSTEM SETTINGS
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Common Operation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)
Accessing the System Settings (General) . . . . . . . . 8
System Settings (General) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Total Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• Job Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• Device Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
• Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
• Keyboard Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
List Print (User) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Paper Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
• Tray Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
• Paper Type Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
• Auto Tray Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Address Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• Custom Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
• Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fax Data Receive/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
• I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Printer Condition Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
• Printer Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
• PCL Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
• PostScript Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Document Filing Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
USB-Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
• Modify User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3
SYSTEM SETTINGS
(ADMINISTRATOR)
Accessing the System Settings (Administrator) . . 29
• When User Authentication is not Enabled . . . . . . 29
• When User Authentication is Enabled . . . . . . . . . 30
System Settings (Administrator) List . . . . . . . . . . . 32
User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
• User Authentication Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
• User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
• Page Limit Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
• Authority Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
• Favorite Operation Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
• User Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Energy Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
• Customize Key Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
• Home Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
• Display Pattern Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Device Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
• Original Size Detector Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
• Disabling of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
• Fusing Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copy Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
• Initial Status Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
• Color Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
• Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
• Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
• Auto Color Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Image Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
• Operation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
• Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
• I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3
Document Filing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
• Other Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
• Document Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
List Print (Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Enable/Disable Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Change Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Product Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Initialize and/or Store Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4
SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX
System Settings for Fax (General) List . . . . . . . . . . 93
Address Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
• Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
• F-Code Memory Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fax Data Receive/Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
• Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
System Settings for Fax (Administrator) List. . . . . 99
Image Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
• Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
4
About This Manual
Please note
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.
Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
The explanations in this manual assume that a saddle stitch finisher, punch module, and inserter are installed on the machine.
For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
5
Manuals Provided with the Machine
Printed manuals and manuals stored in PDF format on the machine's hard drive are provided with the machine. When
using the machine, read the appropriate manual for the feature you are using.
Printed manuals
Operation manuals in PDF format
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "How to download the manuals in PDF format" in the Quick Start Guide.
Icons used in the manuals
The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:
Manual name Contents
Safety Guide
This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely and lists the specifications of the machine
and its peripheral devices.
Software Setup
Guide
This manual explains how to install the software and configure settings to use the machine as a printer or
scanner.
Quick Start Guide
This manual provides easy-to-understand explanations of all the functions of the machine in a single
volume.
Detailed explanations of each of the functions can be found in the manuals in PDF format.
Troubleshooting
This manual explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked questions
regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you have difficulty using
the machine.
Manual name Contents
User's Guide
This manual provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and machine
maintenance.
Copier Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
Printer Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the printer function.
Facsimile Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
Scanner Guide
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the
Internet fax function.
Document Filing
Guide
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The
document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive. The file can be called up as needed.
System Settings
Guide
(This manual)
This manual explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit
the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out from the
"System Settings".
This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of machine damage or failure.
This provides a supplemental explanation of a function or procedure.
This explains how to cancel or correct an operation.
6
System Settings
The system settings are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit the aims and needs of your workplace. The
system settings are also used to display or print out the current settings and status of the machine. The system settings
allow you to make the machine easier to use.
The system settings consist of settings that are used by general users, and settings that can only be configured by an
administrator of the machine. These two groups of settings are distinguished in this manual as follows.
1
SYSTEM SETTINGS
System Settings (General) System Settings (Administrator) *Login Required
System settings that can be configured by general users
(including the administrator). For example, the following
settings can be configured:
• Date and time settings
• Paper tray settings (paper size and paper type)
• Storing destinations for the fax and scanner functions
• Settings related to the printer function
• Creating folders for document filing
• Displaying the number of pages printed, scanned, and
faxed.
For more information, see "2. SYSTEM SETTINGS
(GENERAL)" (page 8).
System settings that can be configured by the administrator.
To configure these settings, login as an administrator is
required. For example, the following settings can be
configured:
• Storing users of the machine
• Energy save settings
• Settings related to the operation panel
• Settings for peripheral devices installed on the machine.
• Settings related to the copy function
• Network connection settings
• Transmission/reception settings for faxes and scanned
images
• Advanced settings for the document filing function
For more information, see "3. SYSTEM SETTINGS
(ADMINISTRATOR)" (page 29).
Settings for general users
Settings for administrators
• Administrator password
To maintain security, the administrator of the machine should promptly change the password after the machine is
purchased. (For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the
Safety Guide.) To change the password, see "Change Administrator Password" (page 90).
*To ensure a high level of security, change the password at regular intervals.
• The above groupings of "General" and "Administrator" are used as a convenient means of clarifying the functions of the
settings. These groupings do not appear in the touch panel.
• For fax settings, see "4. SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 93).
• Web pages
The system settings can also be configured from the Web pages. To configure the system settings from the Web pages,
click [System Settings] in the Web page menu.
In addition to the system settings, network and security settings can also be configured in the Web pages. For information
on the settings, see Help in the Web pages.
7
Common Operation Methods
This section explains special operation methods that are common to all system settings.
Be sure to read this section, as the information is omitted in the explanations of some of the individual settings.
Example: Address book screen
(1) key
Enter a search number and touch the key to retrieve
a destination.
When searching for a user, appears in the icon.
(2) Index keys
Touch an index key to display the corresponding
destinations. The index keys that appear vary depending
on the "Sort" setting.
(3) [Back] key
Returns you to the previous screen.
(4) "Sort"
Use this to select the method of displaying destinations
and the index type.
Example: In the "Address Book" screen, the display can
be switched between the following three methods:
• Alphabetical/User index
• Display by mode
• Ascending/Descending/Number order
(5) Select box
Touch to display a list of the items that can be
selected. Touch an item in the list to select it.
(6) Text box (numerical)
Touch this box to enter a number. Numbers are entered
with the numeric keys.
If you make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) to
clear the incorrect number.
(7) Text box
Touch this box to open a text entry screen. When you
have finished entering text in the screen, the text will
appear in the text box. For the procedure for entering
text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's Guide.
(8) Checkbox
This switches between and each time you touch
it. To enable the corresponding setting, touch the
checkbox so that a checkmark appears . To disable
the setting, clear the checkmark .
Radio buttons ( ) are also used to select settings in
this way. (However, radio buttons are used to select a
single item out of several.)
(9) [Cancel] key
This cancels a setting and returns you to the previous
screen.
(10) [OK] key
Touch this to store the current settings.
(11) Scroll bar
Use this to scroll the screen up and down.
Touch the bar and slide it up or down to move the screen.
You can also move the screen up and down with the
keys.
E-mail Address
(Required):
Address Book
AAA AAA
Freq.
Sort
ABC All UP
2
1
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
Back
Cancel
System Settings
Address Control
Address Type:
Address Name
(Required):
Search Number:
Initial (Optional):
Key Name:
Custom Index:
Register this Address to be added to the [Frequent Use] index.
E-mail
User 1
(1-999)
OK
Add
CCC CCC
EEE EEE
GGG GGG
III III
BBB BBB
DDD DDD
FFF FFF
HHH HHH
JJJ JJJ
(1)
(2)
(8)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(11)
(10)
(9)
8
This chapter describes the system settings that can be configured by general users of the machine.
Accessing the System Settings (General)
Make sure that the machine is in the standby state and
then press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key on the
operation panel.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
following menu screen appears on the touch panel.
Touch the item in this screen that you wish to configure.
For detailed explanations of each of the settings, see the
following pages of this chapter.
2
SYSTEM SETTINGS (GENERAL)
LOGOUT
LINE
PRINT
IMAGE SEND
DATA
DATA
READY
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
HOME
JOB STATUS
System Settings
Admin Password Exit
Total Count
Paper Tray
Settings
Printer Condition
Settings
Document Filing
Control
Address Control
Fax Data
Receive/Forward
USB-Device Check
Default Settings
List Print
(User)
• To quit the system settings, touch the [Exit] key in the top right corner of the screen.
• For the procedure to follow when user authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" in the User's Guide.
9
System Settings (General) List
When the system settings are accessed with general rights, the following items appear. For items that can only be
accessed with administrator rights, see "System Settings (Administrator) List" (page 32).
■ Total Count
■ Default Settings
■ List Print (User)
• Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
• For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "4. SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 93).
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Total Count
13
● Job Count – 13
● Device Count – 13
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Default Settings
14
● Clock
14
X Clock Adjust –
Daylight Saving Time Setting Disable
X Date Format [MM/DD/YYYY], [/], [Last], [12-Hour]
● Keyboard Select English (US) 14
Item Factory default setting Page
■ List Print (User)
15
● All Custom Setting List –
● Printer Test Page –
● Sending Address List –
● Document Filing Folder List –
10
■ Paper Tray Settings
*1 When a large capacity tray is installed.
*2 When an inserter is installed.
■ Address Control
■ Fax Data Receive/Forward
* When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Paper Tray Settings
16
● Tray Settings
16
X Tray 1 Plain, 8-1/2" x 11"
X Tray 2 Plain, 8-1/2" x 11"
X Tray 3
Plain, Auto-Inch
X Tray 4
X Tray 5*
1
MX-LCX2: Plain, 8-1/2" x 11"
MX-LCX3: Plain, 11" x 17"
X Bypass Plain, Auto-Inch
X Inserter*
2
Plain, Auto-Inch
● Paper Type Registration – 18
● Auto Tray Switching Enabled 18
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Address Control
19
● Address Book – 19
● Custom Index – 21
● Program – 21
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Fax Data Receive/Forward
23
● I-Fax Settings*
23
X Reception Start –
X Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen Enabled
X Forward Received Data –
11
■ Printer Condition Settings
* When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Printer Condition Settings
24
● Printer Default Settings
24
X Copies 1
X Orientation Portrait
X Default Paper Size 8-1/2" x 11"
X Default Output Tray Varies depending on the machine
configuration
X Default Paper Type Plain Paper
X Line Thickness 5
X 2-Sided Print 1-Sided
X Color Mode Color
X N-Up Print 1-Up
X Fit To Page Enabled
● PCL Settings
25
X PCL Symbol Set Setting PC-8
X PCL Font Setting Internal Font, Courier
X PCL Line Feed Code 0.CR=CR:LF=LF:FF=FF
X Wide A4 Disabled
● PostScript Setting*
25
X Print PS Errors Disabled
12
■ Document Filing Control
■ USB-Device Check
■ User Control
* When user authentication is enabled and the logged-in user does not have the authority to configure the system settings
(administrator) (excluding factory default users).
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Document Filing Control
26
Item Factory default setting Page
■ USB-Device Check
–
27
Item Factory default setting Page
■ User Control*
28
● Modify User Information – 28
13
Total Count
This function shows the page count in each mode. Touch the [Total Count] key to use the function.
Job Count
This displays or prints out the counts of all jobs.
Device Count
This is used to display or print the counts of the peripheral devices installed on the machine.
• 11" x 17" (A3) size paper is counted as two sheets.
• Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-sided copying is counted as two pages (11" x 17" (A3) paper is counted as
four pages).
• An entered paper size of 5-1/8" (384 mm) or larger is counted as two pages. (Four pages when two-sided copying is used.)
• Pages printed directly from the machine such as list prints are included in the "Other Prints" count.
• The items displayed (or printed) will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed.
• Document feeder
Each sheet is counted as two pages when two-sided scanning is performed.
• Stapler (when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed)
Two-position stapling and pamphlet stapling are counted as "2".
• The items displayed (or printed) will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed.
14
Default Settings
The default settings for operation of the machine can be configured. Touch the [Default Settings] key and select the settings.
Clock
Use this to set the date and time in the machine's built-in clock.
Clock Adjust
Set the time.
Date Format
The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed.
Keyboard Select
The layout of the keyboard that appears in text entry screens can be changed.
The following selections are available.
Item Settings
Date&Time Settings Select and set the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Daylight Saving Time Setting
Select whether or not daylight saving time is used.
If you want the clock to change automatically at the beginning and end of daylight
saving time, select the [Daylight Saving Time Setting] checkbox . When this
function is used, the time changes at the beginning and end of daylight saving time
as follows:
Standard time ➞ Daylight saving time: First Sunday in April, 2:00 ➞ 3:00 AM
Daylight saving time ➞ Standard time: Last Sunday in October, 2:00 ➞ 1:00 AM
Item Settings
Format Set the order of display of the year, month, and day (YYYY/MM/DD).
Separator Select one of three symbols or a blank space for the separator used in the date.
Day-Name Position Select whether the day name appears before or after the date.
Time Display Select 12-hour format or 24-hour format for the time.
If "Disabling of Clock Adjustment" (page 59) has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the date and time
cannot be set.
English (US) English (UK) French German
15
List Print (User)
Lists showing the settings and information stored in the machine can be printed. Touch the [List Print (User)] key and
select the settings.
List name Description
All Custom Setting List
This list shows the hardware status, software status, printer condition settings,
system settings, and total counts.
Printer Test Page
This is used to print the PCL Symbol Set List, various font lists, and the NIC page
(network interface settings, etc.).
• PCL Symbol Set List
• PCL Internal Font List
• PCL Extended Font List
• PS Font List
• PS Extended Font List
• NIC Page
Sending Address List
Lists can be printed of various addresses stored in the machine.
• Individual List
• Group List
• Program List
• Memory Box List
• All Sending Address List
Document Filing Folder List This shows the folder names for document filing.
• The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.
•If "Prohibit Test Page Printing" (page 70) has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), it will not be possible to
print a test page.
16
Paper Tray Settings
Paper tray and paper type settings are explained in this section. Touch the [Paper Tray Settings] key to configure the
settings.
Tray Settings
These settings specify the paper type, paper size, and functions allowed for each paper tray.
When the [Tray Settings] key is touched, a list appears showing the trays and the current settings.
Settings of each tray
Touch the [Change] key in the above screen to change the settings.
The following settings can be configured.
Item Description
Type
Select the type of paper that is loaded in the tray.
The paper types that can be selected vary by paper tray. For more information, see
"Tray Settings" (page 17).
To store a new paper type, see "Paper Type Registration" (page 18).
Size
Select the paper size from the list. The paper sizes that can be selected vary by tray.
The sizes that can be selected may also be restricted by the paper type selected
above. For more information, see "Tray Settings" (page 17).
If the desired size does not appear in the list, select [Custom Size] and directly enter
the size (only for tray 3 and the bypass tray). For more information, see "Tray
Settings" (page 17).
Feeding Approved Job
Select the modes that can be used. If there is a function that you do not wish to be
used with the selected tray, disable the function.
When the "Type" is other than plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper, or a user
type, [Fax] and [Internet Fax] cannot be selected.
• If the paper size specified here is different from the size of paper that is loaded in a tray, a problem or misfeed may result
when printing.
To change the paper size in a tray, see "User's Guide".
• Paper properties such as "Fixed Paper Side" are automatically set when the paper type is selected. The paper tray
properties cannot be changed in this screen.
•If "Disabling of Tray Setting" (page 64) has been enabled in the system settings (administrator), the tray settings (except
for the bypass tray) cannot be configured.
Back
Change
Disable PunchDisable StapleDisable DuplexFixed Paper Side
Type
Plain
8-½x11
Tray Settings
Size
Tray 1
Doc. Filing
I-FaxFaxPrintCopy
Change
Disable PunchDisable StapleDisable DuplexFixed Paper Side
Type
Plain
8-½x11
Size
Tray 2
Doc. Filing
I-FaxFaxPrintCopy
17
Tray Settings
* Heavy Paper 1: 28+ - 56 lbs. (106 g/m
2
to 209 g/m
2
) heavy paper
Heavy Paper 2: 56+ - 68 lbs. (210 g/m
2
to 256 g/m
2
) heavy paper
Paper Tray Paper Type Size
Tray 1
Plain, Pre-Printed,
Recycled, Letter Head,
Pre-Punched, Color,
User Type
8-1/2" x 11", A4
Tray 2
8-1/2" x 11", A4
Tray 3
In addition to the paper
types of trays 1 and 2,
Heavy Paper 1*
Auto-Inch (12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R), Auto-AB (A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R,
A5R, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 13"), Custom Size-Inch, Custom Size-AB, 8K,
16K, 16KR
Labels Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R), Auto-AB (A4, A4R, B5, B5R),
Custom Size
Transparency Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R), Auto-AB (A4, A4R)
Tab Paper Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11"), Auto-AB (A4)
Tray 4
In addition to the paper
types of trays 1 and 2,
Heavy Paper 1*
Auto-Inch (12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R), Auto-AB (A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R,
8-1/2" x 13"), 8K, 16K, 16KR
Tray 5
(When a large capacity
tray is installed)
MX-LCX2
8-1/2" x 11", A4 (paper size change must be performed by a service
technician)
MX-LCX3
12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3W, A3,
B4, A4, A4R, B5, 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
Bypass
In addition to the paper
types of trays 1 and 2,
Thin Paper,
Heavy Paper 1*,
Heavy Paper 2*
Auto-Inch (12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, A3, A4, B4, B5), Auto-AB (A3W, A3,
A4, A4R, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, 11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13"),
8-1/2" x 11"), 8K, 16K, 16KR, Custom Size
Labels Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R), Auto-AB (A4, A4R, B5, B5R),
Custom Size
Transparency Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R), Auto-AB (A4, A4R)
Tab Paper Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11"), Auto-AB (A4)
Envelope Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5
Inserter
(When an inserter is
installed)
Plain, Pre-Punched,
Pre-Printed, Recycled,
Letter Head, Color,
Thin Paper,
Heavy Paper 1*,
Heavy Paper 2*,
User Type
Auto-Inch (12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R), Auto-AB (A3W, A3, A4, A4R, A5R, B4,
B5, B5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13"), 8K, 16K, 16KR
Transparency Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R), Auto-AB (A4, A4R)
Tab Paper Auto-Inch (8-1/2" x 11"), Auto-AB (A4)
18
Paper Type Registration
Store a paper type when the desired paper type does not appear as a selection or when you wish to create a new set of
paper properties.
Up to 7 paper types can be stored.
Auto Tray Switching
When a tray runs out of paper during printing, this determines whether or not another tray with the same size and type of
paper is automatically selected and printing continues.
Item Description
Type Name
Store any name.
The factory default names are "User Type 1" - "User Type 7".
Fixed Paper Side Enable this setting when paper with a front and reverse side is used.
Disable Duplex Enable this setting when paper is loaded that cannot used for two-sided printing.
Disable Staple Enable this setting when paper is used that cannot be stapled.
Disable Punch Enable this setting when paper is used that cannot be punched.
The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices installed.
19
Address Control
Address Control is used to store, edit, and delete one-touch keys, group keys, program keys, and custom indexes.
Touch the [Address Control] key to configure the settings.
Address Book
Destinations can be stored in the address book for easy retrieval.
When the [Address Book] key is touched, the following screen appears.
• [Add] key
Use this to add a new address.
• List display
This displays a list of the currently stored addresses.
An address can be selected to open an edit/delete
screen for the address.
Storing addresses
Touch the [Add] key in the above screen to store an address. Up to 999 addresses can be programmed.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 20).
Editing and deleting addresses
An address can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the address.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 20).
Delete an address with the [Delete] key.
• The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices installed.
• For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "4. SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 93).
Address Book
AAA AAA
Freq.
Sort
ABC All UP
2
1
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
Back
Add
CCC CCC
EEE EEE
GGG GGG
III III
BBB BBB
DDD DDD
FFF FFF
HHH HHH
JJJ JJJ
• When "Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" (page 74) is enabled in the system settings (administrator)
for a function, addresses cannot be stored for that function.
• To store addresses for Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, and Scan to Desktop...
Store Scan to FTP and Scan to Network addresses in the Web pages. Store Scan to Desktop addresses using Network
Scanner Tool. A combined maximum of 200 addresses can be stored for these three scanning methods.
If you cannot edit or delete an individual (one-touch) key or group key...
•
If the individual key or group key that you are attempting to edit or delete is being used in a reserved transmission (including
a timer transmission) or a transmission in progress, wait until the transmission is finished or cancel the transmission.
• If the individual key or group key that you are attempting to edit or delete is included in a group key or program, delete the
key from the group or program and then edit or delete the key.
• If your administrator has enabled "Default Address Setting" (page 77) or "Inbound Routing Settings" / "Document
Administration Function" (in the Web pages), editing and deleting will not be possible. Have the key deleted from the above
settings and then edit or delete the key.
20
Settings
Item Description
Items stored in all modes
Address Type
Select the type of address to be stored in the address book.
• E-mail: Store an e-mail address in a one-touch key.
• Internet Fax: Store an Internet fax address in a one-touch key.
• Fax: Store a fax number in a one-touch key.
• Group: Store multiple addresses as a group for a broadcast transmission.
Search Number
Set a search number. The lowest available number is automatically entered. To
change the number, enter a number from 001 to 999. A search number that has
already been stored cannot be used.
Address Name Enter a maximum of 36 characters for the address name.
Initial
Enter up to 5 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the
position of the one-touch key in the alphabetical index.
Key Name
Enter the name that you wish to appear in the address book (this is different from the
address name).
Custom Index Select the custom index in which the address will appear.
Register this Address to be added to the
[Frequent Use] index.
Frequently used addresses can be stored in the [Frequent Use] index.
Items appearing when an e-mail address is stored
E-mail Address Enter an e-mail address (max. 64 characters).
File Format
Specify the format of the file to be generated and the compression mode for black &
white mode and color mode.
• File Type: Set the format of the file to be generated.
• Compression Mode (Black & White): Select the compression mode for black &
white transmission.
• Compression Ratio (Color/Grayscale):Select the compression ratio for
color/grayscale transmission.
Items appearing when an Internet fax address is stored
I-Fax Address Enter an Internet fax address (max. 64 characters).
Compression Mode Select the compression mode for transmission.
Request Internet Fax Reception Report
Select whether or not you wish to receive a reception report by e-mail after
transmission is completed.
Items appearing when a group is stored
Address
Select addresses from the address book to be stored in the group. Up to 500
addresses can be stored.
Address Review
This displays a list of the selected addresses. Addresses can be deleted from this list
if needed.
Direct Entry
An address that is not stored in the address book can be directly entered. Enter the
address in the same way as when storing an address for a mode. Note that when an
Internet fax address is directly entered, the compression mode and reception report
cannot be selected.
21
Custom Index
The name of a custom index can be changed for greater ease of use.
Delete the previously entered name and enter a new name (maximum of 6 characters).
The factory default names for the custom indexes are "User 1" to "User 6".
Program
If you frequently use the same settings and/or functions to transmit to the same destination or destinations, the settings
and destinations can be stored in a program. This allows the settings and destinations to be selected by simply selecting
the program.
When the [Program] key is touched, the following screen appears.
• [Add] key
Use this to add a new program.
• List display
This displays a list of the currently stored programs. A
program can be selected to open an edit/delete screen
for the program.
Storing a program
Touch the [Add] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 48 programs can be stored.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 22).
Editing and deleting programs
A program can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the program.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 22).
Delete a program with the [Delete] key.
System Settings
Program
Program 3
Program 1
Back
Add
Program 5
Program 7
Program 9
Program 11
Program 2
Program 4
Program 6
Program 8
Program 10
Program 12
• A timer setting cannot be included in a program.
• At least one one-touch key must be specified in a program or the program cannot be stored.
22
Settings
Item Description
Program Number
Set the number to be assigned to the program. The lowest available number is
automatically entered. To change the number, enter a number from 01 to 48. A
number that has already been stored cannot be used.
Program Name Enter a maximum of 36 characters for the program name.
Address
Select the address(es) to be used in the program from the address book. Up to 500
destinations can be stored in one program. (If a Scan to Network Folder destination
is selected, only one destination can be stored.)
Address Book screen This displays a list of the currently stored addresses.
Address Review
This displays a list of the selected addresses. Addresses can be deleted from this list
if needed.
Address Mode Setting
Select the mode in which the address is used (Internet fax, scan, etc.) When a mode
is selected, the settings for that mode appear.
Mode Settings
Frequently used settings can be stored in the same way as when they are selected
for a mode. For more information, see the manuals for each mode.
23
Fax Data Receive/Forward
This section explains settings for reception and forwarding. Touch the [Fax Data Receive/Forward] key and configure
the settings.
I-Fax Settings
These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Reception Start
The machine will connect to your mail server (POP3 server) and check for received Internet faxes. If you have received
Internet faxes, the faxes will be retrieved and printed.
Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen
This displays the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key in the base screen of Internet fax mode.
Forward Received Data
When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another
Internet fax machine.
For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "4. SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 93).
To use this function, POP3 server settings must be configured. Configure these settings in the screen that appears when
[Application Settings] - [Internet Fax Settings] is selected in the Web page menu.
• To store a forwarding address, see "Set Address for Data Forwarding" (page 80) in the system settings (administrator).
• If forwarding was not successful because the transmission was canceled or a communication error occurred, the faxes that
were to be forwarded will return to the print queue on the machine.
• If the initial pages of a fax were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.
• Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding address is not programmed.
•If "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" (page 74) is enabled, you will be prompted to enter a password. Enter the correct
password with the numeric keys.
To cancel forwarding...
Press the [JOB STATUS] key, and then cancel the forwarding job in the same way as a transmission job.
24
Printer Condition Settings
The Printer Condition Settings are used to configure basic printer settings and settings for printing from a DOS
application. To configure the settings, touch the [Printer Condition Settings] key.
Printer Default Settings
The default settings are used to set advanced print conditions for printing in an environment where the print driver is not
used (such as printing from MS-DOS or from a computer that does not have the provided print driver installed).
Settings
*1 When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*2 This setting is used to adjust the line width of vector graphics (black & white printing only). Except for CAD and other
specialized uses, there is normally no need to change this setting. Information on the selections is shown in
"Selections for the line thickness setting" (page 25).
*3 Paper sizes that can be used with this function are A3, B4, A4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", and 8-1/2" x 11". (This function
may not take effect with some print methods.)
*4 Only effective when printing PDF, JPEG, and TIFF files.
When printing using the printer driver, the printer driver settings take precedence over the printer condition settings.
Item Selections
Copies 1 - 999 sets
Orientation
• Portrait
• Horizontal
Default Paper Size
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 7-1/4" x 10-1/2", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A3,
B4, A4, B5, A5, 8k, 16k
Default Output Tray
•Center Tray
• Finisher Upper Tray / Finisher Lower Tray*
1
• Right Tray
Default Paper Type Plain Paper, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Pre-Punched, Recycle Paper, Color
Line Thickness*
2
0-9
2-Sided Print
• 1-Sided
• 2-Sided (Book)
• 2-Sided (Tablet)
Color Mode
•Color
• Black & White
N-Up Print*
3
•1-Up
•2-Up
•4-Up
Fit To Page*
4
• (Use Fit to Page)
• (Do not use Fit to Page)
25
Selections for the line thickness setting
* All lines are the minimum line width.
PCL Settings
This is used to set the symbol sets, fonts, and line feed code used in a PCL environment.
Settings
PostScript Setting
When a PS (PostScript) error occurs during PostScript printing, this setting determines whether or not an error notice is
printed.
Selection 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Percentage
Minimum
line width*
50% 75% 90% 95% 100% 105% 110% 125% 150%
Item Description Selections
PCL Symbol Set Setting
Specify the symbol set used for
printing.
Select from 35 items.
PCL Font Setting
Use this to select the font used for
printing.
• Internal Font
• Extended Font
(List of internal fonts when extended fonts are not
installed.)
PCL Line Feed Code
This setting is used to select how
the printer responds when a line
feed command is received.
• 0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF
• 1.CR=CR+LF; LF=LF;FF=FF
• 2.CR=CR; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF
• 3.CR=CR+LF; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF
Wide A4
When this is enabled, 80
characters per line can be printed
on A4 size paper using a 10-pitch
font. (When this setting is
disabled, up to 78 characters can
be printed per line.)
• (Enabled)
• (Disabled)
This setting can be configured when the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
26
Document Filing Control
Document Filing Control is used to create, edit, and delete custom folders for document filing. Touch the [Document
Filing Control] key to configure the settings.
When the [Document Filing Control] key is touched, the following screen will appear.
• [Add] key
Use this to add a new custom folder.
• List display
This displays a list of the currently configured custom
folders. A folder can be selected to open an edit/delete
screen for the folder.
Creating a custom folder
Touch the [Add] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 500 custom folders can be created.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 27).
Editing/deleting a custom folder
A custom folder can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the folder.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 27).
Delete a folder with the [Delete] key.
Folder List
User 1
All Folders
UP
2
1
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
Back
Add
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
Sort
• If the folder has a password, the correct password must be entered before a file can be deleted.
• A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the
folder.
27
Settings
USB-Device Check
This lets you check the connection when a USB device is connected to the machine. Touch the [USB-Device Check] key
to use this function.
Item Description
Folder Name
Enter a name (maximum of 28 characters) for the custom folder to be created. A
name cannot be stored if it is already being used for another folder.
Initial of Folder
Enter up to 5 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the
position of the one-touch key in the alphabetical index.
Password of Folder To set a password for the folder, enter the desired number (5 to 8 digits).
Select User Name Select the desired user name from the user list.
The status of a USB device that is not compatible with the machine will not appear.
28
User Control
This section explains settings for user control. Touch the [User Control] key to configure the settings.
Modify User Information
The information of the currently logged in user can be edited.
Settings
• User Control settings can only be configured when "User Authentication Setting" (page 46) is enabled.
• Depending on the user that logged in, it may not be possible to use the settings below.
Item Description
User Name
Edit the name of the user (max. 32 characters). This user name is used as the key
name in the login screen, the document filing user name, and the sender name. (The
user name must be unique.)
Initial
Edit the initials (maximum of 5 characters). The initials determine where the user
name will appear in the user name list.
Index
Select the desired custom index. The custom index names are the same as those in
the address book.
User Number This cannot be edited.
Login Name This cannot be edited.
Password
Enter the password used for user authentication by login name and password (1 to
32 characters). (The password can be omitted.)
E-mail Address This cannot be edited.
My Folder This cannot be edited.
Authentication Settings This cannot be edited.
Pages Limit Group This cannot be edited.
Authority Group This cannot be edited.
Favorite Operation Group
The favorite operation group that will be applied at login appears.
Check with your administrator for the settings of the Favorite Operation Groups.
The items that appear will vary depending on the user authentication method that is enabled.
29
This chapter explains the system settings that are configured by the administrator of the machine.
Accessing the System Settings (Administrator)
To access the system settings (administrator), the administrator must log in as explained below.
When User Authentication is not Enabled
When "User Authentication Setting" (page 46) is not enabled, follow the procedure below to log in.
3
SYSTEM SETTINGS
(ADMINISTRATOR)
1
Touch the [Admin Password] key.
2
Log in.
(1) Touch the [Password] text box and enter
the administrator password.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
This completes the administrator login procedure. The system settings (administrator) can be used.
• User authentication is initially disabled (factory default setting).
• To logout...
Touch the [Logout] key in the top right corner of the screen. You can also touch the [Exit] key to quit the system settings.
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.)
System Settings
Admin Password
Exit
Total Count
Paper Tray
Settings
Printer Condition
Settings
Document Filing
Control
Address Control
Fax Data
Receive/Forward
USB-Device Check
Default Settings
List Print
(User)
System Settings
Administrator Password
Enter the administrator password. (From 5 to 32 characters)
Password
Cancel OK
(1) (2)
30
When User Authentication is Enabled
When "User Authentication Setting" (page 46) is enabled, follow the procedure below to log in.
When user authentication is by login name and password (and e-mail
address)
When auto login is enabled, the login screen will not appear.
Administrator login is performed in the user selection screen. For more information on the login procedure when user
authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" in the User's Guide.
1
Touch the [Admin Login] key.
2
Log in.
(1) Touch the [Password] key.
Enter the administrator password in the administrator
password entry screen.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• If login name / password / e-mail address is selected for the authentication method, the [E-mail Address] key will
appear below the "User Name".
• For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the Safety
Guide.
• This completes the administrator login procedure. The system settings (administrator) can be used.
All Users
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
Name 11
Name 9
Name 7
Name 5
Name 3
Name 1
Device Account Mode User Selection
Name 12
Name 10
Name 8
Name 6
Name 4
Name 2
Back
12 186
Direct Entry
User
ABC
Admin Login
User Authentication
OK
Login Name
Login Locally
User Name
Administrator
Password
Auth to:
(2)
(1)
31
Login by user number
Touch the [Admin Login] key.
Enter the administrator password in the administrator password
entry screen.
This completes the administrator login procedure. The system
settings (administrator) can be used.
• In addition to login by touching the [Admin Login] key, the system settings (administrator) can also be accessed when login
is performed by selecting a user with administrator rights from the user list or by entering a user number with administrator
rights. For more information on login procedures when user authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" in
the User's Guide.
• To logout...
Press the [LOGOUT] ( ) key. (Except when entering a fax number.)
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.)
User Authentication
OK
Admin Login
32
System Settings (Administrator) List
The system settings that appear following administrator login are shown below. The default setting for each item is also
shown.
■ User Control
* This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in the Web pages.
• Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
• For information on the general settings, see "System Settings (General) List" (page 9).
• For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "4. SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 93).
Item Factory default setting Page
■ User Control
46
● User Authentication Setting 46
X User Authentication Disabled 46
X Authentication Method Setting Authenticate a User by Login Name
and Password
46
X Device Account Mode Setting Disabled 46
● Other Settings 47
X Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Jobs Job is Stopped when the Limit of
Pages is Reached
47
X
The Number of User Name Displayed Setting on Operation Panel
12 47
X A Warning when Login Fails Disabled 47
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled 47
X Default Network Authentication Server Setting – 47
X User Information Print – 47
● User List – 48
● Page Limit Group List – 50
● Authority Group List – 51
● Favorite Operation Group List* – 54
X Favorite Operation Group Registration* – 54
X Home Screen List* – 55
● User Count – 56
33
■ Energy save
■ Operation Settings
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Energy Save
58
● Toner Save Mode
58X Print Disabled
X Copy Disabled
● Auto Power Shut-Off Enabled 58
● Auto Power Shut-Off Timer 90 min. 58
● Preheat Mode Setting 15 min. 58
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Operation Settings
59
● Other Settings 59
X Keys Touch Sound Middle
59
Key Touch Sound at Initial Point Disabled
X Auto Clear Setting 60 sec.
59
Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled
X Message Time Setting 6 sec. 59
X Display Language Setting American English 59
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled 59
X Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled 59
X Key Operation Setting 0.0 sec.
59
Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled 59
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled 59
● Customize Key Setting*
1
60
X Copy
Customize 1 File
Customize 2 Quick File
Customize 3 –
X Scan
Customize 1 Address Review
Customize 2 File
Customize 3 Quick File
34
*1 This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system settings in the Web pages.
*2 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*3 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
*4 When the application integration module is installed.
■ Device Control
X Internet Fax*
2
60
(Same as Scan)
X Fax*
3
(Same as Scan)
X USB Memory Scan
Customize 1 –
Customize 2 –
Customize 3 –
X Data Entry*
4
(Same as Scan)
● Home Screen Settings*
1
– 60
● Display Pattern Setting Following the System Settings 60
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Device Control
61
● Other Settings 61
X Original Feeding Mode All Disabled 61
X Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*
1
0.0 mm 61
X Auto Paper Selection Setting Plain Paper 61
X Tandem Connection Setting
61
IP Address of Slave Machine 0.0.0.0
Port Number 50001
Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled
X Detect Standard in Auto Color Mode 3 61
X Auto Switching of Finisher Trays Enabled 61
X Registration Adjustment 62
X Optimization of a Hard Disk – 62
X Clear All Job Log Data – 62
● Original Size Detector Setting
63X Original Detection Size Combination Inch-1
X Cancel Detection at Document Glass Disabled
Item Factory default setting Page
35
*1 When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*2 When a large capacity tray is installed.
*3 When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*4 When an inserter is installed.
*5 When a punch module is installed.
*6 When a color-related problem has occurred.
■ Copy Function Settings
● Disabling of Devices 64
X Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled 64
X Disabling of Duplex Disabled 64
X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*
2
Disabled 64
X Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled 64
X Disabling of Finisher*
3
Disabled 64
X Disabling of Inserter*
4
Disabled 64
X Disabling of Offset Disabled 64
X Disabling of Stapler*
3
Disabled 64
X Disabling of Punch*
5
Disabled 64
X Disabling of Color Mode*
6
Disabled 64
● Fusing Control Settings 16 - 24 lbs. (60 - 90g/m
2
) 64
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Copy Function Settings
65
● Initial Status Settings
65
X Color Mode Full Color
X Paper Tray Varies depending on the machine
configuration
X Exposure Type Auto
X Copy Ratio 100%
X 2-Sided Copy 1-Side to 1-Side
X Output –
● Other Settings 66
X Copy Exposure Adjustment
66 Color 5
Black & White 5
X Rotation Copy Setting Enabled 66
X Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios – 66
X Setting a Maximum Number of Copies 999 66
Item Factory default setting Page
36
* When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
■ Network Settings
X Initial Margin Shift Setting
66 Side 1 1/2"
Side 2 1/2"
X Erase Width Adjustment
66 Edge Clearance Width 1/2"
Center Clearance Width 1/2"
X Card Shot Settings
66 Original Size X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8"
Fit to Page Disabled
X Automatic Saddle Stitch* Enabled 66
X Initial Tab Copy Setting 1/2" 66
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled 67
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled 67
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled 67
X Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the Paper Disabled 67
X B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for Document Feeder Disabled 67
X B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass Enabled 67
● Color Adjustments 68
X Initial Color Balance Setting Factory default state 68
X Auto Color Calibration – 68
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Network Settings
69
● IP Address Setting DHCP 69
● Enable TCP/IP Enabled 69
● Enable NetWare Enabled 69
● Enable EtherTalk Enabled 69
● Enable NetBEUI Enabled 69
● Reset the NIC – 69
● Ping Command – 69
Item Factory default setting Page
37
■ Printer Settings
■ Image Send Settings
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Printer Settings
70
● Default Settings 70
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled 70
X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled 70
X A4/Letter Size Auto Change Disabled 70
X Print Density Level
70 Color 3
Black & White 3
X Bypass Tray Settings 70
Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray Disabled 70
Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray Enabled 70
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select Disabled 70
X Job Spool Queuing Enabled 70
● Interface Settings 71
X Hexadecimal Dump Mode Disabled 71
X I/O Timeout 60 sec. 71
X Enable USB Port Enabled 71
X USB Port Emulation Switching Auto 71
X Enable Network Port Enabled 71
X Network Port Emulation Switching Auto 71
X Port Switching Method Switch at End of Job 71
● Auto Color Calibration – 72
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Image Send Settings
73
● Operation Settings 73
X Other Settings 73
Default Display Settings Scan (fax when fax is installed)
73
• Hold settings for a while after scanning has been
completed
Disabled
• Switch Automatically to Copy Mode Screen Enabled
38
Initial Resolution Setting
73
• Apply the Resolution Set when Stored Disabled
•Scan 200 X 200 dpi
• Internet Fax*
1
200 X 100 dpi
•Fax*
2
Standard
Default Exposure Settings Auto
73• Original Image Type Text
• Moiré Reduction Disabled
Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting Disabled 73
Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle 74
The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed
Setting
12
74
The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting 10 74
Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled 74
Hold Setting for Received Data Print Disabled 74
X Settings to Disable Registration 74
Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel Disabled 74
Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*
3
Disabled 74
Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tool*
3
Disabled 74
X Settings to Disable Transmission 75
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disabled 75
Disable Selection From Address Book Disabled 75
Disable Direct Entry Disabled 75
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*
1
Disabled 75
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*
2
Disabled 75
● Scan Settings 76
X Other Settings 76
Default Sender Set – 76
Default Color Mode Settings
76
• Black & White Mono 2
• Color Mode Auto, Grayscale
• Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode Disabled
Item Factory default setting Page
39
Initial File Format Setting
76
• File Type PDF
• Black & White MMR (G4)
• Color/Grayscale Medium
• Specified Pages per File Disabled
Compression Mode at Broadcasting
76• Black & White MH (G3)
• Color/Grayscale Medium
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments (E-mail) Unlimited 76
Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network
Folder)
Unlimited
77
Bcc Setting
77• Enable Bcc Disabled
• Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Screen Disabled
Disable Scan Function
77• USB Memory Scan Disabled
•PC Scan Disabled
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled 77
X Default Address Setting Disabled 77
● I-Fax Settings*
1
78
X I-Fax Default Settings 78
I-Fax Own Name and Address Set – 78
Auto Wake Up Print Enabled 78
Compression Setting MH (G3) 78
Speaker Volume Setting –
78• Receive Signal Middle
• Communication Error Signal Middle
Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report Only 78
Transaction Report Print Select Setting
78
• Single Sending Print Out Error Report Only
• Broadcasting Print Out All Report
• Receiving No Printed Report
Activity Report Print Select Setting
79• Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled
• Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled
Body Text Print Select Setting Disabled 79
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled 79
Item Factory default setting Page
40
*1 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*2 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
*3 When network connection is enabled.
■ Document Filing Settings
X I-Fax Send Settings 79
I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting Disabled 79
I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout Setting 1 hour 79
Number of Resend Times at Reception Error 2 79
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited 79
Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled 80
Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled 80
X I-Fax Receive Settings 80
Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled 80
Duplex Reception Setting Disabled 80
Set Address for Data Forwarding – 80
A3 RX Reduce Disabled 80
POP3 Communication Timeout Setting 60 sec. 80
Reception Check Interval Setting 5 min. 81
I-Fax Output Setting Varies depending on the machine
configuration
81
X Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name Setting All Invalid 81
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Document Filing Settings
82
● Other Settings 82
X Default Mode Settings Sharing Mode 82
X Sort Method Setting Date 82
X Administrator Authority Setting
82 Delete File Disabled
Delete Folder Disabled
X Delete All Quick Files
82 Delete –
Delete quick files at power up (protected files excluded) Enabled
Item Factory default setting Page
41
X Default Color Mode Settings
82 Color Auto
Black & White Mono 2
X Default Exposure Settings Auto
82 Original Image Type Text
Moiré Reduction Disabled
X Initial Resolution Settings 600 x 600 dpi 82
X Color Data Compression Ratio Setting Medium 83
X Default Output Tray Varies depending on the machine
configuration
83
X Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle 83
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled 83
X Batch Print Settings
83 Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled
Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed. Enabled
● Document Output Options
84
X Print
Copy Enabled
Print Enabled
Scan Send Disabled
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax) Disabled
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled
Scan to HDD Enabled
X Scan Send
Copy Disabled
Scan Send Enabled
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax) Disabled
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled
Scan to HDD Enabled
X Internet Fax Send*
1
Copy Disabled
Scan Send Disabled
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax) Enabled
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled
Scan to HDD Disabled
Item Factory default setting Page
42
*1 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*2 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
■ List Print (Administrator)
*1 When network connection is enabled.
*2 When the application integration module is installed.
■ Security Settings
X Fax Send*
2
84
Copy Disabled
Scan Send Disabled
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax) Disabled
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Enabled
Scan to HDD Disabled
Item Factory default setting Page
■ List Print (Administrator)
85
● Administrator Settings List – 85
● Image Sending Activity Report – 85
● Data Receive/Forward List – 85
● Web Settings List*
1
– 85
● Metadata Set List*
2
– 85
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Security Settings
86
● Setting of SSL
86
X HTTPS Disabled
X IPP-SSL Disabled
X FTPS Disabled
X SMTP-SSL Disabled
X POP3-SSL Disabled
X Level of Encryption Disabled
Item Factory default setting Page
43
■ Enable/Disable Settings
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Enable/Disable Settings
87
● User Control 87
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled 87
● Operation Settings 87
X Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled 87
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled 87
X Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled 87
X Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled 87
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled 87
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled 87
● Device Control 87
X Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled 87
X Disabling of Duplex Disabled 87
X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*
1
Disabled 87
X Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled 87
X Disabling of Finisher*
2
Disabled 87
X Disabling of Inserter*
3
Disabled 87
X Disabling of Offset Disabled 87
X Disabling of Stapler*
2
Disabled 87
X Disabling of Punch*
4
Disabled 87
X Disabling of Color Mode*
5
Disabled 88
X Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled 88
X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled 88
● Copy Function Settings 88
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled 88
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled 88
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled 88
● Printer Settings 88
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled 88
X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled 88
X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select Disabled 88
44
*1 When a large capacity tray is installed.
*2 When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*3 When an inserter is installed.
*4 When a punch module is installed.
*5 When a color-related problem has occurred.
*6 When network connection is enabled.
*7 When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*8 When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
● Image Send Settings 88
X Other Disabling 88
Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled 88
Disable Scan Function
88• USB Memory Scan Disabled
•PC Scan Disabled
X Settings to Disable Registration 88
Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel Disabled 88
Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*
6
Disabled 89
Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tools*
6
Disabled 89
X Settings to Disable Transmission 89
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disabled 89
Disable Selection from Address Book Disabled 89
Disable Direct Entry Disabled 89
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*
7
Disabled 89
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*
8
Disabled 89
● Document Filing Settings 89
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled 89
X Batch Print Settings
89 Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled
Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed. Enabled
Item Factory default setting Page
45
■ Change Administrator Password
■ Product Key
* It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed.
■ Initialize and/or Store Settings
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Change Administrator Password
See "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF
THE MACHINE" in the Safety Guide.
90
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Product Key*
91
● PS3 Expansion Kit – 91
● Internet Fax Expansion Kit – 91
● E-mail Alert and Status – 91
● Application Integration Module – 91
● Serial Number – 91
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Initialize and/or Store Settings
92
● Restore Factory Defaults – 92
● Store Current Configuration – 92
● Restore Configuration – 92
46
User Control
User Control is used to configure settings for user authentication. Touch the [User Control] key to configure the settings.
User Authentication Setting
These settings enable or disable user authentication and specify the authentication method.
When user authentication is enabled, each user of the machine is registered. When a user logs in, settings for that user
are applied. This function allows greater control of security and cost management than on previous machines.
User Authentication
When [User Authentication] is enabled, the login screen
appears before an operation is begun in any mode
except the job status screen*. You must log in as one of
the stored users. (After logging in, you can move freely
through the modes.)
* The login screen appears when a document filing file is
used or when a broadcast transmission is reattempted
from the job status screen.
Authentication Method Setting
This selects the authentication method. When using user
authentication, be sure to configure this setting first. The
items configured for users stored after the user
authentication method is set vary depending on the
selected authentication method.
Authenticate a User by Login Name and Password
Standard authentication method using a login name and
password.
Authenticate a User by Login Name, Password and
E-mail Address
In addition to a login name and password, this
authentication method also requires the entry of an
e-mail address.
Authenticate a User by User Number Only
This can be used as a simple authentication method
when network authentication is not used.
Device Account Mode Setting
A specific user can be stored as an auto login user.
When this setting is enabled, login can be performed
automatically.
This function eliminates the bother of logging in but still
allows the settings of the selected user (network
settings, favorite operations, etc.) to be applied.
• For the procedure for storing users, see "User List" (page 48).
• For more information on login procedures when user authentication is enabled, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" in the
User's Guide.
• The login screen will vary depending on the
authentication method that is selected. For more
information, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" in the
User's Guide.
• When "Authenticate a User by User Number Only"
is selected for the authentication method, network
authentication cannot be used.
If auto login fails for some reason when auto login is
enabled, or the login user does not have administrator
rights, all system settings or the system settings
(administrator) will lock. In this event, the administrator
should touch the [Admin Password] key in the system
settings screen and log in again.
47
Other Settings
Actions when the Limit of Pages
for Output Jobs
This setting determines whether or not a job will be
completed if the page limit is reached while the job is in
progress.
The following selections are available.
• Job is Stopped when the Limit of Pages is Reached
• Job is Completed even when the Limit of Pages is
Reached
The Number of User Name
Displayed Setting on Operation
Panel
The number of users that are displayed in the user
selection screen can be selected (6, 12, or 18 users).
A Warning when Login Fails
This setting is used to display a warning and prohibit
login for five minutes if login fails three times in a row.
This prevents an unauthorized person from attempting to
guess a password. (The number of failed login attempts
is retained even if the power is turned off.)
Disabling of Printing by Invalid
User
Printing by users whose information is not stored in the
machine, such as printing without entering valid user
information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an
FTP server from the Web pages, can be prohibited.
Default Network Authentication
Server Setting
Use this to set the default network authentication server.
When a user logs in from the Web page or sends a print
job to the machine using user information that is not
stored on the machine, the authentication server is not
known. This setting is used to specify one of the LDAP
servers stored on the machine as the authentication
server.
User Information Print
The following lists can be printed.
•User List
• List of Number of Pages Used
• Page Limit Group List*
• Authority Group List
• Favorite Operation Group List*
• All User Information Print
Touch the key of the desired list to begin printing.
* Cannot be printed when no groups are stored.
This setting also applies to the user selection screen
of document filing and the sender selection screen.
Locking of the operation panel for 5 minutes can be
canceled by clicking [User Control] - [Default Settings]
- [Release the Lock on Machine Operation Panel] in
the Web page menu.
48
User List
This is used to store, edit, and delete users when user authentication is enabled.
When the [User List] key is touched, the following screen appears.
• [Add] key
Use this to add a new user.
• [Delete All Users] key
Use this to delete all stored users. (Excluding factory
stored users.) This operation can only be performed
by an administrator.
• User List
This shows the factory-stored users and the currently
stored users. A user can be selected to open an
edit/delete screen for the user.
Storing a user
Touch the [Add] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 1000 users can be stored.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 49).
Editing/deleting a user
A user can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the user.
For more information, see "Settings" (page 49).
Delete a user with the [Delete] key. (The factory-stored users cannot be deleted.)
User List
Administrator
All Users
Sort
ABC UP
2
1
ABCD
EFGHI
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
Back
AddDelete All Users
Other User
Name 2
Name 4
Name 6
User
Name 1
Name 3
Name 5
Name 7
When auto login is enabled, "Delete All Users" cannot be used. The factory-stored users cannot be deleted.
49
Settings
*1 Does not appear when "User Number" is selected for the authentication method.
*2 Only appears when "User Number" is selected for the authentication method.
*3 Not required when network authentication is used, as the password stored in the LDAP server is used.
Item Description
User Name
Store the name of the user (max. 32 characters). This user name is used as the key name in
the login screen, the document filing user name, and the sender name. (The user name must
be unique.)
Apply User Name to Log-in
Name*
1
Touch this key to enter the entered user name in the login name.
Initial
This determines where the user name will appear in the user list. Up to 5 characters can be
entered.
Index
Select the desired custom index. The custom index names are the same as those in the
address book.
User Number*
2
Enter a user number (5 to 8 digits).
Login Name*
1
Enter the login name used when authentication by login name/password is enabled
(maximum of 255 characters). (The login name must be unique.)
Password*
1, 3
Enter the password used when authentication by login name/password is enabled (1 to 32
characters). (The password can be omitted.)
E-mail Address
Enter the e-mail address used in the sender list and for LDAP authentication (maximum of 64
characters).
My Folder
A folder ("My Folder") can be specified as the folder used by the user for document filing. A
previously created folder can be selected or you can create and select a new folder.
Authentication Settings*
1
Select [Login Locally] or [Network Authentication] (when LDAP is enabled) for "Authenticate
to:".
Authentication Server
When [Network Authentication] is selected, select the server to be used for user
authentication from the list of LDAP servers stored in the Web pages.
Pages Limit Group
Specify page limits for the user by selecting one of the stored page limit groups. The factory
default setting is [Unlimited].
For more information, see "Page Limit Group List" (page 50) .
Authority Group
Specify the authority of the user by selecting one of the stored authority groups. The factory
default setting is [User].
For more information, see "Authority Group List" (page 51) .
Favorite Operation Group
The favorite operation group that will be applied at login appears. The factory default setting is
[Following the System Settings].
The setting can be changed in the [User Control] menu in the Web pages.
50
Page Limit Group List
This is used to store groups of Account Limit Settings. The page limits for each user are specified by selecting one of
these stored groups when the user is stored.
When the [Page Limit Group List] key is touched, the following screen appears.
• [Add] key
Use this to add a new group.
• List display
This shows the currently stored groups. A group name
can be selected to open an edit/delete screen for that
group.
Storing a page limit group
Touch the [Add] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 8 groups can be stored.
For more information, see "Settings".
Editing a page limit group
A group can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the group.
For information on the settings, see "Settings".
To return a group to the factory default state, set "Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model" to "Unlimited" in
the editing screen.
Settings
System Settings
Page Limit Group List
Group 3
Group 1
Back
Add
Group 5
Group 7
Group 2
Group 4
Group 6
Group 8
Item Description
Group Name Store the name of the group (max. 32 characters).
Select the Group Name to be
the Registration Model
Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When
selected, the group's settings are applied.
Function names The names of the functions that can be configured are displayed. Set a limit for each function.
Page Limit
When [Prohibited] is selected for a mode, input and output from the mode are prohibited.
When [Unlimited] is selected for a mode, there is no limit to the number of pages that can be
input/output in that mode.
When [Limited] is selected, enter a limit (1 to 99999999 pages).
51
Authority Group List
Use this to store groups of user authority settings. The authority of each user is specified by selecting one of these
stored groups when the user is stored.
When the [Authority Group List] key is touched, the following screen appears.
• [Add] key
Use this to add a new group.
• List display
This shows the currently stored groups. A group name
can be selected to open an edit/delete screen for that
group.
Storing an authority group
Touch the [Add] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 8 groups can be stored.
For information on the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups" (page 52).
Editing an authority group
A group can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the group. For information on
the settings, see "List of settings and factory default settings of template groups" (page 52).
To return a group to the factory default state, select [Return to Administrator Authority], [Return to User Authority], or
[Return to Guest Authority].
System Settings
Authority Group List
Group 3
Group 1
Back
Add
Group 5
Group 7
Group 2
Group 4
Group 6
Group 8
52
List of settings and factory default settings of template groups
Item Description
Group Name Store the name of the group (max. 32 characters).
Select the Group Name to be the
Registration Model
Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new
group. When selected, the group's settings are applied.
The factory default groups and their settings are shown below.
Admin User Guest
Copy
Color Mode Approval Setting All allowed All allowed
Only Black & White
Allowed
Special Modes Usage Allowed Allowed Prohibited
Printer
Color Mode Approval Setting Allowed Allowed
Only Black & White
Allowed
USB Memory Direct Print Allowed Allowed Prohibited
FTP Pull Print Allowed Allowed Prohibited
Image Send
Approval Settings for Each Mode
• E-mail
•FTP
• Desktop
• Network Folder
• USB Memory
•PC Scan
• Internet Fax Send
• PC-I-Fax Send
•Fax Send
•PC-Fax Send
All allowed All allowed All allowed
Color Scan Allowed Allowed Prohibited
Special Modes Usage Allowed Allowed Prohibited
Approval Setting for Addressing
• Approval Setting for Direct Entry
•
Approval Setting to Use a Local Address Book
• Approval Settings to Use a Global
Address Book
All allowed All allowed All allowed
Document Filing
Scan to HDD
• Color Mode Approval Setting All allowed All allowed
Only Black & White
Allowed
• Special Modes Usage Allowed Allowed Prohibited
Prints (Document Filing)
• Color Mode Approval Setting All allowed All allowed
Only Black & White
Allowed
• Special Modes Usage Allowed Allowed Prohibited
53
*1 For information on each setting, see the system settings (general/administrator) lists.
*2 All allowed except "Change Administrator Password".
Common Functions
Approval Settings for 2-Sided Print
[1-Sided/2-Sided
Approved]
[1-Sided/2-Sided
Approved]
[1-Sided/2-Sided
Approved]
MFP Settings
System Settings Operational Authority
System Settings*
1
Allowed*
2
Only user authority
settings
are allowed
All settings prohibited
Web Settings Operational Authority
Display of Device /Network Status
Allowed
Allowed
Prohibited
Power Reset Prohibited
Machine Identification Prohibited
Network Settings Prohibited
Application Settings (Excluding
Registration of Pre-set Text/Forward
Table)
Prohibited
Registration of Pre-set Text/Forward Table Allowed
E-mail Alert and Status Prohibited
Job Log Setting Prohibited
Port Control/ Filter Settings Prohibited
Storage Backup Prohibited
Custom Link Setting Prohibited
Operation Manual Download Allowed
Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
Item Description
54
Favorite Operation Group List
This is used to store favorite operation groups and home screens.
Favorite Operation Group Registration
Sets of preferred settings can be as groups. For example, a user who speaks a different language would normally have
to change the display language each time he or she uses the machine; however, by storing the language in a favorite
operation group, the language is automatically selected when the user logs in.
Settings
This setting can only be configured in the Web pages. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.
Item Description
Group Name Store the name of the group (max. 32 characters).
Select the Group Name to be
the Registration Model
Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When
selected, the group's settings are applied.
Copy
Initial Status Settings Select settings for Color Mode, Paper Tray, Exposure Type, Copy Ratio, Duplex, and Output.
Image Send
Initial Status Settings Select settings for Resolution, Exposure, and File Format. Store the default fax sender name
and number.
Document Filing
Scan to HDD: Initial Status
Settings
Select settings for Color Mode, Resolution, Exposure, and Compression Ratio.
Prints (Document Filing) Set the default output tray for document filing print.
System Settings
Original Size Detector Setting Select whether inch sizes or AB sizes are detected, or disable detection on the document
glass.
Display Language Setting Select the display language.
Key Operation Setting Set the key input time and Auto Key Repeat setting.
Keys Touch Sound Set the sound made when keys are touched.
Display Pattern Setting Select the color pattern used in the touch panel.
Home Screen Settings Select the home screen.
Customize Key Setting
Customize Key Setting Set customized keys for each mode.
55
Home Screen List
Home screen settings must be previously stored. Select a home screen when storing a favorite operation group.
Settings
Item Description
Home Screen Name Enter a maximum of 32 characters for the home screen name.
Select the Home Screen to be
the Registration Model
Select one of the previously stored home screens as a template for the new home screen.
When selected, the home screen's settings are applied.
Display Title Show a title on the home screen.
Title Enter a maximum of 70 characters for the title name.
Display the User Name Show the currently logged-in user name on the home screen.
Display the Date and Time Show the date and time on the home screen.
Design Template
A template for the design of the home screen can be selected from the list. A sample of the
selected template can be viewed.
Layout of Keys on Screen The layout of the keys in the home screen is displayed.
Key Number Select the number of the key that you want to set, referring to "Screen Key Layout".
Key Name The name of the key selected in "Key Number" can be changed (maximum of 48 characters).
Link Item Specify the function that you want to use in the key selected in "Key Number".
56
User Count
This displays the total number of pages printed by each user.
When the [User Count] key is touched, the following screen appears.
• [Select All Users] key
This selects all users.
• [Show] key
This shows the counts of the selected user.
• [Delete] key
Use this to reset the counts of the selected user.
• User List
This shows the factory-stored users and the currently
stored users. To select a user, select the user name.
Showing user count
Select a user in the above screen and touch the [Show] key. The counts of that user will appear.
Administrator
2
1
Other User
Name 2
Name 4
Name 6
User
Name 1
Name 3
Name 5
Name 7
User Count
All Users
ABC UP
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST
UVWXYZ
Back
Delete
ShowSelect All Users
Sort
Item Settings
Next This shows the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).
Previous This shows the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers).
Show Counts The counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user are shown by function.
Page Limit The page limit set for the user appears in parentheses below the count.
• Counts of devices that are not installed do not appear.
• A user count can be saved in the screen that appears when [User Control] - [User Count] - [Save User Count] is selected
in the Web page menu.
57
Resetting user counts
Select a user in the setting screen and touch the [Reset] key. A count reset screen for that user will appear.
The reset screen will vary depending on whether a single user or multiple users were selected. The items displayed in
each case are described in the table below.
When a single user is selected
When multiple users are selected
Item Description
Next This shows the next user (in the order of the registration numbers).
Previous This shows the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers).
Show Counts The counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user are shown by function.
Clear Count Reset the count of the selected item to "0".
Clear All Counts Reset all items of the selected user to "0".
Item Description
Show Counts The counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected users are shown by function.
Clear Count Reset the count of the selected item to "0".
Clear All Count Reset all items of the selected users to "0".
58
Energy Save
The Energy Save settings help reduce power costs. From an environmental perspective, these settings also help reduce
pollution and conserve natural resources. Touch the [Energy Save] key to configure the settings.
Toner Save Mode
You can reduce the amount of toner used for printing.
Auto Power Shut-Off
This setting enables or disables Auto Power Shut-Off.
Remove the checkmark if you prefer that Auto Power
Shut-Off does not operate.
When the set duration of time elapses after printing
ends, Auto Power Shut-Off activates and causes to
machine to go on standby at a minimal level of power
consumption.
This function reduces your power costs, and at the same
time helps conserve natural resources and reduce
pollution.
If you prefer that auto power shut-off activates as little as
possible, it is recommended that you try lengthening the
time setting after which activation takes place rather than
disabling the function altogether. (The time setting is
changed using "Auto Power Shut-Off Timer" below.)
Auto Power Shut-Off Timer
The time until Auto Power Shut-Off activates can be set
to any number of minutes from 1 to 240.
Select the time that best suits your workplace needs.
Preheat Mode Setting
The time until Preheat Mode activates can be set to any
number of minutes from 1 to 240.
Preheat Mode will activate when the set duration of time
elapses after printing ends and no further operations are
performed. This function reduces your power costs, and
at the same time helps conserve natural resources and
reduce pollution.
Select the time that best suits the needs of your
workplace.
[Print] in Toner Save Mode is only effective when the
machine's printer driver is not used. When the printer
driver is used, the printer driver setting takes
precedence.
This function may not operate in some applications
and operating systems.
Print
data
Print example
when "Toner
Save Mode"
is enabled
The timer setting will not be effective if Auto Power
Shut-Off is disabled using "Auto Power Shut-Off
".
Preheat mode cannot be disabled.
59
Operation Settings
Settings related to machine operation can be configured. Touch the [Operation Settings] key to configure the settings.
Other Settings
Keys Touch Sound
This setting is used to adjust (or turn off) the volume of the
beep that sounds when you touch a key. You can also have
three beeps sound at initial values when setting the ratio in
copy mode or when adjusting the exposure in any mode.
Auto Clear Setting
The time until Auto Clear activates can be set to any
number of minutes from 10 to 240.
If the machine is not used for the duration of time set
here, the auto clear function will clear any settings that
have been selected and return the screen to the base
screen of copy mode or the job status screen.
Cancel Auto Clear Timer
This is used to disable the auto clear function.
Message Time Setting
The duration of time that messages appear in the touch
panel (the time until a message is automatically cleared)
can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 12.
Display Language Setting
The language that appears in the touch panel can be changed.
Disabling of Job Priority Operation
This disables the job priority function and hides the
[Priority] key in the job status screen.
Disabling of Bypass Printing
This is used to disable bypass printing (printing other
jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped* because the
paper required for the job is not in any of the trays).
* This does not include cases where the paper ran out
during the job.
Key Operation Setting
This setting determines how long a key in the touch
panel must be touched until the key input is registered.
The time can be set from 0 to 2 seconds in increments of
0.5 seconds.
By lengthening the time setting, key input can be
prevented when a key is touched accidentally. Keep in
mind, however, that when a longer setting is selected
more care is required when touching keys to ensure that
key input is registered.
Disable Auto Key Repeat
This is used to disable key repeat.
Key repeat causes a setting to change continuously
while a key is touched, not only each time the key is
touched.
Disabling of Clock Adjustment
This setting is used to prohibit changing of the date and
time.
Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
This setting is used to prohibit the use of the covers and
inserts function.
Screen in which setting is effective
Initial
value
Ratio setting screen in base screen of
copy mode
Ratio 100%
Exposure adjustment screen in base
screen of copy mode
Exposure
level:
3 (medium)
Exposure adjustment screen in base screen of
fax, Internet fax, and network scanner modes
Exposure adjustment screen for Scan to
HDD in document filing mode
When user authentication is enabled and a display
language is specified in the favorite operation group,
that setting is given priority.
60
Customize Key Setting
Short-cuts to functions that are frequently used can be displayed in the base screen of each mode.
For more information, see the manuals for each mode.
The settings are shown below.
Home Screen Settings
Use this to configure the home screen that appears when the [HOME] key is pressed.
The settings are shown below.
* Does not appear when user authentication is not enabled.
Display Pattern Setting
One of six color patterns can be selected for the color pattern in the touch panel.
A sample of the selected pattern can be viewed.
Item Description
Customized Keys 1 - 3 Enter a name for the customized key (maximum of 14 characters).
Item
Select the function that you want to assign to the key. The functions that can be
selected vary by mode.
Return to the Defaults This returns all customized keys to their factory default state.
This setting can only be configured in the Web pages. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.
Item Description
Display Title Show a title on the home screen.
Title Enter a maximum of 70 characters for the title name.
Display the User Name* Show the currently logged-in user name on the home screen.
Display the Date and Time Show the date and time on the home screen.
Design Template
A template for the design of the home screen can be selected from the list. A sample of the
selected template can be viewed.
Key Layout of the Screen The layout of the keys in the home screen is displayed.
Key Number Select the number of the key that you want to configure, referring to "Screen Key Layout".
Key Name The name of the key selected in "Key Number" can be changed (maximum of 48 characters).
Link Item Specify the function that you want to use in the key selected in "Key Number".
This setting can only be configured in the Web pages. It cannot be configured in the touch panel of the machine.
61
Device Control
These settings control devices installed on the machine. Touch the [Device Control] key to configure the settings.
Other Settings
Original Feeding Mode
The following original feeding modes can be set to
operate by default in copy, Scan to HDD, and image
send modes. When a mode is frequently used, this
saves you from having to select the mode in the special
modes each time you need to use it.
• Mixed Size Original (Same Width/Different Width)
• Slow Scan Mode
Saddle Stitch Position Adjust
(When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, this setting is
used to adjust the stapling position (folding position) of
the pamphlet staple function.
The value can be adjusted in increments of 0.25 mm
within a range of ±2.0 mm from the home position of
each paper size.
Auto Paper Selection Setting
The paper types* that the Auto Paper Selection function will
select can be specified. Select one of the following settings:
• Plain Paper
• Plain and Recycle Paper
• Recycle Paper
The Auto Paper Selection function will not select any
paper types other than the paper types specified with
this setting.
* The paper type set for each paper tray using "Paper
Tray Settings" (page 16) in the system settings
(general).
Tandem Connection Setting
When two machines are used as network printers using
TCP/IP protocol, use this setting to configure the port
number and IP address of the machine used as the
tandem slave machine.
Disabling of Master Machine Mode
To prohibit tandem transmission, enable this setting.
(There is normally no need to enable this setting.)
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
To prohibit tandem reception, enable this setting. (There
is normally no need to enable this setting.)
Detect Standard in Auto Color
Mode
When the color mode is set to auto in copy mode, the
discrimination point for detecting whether originals are
color or black and white can be set to one of 5 levels. To
make it easier to detect a black and white original, adjust
the setting toward [Black & White]. To make it easier to
detect a color original, adjust the setting toward [Color].
Auto Switching of Finisher Trays
If the number of sheets on the upper finisher tray
reaches the sheet limit, output will automatically switch
to the lower tray.
1
2
12
11
Position
moved in
the minus direction
.
Position moved in
the plus direction.
Max. + 2 mm Min. - 2 mm
Reference position
• The factory default setting for the port number is
[50001]. Unless you experience difficulty with this
setting, do not change the port number.
• To use the tandem function when user
authentication is enabled, the same login name and
password must be used on both the master
machine and slave machine. If the same login name
and password are not used, the page count may not
be added to the appropriate user count or only the
master machine may print.
62
Registration Adjustment
If the colors are out of place on the printed surface when
color printing is performed, the print positions of the
colors can be adjusted.
To perform this adjustment, touch the [Auto Adjustment]
key. A message will appear. Touch the [Execute] key.
Optimization of a Hard Disk
This function optimizes the hard drive of the machine by
defragmenting data. If a job is in progress, a message
will appear and optimization will not begin until the job is
finished. During optimization, the following operations
are not possible:
• Web page access, reception of print data
• Use of keys on the operation panel
• Turning off the power with the main power switch of
the machine.
• Auto Power Shut-Off
When optimization is completed, the machine will
automatically restart.
Clear All Job Log Data
This is used to clear the entire job log. (There is normally
no need to use this function.)
A log file is kept of jobs run on the machine. The job log
can be used to check general use of the machine. The
job log can be written to a computer in CSV format using
a Web browser.
When the document filing function is frequently used
and output of files seems somewhat slow, optimizing
the hard drive may improve performance.
63
Original Size Detector Setting
One of the five groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size detection
function.
Cancel Detection at Document Glass
Original size detection on the document glass can be disabled. When this is done, all originals placed on the document
glass are treated as special size originals.
Selections
Detectable original sizes
Document glass
Document feeder tray (automatic
document feeder)
AB-1
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R,
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
AB-2
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R,
216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R,
8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17"
216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
AB-3
A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17"
216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
INCH-1
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
INCH-2
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm ),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm ),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2",
A4, A3
64
Disabling of Devices
Use these settings when a peripheral device on the machine has failed or when you wish to temporarily disable a device.
Disabling of Document Feeder
Use this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic
document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions.
(When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible
using the document glass.)
Disabling of Duplex
This is used to disable two-sided printing, such as when
the duplex module malfunctions.
Disabling of Large Capacity
Cassette
(When a large capacity tray is installed.)
This setting is used to prohibit the use of the large
capacity tray, such as when it malfunctions.
Disabling of Tray Setting
This setting is used to prohibit tray settings (except for
the bypass tray).
Disabling of Finisher
(When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.)
This setting is used to disable the saddle stitch finisher
or finisher, such as when the unit malfunctions.
Disabling of Inserter
(When an inserter is installed.)
This setting is used to prohibit the use of the inserter,
such as when it malfunctions.
Disabling of Offset
(When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is
installed.)
This setting is used to disable the offset function.
Disabling of Stapler
(When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is
installed.)
This setting is used to prohibit stapling, such as when
the stapler unit of the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher
malfunctions.
Disabling of Punch
(When a punch module is installed.)
This setting is used to prohibit punching, such as when
the punch module of the finisher or the saddle stitch
finisher malfunctions.
Disabling of Color Mode
(When a color-related problem has occurred.)
When a color-related problem has occurred and printing
is not possible, the use of color mode can be temporarily
prohibited. Black & white printing will still be allowed.
Fusing Control Settings
This is used to set the weight of paper from 16 to 28 lbs. (60 to 105 g/m
2
) for control of fusing temperature by paper
weight.
This function is only for use as an emergency
measure. Once this setting is enabled, only a service
technician can cancel the setting. Promptly contact
your dealer or nearest SHARP service department to
have a service technician cancel the setting and
resolve the color-related problem.
To make this setting take effect, press the [POWER] key ( ) to turn the power off, wait briefly, and then press the
[POWER] key ( ) again to turn the power on.
65
Copy Function Settings
The following settings are related to copying. Touch the [Copy Function Settings] key to configure the settings.
Default settings selected with these settings apply to all functions of the machine (not just the copy function).
Initial Status Settings
The copier settings are reset when the [POWER] key ( ) is turned on, when the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) is pressed,
or when the auto clear interval has elapsed. These settings are used to change the default settings for copy mode.
The following settings can be changed:
Item Description
Color Mode Configure default color mode settings.
Paper Tray Specify the paper tray that is selected by default.
Exposure Type Configure exposure mode settings.
Copy Ratio Specify the copy ratio that is selected by default.
2-Sided Copy
Configure the 2-sided mode settings that are selected by default.
If this setting is used to change the default setting for the duplex function to other than "1-Side to 1-Side"
and the duplex function or automatic document feeder fails or is disabled, the setting will revert to
"1-Side to 1-Side".
Output Set the print output method and output tray that are selected by default.
Return to the
Defaults
This returns all items to the factory default settings.
66
Other Settings
Copy Exposure Adjustment
This is used to adjust the exposure level when [Auto] is
used for the copy exposure.
Color
Use this to set the copy exposure level in color mode for the
document glass and for the automatic document feeder.
Black & White
Use this to set the copy exposure level in black & white
mode for the document glass and for the automatic
document feeder.
Rotation Copy Setting
When the original and paper are placed in different
orientations, this function automatically rotates the image
90 degrees to enable correct copying on the paper.
Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
Two enlargement preset ratios (101% to 400%) and two
reduction preset ratios (25% to 99%) can be added. An
added preset ratio can also be changed.
Setting a Maximum Number of Copies
This is used to set the maximum number that can be
entered for the number of copies (number of continuous
copies). Any number from 1 to 999 can be specified.
Initial Margin Shift Setting
This is used to set the default margin shift amount.
Specify a value from 0" (0 mm) to 1" (20 mm) in
increments of
1/8" (1 mm) for both the front and reverse
sides.
Erase Width Adjustment
This is used to set the default erase width for erase
copy. Specify a value from 0" (0 mm) to 1" (20 mm) in
increments of 1/8" (1 mm) for both edge erase and
center erase.
Card Shot Settings
This is used to set the default original size for the card
shot function.
Both the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions of the
original can be set from 1" (25 mm) to 8-1/2" (210 mm) in
increments of 1/8" (1 mm).
Fit to Page
Enable this setting to have the [Fit to Page] key always
appear in the card shot screen.
Automatic Saddle Stitch
(When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
This is used to have saddle stitch stapling take place
automatically when the pamphlet copy function is used.
Initial Tab Copy Setting
This is used to set the default image shift width (tab
width) for tab copying.
The default width can be set from 0" (0 mm) to 5/8"
(20 mm) in increments of 1/8" (1 mm).
•
Image rotation can only take place when automatic
paper selection or automatic ratio selection is enabled.
• The Rotation Copy setting must be enabled when
copying an 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size original on
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A5R) paper.
Preset ratios other than added preset ratios cannot be
changed.
67
Disabling Deletion of Job Programs
This is used to prohibit the deletion and changing of copy
settings stored in job programs.
Disabling of Bypass-Tray in
Duplex Copy
This is used to prohibit the use of the bypass tray when
making two-sided copies.
The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets,
transparency film, and other special media for which
two-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of one of these
special media enters the reversing unit, a misfeed or
damage to the unit may result. If special media for which
two-sided copying is prohibited is often used, it is
recommended that you enable this setting.
Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
This setting is used to disable the Auto Paper Selection
function.
When this setting is enabled, automatic selection of
paper that is the same size as the original on the
document glass or in the automatic document feeder
does not take place.
Auto Selection Setting of Tray that
is Supplied the Paper
When this setting is enabled and paper is loaded in a
tray while the machine is on standby in copy mode, that
tray is automatically selected.
B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning
Mode for Document Feeder
The resolution for copying in black and white using the
automatic document feeder can be changed from 600 x
300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high quality mode).
When high quality mode is used, fine print and thin lines
are reproduced with greater clarity, however, the
scanning speed is slower.
B/W Quick Scan from Document
Glass
The resolution for copying in black and white using the
document glass can be changed from 600 x 600 dpi to
600 x 300 dpi (high speed mode).
When high speed mode is selected, the first copy time is
quicker, however, the copy image is not as clear.
When high quality mode is not selected, the following
conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x
300 dpi and attain the fastest speed.
• The copy ratio must be set to 100%.
• Do not select a special mode that will change the
ratio.
• [Copy of Copy] must not be enabled.
• Do not copy in black and white with the [COLOR
START] key ( ).
When high speed mode is selected, the following
conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x
300 dpi and attain the fastest speed.
• The copy ratio must be set to 100%.
• Do not select a special mode that will change the
ratio.
• [Copy of Copy] must not be enabled.
• Do not copy in black and white with the [COLOR
START] key ( ).
68
Color Adjustments
The following color settings can be configured.
Initial Color Balance Setting
Color balance values obtained using "Color Balance" in
the special modes can be stored in a program (1 to 48),
and those values can be retrieved and stored as the
initial color balance setting*. Use this feature when you
want to repeatedly use a color balance setting for a
favorite color or for correction when a change occurs in
the color balance.
* Preset values displayed when you select "Color
Balance" in the special modes.
Return to the Factory Default Setting
This returns the stored color balance values to the
factory default values (all color balance values are "0" for
the 8 levels of each color).
Auto Color Calibration
This is used to perform automatic color correction when
the color in color copies is off. The machine prints a test
patch, the test patch is scanned, and the color is
automatically corrected.
After the [Execute] key is touched and a test patch is
printed, a message appears prompting you to begin
automatic calibration. Place the test patch on the
document glass as shown below (so that the thin line at
the edge of the page is to the left).
Lay copy paper (about five sheets) that is the same size
as the test patch on top of the placed test patch, gently
close the automatic document feeder, and touch the
[Execute] key.
• Before executing Auto Color Calibration, check to
see if the registration adjustment is correct. If the
registration adjustment is not correct, perform
"Registration Adjustment" (page 62).
• If the color is still off after performing Auto Color
Calibration, repeating Auto Color Calibration once
again may improve the color.
Thin line
69
Network Settings
Network settings are described below. Touch the [Network Settings] key to configure the settings.
IP Address Setting
When using the machine on a TCP/IP network, use this
setting to configure the IP address of the machine.
The settings are shown below.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the machine.
IP Subnet Mask
Entry the IP Subnet Mask.
IP Gateway
Enter the IP Gateway address.
DHCP
Use this setting to have the IP address obtained
automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol). When this setting is enabled, it is not
necessary to manually enter an IP address.
Enable TCP/IP
To use the machine on a TCP/IP network, this setting
must be enabled. The IP address of the machine must
also be configured using "IP Address Setting".
Enable NetWare
To use the machine on a NetWare network, this setting
must be enabled.
Enable EtherTalk
To use the machine on an EtherTalk network, this
setting must be enabled.
Enable NetBEUI
To use the machine on a NetBEUI network, this setting
must be enabled.
Reset the NIC
This returns all "Network Settings" to the factory default
settings.
Ping Command
Use this function to check if the machine can
communicate with a computer on the network.
Specify the IP address of the desired computer and
touch the [Execute] key. A message will appear
indicating whether or not the computer responded.
When any of these settings are changed, you must exit the system settings, turn off the [POWER] key ( ), wait a brief
interval, and then turn the [POWER] key ( ) back on to make the new settings take effect.
• If the machine will be used on a TCP/IP network, be
sure to enable "Enable TCP/IP
" below.
• If DHCP is used, the IP address assigned to the
machine may change automatically. If the IP
address changes, printing will not be possible.
70
Printer Settings
Settings related to the printer function can be configured. Touch the [Printer Settings] key to configure the settings.
Default Settings
Printer condition settings are described below.
Prohibit Notice Page Printing
This setting is used to disable printing of notice pages.
Prohibit Test Page Printing
This setting is used to disable printing of test pages.
When this setting is enabled, "Printer Test Page" in the
system settings cannot be used to print test pages.
A4/Letter Size Auto Change
When printing an A4 size image, this setting allows letter
size paper to be used if A4 size paper is not loaded.
Print Density Level
This lightens or darkens the print density of color and
black and white images. The print density can be
adjusted to five levels.
Bypass Tray Settings
Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray
This is used to prohibit printing when the paper size
specified for a print job is different from the paper size
inserted in the bypass tray.
Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray
This is used to prohibit printing when the paper type
specified for a print job is different from the paper type
inserted in the bypass tray.
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [auto] is selected for paper type selection, the
bypass tray can be excluded from the trays that can be
selected. This is recommended when special media is
often placed in the bypass tray.
Job Spool Queuing
When this function is enabled, received print jobs are
displayed in the spool queue of the job status screen.
The jobs are moved to the job queue after they have
been analyzed by the machine. Multiple jobs that have
not yet been analyzed can appear in the spool queue.
When this function is disabled, received print jobs are
displayed in the job queue without being displayed in the
spool queue. However, when an encrypted PDF job is
printed, the job appears in the spool queue.
71
Interface Settings
These settings are used to control and monitor data transmitted to the USB port or network port of the machine.
Hexadecimal Dump Mode
This function is used to print the print data from a
computer in hexadecimal format together with the
corresponding ASCII text. This allows you to check
whether or not print data from the computer is being
transmitted to the machine correctly.
Example of a hexadecimal dump
I/O Timeout
The I/O timeout can be set to any number of seconds
from 1 to 999.
The I/O timeout function temporarily breaks the
connection if the set duration of time elapses without any
data being received by the port. After the connection is
broken, the port is set to auto selection or the next print
job is begun.
Enable USB Port
This is used to enable printing from the USB port.
USB Port Emulation Switching
If the machine is connected using the USB port, select
the emulated printer language.
The settings are shown below.
•Auto
• PostScript*
•PCL
* When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
Enable Network Port
This is used to enable printing from the network port.
Network Port Emulation Switching
This setting is used to select the emulated printer
language when the machine is connected by a network
port.
The settings are shown below.
•Auto
• PostScript*
•PCL
* When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
Port Switching Method
This setting is used to select when port switching takes
place.
Switch at End of Job
The port changes to auto selection when printing ends.
Switch after I/O Timeout
When the time set in "I/O Timeout" elapses, the port
changes to auto selection.
• The settings are the same as those of "Network Port
Emulation Switching".
• Unless printer errors occur frequently, it is
recommended that you use the factory default
setting "Auto".
• The settings are the same as those of "USB Port
Emulation Switching".
• Unless printer errors occur frequently, it is
recommended that you use the factory default
setting "Auto".
The following two print ports are available on the
machine:
• USB port
• Network port
72
Auto Color Calibration
This is used to perform automatic color correction when the color in color printing is off. The machine prints a test patch,
the test patch is scanned, and the color is automatically corrected.
After the [Execute] key is touched and a test patch is printed, a message appears prompting you to begin automatic
calibration. Place the test patch on the document glass as shown below (so that the thin line at the edge of the page is to
the left).
Lay copy paper (about five sheets) that is the same size as the test patch on top of the placed test patch, gently close
the automatic document feeder, and touch the [Execute] key.
• Before executing Auto Color Calibration, check to see if the registration adjustment is correct. If the registration adjustment
is not correct, perform "Registration Adjustment" (page 62).
• If the color is still off after performing Auto Color Calibration, repeating Auto Color Calibration once again may improve the
color.
Thin line
73
Image Send Settings
Settings related to the image send function (scan, Internet fax, etc.) can be configured. Touch the [Image Send Settings]
key to configure the settings.
Operation Settings
The operation settings below apply to all image send functions.
Default Display Settings
You can select one of 6 base screen types for the base screen
that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched or when
the [CLEAR ALL] ( ) key is pressed in image send mode.
• Address Book (ABC)
• Address Book (User)
• Scan
• Internet Fax
•Fax
• Data Entry
Hold settings for a while after scanning has been completed
Use this setting to hold the settings after scanning is
completed (until Auto Clear Mode activates).
Switch Automatically to Copy Mode Screen
Enable this setting to have the screen automatically
switch to the copy mode screen if no action is taken in
the image send mode screen for 20 seconds.
Initial Resolution Setting
The following settings are available for the default
resolutions of scan, Internet fax, and fax mode.
Scan : 100X100 dpi, 200X200 dpi, 300X300 dpi,
400X400 dpi, 600X600 dpi
Internet fax : 200X100 dpi
200X200 dpi
200X400 dpi
400X400 dpi
600X600 dpi
Fax: Standard
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Apply the Resolution Set when Stored
When an image stored by document filing is used, this
applies the resolution setting that was stored with the image.
Default Exposure Settings
This is used to set the default exposure settings for
scanning a document in image send mode. Select [Auto]
or [Manual]. When [Manual] is selected, the exposure
can be set to one of 5 levels.
Default Original Image Type
Select the original type beforehand to enable
transmission at a resolution suitable for the original (only
in scan mode and USB memory mode).
The settings are shown below.
• Text/Printed Photo
• Text/Photo
•Text
• Photo*
• Printed Photo*
•Map*
* Does not appear when the exposure is set to [Auto].
Moiré Reduction
This reduces the moiré effect (line pattern) that occurs
when printed matter is scanned (only in scan mode and
USB memory mode).
Must Input Next Address Key at
Broadcast Setting
This setting is used to require that the [Next Address]
key be touched before the next address is entered when
performing a broadcast transmission.
When this setting is enabled, the [Next Address] key
cannot be omitted even if the next address is entered
with a one-touch key.
If a user attempts to enter the next address without
touching the [Next Address] key, a double-beep alarm
will sound and the entry will be rejected.
For explanations of settings related to the fax function, see "4. SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX" (page 93).
Other Settings
Half Tone
Half Tone
74
Scan Complete Sound Setting
The scan complete sound can be selected.
The Number of File Name/Subject/Body
Keys Displayed Setting
This setting is used to select the number of file name /
subject keys that are displayed in the screen. The
number of keys can be set to 6, 12, or 18.
The Number of Direct Address
Keys Displayed Setting
Select 5, 10, or 15 for the number of one-touch keys that
appear in the address book screen.
Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to prohibit changes to the order of display
(search number order, ascending, descending) in the
address book.
When this setting enabled, touching a tab on the
address book screen does not change the order. The
display order will remain fixed at the order that is in effect
when this setting is enabled.
Hold Setting for Received Data Print
This function holds received faxes and Internet faxes in
memory without printing them. The faxes can be printed
by entering a password (factory default setting: 0000)
with the numeric keys.
Password
When [Hold Setting for Received Data Print] and
[Change Password] are enabled, the password (4-digit
number) can be changed.
Change Password
Enable this setting to allow the password to be changed.
This is used to prohibit the storing of destinations.
Storing from the machine, storing from the Web page,
and storing from a computer can each be separately
prohibited.
Disable Registering Destination
from Operation Panel
This disables address control from the machine.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
•Group
• E-mail
• Internet Fax
•Fax
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Disable Registering Destination on
Web Page
(When network connection is enabled.)
This disables address control from the Web pages.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
•Group
• E-mail
• FTP
• Desktop
• Network Folder
• Internet Fax
•Fax
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Disable Registration Using
Network Scanner Tool
(When network connection is enabled.)
This disables address control from the Network Scanner
Tool.
These settings can only be configured when there is
no received data in the machine's memory (excluding
data in a confidential or relay broadcast memory box).
Settings to Disable Registration
75
These settings are used to disable the following
transmission operations.
Disable [Resend] on Image Send
Mode
This setting disables the [Resend] key in the base
screen of image send mode.
Disable Selection From Address
Book
This disables the selection of destinations from the
Address Book.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
•E-mail
• FTP
•Desktop
• Network Folder
• Internet Fax
•Fax
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Disable Direct Entry
This prohibits the direct entry of addresses.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
•E-mail
• Internet Fax
•Fax
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission
(When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.)
This prohibits PC-I-Fax transmission.
Disable PC-Fax Transmission
(When facsimile expansion kit is installed.)
This prohibits PC-Fax transmission.
Settings to Disable Transmission
76
Scan Settings
Settings related to scanning can be configured.
Default Sender Set
The information stored here is used if you do not specify
[Reply-To] in the send settings when performing Scan to
E-mail.
Sender Name
Enter a default sender name (maximum of 20
characters).
Reply E-mail Address
Enter a default reply address (maximum of 64
characters).
Default Color Mode Settings
Select a default color mode setting for both color and
black & white in scan mode.
Black & White
Mono 2, Grayscale
Color Mode
Auto (Mono 2, Grayscale*), Full Color
* When scanning a black and white original with the color
mode set to [Auto].
Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode
This prohibits black & white settings from the base
screen when the color mode is set to Auto.
Initial File Format Setting
This is used to set the default file format for Scan to
E-mail and USB memory mode when the e-mail address
is entered manually by touching the [Address Entry] key.
File Type
Black & White: PDF, Encrypt PDF, TIFF
Color/Grayscale: PDF, Encrypt PDF, TIFF, JPEG
Compression Mode (Compression Ratio)
Black & White: None, MH(G3), MMR(G4)
Color/Grayscale: Low, Medium, High
Specified Pages per File
When multiple pages are scanned, this is used to
generate a separate file for each scanned page (or
specified number of pages).
When this setting is enabled, the number of pages per
file can be specified.
Compression Mode at Broadcasting
This is used to set the compression mode for
broadcasting using Scan to E-mail or Internet fax. The
compression mode set here is used for all destinations
regardless of their individual compression mode settings.
Black & White
MH(G3), MMR(G4)
Color/Grayscale
Low, Medium, High
Maximum Size of E-mail
Attachments (E-mail)
To prevent the transmission of excessively large image
files by Scan to E-mail, a file size limit can be set from
1 MB to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB. If the total size of
the image files created by scanning the original exceeds
the limit, the image files are discarded.
If you do not wish to set a limit, select [Unlimited].
Other Settings
If only the sender name is stored, it will not be used as
sender information.
When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, [Specified
Pages per File] cannot be selected.
This setting is linked to "Maximum Size of E-mail
Attachments" (page 79) in the Internet Fax Send
Settings.
77
Maximum Size of Data Attachments
(FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)
A limit can be set for the size of files that can be sent by
Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network
Folder. Limits that can be selected are 50 MB, 150 MB,
and 300 MB. If the total size of the image files created by
scanning the original exceeds the limit, the image files
are discarded.
If you do not wish to set a limit, select [Unlimited].
Bcc Setting
Enable Bcc
Enable this setting if you wish to use Bcc delivery. When
the setting is enabled, the [Bcc] key will appear in the
image send address book screen.
Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Screen
This displays Bcc addresses on the job status screen
and address list tab.
Disable Scan Function
This is used to disable PC scan and USB memory scan.
When these modes are disabled, they are grayed out
when the mode is changed in the base screen.
Pre-Setting Mail Signature
A signature can be automatically appended to the end of
the body text of e-mail. This is convenient when it is a
corporate policy to append a specific signature at the
end of e-mail.
The mail signature to be appended is configured in the
Web pages. This setting simply enables or disables the
signature.
A default address can be stored that makes it possible to
transmit by simply pressing the [COLOR START] key
( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( )
without specifying an address.
When a broadcast transmission is performed that
includes both e-mail and Internet fax destinations, the
limit set in "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
(E-mail)" (page 76) is given priority.
This setting is linked to "Pre-Setting Mail Signature"
(page 79) in the Internet Fax Initial Settings.
Default Address Setting
• When this setting is enabled, the base screen
changes to scan mode.
• Only a single default address can be set for Scan to
E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to
Network Folder.
78
I-Fax Settings
These settings are used to configure the default settings
for Internet fax.
I-Fax Own Name and Address Set
This is used to configure the sender name and address
for Internet fax. The entered sender name and address
are printed at the top of each fax page you send.
Sender Name
Enter a default sender name (max. of 40 characters).
Own Address
Enter a default sender address (maximum of 56
characters).
Auto Wake Up Print
When the [POWER] key ( ) is "off" (but the main
power switch is "on") and an Internet fax is received, this
function activates the machine and prints the fax.
When this function is disabled, received Internet faxes
are not printed until the the [POWER] key ( ) is
switched "on".
Compression Setting
This is used to set the default compression mode for
Internet fax transmission.
The settings are shown below.
•MH (G3)
• MMR (G4)
Speaker Volume Setting
This is used to adjust the volume of fax receive signals
and communication error signals heard through the
speaker.
A fax receive signal sounds after the machine checks
the mail server and retrieves received faxes. A
communication error signal sounds when a delivery
failed e-mail is received from the destination Internet fax
machine.
Original Print on Transaction
Report
When a transaction report is printed, this is used to print
part of the first page of the transmitted original on the
transaction report. Select one of the settings below.
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
This setting will not be effective if "Transaction Report
Print Select Setting" below is set to "No Printed Report".
Transaction Report Print Select
Setting
This is used to select whether or not a transaction report
will be printed, and if printed, the condition for being
printed. Select a setting for each of the following
operations:
Single Sending
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
Broadcasting
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
Receiving
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
When a transaction report is printed, you can have part
of the first page of the transmitted original printed on the
transaction report. For more information, see "Original
Print on Transaction Report".
These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
I-Fax Default Settings
79
Activity Report Print Select Setting
This is used to have the Image Sending Activity Report
stored in the machine's memory automatically print at
specified times.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to
automatically print each time the number of transactions
reaches 200, and it can also be set to automatically print
at a specified time (once a day only). (The settings can
be simultaneously enabled.)
Body Text Print Select Setting
Image files attached to Internet faxes are normally
printed. This setting can be enabled to also have the
e-mail body text (subject and message) printed.
This setting also applies to printing of the body text of
e-mail messages without file attachments.
Pre-Setting Mail Signature
A signature can be automatically appended to the end of
the body text of e-mail. This is convenient when it is a
corporate policy to append a certain signature at the end
of e-mail.
The mail signature to be appended is configured in the
Web pages. This setting simply enables or disables the
signature.
I-Fax Send Settings are described below.
I-Fax Reception Report On/Off
Setting
This setting is used to request a reception report when
an Internet fax is sent.
The reception report is returned to the sender address
stored in "I-Fax Own Name and Address Set" (page 78).
I-Fax Reception Report Request
Timeout Setting
The duration of time that the machine will wait for a
reception report from the destination machine can be set
by any number from 0 minutes to 240 hours in
increments of 1 minute.
Number of Resend Times at
Reception Error
The number of resend attempts when an error message
is received from an I-Fax recipient can be set to any
number from 0 to 15.
Maximum Size of E-mail
Attachments
To prevent the transmission of excessively large image
files by Internet fax, a file size limit can be set from 1 MB
to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB. If the total size of the
image files created by scanning the original exceeds the
limit, the image files are discarded.
If you do not wish to set a limit, select [Unlimited].
• If you only enable the [Print Daily at Designated
Time] setting and the number of recorded
transactions exceeds 200 before the specified time,
each new transaction will delete the oldest
transaction (the oldest transaction will not be
printed).
• The Image Sending Activity Report can also be
printed manually. See "List Print (Administrator)"
(page 85) in the system settings (administrator).
A maximum of 5 pages of body text can be printed.
This setting is linked to "Pre-Setting Mail Signature"
(page 77) in the Scan Settings.
I-Fax Send Settings
This setting is only effective when "I-Fax Reception
Report On/Off Setting" is enabled.
This setting is only effective when "I-Fax Reception
Report On/Off Setting" is enabled.
This setting is linked to "Maximum Size of E-mail
Attachments (E-mail)" (page 76) in the Scan Settings.
80
Rotation Sending Setting
When transmitting an image that is one of the following
sizes, this function rotates the image counterclockwise
90 degrees. (The setting can be configured separately
for each size.)
8-1/2 x 11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, A4, B5R, A5R, 16K
Printing Page Number at Receiver
When the transmitted image is printed by the receiving
machine, the page number can be added to the top of
each printed page.
I-Fax Receive Settings are described below.
Auto Receive Reduce Setting
When a fax is received that includes printed information
such as the sender's name and address, the received image
is slightly larger than the standard size. This setting is used
to automatically reduce the image to fit the standard size.
Duplex Reception Setting
This is used to select whether or not received faxes are
printed on both sides of the paper.
When this setting is enabled and a fax consisting of 2 or
more pages is received (the pages must be the same
size), the pages are printed on both sides of the paper.
Set Address for Data Forwarding
When the machine is unable to print a received fax, the
fax can be forwarded to another machine. This setting is
used to configure the address of the other machine.
Enter the forwarding address (maximum of 64 characters).
A3 RX Reduce
When an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces
the fax to W letter size.
POP3 Communication Timeout Setting
The duration of time the machine waits until stopping
reception when a response is not received from the mail
server (POP3 server) can be set from 30 to 300 seconds
in increments of 30 seconds.
8-1/2"x11"R and A4R size images are not rotated.
I-Fax Receive Settings
• If Auto Receive Reduce is disabled, the edges of
the image outside the standard size will be cut off.
However, the image will be clearer because it will
be printed at the same size as the original.
• Standard sizes are sizes such as 8-1/2" x 11" and
8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (A4 and B5).
Multiple forwarding addresses cannot be stored.
When this setting is enabled, W letter size faxes are
also reduced.
81
Reception Check Interval Setting
This is used to specify the interval at which the machine
automatically checks the mail server (POP3 server) for
received Internet faxes. The interval can be set from 0
minutes to 8 hours in increments of 1 minute.
When 0 hours 0 minutes is specified, the machine does
not automatically check the mail server for received
Internet faxes.
I-Fax Output Setting
This sets the output tray for received Internet faxes.
The items that appear will vary depending the machine
configuration.
This setting is used to allow or refuse reception from
specified addresses/domains.
The machine also checks the mail server (POP3
server) for received Internet faxes when the main
power is switched on. (Except when 0 hours 0 minutes
is specified.)
Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name
Setting
Item Description
Reject
Reception
Reception from the stored
address/domain is not allowed.
Allow
Reception
Reception from the stored
address/domain is allowed.
All Invalid
Reception from any address and domain
is allowed, regardless of whether or not
any addresses or domains have been
stored.
Add New
Use this to add a new address or domain
(maximum of 50) from which reception is
to be rejected or allowed.
If the first character of the entry is not
"@", the entry is identified as an address.
If the first character is "@", the entry is
identified as a domain. ([email protected]
is treated as an address, and
@xx.xxx.com is treated as a domain.)
Storing an address specifies only that
address. Storing a domain specifies all
addresses that include that domain.
Registration
Number
List
This shows a list of the stored addresses
and domains. An address or domain can
be selected in this screen to delete it from
the list.
When there are no stored anti junk mail addresses,
only the [Add New] key can be selected.
82
Document Filing Settings
Document filing settings are described below. Touch the [Document Filing Settings] key to configure the settings.
Other Settings
Default Mode Settings
This is used to specify which mode, Sharing or
Confidential, is used as the default mode when storing a
file.
When [Confidential Mode] is selected, the [Confidential]
checkbox in the information screen for filing will be
selected .
Sort Method Setting
This setting is used to select the order of display of files
stored in the Main Folder, Custom Folder, and Quick File
Folder. Select one of the following settings:
• File Name
• User Name
•Date
Administrator Authority Setting
For files and custom folders that have a password, this
setting is used to allow an administrator password to be
entered to cancel and delete the password.
Delete All Quick Files
This function deletes all files except protected files from
the Quick File Folder.
Delete Quick Files at Power Up
This is used to automatically delete all files in the Quick
File Folder (with the exception of protected files) when
the [POWER] key ( ) is turned "on".
Default Color Mode Settings
This sets the default settings for black & white and color
when Scan to HDD is used.
The settings are shown below.
Color
Auto, Full Color, 2 Color
Black & White
Mono 2, Grayscale
Default Exposure Settings
Default exposure settings for document filing can be
configured. Select [Auto] or [Manual]. If you select
[Manual], set the exposure to one of 5 levels.
Default Original Type
Select the original type beforehand to enable scanning
at a resolution suitable for the original.
The settings are shown below.
• Text/Printed Photo
• Text/Photo
•Text
• Photo*
• Printed Photo*
•Map*
* Does not appear when the exposure is set to [Auto].
Moiré Reduction
This reduces the moiré effect (line pattern) that occurs
when printed matter is scanned.
Initial Resolution Settings
One of the following resolutions can be selected for the
default resolution for Scan to HDD.
• 100X100 dpi
• 200X200 dpi
• 300X300 dpi
• 400X400 dpi
• 600X600 dpi
This setting can only be used to delete a password. It
cannot be used to change a password.
83
Color Data Compression Ratio
Setting
[Low], [Medium], or [High] can be selected for the default
compression ratio for color files stored by Scan to HDD.
Default Output Tray
This setting is used to select the default output tray for
printing a file stored by Scan to HDD.
The items that appear will vary depending the machine
configuration.
Scan Complete Sound Setting
This setting adjusts the volume of the beep that sounds
when scanning ends. The beep can also be turned off.
Disable Stamp for Reprinting
When a stored file is retrieved and printed, this setting
prohibits the selection of a "Stamp" setting in the special
modes. If a stamp setting is already selected, it will not
be possible to change the stamp setting.
This function can be used to prevent inconsistencies in
the printed information, such as that of the original date
in the file and the date the file is retrieved and printed.
Batch Print Settings
When printing files by batch printing, this setting is used
to prohibit the selection of the [All Users] key and the
[User Unknown] key in the user selection screen.
84
Document Output Options
The use of a stored file can be allowed or prohibited by operation type and by the mode from which the file was stored.
The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.
Item Description
Print For each mode, select whether or not printing of stored files is allowed.
Scan Send For each mode, select whether or not scan send of stored files is allowed.
Internet Fax Send For each mode, select whether or not I-Fax transmission of stored files is allowed.
Fax Send For each mode, select whether or not fax transmission of stored files is allowed.
85
List Print (Administrator)
This is used to print lists and reports that are only for use by the administrator of the machine. Touch the [List Print
(Administrator)] key to configure the settings.
Administrator Settings List
Lists of the administrator settings for the following modes
can be printed.
• Copy
•Print
• Image Send
• Document Filing
• Security
•Common
• All Administrator Settings List
Image Sending Activity Report
The following Image Sending Activity Reports can each
be separately printed.
• Image Sending Activity Report (Scan)
• Image Sending Activity Report (Internet Fax)
• Image Sending Activity Report (Fax)
Data Receive/Forward List
The following lists showing reception settings and
forwarding settings can be printed.
• Anti Junk Fax Number List
• Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name List
• Inbound Routing List
• Document Admin List
Web Settings List
(When network connection is enabled.)
This prints a list of the settings that are configured in the
Web pages.
Metadata Set List
(When the application integration module is
installed.)
This prints a list of the metadata sets stored in the Web
pages.
86
Security Settings
The following settings are related to security. Touch the [Security Settings] key to configure the settings.
Setting of SSL
SSL can be used for data transmission over a network.
SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of
information communicated over a network. Encrypting
data makes it possible to transmit and receive sensitive
information safely.
SSL can be enabled for the following protocols:
Server Port
• HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP
communication.
• IPP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to IPP
communication.
Client Port
• FTPS: Apply SSL encryption to FTP
communication.
• SMTP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to SMTP
communication.
• POP3-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to POP3
communication.
Level of Encryption
The encryption strength can be set to one of three levels.
87
Enable/Disable Settings
The following settings are used to prohibit the use of certain functions. Touch the [Enable/Disable Settings] key to
configure the settings.
User Control
Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
Printing by users whose information is not stored in the
machine, such as printing without entering valid user
information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an
FTP server from the Web pages, can be prohibited.
Operation Settings
Cancel Auto Clear Timer
This setting is used to disable Auto Clear.
Disabling of Job Priority Operation
The job priority function can be disabled. When this is
done, the [Priority] key will not appear in the job status
screen.
Disabling of Bypass Printing
This setting is used to disable bypass printing (printing
other jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped*
because the paper required for the job is not in any of
the trays).
* This does not include cases where the paper ran out
during the job.
Disable Auto Key Repeat
This setting is used to disable the auto key repeat
function.
Disabling of Clock Adjustment
This setting is used to prohibit changing of the date and
time.
Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
This setting is used to prohibit the use of the covers and
inserts function.
Device Control
Disabling of Document Feeder
Use this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic
document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions.
(When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible
using the document glass.)
Disabling of Duplex
This is used to disable two-sided printing, such as when
the duplex module malfunctions.
Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette
(When a large capacity tray is installed.)
This setting is used to prohibit the use of the large
capacity tray, such as when it malfunctions.
Disabling of Tray Setting
This setting is used to prohibit tray settings.
Disabling of Finisher
(When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.)
This setting is used to disable the saddle stitch finisher
or finisher, such as when the unit malfunctions.
Disabling of Inserter
(When an inserter is installed)
This setting is used to prohibit the use of the inserter,
such as when it malfunctions.
Disabling of Offset
(When a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
This setting is used to disable the offset function.
Disabling of Stapler
(When a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
This setting is used to prohibit stapling, such as when
the stapler unit of the finisher or the saddle stitch finisher
malfunctions.
Disabling of Punch
(When a punch module is installed.)
This setting is used to prohibit punching, such as when
the punch module of the finisher or the saddle stitch
finisher malfunctions.
The Enable/Disable Settings control the same parameters as the enable/disable settings in other settings. The settings are
linked together (changing one setting changes the other).
88
Disabling of Color Mode
(When a color-related problem has occurred.)
When a color-related problem has occurred and printing
is not possible, the use of color mode can be temporarily
prohibited. Black & white printing will still be allowed.
Disabling of Master Machine Mode
This prohibits the use of the machine as a master
machine for tandem printing.
(Normally this setting is not necessary.)
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
This prohibits the use of the machine as a slave machine
for tandem printing.
(Normally this setting is not necessary.)
Copy Function Settings
Disabling Deletion of Job Programs
This is used to prohibit the deletion and changing of copy
settings stored in job programs.
Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy
This is used to prohibit the use of the bypass tray when
making two-sided copies.
The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets,
transparency film, and other special media for which
two-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of one of these
special media enters the reversing unit, a misfeed or
damage to the unit may result. If special media for which
two-sided copying is prohibited is often used, it is
recommended that you enable this setting.
Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
This setting is used to disable the Auto Paper Selection
function.
When this setting is enabled, automatic selection of
paper that is the same size as the original on the
document glass or in the automatic document feeder
does not take place.
Printer Settings
Prohibit Notice Page Printing
This setting is used to disable printing of notice pages.
Prohibit Test Page Printing
This setting is used to disable printing of test pages.
When this setting is enabled, "Printer Test Page" in the
system settings cannot be used to print test pages.
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [Auto] is selected for paper type selection, the
bypass tray can be excluded from the trays that can be
selected. This is recommended when special paper is
often placed in the bypass tray.
Image Send Settings
Other Disabling
Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to prohibit changes to the order of display
(search number order, ascending, descending) in the
address book.
When this setting is enabled, touching a tab on the
address book screen does not change the order. The
currently selected display order will be the order that is
used after the setting is selected.
Disable Scan Function
This is used to disable PC scan and USB memory scan.
When these modes are disabled, they are grayed out
when the mode is changed in the base screen.
Settings to Disable Registration
Disable Registering Destination from Operation
Panel
This disables address control from the machine.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
•Group
• E-mail
• Internet Fax
•Fax
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
This function is only for use as an emergency
measure. Once this setting is enabled, only a service
technician can cancel the setting. Promptly contact
your dealer or nearest SHARP service department to
have a service technician cancel the setting and
resolve the color-related problem.
89
Disable Registering Destination on Web Page
(When network connection is enabled.)
This disables address control from the Web pages.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
•Group
•E-mail
• FTP
•Desktop
• Network Folder
• Internet Fax
•Fax
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Disable Registration Using Network Scanner Tools
(When network connection is enabled.)
This disables address control from the Network Scanner
Tool.
Settings to Disable Transmission
These settings are used to disable the following
transmission operations.
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode
This setting disables the [Resend] key in the base
screen of image send mode.
Disable Selection from Address Book
This disables the selection of destinations from the
address book.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
•E-mail
• FTP
•Desktop
• Network Folder
• Internet Fax
•Fax
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Disable Direct Entry
This prohibits the direct entry of addresses.
Configure the setting for each of the following items:
•E-mail
• Internet Fax
•Fax
Select All: Select all items.
Clear Checked: Clear all selections.
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission
(When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.)
This prohibits PC-I-Fax transmission.
Disable PC-Fax Transmission
(When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.)
This prohibits PC-Fax transmission.
Document Filing Settings
Disable Stamp for Reprinting
When a stored file is retrieved and printed, this setting
prohibits the selection of a "Stamp" setting in the special
modes. If a stamp setting is already selected, it will not
be possible to change the stamp setting.
This function can be used to prevent inconsistencies in
the printed information, such as that of the original date
in the file and the date the file is retrieved and printed.
Batch Print Settings
When printing files by batch printing, this setting is used
to prohibit the selection of the [All Users] key and the
[User Unknown] key in the user selection screen.
90
Change Administrator Password
This is used to change the administrator password. Touch the [Change Administrator Password] key to change the
password.
When changing the password, be sure to remember the new password.
It is recommended that you periodically change the administrator password.
Password
Enter the new administrator password (5 to 32 characters).
Password (confirmation)
Enter the new password once again for confirmation purposes.
For the factory default administrator password, see "TO THE ADMINISTRATOR OF THE MACHINE" in the Safety Guide.
91
Product Key
The procedures for entering the product keys of the expansion kits are explained below. Touch the [Product Key] key to
configure the settings.
PS3 Expansion Kit
Enter the product key of the PS expansion kit.
Internet Fax Expansion Kit
Enter the product key of the Internet fax expansion kit.
E-mail Alert and Status
Enter the product key of e-mail alert and status.
Application Integration Module
Enter the product key of the application integration
module.
Serial Number
This displays the serial number that is required to obtain
the product key.
• It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed.
• For the product key to be entered, contact your dealer.
When the fax function is enabled, this is displayed as
"E-mail Status".
92
Initialize and/or Store Settings
The current system settings can be stored, previously stored system settings can be retrieved, and the factory default
system settings can be restored. Touch the [Initialize and/or Store Settings] key to configure the settings.
Restore Factory Defaults
This is used to return the system settings to the factory
default settings. If you wish to create a record of the
current settings before restoring the factory default
settings, print the current settings using "List Print
(Administrator)" (page 85) in the system settings
(administrator).
Store Current Configuration
This is used to store the currently configured system
settings. The stored settings will be retained even if the
[POWER] key ( ) is turned off. To retrieve the stored
settings, use "Restore Configuration" below.
Items not stored
• Network Settings: These are not stored as unexpected
settings may cause damage to the
network.
• Product Keys: Product Keys are not stored as
reissue of keys may be necessary.
Restore Configuration
Use this to restore settings stored with "Store Current
Configuration".
The current settings will change to the retrieved settings.
After executing the reset, exit the system settings, turn
off the [POWER] key ( ), wait a brief interval, and
then turn the [POWER] key ( ) back on to make
the factory default settings take effect.
93
This chapter explains system settings that are specifically for the fax function.
The system settings for the fax function can only be configured when the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
System Settings for Fax (General) List
When the system settings for fax are accessed with general rights, the following items appear. For items that can only
be accessed with administrator rights, see "System Settings for Fax (Administrator) List" (page 99).
■ Address Control
■ Fax Data Receive/Forward
* When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
4
SYSTEM SETTINGS FOR FAX
Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Address Control
94
● Address Book – 94
● F-Code Memory Box – 96
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Fax Data Receive/Forward
98
● Fax Settings
98
X Receive Setting Auto Reception
X Multiple Set Print Disabled
X Staple* Disabled
X Forward Received Data –
94
Address Control
Address Book
This section explains items specifically used for fax in "Address Control". For items that are also used for other
functions, see "Address Control" (page 19).
When the [Address Book] key is touched, the following screen appears.
• [Add] key
Use this to add a new address.
• List display
This displays a list of the currently stored addresses.
An address can be selected to open an edit/delete
screen for the address.
Storing addresses
Touch the [Add] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. Up to 999 addresses can be stored.
For information on the settings, see "Settings" (page 95).
Editing and deleting addresses
An address can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the address.
For information on the settings, see "Settings" (page 95).
Delete an address with the [Delete] key.
Address Book
AAA AAA
Freq.
Sort
ABC All UP
2
1
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
Back
Add
CCC CCC
EEE EEE
GGG GGG
III III
BBB BBB
DDD DDD
FFF FFF
HHH HHH
JJJ JJJ
When "Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel" (page 74) is enabled in the system settings (administrator) for
a function, addresses cannot be stored for that function.
• If you cannot edit or delete a one-touch individual or group key...
Individual keys and group keys cannot be edited or deleted in the following situations:
• The key is used in a reserved transmission or a transmission in progress.
• The key is included in a group key.
• The key is included in a program.
• The key is specified as an end receiving machine in an F-code relay broadcast transmission.
• The key is specified as a forwarding destination in the "Inbound Routing Settings" or other settings.
If the key is used in a reserved transmission or a transmission that is in progress, cancel the transmission or wait until it is
completed and then edit or delete the key.
If the key is included in a group, first delete the key from the group and then edit or delete the key.
If the key is specified as a forwarding destination, cancel the forwarding destination setting and then edit or delete the key.
95
Settings
Item Description
General items stored
Address Type
Select the type of address to be stored in the address book.
In this case, select [Fax].
Search Number
Set a search number. The lowest available number is automatically entered. To
change the number, enter a number from 001 to 999. A search number that has
already been stored cannot be used.
Address Name Enter a maximum of 36 characters for the address name.
Initial
Enter up to 5 characters for the initials. The initials you enter here determine the
position of the one-touch key in the alphabetical index.
Key Name
Enter the name that you wish to appear in the address book (this is different from
the address name).
Custom Index Select the custom index in which the address will appear.
Register this Address to be added to the
[Frequent Use] index.
Frequently used addresses can be stored in the [Frequent Use] index.
Fax Number
Enter the fax number of the destination (maximum of 64 digits).
To cancel the PBX settings temporarily when sending a fax...
Touch the [R] key before entering a fax number.
Entering a pause between digits of the number
Touch the [-] key at the place where you wish to enter a pause.
To enter an F-code (sub-address and passcode)...
(1) Enter the destination fax number.
(2) Touch the [/] key.
(3) Enter the sub address (maximum of 20 digits).
(4) Touch the [/] key.
(5) Enter the passcode (maximum of 20 digits).
A passcode is not necessary if the destination machine does not use a
passcode.
The destination fax number can be a maximum of 64 digits including all numbers
and characters. However, only the first 32 digits will appear in the display.
Transmission Mode
Set the transmission speed and the International Correspondence Mode.
Selecting appropriate settings for these items may help eliminate communication
errors.
Transmission Speed
33.6 kbps, 14.4 kbps, 9.6 kbps or 4.8 kbps can be selected for the transmission
speed. Higher numbers are higher transmission speeds.
Set the transmission speed only when you know what speed is most suitable,
such as when you are sending a fax to a foreign country and telephone line
conditions are bad. If you do not know the line conditions, do not change this
setting.
Transmission Mode
No Sound, Mode1, Mode2, or Mode3 can be selected for the International
Correspondence Mode.
When sending a fax to a foreign country, telephone line conditions can sometimes
distort the fax or interrupt the transmission. If errors frequently occur when
sending a fax to a foreign country, try each of modes 1 to 3 and select the mode
that enables the best transmission.
96
F-Code Memory Box
This section explains how to store memory boxes for various types of F-code communication.
When the [F-Code Memory Box] key is touched, the following screen appears.
• [Add] key
Use this to add a new memory box.
• List display
This displays a list of the currently stored memory
boxes. A memory box can be selected to open an
edit/delete screen for the memory box.
Storing a memory box
Touch the [Add] key in the above screen to open a registration screen. A total of 100 F-code memory boxes for all
functions (polling memory, confidential, and relay broadcast) can be stored.
For information on the settings, see "Settings" (page 97).
Editing and deleting a memory box
A memory box can be selected from the list in the above screen to open an edit/delete screen for the box.
For information on the settings, see "Settings" (page 97).
Delete a memory box with the [Delete] key.
System Settings
F-Code Memory Box
Box 3
Box 1
Sort
Polling Memory
Back
Add
Box 5
Box 7
Box 9
Box 2
Box 4
Box 6
Box 8
Box 10
2
1
97
Settings
Item Description
Items common to all types
Box Type
Select the type of box.
• Polling Memory: Store a memory box for F-code polling memory. The
sub-address and passcode that you program in the memory
box are necessary for the other machine to poll your machine
(request transmission) using F-code communication.
• Confidential: Store a memory box for F-code confidential reception. In
addition, store a "Print PIN" in the memory box to print faxes
received by confidential reception. The sub-address and
passcode that you program in the memory box are necessary
for the other machine to send a fax to your machine by
F-code confidential transmission.
• Relay Broadcast: Store a memory box for F-code relay broadcast transmission.
Store the fax numbers of the end recipients (up to 30) in the
memory box. The sub-address and passcode that you
program in the memory box are necessary for the other
machine to perform an F-code relay request transmission
(ask your machine to relay a fax).
Memory Box Name Enter a name (maximum of 18 characters) for the memory box.
Sub Address / Passcode
Enter a sub-address and passcode. A maximum of 20 digits can be entered for
each.
Separate a sub-address and passcode by a slash ("/").
Items displayed when storing a confidential memory box
Print PIN Set a "Print PIN" for confidential reception. Enter a 4-digit number.
Items displayed when storing a relay broadcast memory box
Recipients
Select the end recipients of the relay broadcast. Select the recipients from the
address book.
• Address Review: This displays a list of the selected recipients. Addresses can
be deleted from this list if needed.
• Direct Entry: An address that is not stored in the address book can be
directly entered. Enter the address in the same way as when
storing an address for a mode.
• When programming a new memory box, a sub-address that is already programmed for another box cannot be used.
However, the same passcode can be used for more than one memory box.
• A passcode can be omitted.
• [ ] and [#] cannot be used in a sub-address.
• Do not forget the Print PIN. In the event that you forget the Print PIN or need to verify the Print PIN, contact your SHARP
dealer or nearest SHARP customer service center.
98
Fax Data Receive/Forward
This section explains settings for reception and forwarding.
Fax Settings
The following items appear when the "Fax Settings" are configured.
Item Description
Receive Setting
Set the fax reception method.
• Auto Reception: When a call comes in, the machine rings and then
automatically begins fax reception.
• Manual Reception: This can be used when an existing extension phone is
connected to the machine. Fax reception is begun by
manual operation after answering on the extension phone.
Multiple Set Print
Specify whether or not two or more copies of received faxes will be printed. The
number of copies is set in "Fax Output Settings", (page 105).
Staple
Specify whether or not stapling is performed. (Only when a finisher is installed.)
Stapling settings are set in "Fax Output Settings", (page 105).
Forward Received Data
When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received
faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine.
• If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be
forwarded.
• A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was
canceled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.
• All faxes received are forwarded. Note, however, that faxes received to an F-code confidential memory box cannot be
forwarded.
• To store a forwarding fax number, see "Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding" (page 105) in the system settings
(administrator).
• Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed.
•If "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" (page 74) is enabled, you will be prompted to enter a password. Enter the correct
password with the numeric keys.
99
System Settings for Fax (Administrator) List
When the system settings for fax are accessed with administrator rights, the following items appear. For information on
the general settings, see "System Settings for Fax (General) List" (page 93).
■ Image Send Settings
•
For the procedure for using the system settings (administrator), see "Accessing the System Settings (Administrator)" (page 29).
• Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings.
Item Factory default setting Page
■ Image Send Settings
101
● Fax Settings 101
X Fax Default Settings 101
Fax Own Name and Number Set – 101
Dial Mode Setting Tone 101
Auto Wake Up Print Enabled 101
Pause Time Setting 2 sec. 101
Speaker Settings
101
• Speaker Volume: Middle
• Ringer Volume Volume: Middle
• Line Monitor Volume: Middle
• Fax Receive Complete Signal Volume: Middle; Tone Pattern: 3
Transmission Complete Sound Time
Setting: 3 sec.
• Fax Send Complete Signal Volume: Middle; Tone Pattern: 3
Transmission Complete Sound Time
Setting: 3 sec.
• Fax Communication Error Signal Volume: Middle; Tone Pattern: 3
Transmission Complete Sound Time
Setting: 0.3 sec. each
• Speaker Volume Details Setting Speaker / Line Monitor
Small: 3, Middle: 6, Big: 8
Ringer Volume / Reception End
Signal / Transmission End Signal /
Fax Communication Error Signal
Small: 2, Middle: 4, Big: 8
Remote Reception Number Setting 5 101
Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Report Only 102
100
Transaction Report Print Select Setting
102
• Single Sending Print Out Error Report Only
• Broadcasting Print Out All Report
• Receiving No Printed Report
• Confidential Reception Print Out Notice Page
Activity Report Print Select Setting
102• Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled
• Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled
ECM Enabled 102
Distinctive Ring Detection Off 102
X Fax Send Settings 103
Auto Reduction Sending Setting Enabled 103
Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled 103
Quick On Line Sending Enabled 103
Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled 103
Date/Own Number Print Position Setting Outside the Original Image 103
Recall in Case of Line Busy Recall, Number of Times: 2, Interval:
3 min.
103
Recall in Case of Communication Error Recall, Number of Times: 1, Interval:
3 min.
103
X Registration of Own Name Select – 104
X Fax Receive Settings 104
Number of Calls in Auto Reception 2 104
Duplex Reception Setting Disabled 104
Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled 104
Print Style Setting Auto Size Select 105
Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding – 105
A3 RX Reduce Disabled 105
Fax Output Settings Varies depending on the machine
configuration
105
X Anti Junk Fax Setting Disabled 105
X Fax Polling Security Enabled 106
Item Factory default setting Page
101
Image Send Settings
Settings related to the image send function (scan, Internet fax, etc.) can be configured. Touch the [Image Send Settings]
key to configure the settings.
Fax Settings
The fax settings can be enabled or disabled to suit the
needs of your workplace.
Fax Own Name and Number Set
Use this setting to enter the fax number of the machine
and the name of the user. The entered name and
number are printed at the top of each fax page you send.
Sender Name
Enter the sender name. A maximum of 20 characters
can be entered for the sender name.
Fax No.
This is used to set the sender fax number.
To insert a pause between digits of the number, touch
the [-] key.
To insert a space between digits of the number, touch
the [Space] key.
Dial Mode Setting
Select the appropriate setting for your telephone line
type.
Dial Mode Setting
Select the line type from the list.
Auto Select
Select this after the line has been connected to have the
machine automatically detect whether your line is a
pulse dial line or a tone dial line.
Auto Wake Up Print
When the [POWER] key ( ) is "off" (but the main
power switch is "on") and a fax is received, this function
automatically activates the machine and prints the fax.
When this function is disabled, received faxes are not
printed until the the [POWER] key ( ) is switched
"on".
Pause Time Setting
Use this to change the length of pauses inserted in fax
numbers.
If a hyphen "-" is entered when dialing or storing a fax
number, a pause of 2 seconds is inserted.
The pause can be changed to any number of seconds
from 1 to 15.
Speaker Settings
Use these settings to set the sound heard from the
speaker for the Speaker, Ringer Volume, Line Monitor,
Fax Receive Complete Signal, Fax Send Complete
Signal, and Fax Communication Error Signal. For the
Fax Receive Complete Signal, the Fax Send Complete
Signal, and the Fax Communication Error Signal, the
Tone Pattern and Transmission Complete Sound Time
Setting can be selected in addition to the volume.
Check on Setup Sounds
Use this to check the selected tone pattern and volume.
Remote Reception Number Setting
Fax reception can be activated from an extension phone
connected to the machine by entering a 1-digit number
and pressing the key twice on the phone's keypad.
This number is called the remote reception number, and
you can set it to any number from "0" to "9".
Fax Default Settings
102
Original Print on Transaction
Report
When a transaction report is printed for a memory
transmission, this is used to print part of the first page of
the transmitted original on the transaction report. Select
one of the settings below.
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
This setting will not be effective if "Transaction Report
Print Select Setting" below is set to "No Printed Report".
Transaction Report Print Select
Setting
This is used to select whether or not a transaction report
will be printed, and if printed, the condition for being
printed. Select a setting for each of the following
operations:
Single Sending
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
Broadcasting
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
Receiving
• Print Out All Report
• Print Out Error Report Only
• No Printed Report
Confidential Reception
• Print Out Notice Page
• No Printed Report
When a transaction report is printed, you can have part
of the first page of the transmitted original printed on the
transaction report. For more information, see "Original
Print on Transaction Report".
Activity Report Print Select Setting
This is used to have the Image Sending Activity Report
that is stored in the machine's memory printed at regular
intervals.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to
automatically print each time the number of transactions
reaches 200, and it can also be set to automatically print
at a specified time (once a day only). (The settings can
be simultaneously enabled.)
ECM
Line conditions can sometimes distort a transmitted fax
image. When ECM (Error Correction Mode) is turned on,
pages that are distorted are automatically re-transmitted.
Distinctive Ring Detection
If multiple telephone numbers have been assigned to
your telephone line, the number called can be identified
by its ringing pattern. By using one number for voice
calls and another number for faxes, you can tell which
type of call you are receiving by the ringing pattern. You
can set your machine to automatically receive faxes
when your fax number is called by setting the pattern
that corresponds to your fax number. Six selections are
available.
• If you only select the "Print Daily at Designated
Time" setting and the number of recorded
transactions exceeds 200 before the specified time,
each new transaction will delete the oldest
transaction (the oldest transaction will not be
printed).
• The Image Sending Activity Report can also be
printed manually. See "List Print (Administrator)"
(page 85).
If the other machine supports Super G3, ECM will
function regardless of this setting.
103
Settings for fax transmission can be configured.
Auto Reduction Sending Setting
This setting is used to have the size of transmitted faxes
automatically reduced to match the size of the paper in
the receiving machine.
If the setting is disabled, faxes are sent at full size.
Because the size is not adjusted to match the size of the
printing paper, part of the received fax may be cut off.
Rotation Sending Setting
When transmitting an image that is one of the following
sizes, this function rotates the image counterclockwise
90 degrees. (The setting can be configured separately
for each size.)
8-1/2"x11", 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, A4, B5R, A5R, 16K
Quick On Line Sending
When this setting is enabled, the machine starts
transmitting a fax as soon as the first page is scanned.
Transmission takes place at the same time as the
remaining pages are being scanned.
If you disable this setting, transmission will not begin
until all pages have been scanned. Note that this setting
does not apply to manual transmission.
Printing Page Number at Receiver
This setting is used to add the page number to the top of
each fax page printed by the receiving machine.
Date/Own Number Print Position
Setting
This setting determines the position of the date and sender
information printed at the top of faxes by the receiving
machine. To have the information printed outside the
transmitted document image, touch the [Outside the
Original Image] key. To have the information printed inside
the document image, touch [Inside the Original Image] key.
For more information on the print position, see "ADDING
YOUR SENDER INFORMATION TO FAXES (Own
number sending)" in the Facsimile Guide.
Recall in Case of Line Busy
This program is used to set the number of recall
attempts and the interval between recall attempts when
a transmission is not successful due to the line being
busy or other reason.
Number of Times to Recall When Line is Busy
This setting specifies whether or not recalling is
performed when the line is busy. When recalling is
performed, you can set the number of recall attempts.
Any number from 1 to 14 can be selected.
Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.)
When Line is Busy
The interval between recall attempts can be set. Any
number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.
Recall in Case of Communication Error
This determines how many times your machine will
automatically re-attempt the call if a fax transmission
fails due to a communication error.
Number of Times to Recall in Case of Error
Specify how many times the machine will re-attempt the
call when a communication error occurs.
Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) in
Case of Error
The interval between recall attempts can be set. Any
number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.
Fax Send Settings
8-1/2" x 11"R and A4R originals are not rotated.
Even when this setting is enabled, note that your
machine will not re-attempt a call when manual
transmission or direct transmission is used.
Even when this setting is enabled, note that your
machine will not re-attempt a call when manual
transmission or direct transmission is used.
104
This is used to store sender names used in "Own
Number Select". A maximum of 18 names can be stored.
Add New
Store a sender name. A maximum of 20 characters can
be entered for the sender name. Control numbers are
from 01 to 18. The lowest number not yet in use is
automatically assigned when you begin the storing
procedure. This number cannot be changed.
Sender Name List
This shows the currently stored sender names.
A sender name can be selected to delete it.
Settings for fax reception can be configured.
Number of Calls in Auto Reception
This setting is used to select the number of rings on
which the machine automatically receives a call and
begins fax reception in auto reception mode. Any
number from 0 to 15 can be selected.
Duplex Reception Setting
This is used to have received faxes printed on both sides
of the paper.
When this setting is enabled and a fax consisting of 2 or
more pages is received (the pages must be the same
size), the pages are printed on both sides of the paper.
Auto Receive Reduce Setting
When a fax is received that includes the sender's name
and number, the received image is slightly larger than
the standard size. This setting is used to automatically
reduce the image to fit the standard size.
Registration of Own Name
Select
Fax Receive Settings
If you select "0" for the number of rings, the machine
will immediately answer and begin fax reception
without ringing in auto reception mode.
• If Auto Receive Reduce is disabled, the edges of
the image outside the standard size will be cut off.
However, the image will be clearer because it will
be printed at the same size as the original.
• Standard sizes are sizes such as 8-1/2" x 11" and
8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (A4 and B5).
105
Print Style Setting
This setting determines the paper selection condition
when printing received faxes. Select one of the three
conditions below.
Print Actual Size Cut off Disabled
The received fax image is printed at full size without
dividing it onto multiple sheets of paper. If the same size
of paper or larger paper is not loaded, the fax will be
received in memory and will not be printed until a
suitable size of paper is loaded.
However, if the received fax is longer than 11" x 17" (A3)
size, it will be automatically divided onto multiple sheets
of paper.
Print Actual Size Cut off Enabled
Each received image is printed at full size. If necessary,
the image is divided onto multiple sheets of paper.
Auto Size Select
Each received image is printed at full size when
possible. When not possible, the image is automatically
reduced before printing.
Set the Telephone Number for Data
Forwarding
When a problem prevents the machine from printing a
received fax, the received fax can be forwarded to
another fax machine. This setting is used to program the
fax number of the destination fax machine. Only one
forwarding fax number can be programmed (maximum
of 64 digits).
To insert a pause between digits of the number, touch
the [-] key.
If you wish to specify an F-code confidential memory box
in the destination machine, touch the [/] key after
entering the fax number and enter the F-code
(sub-address and passcode).
A3 RX Reduce
When an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces
the fax to W letter size.
Fax Output Settings
These settings are used to select the number of copies
and output tray for received faxes. When a finisher is
installed, the finisher tray can be selected as the output
tray and stapling can be selected.
Output tray
Select the output tray for received faxes.
Number of Prints
Set the number of copies of received faxes that are
printed.
Staple Settings
When a finisher is installed, set the position at which
received faxes are stapled.
Paper Size
When a finisher is installed, select the paper used for
printing of received faxes.
This setting is used to block fax reception from specified
fax numbers (anti junk fax numbers).
Up to 50 anti junk fax numbers can be stored.
Add New
Add a new anti-junk fax number. When storing an
anti-junk number, a maximum of 20 digits can be
entered.
Number Key List
This shows a list of the stored anti-junk numbers.
An anti-junk number can be selected to delete it.
When this setting is enabled, W letter size faxes are
also reduced.
• This setting can only be used when the [Multiple Set
Print] and [Staple] checkboxes are selected in
"Fax Settings" (page 98).
• The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled
is 50. (When the paper is oriented horizontally, the
maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is
30.)
Anti Junk Fax Setting
106
The following settings are for regular polling memory
using the Public Box.
Set Fax Polling Security
When the memory polling function is used, this setting
determines whether any machine will be allowed to poll
your machine, or only machines that have been stored in
your machine.
Add New
When the Polling Security Setting is enabled, use this
setting to store (or delete) the fax numbers of the
machines that are allowed to poll your machine. The
stored fax numbers are called passcode numbers. Up to
10 passcode numbers can be stored (maximum of 20
digits each).
Passcode Number Key List
This shows a list of the stored passcode numbers. A
number can be selected to delete it.
Fax Polling Security
Note that these settings do not apply to F-code polling
memory.
MX7000-US-SYS-Z2
System Settings Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
Document Filing Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
• MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE . . . 4
1
DOCUMENT FILING
OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
• TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
• USES OF DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
• BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . 7
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING
DOCUMENT FILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
• USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE . . 10
BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE . . . 12
2
SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT
FILING
SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SAVING A FILE WITH "File" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• FILE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to
HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
• "Scan to HDD" SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
• PERFORMING "Scan to HDD". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3
USING STORED FILES
SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE. . . . . . . . 25
FOLDER AND FILE SELECTION SCREENS . . . . . . 27
• FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
• FILE SELECTION SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
SELECTING A FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
• JOB SETTINGS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
PRINTING A STORED FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
• PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
• BATCH PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SENDING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
• SEND SETTINGS SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
• FILE PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
• CHANGING THE PROPERTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
MOVING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DELETING A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Please note
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.
Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
The explanations in this manual assume that a saddle stitch finisher, punch module, and inserter are installed on the machine.
For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.
Scope of the explanations in this manual
• The explanations of the document filing function assume that the user is already familiar with copy mode, and the other modes
of the machine.
This manual does not contain detailed explanations of the other modes that are used in conjunction with the document filing function.
If you have any questions regarding one of the other modes, see the manual for that mode.
• To further explain certain functions and uses, some explanations assume that additional peripheral devices (Internet fax
expansion kit etc.) are installed.
• The function that cannot be used according to the state of the installation of the peripheral devices is provided.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
4
MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE
Printed manuals and manuals stored in PDF format on the machine's hard drive are provided with the machine. When
using the machine, read the appropriate manual for the feature you are using.
Printed manuals
Operation manuals in PDF format
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "How to download the manuals in PDF format" in the Quick Start Guide.
Icons used in the manuals
The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:
Manual name Contents
Safety Guide This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely and lists the specifications of the machine
and its peripheral devices.
Software Setup
Guide
This manual explains how to install the software and configure settings to use the machine as a printer
or scanner.
Quick Start Guide This manual provides easy-to-understand explanations of all the functions of the machine in a single
volume.
Detailed explanations of each of the functions can be found in the manuals in PDF format.
Troubleshooting This manual explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked
questions regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you have
difficulty using the machine.
Manual name Contents
User's Guide This manual provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and machine
maintenance.
Copier Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
Printer Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the printer function.
Facsimile Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
Scanner Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the
Internet fax function.
Document Filing
Guide (this
manual)
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The
document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive. The file can be called up as needed.
System Settings
Guide
This manual explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit
the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out from the
"System Settings".
This alerts you to a situation where there is a
risk of machine damage or failure.
This indicates the name of a system setting and provides a
brief explanation of the setting.
For detailed information on each system setting, see the
System Settings Guide.
When "System Settings:" appears:
A general setting is explained.
When "System Settings (Administrator):" appears:
A setting that can only be configured by an administrator is
explained.
This provides a supplemental explanation of a
function or procedure.
This explains how to cancel or correct an
operation.
5
This chapter provides information that you should know before using the document filing function, including an overview
of document filing, the features and functions of document filing, and points to keep in mind when using document filing.
OVERVIEW
The document filing function allows you to save the document image of a copy or image send job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive.
The stored file can be retrieved and printed or transmitted as needed.
TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING
There are three ways to save a file using document filing: "Quick File", "File", and "Scan to HDD".
1
DOCUMENT FILING
Quick File
As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Use this function when you want to quickly and easily store document data without specifying a
file name or other information.
The stored file can also be used by other people. Do not use this method to save files that you do not
want others to use, such as files containing sensitive or confidential information.
File
As a copy, scan send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard
drive. Unlike Quick File, various types of information can be appended to the file when the file is saved
to enable efficient file management.
A password can also be established to prevent the file from being retrieved up by others.
Scan to HDD
This function scans a document and stores it as a file. Like File, various types of information can be
appended to the file when it is stored.
Print
Hard drive
Int
e
rn
e
t F
ax
F
ax
S
can to HD
D
Send
Cop
y
Prin
t
S
ca
n
Hard drive
Saving a file Retrieving and using a stored file
A stored file can be printed. A stored file can also be
sent as a fax or sent to another computer over a
network. A stored file can also be kept for archive
purposes.
Document information used in any of the modes
is saved to the hard drive as a file.
6
USES OF DOCUMENT FILING
Quickly using a file
Example: You prepared handouts consisting of numerous pages for a meeting, however, another handout is
needed for a newly added participant.
As shown in the example, storing a job with the document filing function frees you of the need to rescan the original and
select settings, saving considerable time.
Convenient for managing frequently used documents
Example: Managing a large number of business forms
Application forms, report forms, and other business forms can be stored on the hard drive for easy retrieval, letting you
print the number of copies you need when you need them.
The handout was not saved using document filing The handout was saved using document filing
Not likely to be completed in time for the meeting... Printing is accomplished quickly and the handout is ready in
time for the meeting!
Copy settings must be reselected and the original must be
rescanned.
As indicated above, to obtain another set of output, the
settings must be selected all over again. If you don't remember
the settings, much effort may be expended to get the same
output result as the previous time.
By retrieving a job stored using document filing, there is no
need to reselect copy settings or rescan the original.
The job can be retrieved and printed using the same settings
quickly and easily.
Ratio, color mode, and special mode
settings must be reselected.
The numerous original pages must all be
rescanned.
The stored file is simply retrieved and
printed.
Paid holiday forms?
Daily report forms?
Business trip forms
?
Main Folder
File Name
Paid holiday forms Name 1 04/01/2006
Daily report forms Name 1 04/01/2006
Business trip forms Name 1 04/01/2006
Daily report forms
Name 1
04/01/2006
Daily report forms
Name 1
04/01/2006
User Name Date
All Files Filter by Job
1
2
BackSearch
Batch Print
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access
Not using document filing
It takes time to find the form you need.
Using document filing
The required form can be easily retrieved from the
document filing list,
and document management is much more efficient.
7
BEFORE USING DOCUMENT FILING
This section provides information that you should know before using the document filing function.
Folders
Three types of folders are used to store files by document filing.
Quick File Folder
Documents scanned using the [Quick File] key are stored in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically
assigned to each job.
Main Folder
Documents scanned using the [File] key are stored in this folder.
When you store a job in the Main folder, you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name.
A password can also be set when storing a file ([Confidential] save).
Custom Folder
Folders with custom names can be created inside this folder.
When a document is scanned using the [File] key and a folder is selected, the document is stored in the specified folder.
Like the Main folder, a custom folder allows you to specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name when storing a job.
Passwords can be established for custom folders and for files saved in custom folders.
Items convenient to store
When storing a job using "File" or "Scan to HDD", it is convenient to store the items below. These settings are not
needed when storing a job using "Quick File".
A maximum of 500 custom folders can be created on the hard drive.
User Name
This is necessary if you will be assigning a user name to stored files. User names are stored in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator). A user name is also used as a search condition when searching for a file.
Custom Folder
The Main folder is initially available as a location for storing files by "File" and "Scan to HDD". When
custom folders have been created using "Document Filing Control" in the system settings
(administrator), a custom folder can be specified as a location for storing files. A password can also be
established for a custom folder to restrict access to the folder.
My Folder
"My Folder" is specified using "User List" in the system settings (administrator). A previously created
custom folder can be selected as "My Folder", or a new folder created as "My Folder". When "My
Folder" has been configured and user authentication is used, "My Folder" will always be selected as
the destination of "File" and "Scan to HDD".
System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store a user name and specify a folder as "My Folder".
System Settings: Document Filing Control
This is used to create custom folders for document filing. A password can also be established for a custom folder.
Folders on the hard drive
Quick File
Folder
Main Folder
Custom Folder
8
Approximate number of pages and files that can be stored by document
filing
Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom
folders and in the Main folder
Number of pages and number of files that can be stored in the Quick File folder
* The indicated numbers are guidelines for the number of pages that can be stored when all pages are full color, and
when all pages are black & white.
Copying in electrical sort mode uses the same memory area as the Quick File folder. For this reason, when too much
data has been stored in the Quick File folder, it may not be possible to perform a large copy job using electrical sort
mode. Delete unneeded files.
The original types above are examples to make the explanation easier to understand. The actual number of pages and
number of files that can be stored will vary depending on the contents of the original images.
Examples of original types Number of pages* Number of files
Full color
original
(Text and photo
example)
Size:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Max. 1200
Max. 3000
Black & white
original
(Text)
Size:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Max. 4200
Examples of original types Number of pages* Number of files
Full color
original
(Text and photo
example)
Size:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Max. 400
Max. 1000
Black & white
original
(Text)
Size:
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Max. 1400
9
Files
When a file is saved using "File", the following information can be appended.
Saving a file with this information allows you to distinguish it from other files.
User name: Use this to specify the owner of the file. The user name must first be stored in "User List" in the system
settings.
File Name: A file name can be entered.
Folder: Select which folder the file will be saved in.
Confidential: A password (5 to 8 digits) can be established to prevent others from using the file.
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING
Note the following when using document filing:
• Files saved using "Quick File" are assigned the "Sharing" property. "Sharing" files can be retrieved and printed or
transmitted by anyone, and thus Quick File should not be used to save sensitive or confidential documents that you do
not wish others to use.
• When saving a file with "File", use the "Confidential" property. A password can be set for a "Confidential" file to
prevent the file from being used by other people. Take care to keep the password of a stored "Confidential" file secret.
• The property of a stored "Confidential" file can be changed to "Sharing" by "Property Change" when the file is used.
Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others.
• Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the
leaking of sensitive information due to manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or
File function, or incorrect operation of the Quick File function or File function by the operator that saves the data.
The above information cannot be specified when a file is saved with Quick File.
System Settings (Administrator): User List
This is used to store user names.
"Meeting minutes" folder
User Name: Name 1
File Name: Meeting handout
Password: 12345678
10
USING DOCUMENT FILING IN EACH MODE
In copy or image send mode, the original can be saved as a file on the hard drive at the same time it is copied or
transmitted. In addition, Scan to HDD can be used to save the scanned data of an original to the hard drive without
copying or transmitting the data.
Copy mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is copied.
Image Send mode
Example: Base screen of scan mode
The original is saved as an image file at the same time it is scanned and transmitted.
(1) Touch the [COPY] key.
(2) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.
(1) Touch the [IMAGE SEND] key.
(2) Touch the [Scan] tab.
(3) Touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key.
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Ready to scan for copy.
Copy Ratio
100%
0
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
(1) (2)
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Resend
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
Ready to send.
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(3)
(1)(2)
11
Scan to HDD mode
The scanned original is saved as an image file. Neither printing nor transmission are performed when Scan to HDD is
used.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.
[File] key and [Quick File] key
The "File" key and/or "Quick File" key will not appear in the base screen of copy mode or image send mode if one or both of
the keys has been changed to a different function using "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu. In this case, touch
the [Special Modes] key in the base screen of either mode. Document filing can be performed by touching the [Quick File]
key or [File] key in the special modes menu.
Using document filing in print mode
To use document filing in print mode, select document filing in the printer driver. For more information on using document
filing in print mode, see "CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS" in the Printer Guide.
Using document filing in PC-Fax/PC-I-Fax mode
To use document filing in PC-Fax or PC-I-Fax mode, select document filing settings in the PC-Fax driver. For more
information, see Help in the PC-Fax driver.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
File
Information
Original
Exposure
Resolution
Comp. Ratio
Color Mode
Special Modes
200X200dpi
Medium
Auto Auto
Auto
Auto
Mono2
Text
Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.
Scan: Store:
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)(2)
12
BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING
MODE
Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of document filing mode.
Files stored on the hard drive in the machine can be retrieved from this screen.
When user authentication is used and My Folder is configured, the file selection screen of My Folder will appear.
If the user that logged in does not have My Folder configured, the folder selection screen will appear.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 27)
FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 28)
(1) Mode switch keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To switch to document filing mode, touch the
[DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) [File Retrieve] tab
Touch this tab to retrieve a file stored by document filing.
The folder selection screen will appear.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 27)
(3) [Scan to HDD] tab
Touch this key to select Scan to HDD. Neither printing
nor transmission are performed.
The file will be stored in the Main folder or a custom
folder.
☞ SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to HDD)
(page 20)
(4) [HDD Status] tab
Touch this key to check how much of the machine's hard
drive is being used.
The amount used is shown as a percentage.
(5) [External Data Access] tab
This can be selected when an FTP server is stored or a
USB memory device is connected to the machine.
☞ "DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE" in
the Printer Guide
(6) [Search] key
Touch this key to search for a file stored in a folder.
You can search using the user name, file name, or folder
name.
☞ SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE (page 43)
(7) When retrieving a stored file, use this to select the
folder where the file is stored.
☞ FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 27)
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Main Folder
User 1
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
Quick File Folder
Search
Folder Select
1
2
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(2)
HDD Status
Main Folder:10%
Custom Folder:40%
Quick File Folder:20%
Free Space:50%
Free Space:80%
0 25 50 75 100%
0 25 50 75 100%
13
This chapter explains how to save an original as an image file using the Quick File, File, and Scan to HDD functions of
document filing mode.
SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"
When copying, printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "Quick File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.
The image can retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the
original.
As an example, the procedure for storing a document in the Quick File folder while copying is explained below.
2
SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT
FILING
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
2
Touch the [Quick File] key.
3
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the [Quick
File] key will be highlighted.
To cancel Quick File...
Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted after you touch the [OK] key.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
OK
Scanned data is automatically stored
in the quick file folder. Do not store
confidential data to the folder.
14
4
Select copy settings and then press the
[COLOR START] key ( ) or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved
to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
• To prevent accidental saving of the document, the message
"The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears
for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [START] key is
pressed.
The message display time can be changed using "Message
Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder
tray, all pages are scanned.
• If you placed the original on the document glass, scan each
page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next
page and press the same [START] key that you pressed
initially.
Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then press
the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
When a file is stored using Quick File, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_04012006_112030AM)
Stored to: Quick File Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
Only the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File Folder can be changed.
To cancel Quick File...
Touch the [Quick File] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is no longer highlighted.
or
15
SAVING A FILE WITH "File"
When copying, printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, print mode, or image send mode (excluding USB
memory scan mode), "File" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Main folder or a previously created
custom folder. The image can retrieved at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to
locate the original.
As an example, the procedure for using "File" while copying is explained below.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
2
Touch the [File] key.
3
Select the "File" settings.
(1) Select file information settings.
To select the user name, file name, folder, and
confidential setting, see "FILE INFORMATION" (page 17).
• Specifying a user name: (page 17)
• Assigning a file name: (page 18)
• Specifying the folder: (page 18)
• Storing a file as a confidential file: (page 19)
After configuring the above settings, you will return to this
screen. Go to the next step.
If you do not wish to assign a user name or other
information to the file, go to the next step.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
[File] key will be highlighted.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
File Information
OKCancel
Confidential
User Name
User Unknown
Copy_04012006_112030AM
Main Folder
File Name
Stored to:
Password
(1) (2)
16
4
Select copy settings and then press the
[COLOR START] key ( ) or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
• Copying begins and the scanned document image is saved
to the hard drive.
The selected copy settings are also saved.
• For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of
"SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"" (page 13).
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
When a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: Copy_04012006_112030AM)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
To cancel the File operation...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
or
17
FILE INFORMATION
This section explains the settings that are configured in step 3 of "SAVING A FILE WITH "File"" (page 15). Specifying a
user name, file name, folder, and confidential setting makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when
confidential is selected and a password is established, other people will not be able to view the file without permission.
Specifying a user name
1
Touch the [User Name] key.
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used
for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not
needed.
The user name must be previously stored in "User List" in the system settings (administrator).
2
Touch the desired user name in the list
of user names that is displayed.
(1) Select the user name.
There are two ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch
the key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [---]
appears in the message display. Enter the
"Registration No." set during user registration. This
will allow you to select the user name.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
The user name that you touched is selected and you
return to the screen of step 1. The selected user name
appears.
File Information
OKCancel
Confidential
User Name
User Unknown
Copy_04012006_112030AM
Main Folder
File Name
Stored to:
Password
User Name
Cancel OK
6
18
ABC
User
Name 1
Name 3
Name 5
Name 7
Name 9
Name 11
Name 2
Name 4
Name 6
Name 8
Name 10
Name 12
1
2
All Users ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
12
(A) (2)
(B)
18
Assigning a file name
A file name can be assigned to the file.
Specifying the folder
Touch the [File Name] key.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch
the [OK] key.
A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
For the procedure for entering text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT"
in the User's Guide.
1
Touch the [Stored to:] key.
When user authentication is used, "My Folder" of the user that logged in is automatically selected. If the user that
logged in does not have "My Folder" configured, the Main folder will appear.
2
Select the folder in which you want to
store the file.
(1) Touch the key of the folder where you want
to store the file.
If a password has been set for the folder, a password
entry screen appears. Enter the password of the touched
folder with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and touch the
[OK] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
File Information
OKCancel
Confidential
User Name
User Unknown
Copy_04012006_112030AM
Main Folder
File Name
Stored to:
Password
File Information
OKCancel
Confidential
User Name
Name 1
file-01
Main Folder
File Name
Stored to:
Password
Main Folder
User 1
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
OK
Stored to:
1
2
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
(1) (2)
19
Storing a file as a confidential file
A password can be set for the file to prevent others from viewing it. Set a password (5 to 8 digits) with the numeric keys.
1
Enable the confidential property.
(1) Select the [Confidential] checkbox so that a
checkmark appears.
Confidential mode is enabled and a password can be
entered.
(2) Touch the [Password] key.
2
Enter a password (5 to 8 digits) with the
numeric keys and touch the [OK] key.
As each digit is entered, "-" changes to " ".
File Information
OKCancel
Confidential
User Name
Password
Name 1
file-01
User 1
File Name
Stored to:
(1) (2)
Password
Enter password via the 10-Key pad.
OKCancel
20
SAVING A DOCUMENT FILE ONLY (Scan to
HDD)
Scan to HDD is used to store a scanned document in the Main folder or a custom folder. Neither printing nor
transmission are performed.
"Scan to HDD" SCREEN
The following screen appears when the [Scan to HDD] tab is touched in document filing mode. Touch the keys below to
select Scan to HDD settings.
The current setting of each key appears to the right of the key.
(1) [File Information] key
Information can be appended to a file stored by Scan to
HDD. The settings are configured in the same way as file
information for "File".
☞ FILE INFORMATION (page 17)
(2) [Original] key
Touch this key to set the scanning size, storing size and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
☞ [Original] key (page 21)
(3) [Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
(4) [Resolution] key*
Use this to select the resolution that will be used when
the file is transmitted.
When "Long Size" is specified, only resolution settings of
300 X 300 dpi and under can be selected.
(5) [Comp. Ratio] key*
Use this to select the color compression ratio that will be
used when the file is transmitted in color.
(6) [Color Mode] key
Use this key to select the color mode when storing a
document.
☞ [Color Mode] key (page 22)
(7) [Special Modes] key
Use this key to select special modes for Scan to HDD.
☞ Special modes screen for Scan to HDD (page 23)
(8) key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.
* This specifies a default setting for transmission of a stored file. It is not a setting that affects the stored file itself.
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
File
Information
Original
Exposure
Resolution
Comp. Ratio
Color Mode
Special Modes
Scan:
200X200dpi
Medium
Auto
Store:
Text
Auto
Auto
Auto
Mono2
Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.
8½x11
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)
(7)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
21
[Original] key
When the [Original] key is touched, the following screen appears. This screen is used to change the original size and
select scanning settings for 2-sided originals.
(1) Touch the [Scan Size] key.
If the original is a non-standard size that cannot be detected by auto original size detection, touch the [Scan Size] key and specify the original size.
(2) Touch the [Store Size] key.
If you wish to store the file at a different size than the original size, touch the [Store Size] key and change the store size.
(3) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the key. If the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the key.
If the original is a 2-sided original, touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided Tablet] key as appropriate for the original type.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.
[Exposure] key
To adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key.
Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original and touch the or key to adjust the exposure level.
When finished, touch the [OK] key.
(1) Select the appropriate original type for the original to be scanned.
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the exposure modes [Printed Photo], [Photo], and [Map] do not appear.
(2) Select [Auto] or [Manual].
If you selected [Manual], touch the or key to adjust the exposure. (For a darker image, touch the key. For a
lighter image, touch the key.)
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the keys cannot be used.
(A): Moirè Reduction
To reduce the moirè effect when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moirè Reduction] checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
The settings are stored and you return to the Scan to HDD screen.
Scan to HDD/Original
OK
Scan Size Store Size100%
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
Auto 8½x11 Auto
Image Orientation
(3)
(1) (2) (4)
Original
Scan to HDD/Exposure
OK
Manual
1 3 5
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Photo
Text/Photo
Map
Text
Printed
Photo
Moiré
Reduction
Auto
Original Image Type
(1)(A)(2)
(3)
Exposure
22
[Color Mode] key
Touch the [Color Mode] key to open the color mode setting screen for Scan to HDD.
The following settings can be selected for the scanning color when the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key ( ) is pressed.
When you have finished selecting the mode, touch the [OK] key.
Start key Mode Scanning method
[COLOR START] key
Full Color
The original is scanned in full color. This mode is best for full color originals
such as catalogues.
Even when the original is black and white, it is scanned as a full color
original.
Auto
The machine detects whether the original is color or black and white and
automatically selects full color or black and white (grayscale) scanning.
2 Color
Only the red areas of the original are changed to the selected color;
colors other than red are scanned in black.
Red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow can be selected.
[BLACK & WHITE
START] key
Mono 2
Colors in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for
text-only originals.
Grayscale
The colors in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of gray
(grayscale).
Scan to HDD/Color Mode
OK
Full Color
2 Color
Auto
Mono2
Grayscale
Color Mode
B/W Mode
Colo
r M
ode
23
Special modes screen for Scan to HDD
When the [Special Modes] key is touched, the following screen appears. For more information on each setting, see "4.
SPECIAL MODES" in the Scanner Guide.
(1) [Erase] key
The erase function is used to erase shadow lines on
images produced when scanning thick originals or books
on the document glass.
(2) [Dual Page Scan] key
The left and right sides of an original can be scanned as
two separate pages. This function is useful when you
wish to successively scan each page of a book or other
bound document.
(3) [Card Shot] key
This function lets you store the front and reverse sides of
a card as a single file.
(4) [Job Build] key
This function lets you separate a many-page original into
sets, scan each set using the automatic document
feeder, and store all pages as a single file. Use this
function when there are more original pages than can be
placed at once in the auto document feeder.
(5) [Mixed Size Original] key
This feature lets you scan originals of different sizes at
the same time; for example, 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size
originals mixed together with 11" x 17" (A3) size
originals. When scanning the originals, the machine
automatically detects the size of each original.
Originals of mixed widths and sizes can be scanned
(11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13",
11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A3 and B4, A3 and B5, A4
and B4, A4 and B5, B4 and A4R, B4 and A5, B5 and
A4R, B5 and A5)).
(6) [Slow Scan Mode] key
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals
using the automatic document feeder. This function helps
prevent thin originals from misfeeding.
Scan to HDD/Special Modes
OK
Dual Page
Scan
Mixed Size
Original
Slow Scan
Mode
Job
Build
Erase Card Shot
(5)(4) (6)
(2)(1) (3)
Special Modes
24
PERFORMING "Scan to HDD"
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
2
Switch to document filing mode and
select Scan to HDD settings.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Scan to HDD] tab.
If you do not wish to select settings, go to the next step.
(3) Select the original size, exposure,
resolution, compression ratio, color mode,
and special modes.
See ""Scan to HDD" SCREEN" (page 20).
(4) Touch the [File Information] key.
The settings are the same as for "File". See "FILE
INFORMATION" (page 17).
If the original is 2-sided, be sure to touch the [Original] key and then touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the [2-Sided
Tablet] key as appropriate for the original.
3
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
For the procedure for placing the original, see step 4 of
"SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File"" (page 13).
A beep will sound to indicate that Scan to HDD is completed.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
When Scan to HDD is performed without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically
assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second
(Example: HDD_04012006_112030AM)
Stored to: Main Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
File
Information
Original
Exposure
Resolution
Comp. Ratio
Color Mode
Special Modes
Scan:
200X200dpi
Medium
Auto
Store:
Text
Auto
Auto
Auto
Mono2
8½x11
Ready to scan to HDD.
Press [Start] to scan original.
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(3)(1)(2)(4)
or
25
This chapter explains how to retrieve a file stored by document filing and print or transmit the file.
SEQUENCE FOR USING A STORED FILE
This section explains the basic procedure for retrieving and using a stored file. The screens and procedures differ
depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled.
See the sequence that applies to your situation.
For information on user authentication procedures, see "USER AUTHENTICATION" in the User's Guide. For information
on enabling user authentication and storing user names, see "User Control" in the System Settings Guide.
3
USING STORED FILES
Files stored by document filing can also be retrieved and used from the Web pages. Click [Document Operation] and then
[Document Filing] in the Web page menu, and select the folder that contains the file you wish to use.
Change the mode.
Switch to document filing mode.
☞ BASE SCREEN OF DOCUMENT FILING MODE (page
12)
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Main Folder
User 1
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
Quick File Folder
Search
Folder Select
1
2
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
26
Select the file that you wish to retrieve.
• Select the folder in the folder selection screen.
When the folder is selected, the files in the folder will
appear. Select the file that you wish to retrieve.
☞ FILE SELECTION SCREEN (page 28)
SELECTING A FILE (page 29)
• The search function can be used to retrieve a file.
☞ SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE (page 43)
Select the operation.
Select the desired operation and configure settings.
☞ JOB SETTINGS SCREEN (page 30)
PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 31)
SENDING A STORED FILE (page 35)
PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 37)
MOVING A STORED FILE (page 39)
DELETING A STORED FILE (page 41)
Main Folder
File Name
file-01 Name 1 04/01/2006
file-02 Name 2 04/01/2006
file-03.tiff Name 3 04/01/2006
file-04 Name 4 04/01/2006
file-05.tiff Name 5 04/01/2006
User Name Date
All Files Filter by Job
1
2
BackSearch
Batch Print
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access
Job Settings
Cancel
file-01 Name 1 8½x11 F. Color
Print Send
Property
Change
Move Delete Detail
Select the job.
27
FOLDER AND FILE SELECTION SCREENS
To use a file stored by document filing, the folder and file must be selected. The folder selection screen and file selection
screen are explained below.
FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN
Two different screens appear depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled on the machine.
When user authentication is not enabled When user authentication is enabled
(1) [Main Folder] key
Touch this key to retrieve a file from the Main folder. The
files in the Main folder will appear.
(2) Custom folder keys
The custom folders that have been created using
"Document Filing Control" in the system settings are
displayed. Touch a key to display the files in that folder.
If a password has been set for a custom folder, a
password entry screen will appear when the folder is
touched. The password must be entered.
(3) [Quick File Folder] key
Touch this key to retrieve a file from the Quick File folder.
The files in the Quick File folder will appear.
☞ SAVING A FILE WITH "Quick File" (page 13)
(4) Index tabs
All folders appear on the [All Folders] tab.
Touch a tab to display the custom folders whose initials
(set in "Document Filing Control" in the system settings)
match the letters on the tab.
(5) [My Folder] key
This key appears when user authentication is enabled.
Touch the key to display the file selection screen of "My
Folder". When user authentication is enabled but "My
Folder" is not configured, this key will be grayed out to
prevent selection.
Main Folder
User 1
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
Quick File Folder
Search
Folder Select
1
2
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
(2)(1) (3)
(4)
Main Folder
User 1
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
Quick File Folder
SearchMy Folder
Folder Select
1
2
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
(2)(1) (3) (5)
(4)
28
FILE SELECTION SCREEN
The file selection screen of the Quick File folder, Main folder, and custom folders is explained below.
(1) File keys
The stored files are displayed. An icon showing which
mode the file was stored from, the file name, the user
name, and the date the file was stored appear in each file
key.
When a file is touched, the job setting screen appears.
Job icons
(2) [File Name] key, [User Name] key, [Date] key
Use these keys to change the order of display of the file
keys. When one of the keys is touched, or
appears in the key.
• When appears in the [File Name] key or [User
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name
in ascending order.
When appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in
order from the oldest date.
• When appears in the [File Name] key or [User
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user name
in descending order.
When appears in the [Date] key, the files appear in
order from the most recent date.
(3) [Back] key
Touch this key to return to the base screen of document
filing mode.
☞
FOLDER SELECTION SCREEN (page 27)
(4) Page key
When multiple pages exist, use this key to enter the
number of a page that you want to display. When the key
is touched, a page number entry screen appears. Enter
the desired page number (3 digits) with the numeric keys.
For example, to display page 3, enter "003".
(5) Select displayed files by job type.
You can select the file keys that are displayed by job
type.
The currently selected job type appears in the left tab. [All
Files] is initially selected.
Touch the [Filter by Job] tab on the right to open the
following screen.
Touch a mode key to show a list of the files that were
stored from that mode.
(6) [Batch Print] key
Touch this key to print all files in a folder.
☞
BATCH PRINTING (page 33)
Main Folder
File Name
file-01 Name 1 04/01/2006
file-02 Name 2 04/01/2006
file-03.tiff Name 3 04/01/2006
file-04 Name 4 04/01/2006
file-05.tiff Name 5 04/01/2006
User Name Date
All Files Filter by Job
1
2
BackSearch
Batch Print
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access
(2) (3) (4)(1)
(6)
(5)
Copy
Internet fax
transmission
Print
Fax
transmission
Scan to
E-mail
Scan to
HDD
Scan to
FTP
Scan to
Desktop
Scan to
Network
Folder
PC-Fax
transmission
PC-I-Fax
transmission
Main Folder
Search
Back
All Files
All Files Filter by Job
Copy
Printer
Internet Fax
Scan Scan to HDD
Fax
Batch Print
29
SELECTING A FILE
This section explains how to select a file to be used.
1
Select the folder that contains the file
you wish to use.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
The folder selection screen will appear. If a different tab
appears, touch the [File Retrieve] tab.
When user authentication is enabled and "My Folder" is
configured in "User List" in the system settings, the
custom folder specified as "My Folder" opens. To display
the folder selection screen, touch the [Back] key.
(2) Touch the key of the folder that contains the
desired file.
If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.
2
Touch the key of the desired file.
If a password is set for the selected file, a password entry
screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and
touch the [OK] key.
• The [Filter by Job] tab can be touched to show the mode keys (copy mode, scan mode, etc.). Touch a mode key to
show a list of the files that were stored from that mode.
When you know the mode from which a file was stored, touching the [Filter by Job] tab lets you find the file quickly.
• You can touch the [File Name] key, the [User Name] key, or the [Date] key to change the order of display of the files.
• To print all files in the folder, touch the [Batch Print] key.
☞ BATCH PRINTING (page 33)
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Main Folder
User 1
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
Quick File Folder
Search
Folder Select
1
2
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)(2)
User 1
File Name
file-01 Name 1 04/01/2006
file-02 Name 2 04/01/2006
file-03.tiff Name 3 04/01/2006
file-04 Name 4 04/01/2006
file-05.tiff Name 5 04/01/2006
User Name Date
All Files Filter by Job
1
2
BackSearch
Batch Print
30
JOB SETTINGS SCREEN
When a file key is touched, the following screen appears. Touch the key of the operation that you wish to perform and
select settings.
(1) File display
This shows information on the currently selected file (job
icon, file name, user name, store size, and color mode).
(2) [Cancel] key
Touch this key to cancel the operation and return to the
file selection screen.
(3) [Print] key
Touch this key to print the selected file.
☞ PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 31)
(4) [Move] key
Use this procedure to change the location of a file (move
a file to a different folder).
☞ MOVING A STORED FILE (page 39)
(5) [Send] key
A stored file can be sent by fax, Internet fax, or scan
transmission.
☞ SENDING A STORED FILE (page 35)
(6) [Delete] key
Touch this key to delete a file that is no longer needed.
☞ DELETING A STORED FILE (page 41)
(7) [Property Change] key
Use this key to change the property ("Sharing", "Protect",
or "Confidential") of a stored file.
☞ PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 37)
(8) [Detail] key
Touch this key to show detailed information on the
selected file.
When this key is touched, the following screen appears.
If you wish to change the file name, touch the [File Name]
key in this screen.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter the desired file
name. For the procedure for entering text, see "6.
ENTERING TEXT" in the User's Guide.
The key appears when a special mode is selected.
Touch the key to display the special mode selection
confirmation screen.
Main Folder
File Name
file-01 Name 1 04/01/2006
file-02 Name 2 04/01/2006
file-03.tiff Name 3 04/01/2006
file-04 Name 4 04/01/2006
file-05.tiff Name 5 04/01/2006
User Name Date
All Files Filter by Job
1
2
BackSearch
Batch Print
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status Ex Data Access
Job Settings
Cancel
file-01 Name 1 8½x11 F. Color
Print Send
Property
Change
Move Delete Detail
Select the job.
(2)(1)
(4)
(6) (8)(5)(3) (7)
Job Settings / Detail
OK
File Name
file-01 Name 1
Folder:Main Folder
Size:8½x11
Date:04/01/2006 11:20 AM
Data Size:40B
Document
Style:
Output:
Resolution:600X600dpi
Color / B/W:Full Color
Pages:10
Special
Modes:
File Type:
31
PRINTING A STORED FILE
A file stored using document filing can be retrieved and printed when needed. The settings used when the file was
stored are also stored, and thus the file can be printed again using those settings. The file can also be modified before
printing by changing the print settings.
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 29)
1
Touch the [Print] key.
2
Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key
or the [Print and Save the Data] key.
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files will be
automatically deleted after printing.
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files will be
saved after printing.
Output settings, 2-sided printing, special modes, the number of
copies, and other settings can be selected. For more
information, see "PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN" (page 32).
• A file saved in black and white or grayscale cannot be printed in color.
• When a long size document is stored from Scan to HDD or scan mode, the file cannot be printed. A file stored from scan
mode that included fax mode or Internet fax mode destinations in a broadcast transmission can be printed.
• If print settings are changed when a stored file is printed, the only changed setting that can be stored is the number of
copies.
• The printing speed may be somewhat slow depending on the resolution and exposure mode settings of the stored file.
Job Settings
Cancel
file-01 Name 1 8½x11 F. Color
Print Send
Property
Change
Move Delete Detail
Select the job.
Output
2-Sided
Special Modes
Paper Select
Auto
file-01 Name 1 8½x11 F. Color
Job Settings / Print
Cancel
B/W Print
Number of Prints
1
(1 999)
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
32
PRINT SETTINGS SCREEN
(1) [Paper Select] key
Use this key to set the paper size.
(2) [Output] key
Use this key to select Sort, Group or Staple Sort, and to
select the output tray.
(3) [2-Sided] key
Use this key to select the orientation of the image on the
reverse side of the paper for 2-sided printing. To have the
front and back images oriented in the same direction,
touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key. To have the front and
back images oriented opposite to each other, touch the
[2-Sided Tablet] key. Note that the size and orientation of
the saved image may cause these keys to have the
opposite effect. If neither of these keys is selected
(neither is highlighted), 1-sided printing will take place.
(4) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to select "Margin Shift", "Pamphlet Style",
"2in1 / 4in1", "Tandem Print", or "Stamp".
This key does not appear if the file was saved from print
mode.
(5) key
Use these keys to set the number of copies. The number
of copies can also be set with the numeric keys.
(6) [Print and Delete the Data] key
Printing begins when this key is touched. When printing
is finished, the file will be automatically deleted.
(7) [Print and Save the Data] key
Printing begins when this key is touched. The file will not
be deleted after printing.
(8) [B/W Print] checkbox
Select this checkbox if the file was saved in color and you
wish to print it in black & white.
When the file is saved in black & white, this checkbox
does not appear.
Output
2-Sided
Special Modes
Paper Select
Auto
file-01 Name 1 8½x11 F. Color
Job Settings / Print
Cancel
B/W Print
Number of Prints
1
(1 999)
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
(5)
(8)
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
33
BATCH PRINTING
All files in a folder that have the same user name and password can be printed at once.
1
Touch the [Batch Print] key.
To batch print only the files of a certain job type, touch the
[Filter by Job] tab to change the displayed files, and touch the
[Batch Print] key.
2
Touch the [User Name] key.
3
Select the user name.
There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
The user name can be selected from the factory stored
users.
(C) Touch the key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [---] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
To enter text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's
Guide.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.
When all users and user unknown batch printing is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the [All Users] key
and [User Unknown] key can be selected.
The [All Users] key can be touched to select all files in the folder (the files of all users).
The [User Unknown] key can be touched to select all files in the folder that do not have a user name.
Main Folder
File Name
file-01 Name 1 04/01/2006
file-02 Name 2 04/01/2006
file-03.tiff Name 3 04/01/2006
file-04 Name 4 04/01/2006
file-05.tiff Name 5 04/01/2006
User Name Date
All Files Filter by Job
1
2
BackSearch
Batch Print
User 1/ All Files
Batch Print
Cancel
Delete the
Data
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data Change PRT.No.
User Name
Password
User Name
OKCancel
6 18
12
ABC
User
All Users
User Unknown
Name 1
Name 3
Name 5
Name 7
Name 9
Name 2
Name 4
Name 6
Name 8
Name 10
1
2
All Users ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
Default User
Direct Entry
(A)(B)
(D)
(C)
34
4
If a password has been established,
touch the [Password] key.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits) and
touch the [OK] key. Only files that have the same password will
be selected.
If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the next step.
5
To set the number of copies, touch the
[Change PRT.No.] key.
If you wish to use the number of copies stored with each file, go
to step 6.
(1) Touch the [Apply the Number from Stored
Setting of Each Job] checkbox so that it is
not selected ( ).
(2) Set the number of copies with the
keys.
The number of copies can be also set with the numeric
keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
6
Touch the [Print and Delete the Data] key
or the [Print and Save the Data] key.
If the [Print and Delete the Data] key is touched, the files will be
automatically deleted after printing.
If the [Print and Save the Data] key is touched, the files will be
saved after printing.
If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will
return to the file list screen.
All files that match the current search conditions can be deleted by touching the [Delete the Data] key.
User 1/ All Files
Batch Print
Cancel
Delete the
Data
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
Change PRT.No.
User Name
Password
Name 1
User 1/ All Files
Batch Print
Cancel
Delete the
Data
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
Change PRT.No.
User Name
Password
Name 1
Change Print Number
Batch Print
Cancel
OKCancel
Apply the Number from Stored Setting of
Each Job.
1
(1 999)
(1) (3)(2)
User 1/ All Files
Batch Print
Cancel
Delete the
Data
Print and Delete the Data
Print and Save the Data
Change PRT.No.
User Name
Password
Name 1
35
SENDING A STORED FILE
A file stored by document filing can be retrieved and transmitted whenever needed. The settings used when the file was
stored are also stored, and thus the file can be transmitted using those settings. If needed, you can also change the
transmission settings to modify the retrieved file.
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 29)
1
Touch the [Send] key.
2
Select transmission settings.
For information on the settings, see "SEND SETTINGS
SCREEN" (page 36).
3
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
If you are sending a fax or an Internet fax, only the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) can be used.
• A file saved in black and white or grayscale cannot be transmitted in color.
• A stored print job cannot be transmitted.
• These transmission methods require installation of the corresponding options.
• If any of the following special modes were included in the saved file, the file cannot be transmitted.
"Pamphlet Copy", "Covers/Inserts", "Photo Repeat", "Multi-Page Enlargement", "Multi Shot" for copying.
•
If any of the following special modes were included in the saved file, the file can be transmitted but the special modes will
not be executed.
"Margin Shift", "Transparency Inserts", "Book Copy", "Tab Copy", "Stamp", all "Color Adjustments" menu items, "Centering"
• Depending on the reduction or enlargement ratio used when storing a file, it may not be possible to send the stored file
using a selected resolution setting. In this event, try changing the resolution.
However, when sending a stored file by Internet fax, transmission may not be possible even if the resolution is changed.
Job Settings
Cancel
file-01 Name 1 8½x11 F. Color
Print Send
Property
Change
Move Delete Detail
Select the job.
Address Book
Address Entry
Send Settings
Resolution
File Format
Special Modes
file-01
F. Color
200X200dpi
PDF PDF
Name 1
or
36
SEND SETTINGS SCREEN
The keys that appear in the send settings are explained below. For more information on each of the settings, see "BASE
SCREEN OF FAX MODE" in the Facsimile Guide and "BASE SCREEN" in the Scanner Guide.
Example of scan mode
(1) Send mode tabs
Touch the appropriate tab to select fax mode, scan
mode, or Internet fax mode.
(2) [Address Book] key
Touch this key to display the destinations stored in the
address book.
(3) [Address Entry] key or [Sub Address] key
Use this key to directly enter an address when sending a
file in scan mode or Internet Fax mode.
In fax mode this appears as the "Sub Address" key. Use
this key to enter a sub-address and password for F-code
communication.
(4) [Send Settings] key
This key appears in scan mode and Internet fax mode.
Touch the key to enter a subject and a file name when
performing a transmission. In scan mode, a sender can
also be specified.
(5) key
The 3-digit search number that was assigned to a
one-touch key or group key when the key was stored can
be entered to specify a destination.
(6) [Next Address] key
This key appears when at least one address has been
entered. Use this key when you are sending a file to
multiple destinations.
(7) [Cancel] key
This returns you to the job settings screen.
(8) File name / User name display
This shows the icon of the file to be sent, the file name,
the user name, and the color mode (color/black & white).
(9) Any of these keys can be touched to change the
corresponding settings of the file to be sent. The
settings that can be selected vary by mode.
• Scan mode
[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
cannot be selected.
[File Format] key
This lets you select the file type, compression ratio,
and color mode.
[Special Modes] key
This displays the [Timer] key.
• Internet fax mode
[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
cannot be selected.
[File Format] key
Use this to select the file type and compression ratio.
[Special Modes] key
This displays the [Timer] and [Transaction Report]
keys.
• Fax mode
[Resolution] key
Use this to select the resolution. A resolution setting
higher than the resolution at which the file was stored
cannot be selected.
[Special Modes] key
This displays the [Timer], [Own Name Select], and
[Transaction Report] keys.
Address Book
Address Entry
Send Settings
Resolution
File Format
Special Modes
file-01
F. Color
200X200dpi
PDF PDF
Name 1
Scan Internet Fax Fax
Ready to send.
Cancel
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(8)
(9)
(7)
37
PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES
FILE PROPERTIES
A protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being moved,
or automatically or manually deleted.
Three properties are available for saved files: [Sharing], [Protect], and [Confidential]. When saved with the [Sharing]
property, a file is not protected. When saved with the [Protect] or [Confidential] property, a file is protected.
Files saved to the Quick File folder are all saved as [Sharing] files. When a file is saved to the Main folder or a custom
folder, [Sharing] or [Confidential] can be selected.
CHANGING THE PROPERTY
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 29)
Sharing
A [Sharing] file can be changed to [Protect] or [Confidential] using [Property Change] in the Job Settings.
Protect
"Protect" prevents a file from being moved or deleted. A password cannot be established. The icon
appears with the mode icon in the file key of a protected file.
Confidential
To protect a "Confidential" file, a password is set. (The password must be entered to retrieve the file.) The
icon appears with the mode icon in the file key of a confidential file.
1
Touch the [Property Change] key.
2
Select the property.
(1) Touch the key of the desired property.
When the [Confidential] key is touched, the [Password]
key can be touched.
Touch the [Password] key, enter a password (5 to 8 digits)
with the numeric keys, and touch the [OK] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Job Settings
Cancel
file-01 Name 1 8½x11 F. Color
Print Send
Property
Change
Move Delete Detail
Select the job.
Job Settings / Property Change
OKCancel
file-01 Name 1 8½x11 F. Color
Confidential
Sharing
Protect
Password
(1) (2)
38
Restrictions on changing the property
• A file that is set to "Sharing" can be changed to "Protect" or "Confidential". However, a "Sharing" file that is saved in the
Quick File folder can only be changed to "Protect".
• A file that is set to "Protect" can be changed to "Sharing" or "Confidential". However, a "Protect" file that is saved in the
Quick File folder can only be changed to "Sharing".
• A file that is saved in the Quick File folder cannot be changed to "Confidential". If the file is moved to the Main folder or a
custom folder, the property can be changed to "Confidential".
• Two properties cannot be selected for a single file.
39
MOVING A STORED FILE
Use this procedure to change the location of a file (move a file to a different folder).
After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 29)
1
Touch the [Move] key.
2
Touch the [Move to:] key.
• A file cannot be moved to the Quick File Folder. With this procedure, the original name is changed and the file is
moved to the specified folder. (Unlike the "Save As" command on a computer, the file is not copied to the specified
folder with the original file remaining in the original location.)
• To change the file name, touch the [File Name] key.
3
The above screen shows the custom folders as an
example.
Select the destination folder.
(1) Touch the key of the folder to which you
want to move the file.
If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Job Settings
Cancel
file-01 Name 1 8½x11 F. Color
Print Send
Property
Change
Move Delete Detail
Select the job.
Job Settings / Move
Cancel
file-01 Name 1 F. Color
File Name
Move to:
Select the folder the file is moved to.
file-01
Move
8½x11
Main Folder
OK
Job Settings / Move
1
2
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
User 1
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
(1) (2)
40
4
Touch the [Move] key.
A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be moved. To move a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or
"Confidential".
User 2
Move
Job Settings / Move
Cancel
file-01 Name 1 F. Color
File Name
Move to:
Select the folder the file is moved to.
file-01
8½x11
41
DELETING A STORED FILE
Stored files that are no longer needed can be deleted.
Select the file that you wish to delete and touch the [Delete] key.
☞ SELECTING A FILE (page 29)
1
Touch the [Delete] key.
2
Check the file and then touch the [Yes]
key.
A file whose property is "Protect" cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to "Sharing" or
"Confidential".
Job Settings
Cancel
file-01 Name 1 F. Color
Print Send
Property
Change
Move Delete Detail
Select the job.
8½x11
YesNo
Delete the file data?
Name 1
file-01
42
RETRIEVING AND USING A FILE FROM THE
JOB STATUS SCREEN
Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen.
This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another
destination.
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
2
Touch the job status selector key so that
[Complete] is highlighted.
3
Select the desired file in the completed
jobs.
(1) Touch the key of the desired file.
If a password is set for the selected file, a password entry
screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.
(2) Touch the [Call] key.
The job settings screen appears.
Select and perform the desired operation.
☞ JOB SETTINGS SCREEN (page 30)
PRINTING A STORED FILE (page 31)
SENDING A STORED FILE (page 35)
PROPERTIES OF STORED FILES (page 37)
MOVING A STORED FILE (page 39)
DELETING A STORED FILE (page 41)
To view information on a file, select the file and then touch the [Detail] key.
JOB STATUS
Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
Computer01 002/001 Printing
0312345678 002/000 Waiting
0312345678 002/000 Waiting
Copy 002/000 Waiting
Spool
Job Queue
Complete
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
1
1
Detail
Stop/Delete
Priority
1
2
3
4
Print Job Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
Computer02 11:00 04/01 001/001 OK
10:33 04/01 010/010 OK
10:31 04/01 013/013 OK
10:30 04/01 010/010 OK
Computer03
Computer04
file-01
10:13 04/01 001/001 OKCopy
10:03 04/01 001/001 OKCopy
10:01 04/01 003/003 OKComputer05
10:00 04/01 010/010 OKCopy
Spool
Job Queue
Complete
Jobs Completed
Set Time StatusSets
1
1
Detail
Call
(2)
(1)
43
SEARCHING FOR A STORED FILE
When there are many stored files, it may take time to find a file. The search function of document filing mode can be
used to find a file quickly.
This section explains how to search for a file or folder on the machine's hard drive.
Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name. A folder can also be specified as a
search range.
Example: Only part of a file name is known: "Meeting"
1
Open the file search screen.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Search] key.
2
Touch the [User Name] key or the [File
or Folder Name] key.
If you know the user name, touch the [User Name] key and go
to "Using the user name to search" in step 3.
If you know the file name, touch the [File or Folder Name] key
and go to "Using the file name or folder name to search" in step
3.
When you search
using "Meeting"...
All folders and files that
include "Meeting" will be
listed.
[Search results]
Text 1
Report
Regular meeting
Regular
meeting
Meeting graphs
Meeting
graphs
Main
Quick File
For individuals
For meetings
For
meetings
[Hard drive]
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Main Folder
User 1
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
Quick File Folder
Search
Folder Select
1
2
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1) (2)
Search
Cancel
Start Search
User Name
File or Folder Name
Password
44
3
Using the user name to search
There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
The user name can be selected from the factory stored
users.
(C) Touch the key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [---] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
To enter text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's
Guide. Searching is possible even if you only enter the first
several letters of the user name.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.
After the user name is selected, the [Password] key can be
touched. To search for files of the selected user name that
have a certain password, touch the [Password] key and enter
the password.
(It is not possible to search using a password only.)
Using the file name or folder name to
search
Enter the file name or folder name in the text entry screen that
appears and touch the [OK] key.
User Name
OK
Cancel
6 18
12
ABC
User
Name 3
Name 1
Name 5
Name 7
Name 9
Name 11
Name 2
Name 4
Name 6
Name 8
Name 10
Name 12
1
2
All Users ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
Default User
Direct Entry
(A)
(B)
(D)
(C)
45
4
Touch the [Start Search] key.
The search results will appear in a screen similar to the
following screen. A list of the files that match your search
criteria will appear. Select the desired file from the list.
The job settings screen will appear.
To return to the base screen of document filing mode,
touch the [Cancel] key.
To return to the file search screen, touch the [Search
Again] key.
• When you search using [File or Folder Name], custom folders that match the search characters will also appear in
the list. When a folder key is touched, a list of the files in the folder appears. Touch the desired file in the list.
• You can also use the Web pages to search for a file. Click [Document Operations], [Document Filing], and then
[Search] in the Web page menu.
Start Search
Password
file-01
Name 1
Search
Cancel
User Name
File or Folder Name
Search
File or Folder Name
file-01
Name 1
04/01/2006
User Name Date
1
1
Search AgainCancel
46
Searching within a folder
You can specify a folder to restrict the search range to that folder. To search within a specified folder, follow the steps
below.
1
Open the folder that you wish to search.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the key of the folder that you wish to
search.
If a password is set for the selected folder, a password
entry screen will appear.
Enter the password with the numeric keys (5 to 8 digits)
and touch the [OK] key.
2
Touch the [Search] key.
3
Touch the [User Name] key or the [File
or Folder Name] key.
If you know the user name, touch the [User Name] key and go
to "Using the user name to search" in step 4.
If you know the file name, touch the [File or Folder Name] key
and go to "Using the file name or folder name to search" in step
4.
File Retrieve Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
Main Folder
User 1
User 3
User 5
User 7
User 9
User 2
User 4
User 6
User 8
User 10
Quick File Folder
Search
Folder Select
1
2
All Folders ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)(2)
User 1
File Name
file-01 Name 1 04/01/2006
file-02 Name 2 04/01/2006
file-03.tiff Name 3 04/01/2006
file-04 Name 4 04/01/2006
file-05.tiff Name 5 04/01/2006
User Name Date
All Files Filter by Job
1
2
BackSearch
Batch Print
Search within Current Folder
Search
Cancel
Start Search
User Name
File or Folder Name
Password
47
4
Using the user name to search
There are four ways to select the user name:
(A) Touch the key of the user name.
The touched user name is highlighted.
If you accidentally select the wrong user name, touch the
key of the correct name.
(B) Touch the [Default User] key.
The user name can be selected from the factory stored
users.
(C) Touch the key.
An area for entering the "Registration No." [---] appears in
the message display. Enter the "Registration No." set
during user registration. This will allow you to select the
user name.
(D) Touch the [Direct Entry] key.
A text entry screen appears. Directly enter the user name.
To enter text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's
Guide. Searching is possible even if you only enter the first
several letters of the user name.
After selecting the user name, touch the [OK] key.
After the user name is selected, the [Password] key can be
touched. To search for files of the selected user name that
have a certain password, touch the [Password] key and enter
the password.
(It is not possible to search using a password only.)
Using the file name or folder name to
search
Enter the file name or folder name in the text entry screen that
appears and touch the [OK] key.
User Name
OK
Cancel
6 18
12
ABC
User
Name 3
Name 1
Name 5
Name 7
Name 9
Name 11
Name 2
Name 4
Name 6
Name 8
Name 10
Name 12
1
2
All Users ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
Default User
Direct Entry
(A)
(B)
(D)
(C)
48
5
Start searching.
(1) Touch the [Search within Current Folder]
checkbox so that it is selected .
To search only files that are in the current folder, select
the [Search within Current Folder] checkbox .
Use this method to search for a file in a confidential folder.
(2) Touch the [Start Search] key.
The search results will appear in a screen similar to the
following screen. A list of the files that match your search
criteria will appear. Select the desired file from the list.
The job settings screen will appear.
To return to the base screen of document filing mode,
touch the [Cancel] key.
To return to the file search screen, touch the [Search
Again] key.
Start Search
Password
file-01
Name 1
Search within Current Folder
Search
Cancel
User Name
File or Folder Name
(2)(1)
Search
File or Folder Name
file-01
Name 1
04/01/2006
User Name Date
1
1
Search AgainCancel
MX7000-US-FIL-Z2
Document Filing Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
Scanner Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
• MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE . . . 5
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
NETWORK SCANNER
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK
SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
• MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS
IN THE "ON" POSITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
• CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
• STORING SENDER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . 9
• SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES . . . 9
• STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR
EACH SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK. . . 9
• STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO
DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
BASE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
• ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
• CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH
KEYS IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN . . . . . 15
SCAN SEND SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . 19
• THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL . . . . . . . 19
2
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
• RETRIEVING A DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
• CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED
DESTINATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY . . . . . . . . . . 24
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3
TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE
SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE . . . . . . . . . . . 28
• CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE. . . . 37
• ENTERING A FILE NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE. . . . . . . 42
• CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
AND BODY TEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission) . . . . . . 48
• BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT
INCLUDE INTERNET FAX DESTINATIONS . . . . 51
SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-I-Fax) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
IMAGE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
• AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES
OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) . . . . . . . . . . 55
• SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE
AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) . . . . . . . . . . . 56
• CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
EXPOSURE MODE (ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE). . 62
• CHANGING THE RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
• CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
• CHANGING THE COLOR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3
4
SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) . . . . . . 72
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE
PAGES (Dual Page Scan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE
(Suppress Background) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job
Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode) . . 92
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report) . . . 97
5
CHECKING THE STATUS OF
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
• OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB
QUEUE IS COMPLETED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS. . . . . . . . . . . . 104
STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED
OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED . . . . . . . . . . . 105
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION
JOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY LOG
(Image Sending Activity Report) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
• INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6
INTERNET FAX RECEPTION
FUNCTIONS
RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
• MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES . . 109
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print) . . . . . . . . . 110
FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAXES
TO AN E-MAIL ADDRESS (Inbound Routing
Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7
SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC
Scan Mode)
BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8
METADATA DELIVERY
METADATA DELIVERY (Data Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . 117
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
•
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES .
. 118
• METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN TO
DESKTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
TRANSMITTING METADATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
• METADATA FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual explains the procedures for using scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax mode, PC scan mode, and
data entry mode on the machine.
Please note
• To use the Internet fax function, the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed.
• The application integration module is required to use the metadata transmission function.
• For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Software Setup Guide and the
manuals that are provided with the expansion kits.
• To use the network scanner function, basic network scanner settings, server settings including SMTP and DNS server settings,
and destinations must be configured in the Web pages. Configure and store the settings as explained in this manual. These
settings require a knowledge of your network environment and therefore must be configured by your network administrator.
• For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in this manual are primarily for Windows
®
XP. The screens may vary in other
versions of Windows.
• Wherever "MX-xxxx" appears in this manual, please substitute your model name for "xxxx".
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.
Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
The explanations in this manual assume that a saddle stitch finisher, punch module, and inserter are installed on the machine.
For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
5
MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE
Printed manuals and manuals stored in PDF format on the machine's hard drive are provided with the machine. When
using the machine, read the appropriate manual for the feature you are using.
Printed manuals
Operation manuals in PDF format
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "How to download the manuals in PDF format" in the Quick Start Guide.
Icons used in the manuals
The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:
Manual name Contents
Safety Guide
This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely and lists the specifications of the machine
and its peripheral devices.
Software Setup
Guide
This manual explains how to install the software and configure settings to use the machine as a printer or
scanner.
Quick Start Guide
This manual provides easy-to-understand explanations of all the functions of the machine in a single
volume.
Detailed explanations of each of the functions can be found in the manuals in PDF format.
Troubleshooting
This manual explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked questions
regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you have difficulty using
the machine.
Manual name Contents
User's Guide
This manual provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and machine
maintenance.
Copier Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
Printer Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the printer function.
Facsimile Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
Scanner Guide
(This manual)
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the
Internet fax function.
Document Filing
Guide
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The
document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard
drive
. The file can be called up as needed.
System Settings
Guide
This manual explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit
the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out from the
"System Settings".
This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of
machine damage or failure.
This indicates the name of a system setting and
provides a brief explanation of the setting.
For detailed information on each system setting, see
the System Settings Guide.
When "System Settings:" appears:
A general setting is explained.
When "System Settings (Administrator):"
appears:
A setting that can only be configured by an
administrator is explained.
This provides a supplemental explanation of a
function or procedure.
This explains how to cancel or correct an operation.
6
This chapter provides information that you should know before using the machine as a network scanner.
NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION
The network scanner function of the machine can be used to scan an original, create an image file, and send the file
over a network to a computer, FTP server, or other destination. Scanning is also possible from your computer using a
TWAIN-compliant application.
The network scanner function provides the following scanning modes.
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 28)
Scan to E-mail
The scanned file is sent to an e-mail address.
Scan to FTP
The scanned file is sent to a specified directory of an FTP server.
When the file is sent, it is also possible to send an e-mail to a previously stored e-mail
address to inform the recipient of the location of the file. (This is called "Scan to FTP
(Hyperlink)".)
Scan to Desktop
The scanned file is sent to a specified folder on your computer.
To use Scan to Desktop, software must be installed from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner
Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. For the system requirements of the
software, see the manual (PDF format) or the Readme file on the CD-ROM. For the
procedures for installing the software, see the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide".
Scan to Network Folder
The scanned file is sent to a shared folder on a Windows computer on the same network as
the machine.
Transmission is possible to computers running the following operating systems: Windows
98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
AS A NETWORK SCANNER
Scan modes
7
☞ SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page 37)
USB Memory Scan
The scanned file is sent to and stored in a USB memory device connected to the machine.
☞ SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 42)
Internet fax transmission
The scanned file is sent as an Internet fax. Reception of Internet faxes is also possible.
☞ 7. SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) (page 112)
PC Scan
A TWAIN-compliant application on a computer connected to the same network as the
machine is used to scan a document or image.
To use PC Scan, the scanner driver must be installed from the "Software CD-ROM" that
accompanies the machine.
Operating systems that can be used are Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003.
☞ 8. METADATA DELIVERY (page 117)
Metadata delivery
The application integration module can be combined with the network scanner function to append a metadata* file to a
scanned image file. (This is called metadata delivery.)
Information entered using the touch panel or automatically generated by the machine can be sent to a directory on an
FTP server or an application on a computer as a metadata file in XML format.
* Metadata is information about a file, how it is to be processed, and its relation to other objects.
USB memory mode
Internet fax mode
PC scan mode
Data entry mode
8
PREPARATIONS FOR USE AS A NETWORK
SCANNER
MAKE SURE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS IN THE
"ON" POSITION
The main power is "on" when the main power indicator on the right side of the operation panel is lit.
If the main power indicator is not lit, the main power is "off". Switch the main power switch to the "on" position and press
the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel.
If the Internet fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, always
keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME
Verify that the correct date and time are set in the machine.
The date and time are set in the system settings of the machine. When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the
system settings menu screen appears on the touch panel. Select [Default Settings], [Clock], and [Clock Adjust], and set
the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
When the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) indicator light is blinking, the machine is in auto power shut-off mode. If the [POWER
SAVE] key ( ) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will turn off and the machine will return to the ready
state after a brief interval.
LOGOUT
Main power indicator
[POWER SAVE] key/indicator
Main power
switch
"On" position
9
STORING SENDER INFORMATION
Before using Scan to E-mail
Store a default sender name in "Sender Name" and a reply e-mail address in "Reply E-mail Address". These will be
used when a sender is not selected.
Before using Internet fax
Store a sender name in "Sender Name" and a sender Internet fax address in "Own Address".
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES
In order to use the network scanner function, basic network scanner settings, server settings including SMTP and DNS
server settings, and the sender address must be configured in the Web pages.
• Basic network scanner settings
To configure network scanner settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in the Web
page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Server settings
To configure server settings, click [Network Settings] and then [Services Settings] in the Web page menu.
(Administrator rights are required.)
STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK
To use Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder, destinations must be stored in the address book.
Although destinations for Scan to E-mail and Internet fax do not need to be stored in the address book (they can be
entered directly or looked up in a global address book at the time of transmission), storing these types of destinations in
the address book makes it easy to select them. Store each type of destination as explained below.
Scan mode destinations
• Scan to FTP: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [FTP] in
[Address Type] and store an address.
• Scan to Network Folder: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Network
Folder] in [Address Type] and store an address.
• Scan to E-mail: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [E-mail]
in [Address Type] and store an address. Addresses can also be stored in the system
settings.
• Scan to Desktop: See "STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP" (page 10). Scan to Desktop
destinations can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Address Book] in the Web page
menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Desktop] in [Address Type] and store an
address.
Internet fax mode: Click [Address Book] in the Web page menu and then click the [Add] button. Select [Internet Fax]
in [Address Type] and store an address. Addresses can also be stored in the system settings.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Sender Set
This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.
System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Own Name and Address Set
Use this setting to program the sender name and sender address.
System Settings: Address Book
This is used to store destination addresses for Scan to E-mail and Internet fax.
10
STORING A DESTINATION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP
To store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed
from the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM that accompanies the machine. To scan an image to your
computer, Network Scanner Tool must be running on your computer.
INSTALLING NETWORK SCANNER TOOL
To install Network Scanner Tool, see the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide" that accompanies the machine. When a
standard installation is performed, Network Scanner Tool is installed with Sharpdesk.
When you restart your computer after installing Network Scanner Tool, the Setup Wizard will start automatically. Follow
this wizard to set up Network Scanner Tool. This will store your computer in the machine as a destination for Scan to
Desktop. The stored destination will be displayed as a one-touch key in the address book screen.
The following window appears while Network Scanner Tool is being set up. The item selected in "My Profiles" (C) will be
the name of the one-touch key.
The profile name is determined by the combination of the text entered in "Prefix" (A) and the profile*.
The one-touch key is assigned to an index tab in the address book screen based on the text entered in "Initial" (B).
* This defines how an image sent to your computer is processed. For more information, see profile explanation (D).
ADDING DESTINATIONS
For the number of computers that can be stored in the machine as destinations of Scan to Desktop, see the number of
licenses indicated in the "Sharpdesk Installation Guide". To store more destinations, a license kit is required. Store Scan
to Desktop destinations by installing Network Scanner Tool on each computer.
ABCD
Freq.
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
AAA HHH
AAA FFF
AAA DDD
Comp-DESKTOP
AAA AAA
AAA III
AAA GGG
AAA EEE
AAA CCC
AAA BBB
5
15
10
Auto Auto
Auto
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
To Cc
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
(B)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
11
BASE SCREEN
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax mode, and PC scan mode are used by selecting operations and settings in
the base screens of those modes. To display the base screen of a mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key in the touch
panel and then touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(1) Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
To use scan mode, USB memory mode, Internet fax
mode, or PC scan mode, touch the [IMAGE SEND] key.
(2) Various messages are displayed here.
The icon of the selected mode appears on the left.
(3) Send mode tabs
Touch one of these tabs to change the image send
mode.
Tabs of modes that cannot be used because the
corresponding options (Facsimile expansion kit, Internet
fax expansion kit, or application integration module) are
not installed do not appear.
If the [USB Mem. Scan] and [PC Scan] tabs do not
appear, touch the tab to move the screen.
If the [Scan], [Internet Fax], [Fax], and [Data Entry] tabs
do not appear, touch the tab move the
screen.
The [Data Entry] tab appears when the application
integration module is installed. For information on
metadata delivery using the [Data Entry] tab, see "8.
METADATA DELIVERY" (page 117).
(4) [Address Book] key
Touch this key to use a one-touch key or a group key. When
the key is touched, the address book screen appears.
☞
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK (page 20)
(5) [Address Entry] key
Touch this key to manually enter an destination address
instead of using a one-touch key.
☞
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 24)
(6) [Send Settings] key
Touch this key to select or enter the subject, file name,
sender name, or body text, which has been previously
stored in the Web page.
Scan modes:
☞
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME,
REPLY-TO, AND BODY TEXT (page 33)
Internet fax mode:
☞
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND
BODY TEXT (page 45)
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Resend
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
Ready to send.
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)
(2)
(3)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(9)
(11)
(10)
(12)
Auto Auto
Auto
File Name
USB Mem. ScanFaxScan PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Internet Fax
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
Ready to send.
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)
(2)
(3)
(13)
(12)
(10)
I-Fax Manual
Reception
TIFF-F
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Resend
Special Modes
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
200X100dpi
Ready to send.
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)
(2)
(3)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(9)
(12)
(10)
(14)
Base screen of scan mode
Base screen of USB memory mode Base screen of Internet fax mode
12
(7) Customized keys
The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer.
☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 13)
(8) key
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search
number
*
.
* 3-digit number assigned to a destination when it is
stored.
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 23)
(9) [Resend] key/[Next Address] key
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by
Scan to E-mail, fax and/or Internet fax are stored. Touch
this key to select one of these destinations. After a
destination is selected, this key changes to the [Next
Address] key.
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 27)
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 21)
(10) Image settings
Image settings (original size, exposure, resolution, file
format, and color mode) can be selected.
☞ IMAGE SETTINGS (page 54)
(11) key
This key appears when a special mode or 2-sided
scanning is selected. Touch the key to display the
selected special modes.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page 13)
(12) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to use a special mode.
☞ 4. SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
(13) [File Name] key
Touch this key to enter a file name when storing a file to
USB memory.
☞ ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 41)
(14) [I-Fax Manual Reception] key
Touch this key to receive an Internet fax manually.
☞ MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES (page
109)
When sending an image, you can retrieve and use a stored transmission destination from the address book screen. The
address book screen is shared by scan mode, Internet fax mode, and fax mode.
Touch the [Address Book] key in the base screen to switch to the address book screen. Touch the [Condition Settings]
key in the address book screen to switch to the base screen.
• This manual uses the base screen of scan mode as an example when operations common to all modes are explained.
• The procedures in this manual assume that the base screen of scan mode appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is
touched.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
• Address book screen (alphabetical/custom index)
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
B
ase screen o
f
scan mo
d
e
Add
ress
b
oo
k
screen
13
Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. Set these keys to functions that you frequently
use to access the functions with a single touch. The customized keys are configured using "Customize Key Setting" in
the Web pages. The following keys appear by factory default:
• [Address Review] key
Touch this key to display a list of the destinations that have been selected in the address book. This is the same key
as the [Address Review] key in the address book screen.
• [File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch either of these keys to use the File function or Quick File function of document filing mode. For more
information on the document filing function, see the Document Filing Guide.
In USB memory mode...
Customized keys do not initially appear, however, up to three keys can be added.
Example: When "Dual Page Scan", "Job Build", and "Mixed Size Original" are assigned to the customized keys
Checking what special modes are selected
The key appears in the base screen when a special mode or 2-sided scanning is selected.
The key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
• Displaying a program key in the base screen will enable you to retrieve the program by simply touching the key.
☞ STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page 72)
• The functions that can be selected for the customized keys vary depending on the mode.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
The special mode settings cannot be changed from the review screen. To change a setting, touch the [OK] key to close the
review screen and then touch the [Special Modes] key and select the setting that you wish to change.
Auto
Auto
Auto
Job Build
Mixed Size Org
Dual Page Scan
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
These three keys can be changed
as desired.
Timer
Erase
Mixed Size
Original
On
Day of the Week:Monday
Time:21:30
Edge:1/2inch
Center:1/2inch
Function Review
OK
1
1
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
14
ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
This screen is used to select transmission destinations.
(1) This shows the selected destination.
(2) Number of displayed items selector key
Touch this key to change the number of destinations
(one-touch keys) displayed in the address book screen.
Select 5, 10, or 15 keys.
(3) [Condition Settings] key
Touch this key to select transmission settings. When the
key is touched, the base screen appears.
☞
BASE SCREEN (page 11)
(4) [Address Review] key
Touch this key to view a list of the selected destinations.
Destination selections can be changed.
☞
CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED
DESTINATIONS (page 22)
(5) [Address Entry] key
Touch this key to manually enter a destination address
instead of using a one-touch key.
☞
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 24)
(6) [Global Address Search] key
When the use of an LDAP server has been enabled in
the machine's Web pages, a transmission address can
be obtained from a global address book.
☞
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 25)
(7) [Sort Address] key
Touch to change the index tabs to custom indexes or to
display one-touch keys by send mode.
☞
CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS
IN THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN (page 15)
(8) [To] key
Touch this key to enter the selected destination
(one-touch key).
☞
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 21)
(9) [Cc] key
When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Cc] key when you
wish to send a "Carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
additional destination.
(10) [Bcc] key
When using Scan to E-mail, touch the [Bcc] key when
you wish to send a "Blind carbon copy" of the e-mail to an
additional destination.
When an address is specified as a Bcc recipient, other
recipients will not know that the address is a recipient.
This key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using
"Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
(11) One-touch key display
The destinations (one-touch keys) stored in each index
are displayed. This manual refers to keys in which
destinations and groups are stored as one-touch keys.
☞
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION (page 21)
(12) Index tabs
Touch this to change the displayed index tab.
☞
Index display (page 16)
(13) key
Touch this key to specify a destination using a search
number
*
.
* A 3-digit number assigned to a one-touch key or group
key when it is stored.
☞
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 23)
Frequent Use
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
To Cc Bcc
AAA AAA
(13)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(12)
(11)
(8)
(1)
(9) (10)
15
CHANGING THE DISPLAY OF ONE-TOUCH KEYS IN
THE ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN
You can show destinations of only a specific transmission mode in the address book screen, or change the displayed
index tabs from the alphabetical tabs to the custom tabs. The procedure for selecting destinations does not change.
• Icons appear in the one-touch keys in the address book to indicate which mode is used for transmission.
☞
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS BOOK (page 20)
• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 9).
• To store destinations for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed from the CD-ROM that accompanies
the machine. For more information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR
SCAN TO DESKTOP" (page 10).
• System Settings: Address Book
This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of Direct Address Keys Displayed Setting
This is used to change the default setting for the number of one-touch keys displayed in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
One of the following screens can be selected for the initial screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.
• Base screen of each mode (scan, Internet fax, fax, or data entry mode)
• Address book screen (alphabetical/custom index)
1
Touch the [Sort Address] key.
2
Change the display mode.
(1) Touch the key of the mode or tab that you
wish to display.
• To show only the one-touch keys of a particular send
mode, touch the desired mode key under "Address
Type".
• To change the index tabs to the custom indexes, touch
the [User] key under "Tab Switch".
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
To Cc
Sort Address
OK
Group
FTP/Desktop Network Folder
Fax
All
E-mail
ABC
User
Address TypeTab Switch
Internet Fax
(1) (2)
16
Index display
Indexes make it easy to search for a destination (one-touch key). Destinations are grouped on alphabetical index tabs.
To display a stored destination, touch the appropriate index tab. It is convenient to store frequently used destinations in
the [Frequent Use] index. Specify that a destination be displayed in the [Frequent Use] index when you store the
destination.
The destinations can also be displayed in alphabetical order by initial.
Each time the displayed index tab is touched, the display order changes in the following order: search numbers (page
23), ascending names, descending names. When the display order is changed, the display order of the other index tabs
also changes.
Index names can be changed using "Custom Index" in the system settings, allowing you to create groups of one-touch
keys that can be easily recognized. For more information on "Custom Index", see the System Settings Guide.
System Settings: Custom Index
This setting is used to store custom index names. The custom index where a one-touch key appears is specified when the
transmission destination is stored in the key.
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
To Cc
Index tabs
Frequent Use
ABCD
Frequent Use
ABCD
Frequent Use
ABCD
Ordered by search number (default) Ascending names Descending names
17
SCAN SEND SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for scanning and transmission. Select settings in the order shown below to
ensure smooth transmission.
For the detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this manual.
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
☞
SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 28)
SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page 37)
SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 42)
Change the mode.
Select the mode that you wish to use for scanning and
transmission.
☞
BASE SCREEN (page 11)
• Scan mode:
☞
SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE (page 28)
• USB memory mode:
☞
SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE (page 37)
• Internet fax mode:
☞
SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE (page 42)
• PC scan mode:
☞
7. SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode)
(page 112)
• Data entry mode:
☞
TRANSMITTING METADATA (page 119)
Select settings
Settings can be selected for scanning the original.
• Original (2-sided original, scan size, send size)
• Exposure • Resolution • File Format • Color Mode
☞
IMAGE SETTINGS (page 54)
• Send Settings (File Name)
Scan mode, Data entry mode:
☞
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,
AND BODY TEXT (page 33)
USB memory mode:
☞
ENTERING A FILE NAME (page 41)
Internet fax mode:
☞
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY
TEXT (page 45)
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
18
Special mode settings
Special modes can be selected.
☞ 4. SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
Enter the destination
Specify the destination of the scan transmission.
• [Address Book] key:
☞ RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE ADDRESS
BOOK (page 20)
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL
ADDRESS BOOK (page 25)
• [Address Entry] key:
☞ ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 24)
• key:
☞ USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A
DESTINATION (page 23)
• [Resend] key:
☞ USING THE RESEND FUNCTION (page 27)
Start scanning and transmission
Start scanning and transmission.
If the original is placed on the document glass, follow these
steps to start scanning and transmission:
(1) Press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the [BLACK
& WHITE START] key ( ).
(2) When scanning is finished, replace the original with the
next original.
(3) Press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the [BLACK
& WHITE START] key ( ).
(4) Repeat (2) and (3) until all originals have been scanned.
(5) Touch the [Read-End] key.
• The [COLOR START] key ( ) cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
• After the original is scanned, the settings revert to the default settings.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
System Settings (Administrator): Default Display Settings
The settings can be kept in effect a fixed period of time after scanning is completed.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
Resend
Scan
Ready to send.
8½x11
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Quick File
File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
Auto Auto
Auto
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan: Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
Start color scanning Start black and
white scanning
19
ORIGINAL SIZES
TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES
The following original sizes can be transmitted
* A long original can be transmitted. (When only scan destinations are selected for scan transmission or metadata transmission,
scanning will take place in Mono2 at a resolution of 300X300dpi or less.)
THE SIZE OF THE PLACED ORIGINAL
When a standard size original is placed, the original size is automatically detected and displayed in "Scan" in the base
screen.
When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size, the closest standard
size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size.
☞ Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 57)
Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 58)
STANDARD SIZES
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The factory default setting is "Inch-1".
List of original size detector settings
Minimum original size Maximum original size
Using the automatic document feeder 5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)
(131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width))
11-5/8" (height) x 31-1/2"* (width)
(297 mm (height) x 800 mm* (width))
Using the document glass
–
11-5/8" (height) x 17" (width)
(297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width))
Selections
Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Document glass
Document feeder tray
(automatic document feeder)
Inch-1 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216mm x 330mm )
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216mm x 330mm )
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
AB-1 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm
(8-1/2" x 13")
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
AB-3 A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
20
This chapter explains how to specify destination addresses, including selecting an address from the address book and
retrieving an address by entering a search number.
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM THE
ADDRESS BOOK
The address book screen shows stored destinations as one-touch keys.
The destinations are displayed in order by search number. To make it easy to find a destination, the destinations are
grouped by name on alphabetical index tabs.
The address book screen shows the destinations of all modes of the image send function. Each one-touch key shows
the name of the destination and an icon indicating the mode to be used.
2
ENTERING DESTINATIONS
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Review
Address Entry
Sort Address
Condition
Settings
To Cc
Icon Mode used
Fax
Scan to E-mail
Internet fax
Group key with multiple destinations,
such as Scan to E-mail and Internet fax
destinations
Icon Mode used
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to Desktop
• For information on storing addresses in the address book, see "STORING DESTINATION ADDRESSES FOR EACH
SCAN MODE IN THE ADDRESS BOOK" (page 9).
• To store destinations for Scan to Desktop, Network Scanner Tool must be installed from the CD-ROM that accompanies
the machine. For more information on storing destinations for Scan to Desktop, see "STORING A DESTINATION FOR
SCAN TO DESKTOP" (page 10).
System Settings: Address Book
This is used to store Scan to E-mail and Internet fax addresses in one-touch keys.
21
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION
A destination is retrieved by selecting its one-touch key.
1
Touch the [Address Book] key.
2
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the index tab where the destination
is stored.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
If you select an incorrect destination, touch the key again
to cancel the selection.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
• It is convenient to store frequently used destinations in the [Frequent Use] index. Specify that a destination be
displayed in the [Frequent Use] index when you store the destination.
• To continue specifying other destinations...
It is possible to specify multiple scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop), Internet fax, and fax
mode destinations when performing a broadcast transmission (maximum of 500 destinations). To specify multiple
destinations, repeat (1) through (3) of this step.
When performing Scan to E-mail, you can select a one-touch key and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key to
send Cc or Bcc copies of the e-mail.
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
• System Settings (Administrator): Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting
This setting determines whether or not the [Next Address] key can be omitted before specifying the next destination.
Factory default setting: the [Next Address] key can be omitted.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Switching of Display Order
This is used to disable switching of the order of display of the one-touch keys in the address book screen. The currently
selected display order will be the order that is used after this setting is enabled.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
1
2
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
To Cc
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
(3) (2)
(1)
22
CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED
DESTINATIONS
When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a
destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination).
1
Touch the [Address Review] key.
2
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.
To check Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the corresponding tab.
To cancel selection of a destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key.
AAA AAA BBB BBB
To Cc
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
DDD DDD
FFF FFF
To
001
003
005
007
009
011
002
004
006
008
010
012
Cc
1
2
Address Review
OK
AAA AAA
KKK KKK
MMM MMM
OOO OOO
QQQ QQQ
SSS SSS
BBB BBB
LLL LLL
NNN NNN
PPP PPP
RRR RRR
TTT TTT
Yes
No
Deselect the address?
AAA AAA
23
USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE
A DESTINATION
A destination stored in the address book can be retrieved using the key. This can be done in the base screen of any
of the modes or in the address book screen.
1
Touch the key.
2
Enter the 3-digit search number of the
address with the numeric keys.
When the 3-digit search number is entered, the stored address
is retrieved and specified as a destination.
• The search number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book.
• If you do not know the search number, print the one-touch address list using "Sending Address List" in the system
settings.
• When entering search numbers such as "001" and "011", "0" can be omitted. For example to enter "001", enter "1"
and touch the key or the [Next Address] key.
If an incorrect search number is entered...
Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) to clear the number and enter the correct number.
8½x11
Auto
Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
24
ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY
Destination addresses for Scan to E-mail and Internet fax can be entered manually.
1
Display the address input screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
(2) Touch the [Address Entry] key.
2
Enter the destination address.
(1) If you are in scan mode, touch the key of the
desired delivery method.
Normally the [To] key is touched. This specifies that the
entered e-mail address will be a recipient.
(2) Enter the destination address in the text
entry screen that appears.
Enter the destination address and touch the [OK] key.
For the procedure for entering text, see "6. ENTERING
TEXT" in the User's Guide.
• If you wish the destination to be a Cc destination, touch the [Cc] key.
• The [Bcc] key only appears when Bcc has been enabled using "Bcc Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
If you wish the destination to be a Bcc destination, touch the [Bcc] key.
• When Internet fax mode is selected, the base screen appears after the destination address is entered. However, if
"I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the reception report
request screen will appear. If you wish to receive a report, touch the [Yes] key. If not, touch the [No] key.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting
This setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent. When the destination is specified by directly
entering the address, a message will appear asking you if you wish to receive a report.
• System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen and the
delivery type selection screen.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
(1)
(2)
Cc
To
Select addressee type.
25
RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A
GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK
When an LDAP server is configured in the Web pages, you can look up an address in a global address book and
retrieve the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission.
1
Open the global address search screen.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the [Global Address Search] key.
2
Search for the destination.
If only one LDAP server has been stored, (1) and (2) are not
necessary. Go directly to (3).
(1) Touch the key of the LDAP server that you
wish to use.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
(3) Search for the destination in the search
screen.
Enter search characters for the destination and touch the
[Search] key. The search results will appear after a brief
interval.
For the procedure for entering text, see "6. ENTERING
TEXT" in the User's Guide.
How to search
Enter the search characters (maximum of 64 characters). The system will look for names starting with the entered
letters.
An asterisk can be used as follows:
XXX : Names beginning with "XXX".
XXX: Names that end with "XXX".
XXX : Names that include "XXX".
AA XX: Names that start with "AA" and end with "XX".
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
(2)
Server Change
Cancel OK
Server 2
Server 1
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7
(1) (2)
26
Storing a destination from a global address book in the machine's
address book
A destination address obtained from a global address book can be stored as a destination (one-touch key) in the
address book of the machine.
Touch the [Detail] key in the search results screen of the global address book (the screen of step 3 above) to display
information on the selected destination. Touch the [Register] key in the detailed information screen and then touch the
item to be used (the [E-mail] key or the [Internet Fax] key). The following screens will appear.
E-mail address registration screen Internet fax address registration screen
The information stored in the global address book is automatically entered. (The settings can be changed if needed. For
detailed information on each item, see "Address Control" in the System Settings Guide.) However, configure the items
below manually. To complete the storing procedure, touch the [Exit] key.
• [Initial] key: Enter the initials that determine where the destination will appear in the alphabetical index and the order
of one-touch key display. Enter up to 5 characters for the initials.
• [Index] key: Select the custom index in which the address will appear. You can also select whether or not the
destination will be included on the [Frequent Use] tab of the address book.
• [File Format] key: Set the format for Scan to E-mail. Default format settings have already been configured; however,
selecting format settings when you store a destination saves you the trouble of selecting the
settings each time you transmit to that destination.
• [Compression] key: Touch this key to set the compression mode when sending an Internet fax.
• [I-Fax Report] key: Touch this key to request a reception report when sending an Internet fax.
3
Select the destination.
(1) Touch the key of the desired destination.
If no names are found that match the search characters, a
message will appear. Touch the [OK] key to close the
message and touch the [Search Again] key to search
again.
(2) Touch the [To] key.
This enters the selected destination.
If you wish to enter another destination, repeat (1) and (2)
of this step.
• If more than 30 matches are found, a message will appear in the screen. Touch the [OK] key to close the message.
Up to 300 matches can appear. If no names are found that match the search letters, touch the [Search Again] key to
search again using more search letters.
• To check the information stored in a destination...
Touch the key of the destination and then touch the [Detail] key. The information stored for the selected destination
will appear. Check the information and then touch the [OK] key to return to the search results screen.
• If a screen for selecting the item to be used appears...
If the selected destination includes a fax number, telephone number, or other contact information in addition to the
e-mail address or Internet fax address, you will need to select which item you wish to use. Touch the [E-mail] key or
the [Internet Fax] key to retrieve the address for Scan to E-mail or Internet fax transmission.
1
2
XXX EEE
XXX FFF
XXX DDD
XXX CCC
XXX BBB
XXX AAA
Address Book
Search Again
Address Review
Condition
Settings
To Cc
Detail
XXX
(2) (1)
E-mail
Internet Fax
Fax
Direct Address / Individual
Exit
Search Number
Name
Initial
Index
Address
Key Name
File Format
001
AAA AAA
AAA AAA
Color/Grayscale :PDF/Medium
:PDF/MMR(G4)
B/W
A
User 1
E-mail Internet Fax Fax
Direct Address / Individual
Exit
Search Number
Name
Initial
Address
Key Name
Compression
I-Fax Report
001
AAA AAA
A User 1
AAA AAA
MH (G3)
Off
Index
27
USING THE RESEND FUNCTION
The destinations of the most recent 8 transmissions by Scan to E-mail, Internet fax and/or fax are stored. One of these
can be selected to resend to that destination.
1
Touch the [Resend] key.
2
Touch the key of the desired address.
The last 8 addresses used for transmission are displayed.
• When the [Resend] key is touched and a destination selected, the mode of the selected destination is automatically
selected.
• The following types of addresses are not stored for resending.
• A one-touch key in which multiple destinations are stored (group key).
• Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder addresses.
• Broadcasting destinations
• Addresses used only for BCC delivery
• Destinations transmitted to using a program
Resend
Scan
Ready to send.
8½x11
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
Auto Auto
Auto
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan: Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
Resend
Cancel
No.01
No.03
No.05
No.07
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
GGG GGG
No.02
No.04
No.06
No.08
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
HHH HHH
28
SENDING AN IMAGE IN SCAN MODE
This section explains the basic procedure for transmission in scan mode (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to
Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder).
3
TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. If you wish to change the mode or
destination, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the procedure below.
1
Place the original.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.
• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.
* To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 3.
• Place 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal)
orientation ( ), an incorrect size will be detected. For a 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A5R) size original, enter the original size
manually.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
Original size
detector
1
1
1
1
1
1
Document feeder tray
Place the original face up.
Portrait orientation*
Landscape orientation
Document glass
Place the original face down and align the
corner with the tip of the arrow mark in the
top left corner of the document glass scale.
Originals
29
2
Switch to scan mode and display the
image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [Scan] tab.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Color Mode] are indicated at the right of
each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞
AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 55), SPECIFYING THE
ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page56), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
EXPOSURE MODE (ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE) (page 62), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 64),
CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page 65), CHANGING THE COLOR MODE (page 69), 4. SPECIAL MODES
(page 70)
3
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
To enable the original to be scanned in the correct orientation
(the orientation of the top edge of the original that is shown at
the top of the display), specify the orientation in which the
original was placed in step 1.
(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
The original orientation is initially set to . If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not
necessary.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
(1) (2)
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
Auto 8½x11
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
100%
Image Orientation
(2)(1)
30
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
The icon on the key indicates the type of destination
stored in the key.
: Scan to E-mail
: Scan to FTP
: Scan to Network Folder
: Scan to Desktop
(3) Touch the [To] key.
The destination is specified.
• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, you can also send Cc or Bcc copies to other destinations. Touch the desired
destination and then touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
• Multiple destinations can be specified. To specify multiple destinations, repeat steps (2) and (3). Note that multiple
destinations cannot be specified when a Scan to Network Folder destination is specified.
• You can also select multiple one-touch keys and then touch the [To] key (or the [Cc] or [Bcc] key) to specify all
selected keys at once.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. For a Scan
to E-mail destination, you can enter an address manually or retrieve an address from a global address book. For
more information, see "2. ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
System Settings (Administrator): Bcc Setting
This setting enables or disables Bcc delivery. When enabled, the [Bcc] key appears in the address book screen.
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
31
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the
[Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is
only one page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the
next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a
beep will sound when scanning is completed and
transmission will take place.
• To scan in full color, press the [COLOR START] key ( ). To scan in black and white, press the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key ( ). If the color mode of the [COLOR START] key ( ) is set to [Auto], the color of the
original will be detected automatically and scanning in full color, grayscale or Mono2 will take place.
• If the file type is [Encrypt PDF], a password entry screen will appear when the [START] key is pressed.
Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the encrypted PDF file.
To cancel encrypted PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.
6
If the original was placed on the
document glass, replace it with the next
original and press the [COLOR START]
key ( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key ( ).
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
7
Touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.
or
EntryCancel
Please enter encrypt PDF
password.
or
Read-EndConfigure
Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
32
• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• When performing Scan to E-mail, take care not to send a file that is too large. In particular, multi-page files tend to be large.
When sending a multi-page file or other large file, it may be necessary to reduce the number of scanned pages or reduce
the send size.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu. (Administrator
rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the maximum number of
characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
• System Settings (Administrator): Image Send Settings
Use this to configure scanner transmission settings, including the default resolution and exposure settings, the default
color mode and file format, the file compression method for broadcasting, the file size limit for Scan to E-mail, and the
default sender and destination.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.
33
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, REPLY-TO,
AND BODY TEXT
The subject, file name, reply-to, and body text can be changed when performing a scan transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.
• When performing Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan to Network Folder, only the file name is used.
• If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
• If the sender name is not changed, the name set in "Default Sender Set" in the system settings is used. If this is not
configured, the reply address in [Network Settings] - [Services Settings] - [SMTP Settings] in the Web pages is used.
(Administrator rights are required.)
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
• For the procedure for entering text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's Guide.
1
Touch the [Send Settings] key.
If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or Scan
to Network Folder destination, go to step 4.
2
To change the subject, touch the
[Subject] key.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
Send Settings
OK
Subject
File Name
Reply-To
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
34
3
Enter the subject.
(1) Touch a Pre-Set text key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web pages,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters* can be edited in the touch panel.)
* When the number of preset keys displayed is 6
4
To change the file name, touch the [File
Name] key.
• The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.
• If you are sending to a Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, or
Scan to Network Folder destination, go to step 9.
5
To change "Reply-To", touch the
[Reply-To] key.
If user authentication is being used, the information of the user that logged in will be applied, and thus "Reply-To"
cannot be changed.
No.01 Sub: Schedule coordination
No.02 Sub: Monthly Schedule
No.04
No.06No.05
No.08No.07
No.10No.09
No.12No.11
No.03 Sub: Minutes of planning m
Subject
OK
Cancel
Direct Entry
1
5
(2)(1)
Send Settings
OK
Subject
File Name
Reply-To
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting
Send Settings
OK
Subject
File Name
Reply-To
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
35
6
Specify a user for "Reply-To" and touch
the [OK] key.
• Touch the key that you wish to use for "Reply-To".
• You can touch the [Global Address Search] key to specify a
user stored in a global address book for "Reply-To". You can
also touch the [Address Entry] key to directly enter an e-mail
address.
• To specify the return address, you can touch the key and enter a user number that has been previously stored
using "User List" in the system settings (administrator).
• A key can only be selected for the return address if an e-mail address has been stored for that user in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator).
7
To change the body text, touch the
[Body Text] key.
8
Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
key.
• To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Web page,
touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the body text, touch the [Edit] key.
• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)
• To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. This key clears not only the selected line but also the entire
message.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.
All
ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
3
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
KKK KKK LLL LLL
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Reply-To
User
ABC
OK
Cancel
12
186
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting
AAA AAA
Send Settings
OK
Subject
File Name
Reply-To
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
Body Entry
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached scanned data,
which you have requested.
Clear All
OK
Edit
Pre-Set Select
36
9
Touch the [OK] key.
The [Add 'Reply to' to Cc] checkbox can be selected to send a Cc copy to the sender.
When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.
• System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.
• System Settings: Default Sender Set
This is used to store the sender name and e-mail address that is used when a sender is not selected.
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting
AAA AAA
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached sca
Send Settings
OK
Subject
File Name
Reply-To
Body Text
Add 'Reply to' to Cc
37
SENDING AN IMAGE IN USB MEMORY MODE
Follow the steps below to send a scanned image to a commercially available USB memory device that has been
connected to the machine. This stores the file in the USB device.
• Consult your dealer or retailer for USB memory devices that can be used.
• When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot
be changed. To switch to USB memory mode, touch the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then follow the steps below.
1
Connect the USB memory to the USB
connector (Type A) on the machine.
2
Place the original.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.
• When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.
* To place a large portrait-oriented original, place it as shown above in "Landscape orientation" and specify the
placement orientation in step 4.
•
Place 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation
( ), an incorrect size will be detected. For a 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A5R) size original, enter the original size manually.
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
Original size
detector
1
1
1
1
1
1
Document feeder tray
Place the original face up.
Portrait orientation*
Landscape orientation
Document glass
Place the original face down and align the
corner with the tip of the arrow mark in the
top left corner of the document glass scale.
Originals
38
3
Switch to USB memory mode and
display the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [USB Mem. Scan] tab
If the [USB Mem. Scan] tab does not appear, touch the
tab to move the screen.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination.
• If a destination of another mode has been previously specified, a message will appear when you change to USB
memory mode indicating that the destination setting will be cleared. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen and
go to the next step.
• The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], [File Format], and [Color Mode] are indicated at the right
of each key. To change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞
AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 55), SPECIFYING
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page56), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE
AND EXPOSURE MODE (ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE) (page 62), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 64),
CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page 65), CHANGING THE COLOR MODE (page 69), 4. SPECIAL MODES
(page 70)
4
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
To enable the original to be scanned in the correct orientation
(the orientation in which the top edge of the original appears at
the top of the display), specify the orientation in which the
original was placed in step 2.
(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 3.
The original orientation is initially set to . If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not
necessary.
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Scan
Auto
Auto
Scan:
Send:
Auto
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
File Name
8½x11
(1)(2)
USB Mem. Scan/Original
OK
Auto
Auto 8½x11
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
100%
Image Orientation
(2)(1)
39
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the
[Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is
only one page, go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the
next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a
beep will sound when scanning is completed and
transmission will begin. Go to step 8.
Do not disconnect the USB memory until "Sending data has been completed." appears in the touch panel.
• To scan in full color, press the [COLOR START] key ( ). To scan in black and white, press the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key ( ). If the color mode of the [COLOR START] key ( ) is set to [Auto], the color of the
original will be detected automatically and scanning in full color, grayscale or Mono2 will take place.
• If the file type is [Encrypt PDF], a password entry screen will appear when the [START] key is pressed.
Touch the [Entry] key to open the keyboard screen, enter a password (maximum of 32 characters), and touch the
[OK] key. The recipient must use the password entered here to open the encrypted PDF file.
To cancel encrypted PDF, touch the [Cancel] key. The format settings screen will appear to let you change the file
type. Select a new file type and press the [START] key to begin transmission.
6
If the original was placed on the
document glass, replace it with the next
original and press the [COLOR START]
key ( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key ( ).
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
7
Touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be changed
when scanning an even-numbered original page.
or
EntryCancel
Please enter encrypt PDF
password.
or
Read-EndConfigure
Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
40
8
When "Sending data has been
completed." appears in the touch panel,
disconnect the USB memory.
Do not disconnect the USB memory while "Processing data." or "Sending data." appears in the touch panel.
• When transmission to USB memory is completed, "Sending data has been completed." is displayed. After a brief interval
the message is cleared and the base screen of image send mode reappears. (The base screen of image send mode is the
screen that appears when the [IMAGE SEND] key is touched.)
• If the USB memory becomes full during scanning...
A message will appear and scanning will stop. The scanned data will not be stored. However, if the file format is set to
JPEG and the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox is selected, files for which scanning is completed will be stored in USB
memory.
• To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
• To cancel scanning to USB memory...
While scanned data is being stored in the USB memory, the message "Sending data." and the [Cancel] key appear in the
touch panel. To cancel the storing operation, touch the [Cancel] key.
• System Settings: USB-Device Check
This is used to check the connection of a USB device to the machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): Scan Settings
This is used to set the default color mode and file format.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Scan Function
The use of PC scan mode and USB memory mode can be prohibited.
41
ENTERING A FILE NAME
The file name can be directly entered when performing a scan transmission.
Touch the [File Name] key. A text entry screen will appear. Enter the file name and touch the [OK] key.
• If the file name is not entered, the settings in the Web page are used.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's Guide.
To check the entered file name, touch the [File Name] key in the base screen once again.
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Scan
Auto
Auto
Scan: Send:
Auto
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
File Name
42
SENDING A FAX IN INTERNET FAX MODE
When a default address is configured in "Default Address Setting" in the system settings (administrator), the mode cannot be
changed, the destination cannot be changed, and destinations cannot be added. To switch to Internet fax mode, touch the
[Cancel] key in the touch panel and follow the steps below.
1
Place the original.
• Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or
face down on the document glass.
• Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and
prevent correct detection of the document size.
• Place 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A5) size originals in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal)
orientation ( ), an incorrect size will be detected. For a 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A5R) size original, enter the original size
manually.
• Image rotation
8-1/2" x 11" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A4, B5R, and A5R) originals are rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in
8-1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4R, B5, or A5) orientation. (8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4R, B5, and A5)
originals cannot be rotated for transmission.)
• Originals cannot be scanned in succession from both the automatic document feeder and the document glass and
sent in a single transmission.
System Settings (Administrator): Rotation Sending Setting
This is used to select whether or not a scanned original image is rotated before transmission.
The default setting is: rotate 8-1/2" x 11" to 8-1/2" x 11"R, and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4 to A4R, B5R to
B5, and A5R to A5).
2
Switch to Internet fax mode and display
the image settings screen.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The current settings for [Original], [Exposure], [Resolution], and [File Format] are indicated at the right of each key. To
change a setting, touch the appropriate key.
☞
AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 55), SPECIFYING THE
ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 56), CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND
EXPOSURE MODE (ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE) (page 62), CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 64),
CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page 65), 4. SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
Original size
detector
Transmission
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
I-Fax Manual
Reception
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
200X100dpi
TIFF-F
8½x11
(1) (2)
43
3
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
When specifying the orientation of the image to be transmitted,
specify the orientation of the original placed in step 1.
(1) Touch the appropriate orientation key.
If the top edge of the original is up, touch the key. If
the top edge of the original is to the left, touch the
key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the screen of step 2.
The original orientation is initially set to . If the original was placed with the top edge up, this step is not
necessary.
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the key of the desired destination.
The icon appears in one-touch keys in which Internet
fax addresses are stored.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
The destination is specified.
• After a one-touch key is touched, if the screen is changed without touching the [To] key, the destination is
automatically specified.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter a destination or look up a destination in a global address book. For more information, see "2.
ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
•
If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End]
key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page,
go to step 7. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a
beep will sound when scanning is completed and
transmission will take place.
6
If the original was placed on the
document glass, replace it with the next
original and press the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key ( ).
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
Internet Fax/Original
OK
Auto
Auto 8½x11
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
100%
Image Orientation
(2)(1)
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
To Cc
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
(3) (2)
44
7
Touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when "2in1" or "Card Shot" is selected in the special modes, only the exposure can be
changed when scanning an even-numbered original page.
• When all originals have been scanned, "Job stored." will be displayed together with a job control number. This number can
be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast
transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, making a note of
the number is useful for checking the result.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• Storing a mail signature
You can have preset text automatically added at the end of e-mail messages as a mail signature. This is convenient when
you wish to have a corporate policy or other preset text appear at the bottom of e-mail messages. To store the text for the
mail signature, click [Application Settings] and then [Network Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu. (Administrator
rights are required.) Up to 900 characters can be entered. (The mail signature is not included in the maximum number of
characters that can be entered in the e-mail message.)
Use "Pre-Setting Mail Signature" in the system settings (administrator) to specify whether or not a mail signature is added.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Send Settings
This is used to select Internet fax transmission settings such as the receive report setting, rotation setting, size restriction
setting, and sender information attachment setting.
• System Settings (Administrator): Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Use this setting to specify whether or not a mail signature is added at the end of e-mail messages. By factory default, a
mail signature is not added.
Read-End
Configure
Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
45
CHANGING THE SUBJECT, FILE NAME, AND BODY
TEXT
The subject, file name, and body text can be changed when performing an Internet fax transmission. Preset items can
be selected or text can be directly entered.
• If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Web page are used.
• Selections for the subject, file name, and body text are configured by clicking [Application Settings] and then [Network
Scanner Settings] in the Web page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
• For the procedure for entering text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's Guide.
1
Touch the [Send Settings] key.
2
To change the subject, touch the
[Subject] key.
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
I-Fax Manual
Reception
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
200X100dpi
TIFF-F
8½x11
Send Settings
OK
Subject
File Name
Body Text
46
3
Enter the subject.
(1) Touch a pre-set text key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• If you wish to directly enter the text, touch the [Direct Entry] key to open the text entry screen. Enter the text and
touch the [OK] key.
• The text in a pre-set text key can be edited by touching the pre-set text key and then the [Direct Entry] key. The text
entry screen will appear with the selected pre-set text entered. (When a destination is stored using the Web page,
up to 80 characters can be entered. However, only 54 characters* can be edited in the touch panel.)
* When the number of preset keys displayed is 6
4
To change the file name, touch the [File
Name] key.
The file name is entered in the same way as the subject.
5
To change the body text, touch the
[Body Text] key.
No.01 Sub: Schedule coordination
No.02 Sub: Monthly Schedule
No.04
No.06No.05
No.08No.07
No.10No.09
No.12No.11
No.03 Sub: Minutes of planning m
Subject
OK
Cancel
Direct Entry
1
5
(2)(1)
Send Settings
OK
Subject
File Name
Body Text
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting
Send Settings
OK
Subject
File Name
Body Text
47
6
Enter the body text and touch the [OK]
key.
• To select a pre-set message previously stored in the Web
page, touch the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the message, touch the [Edit] key.
• 1800 characters can be entered. (A line break counts as one character.)
• To clear all entered text, touch the [Clear All] key. This key clears not only the selected line but also the entire
message.
• Each line of the entered text can be selected with the keys. To edit the selected line, touch the [Edit] key.
The text entry screen will appear with the selected text entered.
7
Touch the [OK] key.
When storing pre-set text for the subject and file name in the Web pages, up to 80 characters can be entered.
System Settings (Administrator): The Number of File Name/Subject/Body Keys Displayed Setting
The setting for the number of subject keys and file name keys displayed in one screen can be changed to 6, 12, or 18.
Body Entry
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached scanned data,
which you have requested.
Clear All
OK
Edit
Pre-Set Select
Sub: Schedule coordination meeting
Material for planning meeting
Thank you for your continuous support. We have attached sca
Send Settings
OK
Subject
File Name
Body Text
48
SENDING THE SAME IMAGE TO MULTIPLE
DESTINATIONS (Broadcast Transmission)
The same scanned image can be sent to multiple scan modes (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Desktop),
Internet fax mode, and fax mode destinations in a single operation. Up to 500 destinations (including a combined
maximum of 200 Scan to FTP and Scan to Desktop destinations) can be selected in one broadcast operation.
If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
Originals
Transmission
49
2
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch the one-touch key of the desired
destination.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
The destination is specified.
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) until all
destinations are selected.
• To add Cc or Bcc recipients, select a recipient and touch the [Cc] key or the [Bcc] key.
• If "Must Input Next Address Key at Broadcast Setting" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), touch the
[Next Address] key before specifying the next destination.
• One-touch keys that cannot be used for broadcast transmission are grayed out to prevent selection.
• If a Scan to FTP (Hyperlink) address is specified in a broadcast transmission, hyperlink e-mail transmission will not
take place.
• If you frequently use broadcasting to send images to the same group of destinations, it is convenient to store those
destinations in a group key.
3
Touch the [Address Review] key.
4
Check the destinations and then touch
the [OK] key.
If the transmission includes Cc or Bcc destinations, touch the [Cc] tab or the [Bcc] tab to check those destinations.
To cancel a specified destination...
Touch the one-touch key of the destination that you wish to cancel. A message will appear to confirm the deletion.
Touch the [Yes] key.
☞
CHECKING AND DELETING THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 22)
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
AAA AAA BBB BBB
To Cc
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
DDD DDD
FFF FFF
To
001
003
005
007
009
011
002
004
006
008
010
012
Cc
1
2
Address Review
OK
AAA AAA
KKK KKK
MMM MMM
OOO OOO
QQQ QQQ
SSS SSS
BBB BBB
LLL LLL
NNN NNN
PPP PPP
RRR RRR
TTT TTT
50
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder
tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan
each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next
page and press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages
have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
If Internet fax or fax destinations are included in the broadcast transmission, the [COLOR START] key ( )
cannot be pressed. Scanning will take place in Mono2.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
or
51
BROADCAST TRANSMISSIONS THAT INCLUDE
INTERNET FAX DESTINATIONS
When a broadcast transmission includes both scan mode and Internet Fax mode destinations, the Internet Fax mode
settings (original orientation and other various settings) are given priority. When performing this type of broadcast
transmission, note the information below.
Resending to unsuccessful broadcast transmission destinations
The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the
addresses failed, resend the image to those addresses.
Original placement orientation
The orientation of Internet fax mode is given priority. When "Rotation Sending Setting"
is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the image is rotated 90 degrees. For
this reason, in some cases the image may not be displayed in the correct orientation.
Send size
When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode, transmission is only
possible in 8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R) size.
Exposure
The Internet fax settings are given priority.
Resolution
When the file format is set to [TIFF-S] in Internet fax mode and a high resolution
setting is selected in scan mode, the resolution will be changed to [200X200dpi].
File compression mode
The compression mode will be changed to the compression mode set in
"Compression Mode at Broadcasting" in the system settings (administrator).
Color scanning
Scanning will take place in Mono2 regardless of the color mode setting.
Special modes
2in1
This cannot be selected in scan mode, however, if selected in Internet fax mode, it will
also be applied to scan destinations.
Scan file size
If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes destinations for which an
attachment size limit has been set using "Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
(E-mail)" or "Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)" in
the system settings (administrator), the limit will also apply to destinations for which a
limit is not set. (The limitation setting of Scan to E-mail or Internet fax is given priority.)
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
2
Display the jobs completed screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
display.
(2) Touch the [Complete] key.
If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will
appear in each of those modes.
JOB STATUS
Print Job
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Scan to
Address Set Time
Pages
Status
Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
DDD DDD
10:05 04/01 000/001
Waiting
10:22 04/01 000/004
Waiting
10:30 04/01 000/010
Waiting
10:33 04/01 000/010
Waiting
1
1
Complete
Detail
Stop/Delete
Job Queue
Priority
(1) (1) (2)
52
3
Display details on the broadcast
transmission.
(1) Touch the key of the completed broadcast
transmission.
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.
"Broadcastxxxx" will appear as the address of the broadcast job key. The job control number that appeared in the
touch panel when scanning ended appears in "xxxx".
4
Resend the image to the unsuccessful
destinations.
(1) Touch the [Failed] tab.
(2) Touch the [Retry] key.
• The steps to follow after the [Retry] key is touched differ depending on whether or not the document filing function is
used.
Not using document filing
You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the
steps of the broadcast transmission.
Using document filing
You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the
document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to rescan the original.)
• If the [All Destinations] tab is touched in (1), all destinations will be displayed. The [Retry] key that appears in the
screen can be touched to resend to all the destinations.
Broadcast0001 10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000
Broadcast0002
Broadcast0003
DDD DDD
10:05 04/01 001/001
Send OK
10:22 04/01 004/004
Send OK
10:30 04/01 010/010
Send OK
1
1
Complete
Detail
Call
Job Queue
Print Job
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Scan to
Address Start Time
Pages
Status
(1) (2)
Detail
OK
Retry
Broadcast0001
EEE EEE NG000000
NG000000FFF FFF
Start TimeAddress Status
10:01 04/01
10:10
002
010 04/01
1
1
Failed
File
All Destinations
(1) (2)
53
SENDING AN INTERNET FAX FROM A
COMPUTER (PC-I-Fax)
A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as an Internet fax (PC-I-Fax function). Internet faxes are sent using the
PC-I-Fax function in the same way as documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your
computer and then select the Print command in the software application. Image data for transmission will be created and
sent as an Internet fax.
For the procedures for using this function, see the PC-Fax driver Help.
• To send an Internet fax using the PC-I-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed and then updated using the
CD-ROM that accompanies the Internet fax expansion kit. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows computer.
• This function can only be used for transmission. Internet faxes received on the machine cannot be received to a computer
that is connected to the machine.
PC-I-Fax
transmission
54
IMAGE SETTINGS
Settings for scanning the original are selected in the base screen of each mode. The current state of each setting
appears to the right of the key used to select the setting.
(1) [Original] key
Touch this key to set the scan size, send size, and
orientation of the original, and select 2-sided scanning
settings.
☞ AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF
AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) (page 55),
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND
SEND SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce) (page 56)
(2) [Exposure] key
Touch this key to select the exposure for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND EXPOSURE
MODE (ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE) (page 62)
(3) [Resolution] key
Touch this key to select the resolution for scanning.
☞ CHANGING THE RESOLUTION (page 64)
(4) [File Format] key
Touch this key to change the format (file type) of the
scanned image file.
☞ CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT (page 65)
(5) [Color Mode] key
Touch this key to select the color mode for scanning.
This key does not appear in Internet fax mode.
☞ CHANGING THE COLOR MODE (page 69)
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
55
AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN
ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original)
The automatic document feeder can be used to automatically scan both sides of an original.
1
Select the mode and display the image
settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
2
Specify the binding style of the 2-sided
original (book or tablet) and the
orientation in which the original is placed.
(1) Touch the [2-Sided Booklet] key or the
[2-Sided Tablet] key.
A book and a tablet are bound as shown below.
(2)
Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation] key.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
To cancel 2-sided scanning, touch the highlighted key so that it is no longer highlighted.
2-sided scanning automatically turns off after the transmission operation is completed.
2-sided original Front and reverse sides are scanned
Scan transmission
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
(2)
(1)
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
Auto 8½x11
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
100%
Image Orientation
(1) (2)
(3)
A
C
E
G
AB
EF
J
L
KL
Book Tablet
56
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE AND SEND
SIZE (Enlarge/Reduce)
When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected and displayed in the base screen.
The size of the placed original is indicated as the scan size, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the send size.
In the above screen, the scan size (the placed original) is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) and the send size is auto. For example, if the
scan size is 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) and the send size is 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5), the image will be reduced before transmission.
• Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.
☞
STANDARD SIZES (page 19)
• If the original is a non-standard size, you must set the scan size manually.
☞
Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 57)
Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values) (page 58)
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
The image is reduced
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5)
before transmission
"Scan Size"
"Send Size" is set
to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(B5)
Transmission
57
Specifying the original scan size (by paper size)
If the original is a non-standard size or you wish to change the scan size, touch the [Original] key to specify the original
size manually. Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and follow the steps below.
1
Select the mode and display the image
settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the
right of the [Original] key.
2
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
3
Specify the scan size.
(1) Touch the appropriate original size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• If you are sending a long original, touch the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long
original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 31-1/2" (800 mm) (the maximum height is 11-5/8" (297 mm)).
• To specify an AB size for the scan size, touch the [AB Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the
scan size.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
(2)
(1)
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
Auto 8½x11
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
100%
Image Orientation
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
5½x8½
5½x8½R
8½x11
8½x11R
8½x13(216x330)
11x17
8½x14
Size Input
Long Size
Inch
AB
Manual
Manual
(2)(1)
58
Specifying the original scan size (by numerical values)
When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card, follow these steps to specify the original size. The width can
be from 2-1/2" to 17" (64 mm to 432 mm), and the height can be from 2-1/2" to 11-5/8" (64 mm to 297 mm).
4
Touch the [OK] key.
When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. In addition, when only scan
destinations are selected for scan transmission or metadata transmission, scanning will take place in Mono2.
1
Select the mode and display the image
settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
The automatically detected original size appears to the
right of the [Original] key.
2
Touch the [Scan Size] key.
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
5½x8½
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
100%
Image Orientation
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
(2)
(1)
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
Auto 8½x11
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
100%
Image Orientation
59
3
Touch the [Size Input] key.
4
Enter the scan size (original size).
(1) Touch the [X] key and enter the X
(horizontal) dimension with the keys.
(2) Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical)
dimension with the keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
Touch the [OK] key next to the [Cancel] key to complete
the setting and return to the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Size Detector Setting
This is used to set the size entry screen to "inch units" or "mm units".
5
Touch the [OK] key.
The specified size appears in the [Scan Size] key.
• When the scan size is specified by numerical values, the send size cannot be specified.
• When the automatic document feeder is used, an original longer than 17" (432 mm) can be scanned (maximum width
31-1/2" (800 mm)). In this case, touch the [Long Size] key in the screen of step 3.
☞
Specifying the original scan size (by paper size) (page 57)
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
5½x8½
5½x8½R
8½x11
8½x11R
8½x13(216x330)
11x17
8½x14
Size Input
Long Size
Inch
AB
Manual
8½x11
Size Input
Scan/Original
OK
OK
Cancel
11
17
(2 1/2 17)
inch
(2 1/2 11 5/8)
inch
X
Y
(3)(1), (2)
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
X17 Y11
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
Image Orientation
60
Specifying the send size of the image
Specify the send size as a paper size. If a send size bigger than the scan size is selected, the image will be enlarged. If
a send size smaller than the scan size is selected, the image will be reduced.
• The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by
numerical values.
• The send size cannot be specified when [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode. (The send size is fixed at
8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R).)
1
Select the mode and display the image
settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
(2) Touch the [Original] key.
2
Touch the [Send Size] key.
3
Specify the send size.
(1) Touch the desired send size key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• Depending on the paper size specified for the "Scan Size", it may not be possible to select some sizes for the "Send
Size". Size keys that cannot be specified for the "Send Size" are grayed out to prevent selection.
• To specify an AB size for the send size, touch the [AB Inch] key to highlight the [AB] side and then specify the
send size.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
(2)
(1)
Auto 8½x11
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
100%
Image Orientation
Scan/Original
OK
Auto
5½x8½
5½x8½R
8½x11
8½x11R
8½x13(216x330)
11x17
8½x14
Inch
AB
Manual
8½x11
(2)(1)
61
4
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the appropriate [Image Orientation]
key.
If this setting is not correct when sending an image with a
changed ratio, a suitable image may not be transmitted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the "Scan Size" and the "Send Size".
Scan/Original
OK
11x17
Auto 8½x11
Scan Size
2-Sided
Tablet
2-Sided
Booklet
Send Size
129%
Image Orientation
(1)
(2)
62
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND EXPOSURE MODE
(ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE)
The exposure can be changed to match the darkness of the original. In scan mode and USB memory mode, the
exposure mode can be set to match the original image type.
Refer the following tables to select appropriate settings.
How to select the exposure
How to select the original image type
Exposure When to select
Auto This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original.
Manual
1-2 Select this setting when the original consists of dark text.
3 Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light).
4-5 Select this setting when the original consists of faint text.
Setting Description
Text/Prtd. Photo
This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
Text/Photo
This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.
Text Use this mode for regular text documents.
Photo Use this mode to scan photos.
Printed Photo
This mode is best for scanning printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or
catalogue.
Map This mode is best for scanning the color shading and fine details found on most maps.
1
Select the mode and display the
exposure settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
(2) Touch the [Exposure] key.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
(2)
(1)
63
2
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key.
This message does not appear in USB memory mode or
Internet fax mode. Go to the next step.
If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes both scan mode destinations and Internet fax destinations, the
exposure settings for Internet fax mode will have priority.
3
Scan mode, USB memory mode
Internet fax mode
Select the exposure and original image
type.
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(2) Adjust the exposure with the keys.
When the exposure is set to [Auto], the keys
cannot be used.
The exposure darkens when the key is touched,
and lightens when the key is touched.
To return to auto exposure adjustment, touch the [Auto]
key.
(3) Select the original image type.
Touch the original image type key that matches the
original image type.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
• In Internet fax mode, the original image type and moiré reduction cannot be selected.
• When the exposure is set to [Auto], [Printed Photo], [Photo] and [Map] do not appear.
• When the original image type is set to [Printed Photo], [Photo], or [Map], [Auto] will not appear.
• To reduce the occurrence of line patterns (moiré effect) when scanning printed matter, touch the [Moiré Reduction]
checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the exposure setting can be changed each time you change
pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun.
(However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the exposure can be changed each time a new set of originals is
inserted.)
System Settings (Administrator): Default Exposure Settings
This is used to change the default exposure setting.
When Fax/I-Fax address is included,
exposure setting shared among Fax/
I-Fax/ Scanner mode is selected.
OK
Moiré Reduction
Scan/Exposure
OK
Original Image Type
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Text/Photo
Photo
Printed
Photo
Text
Map
Auto
Manual
3
1
5
(4)(2) (3)(1)
Internet Fax/Exposure
OK
Auto
Manual
3
1
5
(4)(2)(1)
64
CHANGING THE RESOLUTION
The resolution setting can be selected.
1
Select the mode and display the image
settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
(2) Touch the [Resolution] key.
2
Scan mode, USB memory mode
Internet fax mode
Select the resolution.
(1) Touch the key of the desired resolution.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
In Internet fax mode, the [Half Tone] key can be touched to select halftone (except when [200X100dpi] is selected).
When the original has many gradations of light and dark such as a photo or color illustration, halftone provides a more
attractive image than regular transmission.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
(2)
(1)
Scan/Resolution
OK
300X300dpi
200X200dpi
100X100dpi
400X400dpi
600X600dpi
(2)(1)
Internet Fax/Resolution
OK
200X400dpi
200X100dpi
200X200dpi
400X400dpi
600X600dpi
Half Tone
(2)(1)
65
How to select the resolution
For normal text originals, 200X200dpi (200X100dpi in Internet fax mode) produces an image that is sufficiently legible.
For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600X600dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high
resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible. In this event,
reduce the number of pages scanned or take other measures to decrease the file size.
☞ CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT
Specifying the send size of the image (page 60)
CHANGING THE FILE FORMAT
Changing the format (scan mode and USB memory mode)
The file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image can be changed at the
time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can
be changed.
• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, the resolution setting can be changed each time you
change pages. When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed once scanning has
begun. (However, when "Job Build" is used in the special modes, the resolution can be changed each time a new set of
originals is inserted.)
• When [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode, only [200X100dpi] or [200X200dpi] can be selected.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Resolution Setting
This is used to change the default resolution setting.
The file format for sending a scanned image is specified when the destination is stored in a one-touch key; however, you can
change the format at the time of transmission.
1
Select the mode and display the image
settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
(2) Touch the [File Format] key.
2
Read the displayed message and touch
the [OK] key.
The message does not appear in USB memory mode. Go to
the next step.
8½x11
Auto
Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
(2)
(1)
(1)
Select a file format to apply it to
all scan destinations.
OK
66
3
Set the format.
● Scanning in Mono2
(1) Select the file type.
(2) Select the compression mode.
● Scanning in color/grayscale
(1) Touch the indicated key to select
[Color/Grayscale] mode.
When [Color/Grayscale] is highlighted, [Color/Grayscale]
mode is selected.
(2) Select the file type.
(3) Select the compression ratio.
High compression results in a smaller file size, however,
the image quality is slightly degraded.
• The [Programmed] key does not appear in USB memory mode.
• When this screen is displayed, the setting screen of [B/W] mode initially appears.
• The format setting for [B/W] mode is the file format that is used when the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) is
pressed with the B/W mode set to [Mono2].
• The format setting for [Color/Grayscale] mode is the file format that is used when the [COLOR START] key
( ) is pressed, or when the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) is pressed with the B/W mode set to
[Grayscale].
• The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Color/Grayscale] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set
separately for each. (When [JPEG] is selected for [Color/Grayscale] mode, [TIFF] is automatically selected for [B/W]
mode.)
Scan/File Format
OK
PDF
MMR (G4)
B/W
TIFF
Encrypt PDF
Programmed
None
MH (G3)
Color/Gray
Specified Pages per File
File Type
(1-99)
Compression Mode
(1) (2)
Medium
B/W
JPEG
High
Color/Gray
Scan/File Format
OK
PDF
TIFF
Encrypt PDF
Programmed
Low
Specified Pages per File
File Type
(1-99)
Compression Ratio
(2) (3) (1)
67
4
To change the number of pages per file,
enter the number of pages and exit the
format settings.
(1) Touch the [Specified Pages per File]
checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
(2) Set the number of pages per file with the
keys.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
• When a checkmark does not appear in the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox , one file is created for all
scanned pages.
• When [Specified Pages per File] is selected, consecutive numbers are added to the created file names.
• When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, one file is created for each page (a file cannot be created for multiple
pages). For this reason, the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox does not appear.
When [Encrypt PDF] is selected, a password entry screen will appear when the [START] key is pressed to begin scanning
and transmission.
Touch the [Entry] key in the displayed screen to open the keyboard screen. Enter a password (maximum of 32 characters)
and touch the [OK] key. Scanning and transmission will begin.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial File Format Setting
This sets the default file format setting for scanner transmission.
Medium
B/W
JPEG
High
Color/Gray
Scan/File Format
OK
PDF
TIFF
Encrypt PDF
Programmed
Low
Specified Pages per File
File Type
(1-99)
Compression Ratio
(3)
(1)
(2)
1
69
CHANGING THE COLOR MODE
This procedure is used to change the color mode used to scan the original when the [COLOR START] key ( ) or
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) is pressed.
This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
Start key Mode Scanning method
[COLOR START] key
Auto
The machine detects whether the original is color or black and white and
automatically selects full color or black and white (Mono2 or Grayscale)
scanning.
Full Color
The original is scanned in full color. This mode is best for full color originals
such as catalogues.
[BLACK & WHITE
START] key
Mono2
Colors in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for
text-only originals.
Grayscale
The colors in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of gray
(grayscale).
1
Select the mode and display the color
mode settings screen.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to
use.
(2) Touch the [Color Mode] key.
2
Select the color mode.
(1)
Touch the key of the mode to be used when
the [COLOR START] key ( ) is pressed.
You can select whether black & white scanning will take
place in Mono2 or grayscale when [Auto] is selected and a
black and white original is scanned. Note that if the file
format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in grayscale.
(2)
Touch the key of the mode to be used when the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) is pressed.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
• System Settings (Administrator): Default Color Mode Settings
The default color mode can be changed.
• System Settings (Administrator): Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode
This prohibits selection of the black and white original scanning setting when [Auto] is selected for the color mode.
8½x11
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
Address Review
(2)
(1)
(1)
Scan/Color Mode
OK
Mono2
Grayscale
Grayscale
Mono2
Auto
Full Color
Color Mode
B/W Mode
(2) (3)(1)
70
This chapter explains special modes that can be used in scan send mode.
SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is pressed in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. When the [OK]
key is touched in the special modes screen, the selected settings are entered and the base screen reappears.
Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode
(1) [Program] key*
1,
2
☞
STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs) (page
72)
(2) [Erase] key
☞
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase) (page 74)
(3) [Dual Page Scan] key
☞
SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE
PAGES (Dual Page Scan) (page 77)
(4) [Timer] key*
1
☞
SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission) (page 79)
(5) [Suppress Background] key
☞
WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE
(Suppress Background) (page 82)
(6) [Card Shot] key
☞
SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO A
SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot) (page 84)
(7) [Job Build] key
☞
SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job
Build) (page 87)
(8) [Mixed Size Original] key
☞
SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original) (page 90)
(9) [Slow Scan Mode] key
☞
SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
(page 92)
(10) [File] key*
1
Touch this to use the File function of document filing
mode. For more information on File, see the Document
Filing Guide.
(11) [Quick File] key*
1
Touch this to use the Quick File function of document
filing mode. For more information on Quick File, see the
Document Filing Guide.
*1
Does not appear in USB memory mode.
*2
Does not appear in data entry mode.
4
SPECIAL MODES
Scan/Special Modes
Card Shot
OK
Dual Page
Scan
Slow Scan
Mode
Quick File
Mixed Size
Original
Erase
Job
Build
File
Suppress
Background
Program
Timer
8½x11
Auto
Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
Address Review
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
(7) (8) (9)
(10) (11)
71
Internet fax mode
There are two special mode menu screens in Internet fax mode. Touch the keys to switch between the two
screens.
The keys explained below can only be used in Internet fax mode. The other keys are the same as those explained in
"Scan mode, USB memory mode, Data entry mode" (page 70).
1st screen 2nd screen
(1) [2in1] key
☞
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (2in1)
(page 94)
(2) [Transaction Report] key
☞
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction Report)
(page 97)
[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
(A) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the base screen.
(B) Enter the selected special mode setting and return to the special mode menu screen. Touch this key when you wish
to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special mode menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special mode menu
screen.
Internet Fax/Special Modes
Card Shot
OK
Dual Page
Scan
Slow Scan
Mode
Quick File
Mixed Size
Original
Erase
Job
Build
File
2in1
Program
Timer
1
2
Internet Fax/Special Modes
OK
Transaction
Report
2
2
(1)
(2)
Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. If a prohibited combination is selected, a message will appear in the touch panel.
Scan/Special Modes
OK
Erase
Edge
1/2
(0 1)
inch
Center
Erase
Edge+Center
Erase
OKCancel
Edge
Erase
(C)
(A)
(B)
72
STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (Programs)
A destination, original settings, and functions can be stored in a program. When you wish to use those settings to send
an image, they can be retrieved with ease.
For example, suppose 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.
(1) The same documents are sent to each branch office
(2) Each page of a bound document is successively transmitted
(3) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission
When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored
Enter the address of each branch office.
Select Dual Page Scan
Select Erase settings
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Touch a stored program key.
Press the [START] key.
The originals are scanned and transmitted.
Considerable time is required to send the documents each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes may occasionally be made when
selecting the settings, so incorrect transmissions may occur.
When a program is used, settings are selected with ease by
simply pressing the stored key.
In addition, transmission takes place based on the stored
settings so there are no chances for mistakes.
• Programs are stored, edited, and deleted using "Address Control" in the system settings. See "Program" in the
System Settings Guide.
•
Programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job Programs] and then [Program Registration] in the Web page menu.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can
be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following settings can be stored in programs.
• Image send mode: Scan, Internet fax
• Destinations
• Image settings: Exposure, Resolution
• Special modes: Erase, Dual Page Scan, Suppress Background, 2in1
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program. (If a Scan to Network Folder destination is selected, only one
destination can be stored.)
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode or data entry mode.
1
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass as appropriate for the functions stored in the program.
73
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Program] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
3
Retrieve the stored program.
(1) Touch the desired program key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4
Select additional settings.
Select any settings or functions that you wish to use that cannot
be stored in a program. The following items can be selected.
• Image Settings: original scan size, send size, 2-sided
scanning, file format, color mode
• Send settings
• Special modes: Timer Transmission, Card Shot, Job Build,
Mixed Size Original, Slow Scan Mode, File,
Quick File, Transaction Report
• The screen that appears will vary depending on the destination stored in the program.
• The mode cannot be changed here.
• Functions stored in the program cannot be canceled here.
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder
tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan
each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press
the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have been
scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
Program
Program 3
Program 1
Program 5
Program 7
Program 9
Program 11
Program 4
Program 2
Program 6
Program 8
Program 10
Program 12
1
2
OK
(1) (2)
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Send Settings
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
8½x11
Program:Program 1
Address Review
or
74
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS ON THE
IMAGE (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows on images produced when scanning thick originals or books. (This function
erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form. The function does not detect shadows and erase only the
shadows.)
Scanning a thick book
Erase modes
Shadows appear here
Not using the erase
function
Using the erase
function
Shadows appear in the
image.
No shadows appear.
• Shadows at the edges of the original can also be erased when the automatic document feeder is used.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Erase] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
Edge Erase Center Erase Edge + Center Erase
75
3
Select the erase settings.
(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
Select one of the three erase modes.
(2) Set the erasure width with the keys.
0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 5.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information,
see "2. ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder
tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan
each page one page at a time.
When scanning of one page finishes, replace it with the next
page and press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages
have been scanned and then press the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
Scan/Special Modes
OK
Erase
Edge
Erase
Edge
1/2
(0 1)
inch
Center
Erase
Edge+Center
Erase
OKCancel
(2) (3)(1)
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
or
76
When the erase function is used, erase takes place at the edges of the original image. If you also use a reduction or an
enlargement setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if the erase width setting is 1"
(20 mm) and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 1/2" (10 mm).
To cancel the erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width setting is linked to the copy mode system setting, and can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm). The
factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
77
SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO
SEPARATE PAGES (Dual Page Scan)
The left and right sides of an original can be scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to
successively scan each page of a book or other bound document.
Example: Scanning the left and right pages of a book
Example:
Book or bound document
The pages are scanned as two separate pages.
Original scan size Transmitted image
11" x 17" (A3) x 1 page 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) x 2 pages
• When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• The send size cannot be changed.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
1
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
Align the center of the original with the appropriate size
mark .
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
11" x 17"
(A3)
Size mark
The page on this
side is scanned first.
Centerline of
A3 original
Centerline of
11" x 17" original
Centerline of original
78
3
Select Dual Page Scan.
(1) Press the [Dual Page Scan] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 5.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information,
see "2. ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
Scanning begins.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have been scanned
and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function. (Note, however, that
"Center Erase" and "Edge + Center Erase" cannot be used.)
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
To cancel the dual page scan setting...
Touch the [Dual Page Scan] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is no longer highlighted, and touch the [OK] key.
Dual Page
Scan
Scan/Special Modes
Card Shot
OK
Slow Scan
Mode
Quick File
Mixed Size
Original
Erase
Job
Build
File
Suppress
Background
Program
Timer
(1) (2)
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
or
79
SENDING AN IMAGE AT A SPECIFIED TIME
(Timer Transmission)
This function lets you specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place.
Transmission begins automatically at the specified time.
• When a timer transmission is stored, keep the main power switch in the "on" position. If the main power switch is in the "off"
position at the specified time, transmission will not take place.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not
possible to leave the document in the auto document feeder or on the document glass and have it scanned at the specified
time of transmission.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, special modes, etc.) are automatically cleared after the
transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored
on the built-in hard drive. For more information on the document filing function, see the Document Filing Guide.)
• This function cannot be used in USB memory mode.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Timer] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
Set a transmission to
take place at 20:00
At 20:00, the transmission
begins automatically
80
3
Set the time with the keys.
(1) Specify the day.
If you do not wish to specify a day, select [---]. In this
case, transmission will begin when the time specified in
(2) arrives.
(2) Specify the time (hour, minute)
Select the time in 24-hour format.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
When this screen is opened, the setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CLEAR ALL] key
( ) to cancel the operation. Correct the time in the system settings and then perform the timer transmission procedure.
☞
CHECKING THE DATE AND TIME (page 8)
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can also
manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information, see "2.
ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder
tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan
each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press
the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have been
scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
• The original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
Scan/Special Modes
OK
10 00
Timer
Time
Day of the Week
hh. mm.
OKCancel
(1) (2) (3)
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
or
81
• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.
• Up to 94 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer transmission will begin after that
transmission is finished.
• Other transmissions can be performed as usual after a timer transmission is stored.
• A timer transmission can be deleted in the job status screen.
• If a timer transmission is given priority in the job status screen, the time specification is canceled. The transmission will
begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
☞
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION JOB (page 106)
To cancel timer transmission...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
82
WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN THE IMAGE
(Suppress Background)
This feature is used to suppress light background areas.
• This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Suppress Background] key.
Read the message that appears and then touch the [OK] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
3
Select the suppress background setting.
(1) Adjust the background suppression level.
Touch the [+] key to suppress only faint background.
Touch the [-] key to suppress faint to dark background.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
The lightness level at which
suppression takes place
can be adjusted.
Level [+]
Level [-]
Scan/Special Modes
OK
Suppress Background
Light areas of the original may be suppressed as background.
OKCancel
1
3
(1) (2)
83
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 5.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information,
see "2. ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder
tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan
each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press
the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have been
scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
When the color mode setting of the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) is [Mono2], the suppress background
function will not operate if the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) is pressed.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
To cancel the background suppression setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
or
84
SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ONTO
A SINGLE PAGE (Card Shot)
This function lets you send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side
separately.
• When using card shot, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
1
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
Transmission
Front
Back
Scanned image
Originals
Example of an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size portrait scan transmission
Example of an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size landscape scan transmission
85
3
Specify the original size.
(1) Enter the original size.
• Touch the [X] key and enter the horizontal dimension
(X) of the original with the keys.
• Touch the [Y] key and enter the vertical dimension (Y)
of the original with the keys.
(A) To return the original size to the default size, touch the
[Size Reset] key.
(B) To automatically enlarge or reduce the image to fit the
send size, touch the [Fit to Send Size] key. If you wish
to scan the original at the entered original size, there
is no need to touch this key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• The send size will be selected automatically based on the entered original size.
• After selecting Card Shot, you can touch the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the
send size. In this case, the screen of this step appears when you touch the scan size key. For the procedure for
setting the send size, see "Specifying the send size of the image" (page60).
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 5.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information,
see "2. ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
( ) to scan the front side of the card.
If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
Scan/Special Modes
OK
Card Shot
(1 8 1/2)
inch
(1 8 1/2)
inch
OKCancel
Fit to
Send Size
Size Reset
X
Y
3
8
3
2
8
1
(1) (B) (2)
(A)
X
Y
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
or
86
6
Turn the card over and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ) or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) to
scan the reverse side of the card.
Press the same [START] key that was used to scan the front
side.
Before scanning the back of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key in the touch panel to change the exposure.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
7
Touch the [Read-End] key.
If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can touch the [Configure] key to change the exposure,
resolution, scan size, and send size.
The ratio cannot be specified and "Rotation Sending Setting" cannot be selected.
To cancel Card Shot...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
or
Read-EndConfigure
Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
87
SCANNING MANY ORIGINALS AT ONCE
(Job Build)
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic
document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. Use this function when the number of originals that
you wish to scan exceeds the maximum number of sheets that can be inserted in the automatic document feeder at
once.
When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you
select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
1
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
3
Select job build mode.
(1) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
1
1
1
101
1
Originals
Originals are
scanned in
separate sets
Transmission
Indicator
line
Job
Build
Scan/Special Modes
Card Shot
OK
Dual Page
Scan
Slow Scan
Mode
Quick File
Mixed Size
Original
Erase
File
Suppress
Background
Program
Timer
(2)
(1)
88
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 5.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information,
see "2. ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
( ) to scan the first set of originals.
If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
6
Insert the next set of originals and press
the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
Press the [START] key pressed in step 5.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation. All scanned data will be cleared.
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
or
or
89
7
Touch the [Read-End] key.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the
transmission is reserved.
• The [Configure] key can be touched to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original
page scanned. However, when Job Build is used in combination with "2in1" in the special modes, only the exposure
can be changed when scanning each even-numbered page of the original pages.
If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be canceled.
To cancel the job build function....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
Read-EndConfigure
Place next original. (Pg.No.x)
Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
90
SCANNING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT
SIZES (Mixed Size Original)
This feature lets you scan originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size originals
mixed together with 11" x 17" (A3) size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the
size of each original.
This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes:
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14" • 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13" • 11" x 17" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
• A3 and B4 • A3 and B5 • B4 and A4 • A4 and B5
• A4R and B5 • B4 and A4R • B4 and A5 • B5 and A5
When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
1
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far
left corner of the document feeder tray.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
11" x 17"
8-1/2" x 14"
11" x 17"
8-1/2" x 14"
Originals
(8-1/2" x 14" (B4) original mixed
in with 11" x 17" (A3) originals)
1st page 2nd to 4th pages
Scanned in at
8-1/2" x 14" (B4)
size
Scanned in at
11" x 17" (A3)
size
Files created
8-1/2" x 14"
(B4)
8-1/2" x 14"
(B4)
11" x 17" (A3)
Place the originals with
the corners aligned
together in the far left
corner.
91
3
Select the mixed size original setting.
(1) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key so that
it is highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
If an original scan size has been specified, a message will appear when the [Mixed Size Original] key is touched. To
enable the Mixed Size Original setting, change the scan size setting to auto and then touch the [Mixed Size Original]
key again.
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 5.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information,
see "2. ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is
finished.
If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
If an original scan size is specified after selecting the "Mixed Size Original" setting, the original scan size setting will be
enabled and the "Mixed Size Original" setting will be cleared.
To cancel the Mixed Size Original setting...
Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.
Mixed Size
Original
Scan/Special Modes
Card Shot
OK
Dual Page
Scan
Slow Scan
Mode
Quick File
Erase
Job
Build
File
Suppress
Background
Program
Timer
(2)
(1)
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
or
92
SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.
When using USB memory mode, connect the USB memory device to the machine before performing the procedure below.
1
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Adjust the original guides slowly.
If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the tab of the mode that you wish to use.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
3
Select slow scan mode.
(1) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
Slow Scan
Mode
Scan/Special Modes
Card Shot
OK
Dual Page
Scan
Quick File
Mixed Size
Original
Erase
Job
Build
File
Suppress
Background
Program
Timer
(2)
(1)
93
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
• When scanning to USB memory, there is no need to specify the destination. Go to step 5.
• In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can
also manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information,
see "2. ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is
finished.
If the destination is an Internet fax destination, press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
When this function is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
To cancel slow scan mode...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.
AAA AAA
To Cc
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
JJJ JJJ
(3) (2)
or
94
SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE
(2in1)
Two original pages can be reduced to half their original size and sent together as a single page.
This function cannot be used in scan mode, USB memory mode, or data entry mode.
1
Place the original.
When placing the originals, orient them as shown below.
1 2
1 2
1 2
1
2
Portrait-oriented originals
Landscape-oriented originals
Transmission
Transmission
1 2
1 2
1
1
1
1
Document feeder tray
Place the originals face up.
Portrait orientation
Landscape orientation
Document glass
Place the originals face down.
Originals
95
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
3
Select 2in1.
(1) Touch the [2in1] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
4
Touch the [Original] key.
5
Specify the orientation in which the
original is placed.
(1) Touch the "Image Orientation" key with the
same orientation as the original image.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be
transmitted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
1
2
2in1
Internet Fax/Special Modes
Card Shot
OK
Dual Page
Scan
Slow Scan
Mode
Quick File
Mixed Size
Original
Erase
Job
Build
File
Program
Timer
(2)
(1)
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
I-Fax Manual
Reception
Address Review
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
200X100dpi
TIFF-F
8½x11
Internet Fax/Original
OK
2-Sided
Booklet
2-Sided
Tablet
Auto 8½x11
Scan Size Send Size100%
Auto
Image Orientation
(2)
(1)
96
6
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can also
manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information, see "2.
ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
7
Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder
tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan
each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ). Repeat until all
pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End]
key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
The [Configure] key can be touched in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan
size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be
changed.)
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
• Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.
• The 2in1 function cannot be used when the original is other than 8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4, B5, or A5) size.
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numerical values, this function cannot be used.
To cancel 2in1...
Touch the [2in1] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
To Cc
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
(3) (2)
97
CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE
TRANSACTION REPORT (Transaction
Report)
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast
transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of
other party, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
☞ INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN (page 107)
Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the system settings; however, you can temporarily select
different conditions for a transmission. To change the transaction report print conditions at the time of transmission,
follow the steps below.
This function cannot be used in scan mode, USB memory mode, or data entry mode.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Internet Fax] tab.
(2) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(3) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(4) Touch the [Transaction Report] key.
☞
SPECIAL MODES (page 70)
3
Select print conditions.
(1) Select the print conditions.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
When the [Print Original Image] checkbox is selected , part of the transmitted original is included on the
transaction report.
Internet Fax/Special Modes
OK
Transaction Report
Print Original Image
OKCancel
Always Print
Print at Error Do not Print
(1) (2)
98
4
Specify the destination.
(1) Touch the [Address Book] key in the base
screen.
(2) Touch one-touch keys of the destinations
that you wish to store in the group.
(3) Touch the [To] key.
In addition to specification by a one-touch key, a destination can also be specified by a search number. You can also
manually enter an e-mail address or look up an e-mail address in a global address book. For more information, see "2.
ENTERING DESTINATIONS" (page 20).
5
Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder
tray, all pages are scanned.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
• If you are scanning the original on the document glass, scan
each page one page at a time.
When scanning finishes, place the next original and press
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ). Repeat until all
pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End]
key.
A beep will sound to indicate that scanning is finished.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ) to cancel the operation.
For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.
To cancel the transaction report setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
• System Settings (Administrator): Transaction Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing transaction reports.
The factory default settings are print at below.
Single Sending: Print Out All Report/ /No Printed Report
Broadcasting: /Print Out Error Report Only/No Printed Report
Receiving: Print Out All Report/Print Out Error Report Only/
• System Settings (Administrator): Original Print on Transaction Report
This is used to have part of the transmitted original printed on the transaction report.
III III
GGG GGG
EEE EEE
CCC CCC
AAA AAA
JJJ JJJ
HHH HHH
FFF FFF
DDD DDD
BBB BBB
To Cc
ABCD
Frequent Use
EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
1
2
5
15
10
Global
Address Search
Address Entry
Sort Address
Address Review
Condition
Settings
(3) (2)
Print Out Error Report Only
Print Out All Report
No Printed Report
99
This chapter explains how to check the status of reserved transmission jobs and received Internet faxes.
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Reserved transmissions and received Internet faxes are referred to as jobs here.
Example: Pressing the tab in scan mode
5
CHECKING THE STATUS OF
TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION
JOBS
The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
Print Job
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Scan to
Address Set Time
Pages
Status
Broadcast0001
1
2
3
4
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
10:05 04/01 000/001
Waiting
10:22 04/01 000/004
Waiting
10:30 04/01 000/010
Waiting
1
1
Complete
Detail
Stop/Delete
Job Queue
Priority
JOB STATUS
Sending
Auto
Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
Address Review
100
JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of two screens: the job queue screen that shows reserved jobs and the job currently in
progress, and the completed jobs screen. To switch between the two screens, touch the job status screen selector key
((2) below).
Job queue screen Complete screen
(1) Mode switch tabs
Use these tabs to change the job status screen mode.
(2) Job status screen selector key
Touch this key to switch between the job queue screen
and the completed jobs screen.
(3) Job queue screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on broadcast
transmission jobs and the status of jobs. Select the key of
the desired job in the job queue screen (6) and then
touch the [Details] key.
(4) [Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
☞
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN TRANSMISSION
JOB (page 106)
(5) [Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
☞
STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING TRANSMITTED
OR WAITING TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 105)
(6) Job queue screen
Jobs are shown as keys in the order they were reserved.
Each key shows information on the job and its current
status.
☞
Job key display (page 101)
(7) Completed jobs screen [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on the results of
completed broadcast transmissions and jobs that used
the document filing function. Select the key of the desired
job in the completed jobs screen (9) and then touch the
[Detail] key.
☞
CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 104)
(8) [Call] key
Touch this key to call up and use a transmission or
reception job stored with the document filing function.
(9) Completed jobs screen
This shows up to 99 completed transmission or reception
jobs in each mode. A description of the job and the result
(status) are shown.
Jobs that used document filing function, broadcast
transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs are indicated as keys.
Broadcast0001
1
2
3
4
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
AAA AAA
BBB BBB
CCC CCC
10:05 04/01 000/001
Waiting
10:22 04/01 000/004
Waiting
10:30 04/01 000/010
Waiting
Broadcast0001
10:00 04/01 010/003 NG000000
Broadcast0002
Broadcast0003
DDD DDD
10:05 04/01 001/001
Send OK
10:22 04/01 004/004
Send OK
10:30 04/01 010/010
Send OK
Complete
Detail
Call
Job Queue
Print Job
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Scan to
Address Set Time
Pages
Status
1
1
Complete
Detail
Stop/Delete
Job Queue
Print Job
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Scan to
Address Start Time
Pages
Status
1
1
Priority
(1) (1)
(6)
(9)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
(7)
(8)
101
Job key display
The following information is shown in the job queue keys and completed job keys that appear in the job status screen.
(1) Displays the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.
When the job currently being transmitted is finished, the
job moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2) Mode icon
This indicates the type of job. In the completed jobs
screen, a color bar appears next to the icon to indicate
whether the job was executed in color or black & white.
(However, the color bar icon does not appear in the key
of a job stored using the document filing function.)
(3) Name of communicating party (address)
For a transmission, the name or address of the
destination. For a reception, the address of the sending
party.
For a broadcast transmission, the function name and a
broadcast control number (4-digits).
(4) Time reserved/Time started
In the job queue screen, the date and time the job was
reserved. In the completed jobs screen, the date and
time the job was started.
(5) Number of pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted/total number of
original pages.
(6) Status
Shows the job status.
• Job in progress
• Job waiting to be executed
3
AAA AAA
10:22
04/01
000/004
Waiting
(4)
(1) (2) (3)
(5) (6)
Icon Job type
Scan to E-mail
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Scan to Desktop
Internet fax transmission
Internet fax reception
PC-I-Fax transmission
Broadcast transmission
Display Status
"Connecting" Connecting to the destination.
"Sending" Sending data.
"Receiving" Receiving an Internet fax.
"Stopped" The job has been stopped.
"Error" An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
Display Status
"Waiting" The job is waiting to be executed.
"Retry Mode" The job is being re-attempted due
to a communication error or other
problem.
"Report Wait" An Internet fax has been sent for
which a receive report was
requested, and the machine is
waiting for the receive report.
A day and
time is
displayed
Timer transmission job (the
specified time is displayed)
102
• Completed job
Display Status
"Send OK" Transmission was completed.
"In Memory" An Internet fax has been received
but has not yet been printed.
"Printed" A received Internet fax has been
printed.
"Forward OK" A received Internet fax has been
forwarded.
"Holding" Received Internet fax held by print
hold.
"Stopped" The job was stopped.
"Number of
successful
transmission
destinations/
Total
destinations
OK"
A broadcast transmission has been
completed.
If transmission to 3 destinations
was successful out of a total of 5,
"003/005 OK" will appear.
"No
Response"
An error occurred because there
was no response from the
destination.
"OK Report" A receive report was requested for
a transmission, the transmission
was completed normally, and the
receive report was received from
the destination.
"NG Report" A receive report was requested for
a transmission, however, the
transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed
report was received.
"No Report" An e-mail was received without an
attached file and thus printing was
not possible.
"Received" An e-mail was received, however,
the attached file was not a TIFF-F
file or there was no attached file,
and thus printing was not possible.
"Rejected" An Internet fax was sent from a
party that is blocked.
"NGxxxxxx" Transmission/reception was not
successful because a
communication error occurred (a
6-digit error code appears in
xxxxxx.)
"Error" An error occurred while the job was
being executed.
103
OPERATION WHEN A JOB IN THE JOB QUEUE IS
COMPLETED
When a normal transmission job is completed, it moves to the completed jobs screen and "Send OK" appears in the
status column.
Received Internet faxes, timer transmission jobs, and forwarding jobs are handled in the job status screen as explained
below.
Internet fax reception jobs
While an Internet fax is being received, "Receiving" appears.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears.
When printing ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed.
Timer transmission jobs
A timer transmission job appears at the bottom of the job queue until the specified time arrives.
When the specified time arrives, the job is executed. If another job is in progress, the timer job is started when the other
job is completed.
Internet fax transmission jobs that request a receive report
After completion of an Internet fax transmission job that requests a receive report, the job is placed on standby at the
bottom of the job queue screen. "Report Wait" appears in the status column. When the receive report is received from
the destination, or if the report is not received within the timeout time, the job moves to the completed jobs screen.
Reception jobs when "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled
When "Inbound Routing Settings" are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.
☞
FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET FAXES TO AN E-MAIL ADDRESS (Inbound Routing Settings) (page 111)
• Received Internet fax is not printed
"Receiving" appears while the Internet fax is being received. When reception is completed, the job moves to the job
queue of the job status screen of scan mode.
• Received Internet fax is printed
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed jobs screen and "In Memory" appears. When printing
ends, the status changes to "Printed" and the job is completed. In addition, the job is added to the job queue of the job
status screen of scan mode. When forwarding received Internet faxes is finished, "Forward OK" appears.
104
CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS
You can check a list of the destinations, the destinations for which transmission failed, and other detailed information on
completed jobs that used document filing function, broadcast transmission jobs, and received Internet fax forwarding
jobs. Touch the key of the job for which you wish to display information in the completed jobs screen and touch the
[Detail] key. The job detail screen (see below) will appear.
The job name appears at the top of the job detail screen.
To view details on the job, touch one of the tabs. The following information appears on each tab.
Tab name Information displayed
File Shows information on a transmission/reception that used document filing function.
To call up the file and use it, touch the [Call] key.
Failed Shows information on addresses for which communication failed.
Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Description of failure (error)
The [Retry] key can be touched to re-attempt transmission to that address.
All Destinations Shows all addresses specified in the job.
Address: Address name or number
Start time: Time at which communication began.
Status: Communication result
The [Retry] key can be touched to transmit to all addresses again.
Detail
OK
Retry
Broadcast0001
EEE EEE NG000000
NG000000FFF FFF
Start TimeAddress Status
10:01 04/01
10:10
002
010 04/01
1
1
Failed
File
All Destinations
105
STOPPING A SCAN JOB BEING
TRANSMITTED OR WAITING TO BE
TRANSMITTED
Follow the steps below to stop a job that is being transmitted or is waiting to be transmitted.
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
2
Select the job that you wish to stop.
(1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be
stopped.
(2) Touch the key of the job to be stopped.
(3) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
3
Touch the [Yes] key.
If you do not want to stop the selected job...
Touch the [No] key.
Printing of a received Internet fax cannot be stopped.
JOB STATUS
Broadcast0001
1
2
4
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
AAA AAA
CCC CCC
10:05 04/01 000/001
Waiting
10:30 04/01 000/010
Waiting
Priority
3
BBB BBB
10:22 04/01 000/004
Waiting
Print Job
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Scan to
Address Set Time
Pages
Status
1
1
Complete
Detail
Stop/Delete
Job Queue
(3)
(1) (1)
(2)
Y
es
N
o
Delete the
j
ob
?
CCC
CCC
10:31 04
/
0
1
106
GIVING PRIORITY TO A SCAN
TRANSMISSION JOB
When multiple jobs are waiting to be transmitted, the jobs are normally transmitted in the order they were reserved. If
you need to give priority to a job and send it ahead of the other jobs, follow the steps below.
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
2
Select the job to which you wish to give
priority.
(1) Touch the mode tab of the job to be given
priority.
(2) Touch the key of the job to be given priority.
(3) Touch the [Priority] key.
The selected job moves up to the position immediately
following the job in progress. The job will be executed
when the job in progress is completed.
JOB STATUS
Broadcast0001
1
2
4
10:00 04/01 020/003 Connecting
AAA AAA
CCC CCC
10:05 04/01 000/001
Waiting
10:30 04/01 000/010
Waiting
Priority
3
BBB BBB
10:22 04/01 000/004
Waiting
Print Job
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Scan to
Address Set Time
Pages
Status
1
1
Complete
Detail
Stop/Delete
Job Queue
(2) (3)
(1) (1)
107
CHECKING THE INTERNET FAX ACTIVITY
LOG (Image Sending Activity Report)
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result,
etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 199 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 200,
or at a specified time (once a day only).
INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN
Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction
report or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
Examples of messages that are printed in the result column
The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.
System Settings (Administrator): Activity Report Print Select Setting
This is used to set the conditions for printing activity reports. The factory default setting is not to print.
The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 200, or at a specified
time (once a day only).
Message Explanation
OK The transaction was completed normally.
OK REPORT A receive report was requested for a transmission, the transmission was completed normally, and
the receive report was received from the destination.
CANCEL A transmission was stopped while in progress, or a reserved transmission job was canceled.
MEM. FULL The memory became full during reception.
REJECTED An Internet fax was sent from a party that is blocked.
NG REPORT A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, the transmission did not take place
correctly and a transmission failed report was received.
NO REPORT A receive report was requested for a transmission, however, a report was not received within the
timeout time.
NG LIMIT Transmission was not possible because the file size exceeded the machine's file size limit setting.
RECEIVED An e-mail was received, however, the attached file was not a TIFF-F file or there was no attached
file, and thus printing was not possible.
FAIL xx (xxxx) The transaction failed due to a communication error.
First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99.
Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians.
108
This chapter explains the basic procedures for receiving Internet faxes.
RECEIVING AN INTERNET FAX
The Internet fax function periodically* connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet
faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed.
* The default setting is once every 5 minutes.
6
INTERNET FAX RECEPTION
FUNCTIONS
If faxes will be received at night, keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
1
Internet faxes are received automatically.
A beep sounds when reception ends.
2
The faxes are printed automatically.
If the machine is out of paper or there is no paper that matches the size of the received fax, a message will appear in the
touch panel. Follow the instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper.
• System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward
When printing is not possible because the machine has run out of paper or toner, received Internet faxes can be forwarded
to and printed by another previously stored Internet fax machine.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Default Settings
These settings are used to select how received faxes are handled when the [POWER] key ( ) is "off" (the main power
switch is "on"), the volume of the beep that sounds when reception ends, and whether or not received e-mail messages
are printed.
• System Settings (Administrator): I-Fax Receive Settings
Settings related to Internet fax reception can be configured such as the interval for checking for received faxes, duplex
reception, output settings, auto reduction printing, and storing reject reception addresses.
Beep
109
MANUALLY RECEIVING INTERNET FAXES
If the interval for checking for received faxes is somewhat long and you wish to check immediately, you can manually
initiate reception.
Touch the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key to connect to the mail server and retrieve received faxes.
If POP3 server settings are not configured in the Web pages, the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key is grayed out to prevent
selection.
System Settings: Fax Data Receive/Forward
This setting is used to hide the [I-Fax Manual Reception] key that appears in the base screen of Internet Fax mode. When the
[I-Fax Manual Reception] key is hidden, manual reception is initiated by touching the [Reception Start] key in the screen that
appears when "Fax Data Receive/Forward" - "I-Fax Settings" is selected.
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
I-Fax Manual
Reception
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Special Modes
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
200X100dpi
TIFF-F
Address Review
110
PRINTING A PASSWORD-PROTECTED FAX
(Hold Setting For Received Data Print)
"Hold Setting for Received Data Print" in the system settings (administrator) can be enabled to have faxes received to
memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a password must be entered. When this function is enabled, a
password entry screen appears in the touch panel when received Internet faxes are retrieved.
When the previously programmed 4-digit password is entered with the numeric keys, printing begins.
The [Cancel] key can be touched to close the password entry screen; however, the data in memory key ( ) will blink
in the touch panel. The password entry screen will reappear when you touch the blinking key ( ) or change modes.
• The received faxes will be retained in memory regardless of whether they were received automatically or manually. If a
transaction report is set to print when a fax is received, the transaction report will also be retained in memory.
• If "Fax Data Receive/Forward" is enabled in the system settings so that received faxes are forwarded to another machine,
faxes retained in memory are also forwarded. At that time, the same password entry screen will appear as for printing.
Forwarding will not take place unless the password is entered.
System Settings (Administrator): Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Enable this setting to have faxes received to memory without being printed. This setting is also used to program the
password that must be entered to print the faxes.
Cancel
Received data is stored.
Enter password via the 10-key.
111
FORWARDING RECEIVED INTERNET
FAXES TO AN E-MAIL ADDRESS
(Inbound Routing Settings)
Received Internet faxes can be automatically forwarded to a specified E-mail address. This function can be used to
forward received Internet faxes directly to an e-mail address without printing the faxes.
To configure inbound routing settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Inbound Routing Settings] in the Web page
menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
The format of the forwarded file is TIFF-F.
Forwarding
Received Internet fax
The machine
112
BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE
You can install the scanner driver on your computer from the CD-ROM that accompanies the machine, and use a
TWAIN* compliant application to scan an image using your computer.
Scanning from your computer is most useful for scanning a single original such as a photo, particularly when you want to
adjust scan settings as you scan. By contrast, scanning at the machine is most useful for continuous scanning of
multiple originals.
* An interface standard used for scanners and other image input devices. When the scanner driver is installed on your
computer, you can use any TWAIN-compliant application to scan an image.
As an example, the procedure for scanning from the "Sharpdesk" application that accompanies the machine is
explained below.
[At the machine]
7
SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER
(PC Scan Mode)
• Scanning in PC scan mode is only possible when the scanner driver has been installed from the "Software CD-ROM"
using the integrated installer. For the procedures for installing the scanner driver and configuring settings, see the
Software Setup Guide.
•
This function cannot be used when it has been disabled using "Disable Scan Function" in the system settings (administrator).
• The procedures for selecting the scanner driver and starting scanning vary depending on the TWAIN-compliant
application. For more information, see the manual for the application or Help.
• When a large image is scanned at high resolution, the amount of data will be very large and scanning will take a long time.
Be sure to select appropriate scan settings for the original (text, photo, etc.).
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
2
Touch the [PC Scan] tab to switch to PC
Scan mode.
If the [PC Scan] tab does not appear, touch the tab
to move the screen.
When PC scan mode is selected, only the [Exit] key displayed in the touch panel can be used on the machine; no
other keys can be used.
Exit
This machine is in the PC scan mode.
Do not remove the original.
Scanner IP address:250.160.102.106
USB Mem. ScanFaxInternet Fax PC Scan
Scan
113
[At your computer]
3
Start the TWAIN-compliant application
on your computer and select [Select
Scanner] from the [File] menu.
4
Select the scanner driver of the
machine.
(1) Select [SHARP MFP TWAIN K].
(2) Click the [Select] button.
5
Select [Acquire Image] from the [File]
menu.
The scanner driver opens.
(1)
(2)
114
6
Preview the image.
(1) Select the location where the original is
placed.
"Scanning Position" menu:
• If the original is a one-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Simplex)].
• If the original is a 2-sided original and is placed in the
document feeder tray, select [SPF(Duplex - Book)] or
[SPF(Duplex - Tablet)] depending on whether the
original is a book-style or tablet-style original. In
addition, select [Left edge is fed first] or [Top edge is
fed first] depending on the orientation of the original.
(2) Select scan settings.
"Scanning Mode" menu:
Switch between the "Preset" screen and the "Custom
Settings" screen. In the "Preset" screen, select "Web
Pages", "Photo", "FAX" or "OCR" depending on the
original type and your scanning purpose.
If you wish to change the initial settings of any of the four
buttons or select the resolution or other advanced
settings, change to the "Custom Settings" screen.
"Image Area" menu:
Select the scan area. If "Auto" is selected, the original size
detected by the machine will be scanned. You can also
set the scanning area in the preview window with your
mouse.
(3) Click the [Preview] button.
The preview image will appear in the scanner driver.
If you are not satisfied with the preview image, repeat (2)
and (3).
If the [Zoom Preview] checkbox is selected before the
[Preview] button is clicked, the selected area will be
enlarged in the preview window. If the checkmark is
removed, the preview image will return to normal. Note
that if SPF is selected in the "Scanning Position" menu,
the [Zoom Preview] function cannot be used.
• For further information on the scan settings, click the button in the preview image screen of step 7 to
open scanner driver Help.
• If the [Preview] button is clicked when scanning from the document feeder tray, only one original page will be
scanned for the preview image. If you wish to include that original in the scan, return it to the document feeder tray.
(1)
(3)
(2)
115
7
Select scanning settings while viewing
the image.
[Rotate] button:
Each time this button is clicked, the preview image rotates 90
degrees. This lets you change the orientation of the image
without picking up and placing the original again. The image file
will be created using the orientation that appears in the preview
window.
[Image Size] button:
Click this button to specify the scan area by entering numerical
values. Pixels, mm, or inches can be selected for the units of
the numerical values. If a scanning area has already been
specified, the entered numbers will change the area relative to
the top left corner of the specified area.
button:
When a preview image is displayed and a scanning area is not
specified, you can click the button to automatically set the
scanning area to the entire preview image.
• For further information on the scan settings, click the button to open scanner driver Help.
• If the originals are placed in the document feeder tray, only the top page will be previewed. The top page will be
delivered to the original exit tray. Be sure to return the previewed page to the document feeder tray before
previewing again or scanning.
8
Click the [Scan] button.
Scanning begins. The image appears in your application.
Assign a file name to the scanned image and save it as
appropriate in the software application you are using.
116
[At the machine]
9
Touch the [Exit] key in the touch panel.
10
Touch the [Yes] key.
Exit
This machine is in the PC scan mode.
Do not remove the original.
Scanner IP address:250.160.102.106
Yes
No
PC scan in progress.
Finish PC scan mode?
117
This chapter explains metadata delivery, which can be used when the application integration module kit is installed.
METADATA DELIVERY (Data Entry)
When the application integration module kit is installed and an image file is generated for a scan send transmission,
metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) can be generated based on
pre-stored information and transmitted as a separate file. The metadata file is created in XML format. By linking the
metadata with applications such as document management software, a workflow application, or an encryption server, a
sophisticated document solution environment can be built.
Using the application integration module kit, information on a generated image file can be entered at the touch panel and
transmitted along with the image as an XML file.
8
METADATA DELIVERY
Metadata
(XML file)
Image file
Scan to
Desktop
Scan to E-mail
Scan to FTP
Scan to Network Folder
Client PC that uses Network
Scanner Tool
Server
Fax server, document
management software,
workflow application,
encryption server, etc.
118
PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA
TRANSMISSION
SETTINGS REQUIRED IN THE WEB PAGES
All settings related to metadata are configured in the Web pages. (Administrator rights are required.)
To configure metadata settings, click [Application Settings] and then [Metadata Settings] in the Web page menu.
When configuring settings, be sure to enable metadata transmission.
Storing Metadata Sets
Store the items (the metadata set) that are written to the XML file that is generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata
items can be configured in a metadata set. A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of transmission.
METADATA TRANSMISSION FOR SCAN TO DESKTOP
When Network Scanner Tool is used in its factory default configuration, a file will be generated with a new file name on
the computer. When Network Scanner Tool is used as a means of sending a metadata file to a third party software
application, this setting must be disabled to allow cross referencing between the image file and XML file by means of the
file name generated by the computer. (When setting the file name in [Send Settings], to ensure that a previously existing
file on a computer is not overwritten by a transmitted file of the same name, be sure to configure the file name so that
name duplication cannot occur; for example, by including a unique extension (the date, etc.) in the generated file name.
If the file name setting is left blank, the machine will automatically generate a file name that is unique.)
Addresses specified in "Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry" when a metadata set is stored can be selected as
transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry, and/or a global address book
search. (Addresses for which metadata entry is not allowed cannot be specified as transmission destinations.)
• It is recommended that you use Network Scanner Tool to receive metadata. For more information, see the Network
Scanner Tool User's Guide (PDF format) on the "Sharpdesk/Network Scanner Utilities" CD-ROM.
• For information on the license agreement and how to use the CD-ROM that accompanies the application integration
module, see the separate "Sharpdesk licence kit" manual.
• Using third party software applications
Various types of third party software applications exist. Some applications can start automatically from Network Scanner
Tool and some cannot. When the auto-run function of an application is enabled, Network Scanner Tool will start the
application with the ".exe" command using the file name as a parameter. Normally an application is started twice, once for
the image file and once for the XML file. For example, when Network Scanner Tool is set to start the application
"APP.EXE", the following commands are applied when the two files "IMG.TIF" and "IMG.XML" are received.
APP.EXE IMG.TIF
APP.EXE IMG.XML
119
TRANSMITTING METADATA
Follow the steps below to select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata transmission.
1
Switch to data entry mode and display
the metadata set screen.
(1) Touch the [Data Entry] tab.
(2) Touch the [Metadata Entry] key.
• If no metadata sets have been stored, the [Data Entry] tab cannot be selected. Store a metadata set in the Web
pages and then perform the transmission procedure.
• If a specific metadata set has been specified as the default set, go to step 3.
2
Select a metadata set.
(1) Touch the key of the metadata set that you
wish to use.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
3
The keys of the items stored in the
metadata set will appear. Touch the key
of the item that you want to enter.
If you accidentally selected the wrong metadata set or wish to use a different metadata set when a default metadata
set has been set, touch the [Metadata Set] key. Touch the [OK] key in the message screen that appears. You will
return to the screen of step 2. Metadata items entered to that point will be canceled.
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
Data EntryFaxInternet Fax
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale
Mono2
PDF
8½x11
Metadata Entry
Address Review
(1)
(2)
Metadata Set
OKCancel
Metadata 1
Set Name:Metadata 1
Metadata 2
Metadata 3 Metadata 4
Metadata 5 Metadata 6
Metadata 7 Metadata 8
Metadata 9 Metadata 10
(2)(1)
Data Entry
Set Name:Metadata 1
OK
Cancel
Metadata Set
1
2
User ID
From Name
Reply To
AccessPassword
BillCode1
DocumentPassword
120
4
Enter the selected metadata item.
(1) Touch the key of the value that you wish to
enter.
• When the entry values of the metadata item are in the
form of selections, the selections are shown as keys.
When a value is editable, you can touch the [Direct
Entry] key to manually enter the value.
• If the metadata item requires the entry of text, a text
entry screen will appear. Enter the required information.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• To change the number of keys displayed in the screen, touch the number of displayed items selector key. Select 6,
12, or 18 keys.
• For the procedure for entering text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's Guide.
5
When you have finished entering all
items, touch the [OK] key.
6
Select image settings and any other
settings, and perform the scan send
procedure.
• The procedures for selecting settings and performing
transmission are the same as in the other modes.
• To make changes to entered values, touch the [Metadata
Entry] key once again. The entry screen of the selected
metadata set will appear.
• Transmission cannot be performed if the [Data Entry] tab is displayed and no metadata settings have been configured. To
perform transmission without sending metadata, switch to a different mode by touching the tab of that mode and then
perform transmission.
• Before configuring metadata settings, you can specify addresses in all modes to be used. After metadata settings have
been configured, only addresses in modes that are allowed in the selected metadata set can be specified.
• When metadata settings have been configured or an address is specified in the [Data Entry] tab, it will not be possible to
switch to another mode.
• Metadata delivery is possible using the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings
screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, metadata delivery using document filing can be
performed in [Document Operations] in the Web pages.
Data Entry
User ID
OK
Cancel
Direct Entry
1
2
Value 1 Value 2
Value 3 Value 4
Value 5 Value 6
Value 7 Value 8
Value 9 Value 10
Value 11 Value 12
6 18
12
(1) (2)
Value 1
xxxx xxxx
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
xxxx xxxx
Data Entry
Set Name:Metadata 1
OK
Cancel
Metadata Set
1
2
User ID
From Name
Reply To
AccessPassword
BillCode1
DocumentPassword
Metadata Entry
Auto Auto
Auto
File
Quick File
Send Settings
Address Entry
Address Book
Data EntryFaxInternet Fax
Special Modes
Color Mode
File Format
Resolution
Exposure
Original
Scan:
Scan
Send:
Text
200X200dpi
PDF
Auto/Grayscale Mono2
PDF
Address Review
8½x11
121
METADATA FIELDS
The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted.
• Data automatically generated by the machine: These data are always included in the XML file and are automatically
stored on your computer.
• Previously defined fields: These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and
assigned to appropriate XML tags. These fields are selectable, and
can only be included in the XML file if enabled in the Web pages.
• User defined fields: Custom fields can be added to the XML file. These fields are selectable
and can be defined in the Web pages.
If a defined metadata field is one of the following fields, a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be
entered. Enter appropriate information in the related items of the send settings.
Name entered in
metadata field
Description Where entered
fromName Name of the user who sent the job. If the
name is not entered as metadata, the sender
name determined by the usual rules for
determining the sender name will be applied
as metadata.
[Reply-To]
(Sender name of selected sender)
replyTo E-mail address to which the transmission
result will be sent.
[Reply-To]
(E-mail address of selected sender)
documentSubject Job name appearing in the e-mail "Subject"
line, or job name on the fax cover sheet.
When the user enters a [Subject] in the send
settings screen in the touch panel, the
entered value is applied as metadata.
[Subject]
(Blank until a value is set in the send settings
screen.)
fileName Enter the file name of the image to be sent. [File Name]
(Only when the [Allow Custom Filenames]
checkbox is selected in the metadata
settings screen in the Web pages.)
(Blank until a value is set in the send settings
screen.)
MX7000-US-SCN-Z2
Scanner Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
Printer Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
2
CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
• MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE . . . 5
PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE. . . . . . . . . . 6
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
• SELECTING THE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION
FUNCTION IS ENABLED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT SETTINGS . . 13
• SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF
PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
• USING SAVED SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
• SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
• PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
• SELECTING THE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION
FUNCTION IS ENABLED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3
FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS
SELECTING THE COLOR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
TWO-SIDED PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER . . . . . 31
PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE . . . . 32
STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4
CONVENIENT PRINTING
FUNCTIONS
CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
• CREATING A PAMPHLET
(Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
• INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift) . . . . . 38
• CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster
Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
• ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180
DEGREES (Rotate 180 degrees) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
• ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE
(Zoom/XY-Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) . . . . . . 43
COLOR MODE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . 44
• ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND
CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (Color
Adjustment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
• PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN
BLACK (Text To Black/Vector To Black) . . . . . . . 45
• SELECTING COLOR SETTINGS TO MATCH
THE IMAGE TYPE (Advanced Color) . . . . . . . . . 46
FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND
IMAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
• ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED
PAGES (Watermark) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
• PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT
DATA (Image Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
• CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT DATA
(Overlays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES . . . 51
• PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON
DIFFERENT PAPER (Different Paper). . . . . . . . . 51
• ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency
Inserts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
• PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon Copy) . . . 54
• PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER
(Tab Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 57
• USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE
PRINT JOB (Tandem Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
• SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES
(Retention/Document Filing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3
5
PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER
DRIVER
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE. . . . . . 60
• DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP
SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
•
DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY
. . 62
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER . . . . . . 64
• SUBMIT PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
• FTP PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
• E-MAIL PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE. . . . . . . . . . . 66
6
USEFUL INFORMATION
GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY/CANCELING A
PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
• GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
• CANCELING A PRINT JOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND
PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7
PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS
PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST . . . . . . . . 70
4
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Please note
• For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Software Setup Guide.
• For information on your operating system, please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Windows environment are primarily for Windows
®
XP. The screens may vary
depending on the version of the operating system or the software application.
• The explanations of screens and procedures in a Macintosh environment are based on Mac OS X v10.4 in the case of Mac OS
X, and on Mac OS 9.2.2 in the case of Mac OS 9. The screens may vary depending on the version of the operating system or
the software application.
• Wherever "MX-xxxx" appears in this manual, please substitute your model name for "xxxx".
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.
Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
The explanations in this manual assume that a saddle stitch finisher, punch module, and inserter are installed on the machine.
For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
5
MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE
Printed manuals and manuals stored in PDF format on the machine's hard drive are provided with the machine. When
using the machine, read the appropriate manual for the feature you are using.
Printed manuals
Operation manuals in PDF format
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "How to download the manuals in PDF format" in the Quick Start Guide.
Icons used in the manuals
The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:
Manual name Contents
Safety Guide
This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely and lists the specifications of the machine
and its peripheral devices.
Software Setup
Guide
This manual explains how to install the software and configure settings to use the machine as a printer or
scanner.
Quick Start Guide
This manual provides easy-to-understand explanations of all the functions of the machine in a single
volume.
Detailed explanations of each of the functions can be found in the manuals in PDF format.
Troubleshooting
This manual explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked questions
regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you have difficulty using
the machine.
Manual name Contents
User's Guide
This manual provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and machine
maintenance.
Copier Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
Printer Guide
(This manual)
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the printer function.
Facsimile Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
Scanner Guide
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the
Internet fax function.
Document Filing
Guide
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The
document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive. The file can be called up as needed.
System Settings
Guide
This manual explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit
the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out from the
"System Settings".
This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of
machine damage or failure.
This indicates the name of a system setting and
provides a brief explanation of the setting.
For detailed information on each system setting, see
the System Settings Guide.
When "System Settings:" appears:
A general setting is explained.
When "System Settings (Administrator):"
appears:
A setting that can only be configured by an
administrator is explained.
This provides a supplemental explanation of a
function or procedure.
This explains how to cancel or correct an operation.
6
PRINTER FUNCTION OF THE MACHINE
The machine is equipped standard with a full color printing function. To enable printing from your computer, a printer
driver must be installed from the provided CD-ROM.
See the table below to determine which printer driver to use in your environment.
Installing the printer driver in a Windows environment
To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Windows environment, see "2. SETUP IN A WINDOWS
ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.
Installing the printer driver in a Macintosh environment
In a Macintosh environment, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed to use the machine as a network printer.
To install the printer driver and configure settings in a Macintosh environment, see "3. SETUP IN A MACINTOSH
ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.
Environment Printer driver type Remarks
Windows
PCL6, PCL5c
The machine supports the Hewlett-Packard PCL6 and PCL5c printer
control languages. It is recommended that you use the PCL6 printer
driver. If you have a problem printing from older software using the PCL6
printer driver, use the PCL5c printer driver.
Can be used in the
standard machine
configuration.
PS
This printer driver supports the PostScript 3 page description language
developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated, and enables the machine to
be used as a PostScript 3 compatible printer.
(A PPD file is available if it is desired to use the Windows standard PS
printer driver.)
The PS3 expansion kit
must be installed.
Macintosh
The explanations in this manual of printing in a Windows environment generally use the screens of the PCL6 printer driver.
The printer driver screens may differ slightly depending on the printer driver that you are using.
7
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE
The following example explains how to print a document from "WordPad", which is a standard accessory program in
Windows.
1
PRINTING FROM WINDOWS
1
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
WordPad.
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
2
Open the printer driver properties
window.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
• If the printer drivers appear as icons, click the icon
of the printer driver to be used.
• If the printer drivers appear as a list, select the
name of the printer driver to be used from the list.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
• In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0, click the [Properties]
button.
• If you are using Windows 2000, the [Preferences]
button does not appear. Click a tab on the "Print"
dialog box to adjust the settings on that tab.
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
(1)
(2)
8
3
Select print settings.
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the paper size.
To select settings on other tabs, click the desired tab
and then select the settings.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
4
Click the [Print] button.
Printing begins.
In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0, click the [OK] button.
(1)
(2)
(3)
9
SELECTING THE PAPER
This section explains how to configure the "Paper Selection" setting on the [Paper] tab of
the printer driver properties window.
Before printing, check the paper sizes, paper types, and paper remaining in the machine's
trays. To view the most recent tray information, click the [Tray Status] button.
• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"
The tray that has the size and type of paper selected in "Paper Size" and "Paper Type" on the [Paper] tab is
automatically selected.
• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Source"
The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting.
When [Bypass Tray] is selected
The "Paper Type" must also be selected. Check the bypass tray and make sure that the desired type of paper is
loaded, and then select the appropriate "Paper Type" setting.
• When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"
A tray with plain paper or recycled paper of the size specified in "Paper Size" is automatically selected. (The factory
default setting is plain paper only.)
• When other than [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Type"
A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" is used for printing.
• Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other
media in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" in the User's Guide.
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray" (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray" (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.
System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [Auto Select] is selected in "Paper Selection", specify whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded from
the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included in the
paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended that
this setting be enabled.
10
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), your user information
(login name, password, etc.) must be entered in the printer driver properties window before you can print. The
information that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the
administrator of the machine before printing.
1
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
(1)
(2)
11
2
Enter your login name and password.
(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Select the [Login Name] and [Password]
checkboxes so that checkmarks appear, and
enter your login name and password. Enter 1 to 32
characters for the password.
• When authentication is by user number
Click the [User Number] checkbox and enter a
user number (5 to 8 digits).
(3) Click the [OK] button.
To have a confirmation window appear before printing starts, select the [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox so that a
checkmark appears.
3
Start printing.
• Normally printing is possible without entering your user information. (In this case, the printed pages will be added to the
"Others" count.) When printing by invalid users is prohibited in the system settings (administrator), printing is not permitted
when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
• The machine's user authentication function cannot be used when the PPD file* is installed and the Windows standard PS
printer driver is used. For this reason, printing will not be possible if printing by invalid users is prohibited in the system
settings (administrator).
* The PPD file enables the machine to print using the standard PS printer driver of the operating system.
System Settings (Administrator): Disable Printing by Invalid User
This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
(3)
(1) (2)
12
VIEWING PRINTER DRIVER HELP
When selecting settings in the printer driver, you can display Help to view explanations of the settings.
Pop-up help
To view Help for a setting, click the button in the upper right-hand corner of the printer driver properties window and
then click the setting.
You can also view the same Help by right-clicking the setting and clicking the [Help] box that appears.
Information icon
Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver properties window.
When a restriction exists on a selected setting, an information icon ( ) will appear next to the setting. Click the icon to
view an explanation of the restriction.
1
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
2
Click the [Help] button.
The Help window will open to let you view explanations of
the settings on the tab.
To view Help for settings in a dialog box, click the green text
at the top of the Help window.
(1)
(2)
13
SAVING FREQUENTLY USED PRINT
SETTINGS
Settings configured on each of the tabs at the time of printing can be saved as user settings. Saving frequently used
settings or complex color settings under an assigned name makes it easy to select those settings the next time you need
to use them.
SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING
Settings can be saved from any tab of the printer driver properties window. Settings configured on each tab are listed at
the time of saving, allowing you to check the settings as you save them.
1
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
2
Save the print settings.
(1) Configure print settings on each tab.
(2) Click the [Save] button.
(1)
(2)
(2)(1)
14
3
Check and save the settings.
(1) Check the displayed settings.
(2) Enter a name for the settings (maximum
of 20 characters).
(3) Click the [OK] button.
4
Click the [OK] button.
5
Start printing.
• Up to 30 sets of user settings can be saved.
• The following items cannot be saved in user settings.
• A watermark that you created
• Paper insertion settings
•Overlay file
• [Tab Paper Print] settings on the [Paper] tab (PCL6 only)
• The login name, password, user name, and job name entered in the [Job Handling] tab
(3)
(2)(1)
15
USING SAVED SETTINGS
Deleting saved settings
Select the user settings that you want to delete in (1) of step 2 above, and click the [Delete] button.
1
Open the printer driver properties
window from the print window of the
software application.
(1) Select the printer driver of the machine.
(2) Click the [Preferences] button.
The button that is used to open the printer driver properties window (usually [Properties] or [Printing Preferences])
may vary depending on the software application.
2
Select the print settings.
(1) Select the user settings that you wish to
use.
(2) Click the [OK] button.
3
Start printing.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
16
CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER
DEFAULT SETTINGS
The default settings of the printer driver can be changed using the procedure below. The settings selected using this
procedure are saved and become the default settings when printing from a software application. (Settings selected in
the printer driver properties window when printing from an application remain in effect only while the application is in
use.)
1
Click the [start] button and then click
[Printers and Faxes].
In Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000, click the [Start] button,
point to [Settings], and then select [Printers].
In Windows XP, if [Printers and Faxes] does not appear in the [start] menu, select [Control Panel], select [Printers and
Other Hardware], and then select [Printers and Faxes].
2
Open the printer properties window.
(1) Click the icon of the printer driver of the
machine.
(2) Click the [File] menu.
(3) Select [Properties].
In Windows NT 4.0, select [Document Defaults] from
the [File] menu to open the printer driver properties
window. Go to step 4.
(1)
(2)
(3)
17
3
Click the [Printing Preferences] button
on the [General] tab.
In Windows 98/Me, click the [Setup] tab.
4
Configure the settings and click the
[OK] button.
For explanations of the settings, see printer driver Help.
18
BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE
The following example explains how to print a document from the standard accessory program "TextEdit" in Mac OS X
("SimpleText" in Mac OS 9).
SELECTING PAPER SETTINGS
Select paper settings in the printer driver before selecting the print command.
Mac OS X
2
PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH
To use the machine as a printer for the Macintosh, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed in the machine and the machine
must be connected to a network. To install the PPD file and configure printer driver settings, see "3. SETUP IN A
MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT" in the Software Setup Guide.
1
Select [Page Setup] from the [File]
menu of TextEdit.
2
Select paper settings.
(1) Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
(2) Select paper settings.
The paper size, paper orientation, and enlarge/reduce
can be selected.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
The machine name that appears in the "Format for" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of
characters that varies depending on your machine model.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
19
Mac OS 9
1
Select [Page Setup] from the [File]
menu of SimpleText.
2
Select paper settings.
(1) Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
(2) Select paper settings.
The paper size, paper orientation, and enlarge/reduce
can be selected.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
The machine name that appears in the "Format for" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of
characters that varies depending on your machine model.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
20
PRINTING
Mac OS X
1
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
TextEdit.
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
2
Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)
3
Select print settings.
Click next to [Copies & Pages] and select the settings
that you wish to configure from the pull-down menu. The
corresponding setting screen will appear.
21
Mac OS 9
4
Click the [Print] button.
Printing begins.
1
Select [Print] from the [File] menu of
SimpleText.
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
2
Make sure that the correct printer is
selected.
The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on your machine model.)
22
3
Select print settings.
Click next to [General] and select the settings that you
wish to configure from the pull-down menu. The
corresponding setting screen will appear.
4
Click the [Print] button.
Printing begins.
23
SELECTING THE PAPER
This section explains the [Paper Feed] settings ("Paper Source" setting in [General] in Mac OS 9) in the print settings
window.
• When [Auto Select] is selected
A tray with plain paper or recycled paper (the factory default setting is plain paper only) of the size specified in "Paper
Size" in the page settings window is automatically selected.
• When a paper tray is selected
The specified tray is used for printing regardless of the "Paper Size" setting in the page settings window.
For the bypass tray, a paper type can also be specified. Make sure that the paper type setting for the bypass tray is
correct and that the set type of paper is actually loaded in the bypass tray, and then select the appropriate bypass tray
(paper type).
• When a paper type is selected
A tray with the specified type of paper and the size specified in "Paper Size" in the page settings window is used for
printing.
• Special media such as envelopes can also be placed in the bypass tray. For the procedure for loading paper and other
media in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" in the User's Guide.
• When "Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Tray" (disabled by factory default) or "Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray" (enabled by factory default) is enabled in the system settings (administrator), printing will not take place if the
paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper size or paper type specified in the settings
of the bypass tray.
System Settings (Administrator): Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Select
When [Auto Select] is used for printing, this setting determines whether or not the paper in the bypass tray will be excluded
from the paper that can be selected. This setting is disabled by factory default, and thus paper in the bypass tray is included
in the paper that can be automatically selected. If special media are frequently loaded in the bypass tray, it is recommended
that this setting be enabled.
24
PRINTING WHEN THE USER
AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED
When the user authentication function is enabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), you must enter your
user information (login name, password, etc.) in order to print. The information that must be entered varies depending on
the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing.
Mac OS X
(This function cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.1.5.)
1
Select [Print] from the application's
[File] menu.
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
2
Display the job handling screen.
(1) Make sure that the machine's printer
name is selected.
(2) Select [Job Handling].
The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)
(1)
(2)
25
Mac OS 9
3
Start printing.
(1) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Enter your login name in "Login Name" and your
password in "Password" (1 to 32 characters).
• When authentication is by user number
Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) in "User
Number".
(2) Click the [Print] button.
You can click the (lock) button after entering your login name and password, or user number, to simplify operation
the next time you wish to print based on the same user authentication.
• Normally printing is possible without entering your user information. (In this case, the printed pages will be added to the
"Others" count.) When printing by invalid users is prohibited in the system settings (administrator), printing is not permitted
when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.1.5, the user authentication function of the machine is not available. For this reason,
printing will not be possible if printing by invalid users is prohibited in the system settings (administrator).
System Settings (Administrator): Disable Printing by Invalid User
This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
1
Select [Print] from the application's
[File] menu.
The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the software application.
(2)(1)
26
2
Display the job handling screen.
(1) Make sure that the machine's printer
name is selected.
(2) Select [User Authentication].
The machine name that appears in the "Printer" menu is normally [SCxxxxxx]. ("xxxxxx" is a sequence of characters
that varies depending on the machine model.)
3
Start printing.
(1) Enter your user information.
• When authentication is by login name/password
Enter your login name in "Login Name" and your
password in "Password" (1 to 32 characters).
• When authentication is by user number
Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) in "User
Number".
(2) Click the [Print] button.
Normally printing is possible without entering your user information. (In this case, the printed pages will be added to the
"Others" count.) When printing by invalid users is prohibited in the system settings (administrator), printing is not permitted
when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
System Settings (Administrator): Disable Printing by Invalid User
This is used to prohibit printing of print jobs by users whose user information is not stored in the machine. When this function
is enabled, printing is not allowed when user information is not entered or incorrect information is entered.
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
27
This chapter explains frequently used functions.
• SELECTING THE COLOR MODE
• TWO-SIDED PRINTING (page 29)
•
FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER (page 31)
•
PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE (page 32)
• STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT (page 34)
The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
☞ Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 7)
☞ Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 18)
SELECTING THE COLOR MODE
This section explains how to select the color mode in the printer driver properties window. The following three selections
are available for the color mode:
Automatic: The machine automatically determines whether each page is color or black and white and prints the
page accordingly. Pages with colors other than black and white are printed using Y (Yellow), M
(Magenta), C (Cyan) and Bk (Black) toner. Pages that are only black and white are printed using Bk
(Black) toner only. This is convenient when printing a document that has both color and black and
white pages, however, the printing speed is slower.
Color: All pages are printed in color. Both color data and black and white data are printed using Y (Yellow), M
(Magenta), C (Cyan) and Bk (Black) toner.
Black and White: All pages are printed in black and white. Color data such as images or materials for a presentation are
printed using black toner only. This mode helps conserve color toner when you do not need to print in
color, such as when proofreading or checking the layout of a document.
(1) Click the [Color] tab.
(2) Select the "Color Mode" that you wish to
use.
3
FREQUENTLY USED FUNCTIONS
In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.
When "Color Mode" is set to [Automatic]
Even if the print result is black and white, the following types of print jobs will be counted as 4-color (Y (Yellow), M (Magenta),
C (Cyan), and Bk (Black)) print jobs. To be always counted as a black and white job, select [Black and White].
• When the data is created as color data.
• When the application treats the data as color data even though the data is black and white.
• When an image is hidden under a black and white image.
Windows
(1) (2)
28
BLACK AND WHITE PRINTING
[Black and White] can be selected on the [Main] tab as well as on the [Color] tab. Click the [Black and White Print]
checkbox on the [Main] tab so that a checkmark appears.
The [Black and White Print] checkbox on the [Main] tab and the "Color Mode" setting on the [Color] tab are linked. When
the [Black and White Print] checkbox is selected on the [Main] tab, [Black and White] is also selected on the [Color]
tab.
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Color].
(2) Select the "Color Mode" that you wish to
use.
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Color].
(2) Select the "Color Mode" that you wish to
use.
Macintosh
(1)
(2)
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, select "Color Mode" on the [Color
1] tab of [Printer Features].
(1) (2)
29
TWO-SIDED PRINTING
The machine can print on both sides of the paper. This function is useful for many purposes, and is particularly
convenient when you want to create a simple pamphlet. Two-sided printing also helps conserve paper.
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [2-Sided(Book)] or [2-Sided(Tablet)].
Paper
orientation
Print results
Vertical
Windows Macintosh Windows Macintosh
2-Sided(Book)
Long-edged binding
(Flip on long edge)
2-Sided(Tablet)
Short-edged binding
(Flip on short edge)
Horizontal
Windows Macintosh Windows Macintosh
2-Sided(Book)
Short-edged binding
(Flip on short edge)
2-Sided(Tablet)
Long-edged binding
(Flip on long edge)
The pages are printed so that they can be bound at
the side.
The pages are printed so that they can be bound at
the top.
Windows
(1) (2)
30
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Layout].
(2) Select [Long-edged binding] or
[Short-edged binding].
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Output/Document Style].
(2) Select [Flip on long edge] or [Flip on short
edge].
Macintosh
(1)
(2)
• In Mac OS X v10.1.5, select the settings in [Duplex].
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in
[Advanced].
(1) (2)
31
FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER
This function is used to automatically enlarge or reduce the printed image to match the size of the paper loaded in the
machine.
This is convenient for such purposes as enlarging a letter or A4 size document to ledger or A3 size to make it easier to
view, and to print when the same size of paper as the document image is not loaded in the machine.
The following example explains how to print a letter size document on ledger size paper.
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the size of the print image (for
example: Letter).
(3) Select [Fit To Paper Size].
(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: Ledger).
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X v10.4.)
(1) Select [Paper Handling].
(2) Check the size of the print image (for
example: Letter).
To change the print image size, use the "Paper Size"
menu that appears when [Page Setup] is selected.
(3) Select [Scale to fit paper size].
(4) Select the actual paper size to be used for
printing (for example: Ledger).
Windows
Letter or A4 Ledger or A3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Macintosh
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
32
PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE
This function can be used to reduce the print image and print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
This is convenient when you want to print multiple images such as photos on a single sheet of paper, and when you want to
conserve paper. This function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing for maximum conservation of paper.
For example, when [2-Up] (2 pages per sheet) and [4-Up] (4 pages per sheet) are selected, the following print results will
be obtained, depending on the order selected.
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) If you wish to print borderlines, click the
[Border] checkbox so that a checkmark
appears.
(4) Select the order of the pages.
N-Up
(Pages per
sheet)
Print results
Left To Right Right To Left
Top To Bottom
(When the print orientation
is landscape)
2-Up
(2 pages per
sheet)
N-Up
(Pages per
sheet)
Right, and Down Down, and Right Left, and Down Down, and Left
4-Up
(4 pages per
sheet)
• The page orders for 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up are the same as for 4-Up.
• In a Windows environment, the page order can be viewed in the print image in the printer driver properties window.
In a Macintosh environment, the page orders are displayed as selections.
• In a Macintosh environment, the number of pages that can be printed on a single sheet is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16.
Windows
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
33
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Layout].
(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) Select the order of the pages.
(4) If you wish to print borderlines, select the
desired type of borderline.
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Layout].
(2) Select the number of pages per sheet.
(3) Select the order of the pages.
(4) If you wish to print borderlines, select the
desired type of borderline.
Macintosh
(1) (2)
(3)(4)
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
34
STAPLING OUTPUT/PUNCHING HOLES IN
OUTPUT
Staple function
The staple function can be used to staple output.
This function saves considerable time when preparing handouts for a meeting or other stapled materials. The staple
function can also be used in combination with two-sided printing to create materials with a more sophisticated
appearance.
Stapling positions and the number of staples can be selected to obtain the following stapling results.
Punch function
The punch function can be selected to punch holes in printed output. Punch hole positions can be set by selecting the
binding edge.
Staples Left Right Top
1 Staple
2 Staples
Left Right Top
• To use the staple function, a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is required.
• To use the punch function, a punch module must be installed on the finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
•
The number of holes that can be punched and the spacing between the holes varies depending on the installed punch module.
• The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 50 (30 sheets for A4-R, Letter-R, B4, Foolscap, and larger sizes).
The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.
• The staple function cannot be used in combination with the offset function, which offsets the position of each output job
from the previous job.
• When the finisher is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), the staple function and punch function
cannot be used.
• When the staple function or the punch function is disabled in the machine's system settings (administrator), stapling or
punching is not possible.
• For information on the saddle stitch function, see "CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple)" (page 36).
35
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the binding edge.
(3) Select the staple function or the punch
function.
• For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
• For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so
that a checkmark appears.
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the staple function or the punch
function.
• For the staple function, select the number of staples in
the "Staple" menu.
• For the punch function, click the [Punch] checkbox so
that a checkmark appears.
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Output/Document Style].
(2) Select the staple function or the punch
function.
• If you are stapling, select the stapling pattern from the
"1-Sided Staple" menu or the "2-Sided Staple" menu.
After a pattern is selected, a print image showing the
binding edge will appear.
• If you are punching, select the binding edge from the
"Punch" menu.
Windows
(3)
(2)
(1)
Macintosh
(1) (2)
(3)
• In Mac OS X v10.1.5, the binding edge cannot be
selected. If the paper is oriented vertically, the
binding edge will be the left edge. If the paper is
oriented horizontally, the binding edge will be the
bottom edge. Select the staple settings or punch
settings on the [Output] tab of [Printer Features].
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the settings in
[Advanced].
(1)
(2)
36
This chapter explains convenient functions for specific printing objectives.
• CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS
• FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE (page 40)
• COLOR MODE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION (page 44)
• FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND IMAGES
(page 48)
• PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL PURPOSES
(page 51)
• CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS (page 57)
The explanations assume that the paper size and other basic settings have already been selected. For the basic
procedure for printing and the steps for opening the printer driver properties window, see the following section:
☞ Windows: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 7)
☞ Macintosh: BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE (page 18)
CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS FOR CREATING
PAMPHLETS AND POSTERS
CREATING A PAMPHLET (Pamphlet/Pamphlet Staple)
The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of
each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and
bound to create a pamphlet. This is convenient when
you wish to compile printed output into a pamphlet.
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed and saddle
stitch printing and the staple function are selected, the
output is automatically folded and stapled at the center.
This allows you to conveniently use the output as a
handout or pamphlet without the need for any further
work.
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select [Pamphlet Style]
The pamphlet printing method can be selected from the
pull-down menu.
(3) Select the "Binding Edge".
[2 Staples] can be selected for "Staple" when a saddle
stitch finisher is installed.
4
CONVENIENT PRINTING
FUNCTIONS
In Windows, view printer driver Help for details on printer driver settings for each printing function.
Windows
(1) (2) (3)
37
Mac OS X
(This function cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.1.5.)
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
[2 Staples] can be selected in the "Staple" menu when a
saddle stitch finisher is installed.
(3) Select [Tiled Pamphlet] or [2-Up Pamphlet].
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Output/Document Style].
(2) Select [Pamphlet(Left)] or
[Pamphlet(Right)].
(3) To staple, select [2 Stapling Pattern 7
(Pamphlet)].
[2 Stapling Pattern 7 (Pamphlet)] can be selected when a
saddle stitch finisher is installed.
Macintosh
(3)
(1) (2)
In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select from the "2-Side Printing"
and "Binding Edge" menus in [Advanced].
(3)
(1) (2)
38
INCREASING THE MARGIN (Margin Shift)
This function is used to shift the print image to increase
the margin at the left, right, or top of the paper. This is
convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output
but the binding area overlaps the text. When a finisher or
saddle stitch finisher is installed, the staple function or
the punch function can be used with this function.
(1) Configure the settings on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select the "Binding Edge".
(3) Select the "Margin Shift".
Windows
(3)
(2)
(1)
Macintosh
(3)
(1) (2)
• In Mac OS X v10.1.5, the binding edge cannot be
selected. If the paper is oriented vertically, the
binding edge will be the left edge. If the paper is
oriented horizontally, the binding edge will be the
bottom edge. Select the margin shift setting from
the "Margin Shift" menu on the [Output] tab of
[Printer Features].
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select from the "Binding
Edge" and "Margin Shift" menus in [Advanced].
39
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Advanced].
(2) Select the binding edge and margin shift.
CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Poster Printing)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
One page of print data can be enlarged and printed
using multiple sheets of paper (4 sheets (2 x 2), 9 sheets
(3 x 3) or 16 sheets (4 x 4)). The sheets can then be
attached together to create a large poster. To enable
precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during
attachment, borderlines can be printed and overlapping
edges can be created (overlap function).
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select the [Poster Printing] checkbox
and click the [Poster Settings] button.
(3) Select poster settings.
Select the number of sheets of paper to be used from the
pull-down menu. If you wish to print borderlines and/or
use the overlap function, select the corresponding
checkboxes .
(1)
(2)
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
40
FUNCTIONS TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND
ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE
ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES
(Rotate 180 degrees)
This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can
be printed correctly on paper that can only be loaded in
one orientation (such as envelopes or paper with punch
holes). (In Mac OS X, a portrait image cannot be rotated
180 degrees.)
(1) Select the setting on the [Main] tab.
(2) Select the [Rotate 180 degrees] checkbox
.
Mac OS X
(This function cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.1.5.)
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and click the button.
(2) Click the [OK] button.
ABCD
ABCD
Windows
(1)
(2)
Macintosh
(1)
(2)
41
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options].
(2) Select the [Flip Horizontal] and [Flip
Vertical] checkboxes .
The print image will show an image of the print result.
(3) Click the [OK] button.
ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE
(Zoom/XY-Zoom)
This function is used to enlarge or reduce the image to a
selected percentage. This allows you to enlarge a small
image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing
an image.
When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can set
the width and length percentages separately to change
the proportions of the image. (XY-Zoom)
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select [Zoom] and click the [Settings]
button.
The actual paper size to be used for printing can be
selected from the pull-down menu.
(3) Select the zoom ratio.
Directly enter a number (%) or click the button to
change the ratio in increments of 1%.
(1) (2)
(3)
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
42
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%).
(2) Click the [OK] button.
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and enter the ratio (%).
(2) Click the [OK] button.
Macintosh
(1)
(2)
(2)(1)
43
REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)
The image can be reversed to create a mirror image.
This function can be used to conveniently print a design
for a woodblock print or other printing medium.
(This function can be used when the PS printer driver is used.)
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select a mirror image setting.
If you wish to reverse the image horizontally, select
[Horizontal]. If you wish to reverse the image vertically,
select [Vertical].
(This function can only be used in Mac OS 9.)
(1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu
and select [PostScript Options].
(2) Select "Visual Effects".
To reverse the image horizontally, select [Flip Horizontal].
To reverse the image vertically, select [Flip Vertical].
(3) Click the [OK] button.
B
B
Windows
(1) (2)
Macintosh
(1) (2)
(3)
44
COLOR MODE ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF
THE IMAGE (Color Adjustment)
The brightness and contrast can be adjusted in the print settings when printing a photo or other image. These settings
can be used for simple corrections when you do not have image editing software installed on your computer.
(1) Click the [Color] tab.
(2) Click the [Color Adjustment] button.
(3) Adjust the color settings.
To adjust a setting, drag the slide bar or click the
or button.
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X v10.3.3 to 10.3.9 and v10.4.)
(1) Select [Color].
(2) Click the [Color Adjustment] button.
(3) Select the [Color Adjustment] checkbox
and adjust the color.
Adjust the settings by dragging the slide bars .
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
Macintosh
(2)
(1)
(3)
45
PRINTING FAINT TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK
(Text To Black/Vector To Black)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
When printing a color image in grayscale, color text and
lines that are faint can be printed in black. (Raster data
such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted.) This allows
you to bring out color text and lines that are faint and
difficult to see when printed in grayscale.
• [Text To Black] can be selected to print all text other
than white text in black.
• [Vector To Black] can be selected to print all vector
graphics other than white lines and areas in black.
(1) Click the [Color] tab.
(2) Select the [Text To Black] checkbox
and/or the [Vector To Black] checkbox .
ABCD ABCD
Windows
(1)
(2)
46
SELECTING COLOR SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE
TYPE (Advanced Color)
Preset color settings are available in the machine's printer driver for various uses. These enable printing using the most
suitable color settings for the color image type.
Advanced color settings can also be configured to match the objective of the color image, such as color management
settings and the screening setting for adjustment of color tone expression.
The following items can be configured in the advanced color management settings:
• [Windows ICM] checkbox: Color management method in a Windows environment
• [ColorSync] checkbox*
1
: Color management method in a Macintosh environment
• "Source Profile": Select the color profile used to display the image on the computer screen.
• "Rendering Intent": Standard value used when converting the color balance of the image displayed on the computer
screen to a color balance that can be printed by the machine.
• "Screening": Select the most suitable image processing method for the image being printed.
• "Neutral Gray": Select the toner color used to print gray areas.
• "Print Priority": Select whether you wish to give priority to image quality or speed when printing.
• "Pure Black Print"*
2
: Black text and vector graphics can be printed using black toner only.
• "Black Overprint"*
2
: Prevents whitening of the outline of black text.
• "CMYK Simulation"*
2
: The color can be adjusted to simulate printing using the process colors ([Default] is "SWOP")
used by printing presses.
*1 Cannot be selected in Mac OS X v10.1.5 and v10.2.8.
In Mac OS 9, can be selected in the "Color Matching" menu.
*2 Can only be used when using the PS printer driver (Windows/Macintosh).
(1) Click the [Color] tab.
(2) Select the color image type.
A document type to match your purpose can be selected
from the pull-down menu.
If you wish to select advanced settings, click the
[Advanced Color] button.
(3) Select advanced color settings.
If you wish to perform color management using Windows
ICM in your operating system, select the [Windows ICM]
checkbox . To configure advanced color management
settings such as "Source Profile", select the desired
settings from the menus.
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
To configure all advanced color settings, select
[Custom] in the "Image Type" field and click the
[Advanced Color] button.
47
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Color].
(2) Select color print settings.
• To use the Mac OS Color Management function, select
the [ColorSync] checkbox . When this is done,
"Image Type" cannot be selected.
• If you selected [4 Colors] from the "Neutral Gray"
menu, select [Pure Black Print].
(3) Select the color image type.
A image type to match your purpose can be selected from
the pull-down menu.
If you wish to select detailed settings, click the [Advanced
Color] button.
(4) Select advanced color settings.
To configure advanced color management settings,
select the desired settings from the menus. To use
"CMYK Simulation", select the [CMYK Simulation]
checkbox and then select the desired setting.
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Color].
Select color management settings from each menu.
When [Color] is selected, "Color Matching" or "Image
Type" can be selected.
(2) Select [Color2].
Select color management settings from each menu. To
select "Rendering Intent", "Image Type" must be set to
[Custom]. If you selected [4Colors] from the "Neutral
Gray" menu, select "Pure Black Print".
(3) Select [Color3].
Select color management settings from each menu. To
select "CMYK Simulation" and "Screening", "Image Type"
must be set to [Custom].
Macintosh
(3)
(2)
(1)
(4)
• In Mac OS X v10.1.5, color management settings are on the [Color 1], [Color 2], and [Color 3] tabs of [Printer Features].
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the color image type from the "Image Type" menu.
• To configure all advanced color settings, select [Custom] in the "Image Type" field and click the [Advanced Color] button.
48
FUNCTIONS THAT COMBINE TEXT AND
IMAGES
ADDING A WATERMARK TO PRINTED PAGES
(Watermark)
Faint shadow-like text can be added to the background
of the printed image as a watermark. The size, color,
density, and angle of the watermark text can be
adjusted. The text can be selected from a pre-stored list,
or entered to create an original watermark.
(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the watermark settings.
Select a stored water mark from the pull-down menu. You
can click the [Edit] button to edit the font color and select
other detailed settings.
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Watermarks].
(2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and
configure watermark settings.
Detailed watermark settings can be configured such as
selection of the text and editing of the font and color.
Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide
bar .
CONFIDENTIAL
Windows
(1) (2)
If you wish to create a new watermark...
Enter the text of the watermark in the "Text" box and
click the [Add] button.
Macintosh
(1)(2)
In Mac OS X v10.1.5, adjust the watermark settings on
the [Watermarks] tab of [Printer Features].
49
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Watermark].
(2) Configure watermark settings.
Detailed watermark settings can be configured such as
selection of the text and editing of the color. Select the
text from the "Watermark" menu. Select the size and
angle of the text and color of the font from the
corresponding menus.
PRINTING AN IMAGE OVER THE PRINT DATA
(Image Stamp)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
A bitmap or JPEG image stored on your computer can
be printed over the print data. The size, position, and
angle of the image can be adjusted. This feature can be
used to "stamp" the print data with a frequently used
image or an icon of your own creation.
(This function can be used when the PCL6 or PS printer driver is used.)
(1) Click the [Watermarks] tab.
(2) Select the image stamp setting.
Select a stored image stamp from the pull-down menu.
(2)(1)
MEMO
MEMO
Windows
(1) (2)
If you wish to create a new image stamp...
Select an image file and then click the [Add] button.
50
CREATING OVERLAYS FOR PRINT DATA (Overlays)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
The print data can be printed in a previously created
overlay. By creating table rulings or a decorative frame
in an application different from that of the text file and
registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print
result can be easily obtained without the need for
complex manipulations.
Create an overlay file.
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
Configure the printer driver settings from the software
application that you wish to use to create the overlay file.
(2) Click the [Edit] button.
(3) Create an overlay file.
Click the [Create Overlay] button and specify the name
and folder to be used for the overlay file that you wish to
create. The file will be created when the settings are
completed and printing is started.
Printing with an overlay file
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
Configure the printer driver settings from the application
from which you wish to print using the overlay file.
(2) Select the overlay file.
A previously created or stored overlay file can be selected
from the pull-down menu.
XXXX
XXX 1 100
XXXX 10 150
XXX 0 120
XXXX 10
250
XXXX
XXX 1 100
XXXX 10 150
XXX 0 120
XXXX 10 250
Overlay file
Windows
(1) (2)
(3)
• When printing is started, a confirmation message
will appear. The overlay file will not be created until
the [Yes] button is clicked.
• To register a previously existing overlay file, click
the [Load Overlay] button.
(1) (2)
51
PRINT FUNCTIONS FOR SPECIAL
PURPOSES
PRINTING SPECIFIED PAGES ON DIFFERENT PAPER
(Different Paper)
• Using this function in a Windows environment
The front and back cover and specified pages of a
document can be printed on paper that is different
from the other pages. Use this function when you wish
to print the front and back cover on heavy paper, or
insert colored paper or a different paper type at
specified pages. You can also insert paper as an
insert without printing on it.
• Using this function in a Macintosh environment
The front cover can be printed using paper that is
different from the other pages. This function can be
used, for example, when you want to print only the
cover on thick paper.
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select [Different Paper] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select paper insertion settings.
Select the insertion position, paper source, and printing
method from the corresponding menus. Click the [Add]
button to show the selected settings in "Information".
When you have completed the settings, click the [Save]
button in "User Settings" to save the settings.
5
4
3
2
1
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Source", be
sure to select the "Paper Type".
52
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Paper Feed].
(2) Select cover insertion settings.
Select the paper tray or paper type for the first page in
"First page from", and then select the paper tray or paper
type used for the remaining pages in "Remaining from".
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [General].
(2) Select cover insertion settings.
Select the paper tray or paper type for the first page in
"First page from", and then select the paper tray or paper
type used for the remaining pages in "Remaining from".
Macintosh
(1) (2)
(2)(1)
53
ADDING INSERTS WHEN PRINTING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
When printing on transparency film, this function helps
prevent the sheets of transparency film from sticking
together by inserting a sheet of paper between each
sheet of film. It is also possible to print the same content
on each inserted sheet of paper as is printed on the
corresponding sheet of transparency film.
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select [Transparency Inserts] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on
the sheet of transparency film, select the [Printed]
checkbox . Select the paper source and type if
needed.
Mac OS X
(1) Select [Printer Features].
(2) Select [Transparency Inserts].
(3) Select transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on the
sheet of transparency film, select [Print] in "Transparency
Inserts". Select the paper source and type if needed.
C
B
A
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Source", be
sure to select the "Paper Type".
Macintosh
(3)(1) (2)
• When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Source",
be sure to select the "Paper Type".
• In Mac OS X v10.1.5, select the settings in
"Transparency Inserts" on the [Advanced] tab of
[Printer Features].
• In Mac OS X v10.2.8, select the [Transparency
Inserts] checkbox in [Advanced].
54
Mac OS 9
(1) Select [Transparency Inserts].
(2) Select the transparency insert settings.
To print the same content on the insert as is printed on
the sheet of transparency film, select [On (Printed)] from
the "Transparency Inserts" menu. Select the paper
source and type if needed.
PRINTING A CARBON COPY (Carbon Copy)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
This function is used to print an additional copy of the
print image on paper that is the same size but from a
different paper tray.
For example, if carbon copy print is selected when
standard paper is loaded in tray 1 and colored paper is
loaded in tray 2, a print result similar to a carbon copy
slip can be obtained with a single selection of the print
command. As another example, if standard paper is
loaded in tray 1 and recycled paper is loaded in tray 2,
Carbon Copy can simultaneously print one copy for
presentation and one copy as a duplicate.
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select [Carbon Copy] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the carbon copy settings.
Select the tray for the "Top Copy" and then select the tray
for the carbon copy (or copies) in "Carbon Copy".
(2)(1)
When [Bypass Tray] is selected in "Paper Source", be
sure to select the "Paper Type".
A
A
A
A
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
When the bypass tray is selected, be sure to select
the "Paper Type".
55
PRINTING TEXT ON TABS OF TAB PAPER
(Tab Printing)
(This function is only available in Windows.)
This function is used to print text on the tabs of tab paper.
Printing tab text created in the printer driver (PCL6 only)
Text to be printed on tabs can be entered in [Tab Paper
Print] on the [Paper] tab of the printer driver properties
window, and detailed settings can be configured such as
the size of the tabs, the starting position, the distance
between tabs, and the page numbers where tab sheets
will be inserted.
Printing tab text created in a software application
Text to be printed on tabs can be created in a software
application, and then [Tab Paper Settings] on the
[Advanced] tab of the printer driver properties window
can be used to specify how far the text needs to be
shifted for tab printing.
Printing tab text created in the printer driver (PCL6 only)
(1) Click the [Paper] tab.
(2) Select [Tab Paper Print] and click the
[Settings] button.
(3) Select the tab paper settings.
The position of the first tab, the distance between tabs,
and the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the tab can
be directly entered or changed using the button. In
addition, the size of the tab paper can be selected in
"Paper Size". To enter text to be printed on tab paper or
specify the page numbers where tab sheets will be
inserted, click the [Page Settings] button.
GHI
DEF
ABC
Windows
(1)
(2)
(3)
The tab paper settings can be stored and a stored file
opened in "User Settings".
56
Printing tab text created in a software application
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Click the [Tab Paper Settings] button.
(3) Select the tab paper settings.
To shift the image, directly enter a number or click the
button.
(1)
(2)
(3)
57
CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS
USING TWO MACHINES TO PRINT A LARGE PRINT
JOB (Tandem Print)
Two machines are required to use this function.
Tandem Print allows you to divide a large print job
between two machines connected to your network.
The machines simultaneously print each half of the job,
making it possible to shorten the printing time when
printing a large number of sets.
To use Tandem Print, the IP address of the slave
machine configured in "Tandem Connection Setting" in
the machine's system settings (administrator) must be
configured in the printer driver. In a Windows
environment, this can be accomplished automatically by
clicking the [Auto Configuration] button on the
[Configuration] tab of the printer driver. In a Macintosh
environment, this can be accomplished automatically by
clicking the [Tandem Settings] button.
(1) Click the [Advanced] tab.
(2) Select the [Tandem Print] checkbox .
(This function can only be used in Mac OS X v10.2.8, v10.3.3 to 10.3.9, and v10.4.)
(1) Select [Tandem Print].
(2) Select the [Tandem Print] checkbox .
Example: Printing 4 sets of copies
2 sets of
copies
2 sets of
copies
Windows
(1)
(2)
Tandem Print function can only be used when the
printer driver is installed using a "Standard
installation", or a "Custom installation" with "LPR
Direct Print" selected.
Macintosh
(2)
(1)
To use the tandem print function, the protocol to be
used must be selected in accordance with the
message that appears in the left screen when adding
the printer driver with the "Printer Setup Utility" ("Print
Center" in Mac OS X v10.2.8).
58
SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES
(Retention/Document Filing)
This function is used to store a print job as a file on the
machine's hard drive, allowing the job to be printed from
the operation panel when needed. The location for
storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from
being mixed together with files of other users.
When printing from a computer, a password (5 to 8
digits) can be set to maintain the secrecy of information
in a stored file.
When a password is set, the password must be entered
to print a stored file from the machine.
Hold Only
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive without printing it.
Hold After Print
This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine's hard drive after it is printed.
Sample Print
When a print job is sent to the machine, only the first set of copies is printed. After checking the contents of the first set
of copies, you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine. This prevents the occurrence of
excessive misprints.
To print files stored on the machine's hard drive, see the Document Filing Guide.
(1) Click the [Job Handling] tab.
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox . Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To enter a password (5 to
8 digit number), click the [Password] checkbox .
(3) Select document filing settings.
Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.
HDD
Windows
(1) (2)
(3)
• When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"
will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be
used.
• To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing
Control" in the system settings (administrator). If a
password has been established for a custom folder,
enter the "Folder Password" in the folder selection
screen.
59
Mac OS X
(This function cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.1.5.)
(1) Select [Job Handling].
(2) Select the retention setting.
Click the [Retention] checkbox . Select the retention
method in "Retention Settings". To simplify operation the
next time the same password is set, click the (lock)
button after entering the password (5 to 8 digit number).
(3) Select document filing settings.
Select the folder for storing the file in "Document Filing
Settings". If you selected [Custom Folder], click the
[Stored to] button to select the folder.
Mac OS 9
(The document filing function cannot be used.)
(1) Select [Job Handling].
(2) Select the retention setting.
Select the retention method from the "Retention" menu. If
needed, enter a password (5 to 8 digit number).
Macintosh
(3)
(1)(2)
• When [Quick File] is selected, "Retention Settings"
will be set to [Hold After Print] only.
• When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered
in "Retention Settings" is cleared and cannot be
used.
• To store a file in a custom folder, the custom folder
must first be created using "Document Filing
Control" in the system settings (administrator). If a
password has been established for a custom folder,
enter the "Folder Password" in the folder selection
screen.
(2)(1)
60
When you do not have the printer driver installed on your computer, or when the software application used to open a file
that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver.
The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below.
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM THE MACHINE
A file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be selected and printed from the
operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver.
5
PRINTING WITHOUT THE
PRINTER DRIVER
File Type
TIFF JPEG PCL
PDF/
Encrypted PDF
PS
Extension
tiff, tif
jpeg, jpg,
jpe, jfif
pcl pdf ps
•
Even if the print result is black and white, the following types of print jobs will be counted as 4-color (Y (Yellow), M (Magenta), C
(Cyan), and Bk (Black)) print jobs. To be always counted as a black and white job, select black and white printing.
- When the data is created as color data.
- When the application treats the data as color data even though the data is black and white
.
- When an image is hidden under a black and white image.
• To print PDF and PS files, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed.
• Depending on the file type, it may not be possible to print some files in the above table.
61
DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON AN FTP SERVER
When an FTP server is configured in the machine's Web pages, you can specify and print a file on the FTP server from
the operation panel of the machine. This saves you the trouble of downloading the file and printing it from a computer.
To configure FTP server settings, click [Application Settings] and then [FTP Print Settings] in the Web page menu, and
configure the settings in "FTP Print Settings from Operation Panel". (Administrator rights are required.)
1
Access the FTP server.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
(3) Touch the [FTP] key.
2
Touch the key of the FTP server that you
wish to access.
3
Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.
• The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the
FTP server. To display the files and folders in a folder, touch
the key of the folder.
• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the key to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the root folder (the top folder level of the selected FTP server).
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key (or the [File Name] key) to change the order of the files and folders displayed
on the screen. The order switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
FTP
USB Memory
External Data Access
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)
(2) (3)
Server 1
FTP
Server 2
Server 3
Back
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
File or Folder Name
Server 1
File-01.tiff
File-02.tiff
File-03.tiff
File-04.tiff
File-05.tiff
Folder01
Folder02
1
1
62
DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE IN USB MEMORY
A file in a USB memory device connected to the machine can be printed from the operation panel of the machine without
using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your computer, you can copy a file into
a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly.
4
Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL or PS) in step 3 that includes
print settings, the settings will be applied.
(2) Touch the [Print] key.
Printing begins. When the message "Job stored. ..."
appears in the touch panel, touch the [OK] key.
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 66)
1
Connect the USB memory device to the
machine.
Consult your dealer for USB memory devices that can be used.
2
Access the USB memory device.
(1) Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING] key.
(2) Touch the [Ex Data Access] tab.
(3) Touch the [USB Memory] key.
1
Output
2-Sided
Quick File
Paper Select
Auto
Print
Cancel
B/W Print
Fit To Page
Print
File-01.tiff
Number of Prints
(1 999)
(1) (2)
FTP
USB Memory
External Data Access
File Retrieve
Scan to HDD HDD Status
Ex Data Access
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(1)
(2) (3)
63
3
Touch the key of the file that you wish to
print.
• The icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be
printed.
• The icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the
USB memory. To display the files and folders in a folder,
touch the key of the folder.
• A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
• Touch the key to move up one folder level.
• When you move down a folder level by touching a folder key, the key appears in the top right corner of the
screen. Touch this key to return to the root folder (the top folder level of the selected USB memory).
• Touch the [File or Folder Name] key (or the [File Name] key) to change the order of the files and folders displayed
on the screen. The order switches between ascending order and descending order each time you touch the key.
4
Print the selected file.
(1) Select print conditions.
If you selected a file (PCL or PS) in step 3 that includes
print settings, the settings will be applied.
(2) Touch the [Print] key.
Printing begins after the selected file is transferred. When
the message "Job stored. ..." appears in the touch panel,
touch the [OK] key.
To cancel printing...
To cancel printing while the file is being transferred, touch the [Cancel] key in the message screen that appears in the
touch panel.
5
Remove the USB memory device from
the machine.
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
☞ PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 66)
File or Folder Name
USB Memory
File-01.tiff
File-02.tiff
File-03.tiff
File-04.tiff
File-05.tiff
Folder01
Folder02
1
1
1
Output
2-Sided
Quick File
Paper Select
Auto
Print
Cancel
B/W Print
Fit To Page
Print
File-01.tiff
Number of Prints
(1 999)
(1) (2)
64
DIRECTLY PRINTING FROM A COMPUTER
Settings can be configured in the Web pages of the machine to enable direct printing from a computer without using the
printer driver.
SUBMIT PRINT JOB
You can specify a file to be printed directly without using the printer driver.
In addition to a file on your computer, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your
computer, such as a file on another computer connected to the same network.
To directly print a file on a computer, click [Document Operations] and then [Submit Print Job] in the Web page menu.
FTP PRINT
You can print a file from your computer by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine.
• Configuring settings
To enable FTP Print, click [Application Settings] and then [FTP Print Settings] in the Web page menu, enable FTP
Print in "FTP Print Settings from Client PC", and configure the port number. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Performing FTP Print
Type "ftp://" and then the IP address of the machine in the address bar of your computer's Web browser as shown
below.
(Example)
ftp://192.168.1.28
Drag and drop the file that you wish to print onto the "lp" folder that appears in your Web browser. The file will
automatically begin printing.
If you printed a file (PCL or PS) that includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
65
E-MAIL PRINT
An e-mail account can be configured in the machine to have the machine periodically check your mail server and
automatically print received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver.
• Configuring settings
To use E-mail Print, you must first configure an e-mail account in the machine. To configure an account, click
[Application Settings] and then [E-mail Print Settings] in the Web page menu. (Administrator rights are required.)
• Using E-mail Print
To print a file using E-mail Print, use your e-mail program on your computer to send the file as an attachment to the
machine's e-mail address.
Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format.
Commands are entered in the format "command name = value".
The following control commands can be entered:
* Can be omitted except when authentication is by user number.
Function Command name Values Example
Copies COPIES 1-999
Staples JOBSTAPLE STAPLENO, STAPLELEFT, STAPLETWO
Punch PUNCH OFF, ON
Output COLLATE OFF, ON
2-sided print DUPLEX OFF, TOP, LEFT, RIGHT
Account number* ACCOUNTNUMBER Number (5 to 8 digits)
File type LANGUAGE PCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF, JPG
Paper PAPER Name of available paper (LETTER, A4, etc.)
Document Filing FILE OFF, ON
FOLDERNAME 30 characters
Quick File QUICKFILE OFF, ON
Output tray OUTTRAY CENTER, RIGHT, FINISHER
Black & white
printing
B/W PRINT OFF, ON
Fit to page FITIMAGETOPAGE OFF, ON
• Enter the commands in Plain Text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.
• To receive a list of the control commands, enter the command "Config" in the e-mail message.
• If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will take place according to the "Printer Default
Settings" in the system settings. If you printed a file (PCL or PS) that includes print settings, the settings will be applied.
• To print PDF and PS files, the PS3 expansion kit must be installed.
• Only enter a "File type" when you are specifying a page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file
type.
COPIES=2
DUPLEX=LEFT
ACCOUNTNUMBER=11111
PAPER=LETTER
B/W PRINT=ON
66
PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE
Encrypted PDF is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print
an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device connected to the machine, follow the steps below to
enter the password and begin printing.
The PS3 expansion kit is required to use this function.
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
2
Select the encrypted PDF print job.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
(2) Change the print job status mode to
[Spool].
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
(3) Touch the print job key of the PDF file that
has the password.
3
Touch the [Yes] key.
A text entry screen appears. Enter the password (32 characters
or less) and touch the [OK] key. The print job is released and
moved to the [Job Queue].
When both a master password and a user password (which is used to open the file) have been set, enter the master
password.
• To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver, enter the password when opening the file on your computer.
• Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for an encrypted PDF file. To delete a spooled print job, touch the
[No] key in the screen of step 3 and touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
• Encrypted PDF versions that can be directly printed are 1.5 (Adobe
®
Acrobat
®
6.0) and earlier.
JOB STATUS
Print Job
Scan to
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Computer01
Computer02
Computer03
Computer04
Computer05
020 / ---
020 / ---
--- / ---
--- / ---
002 / ---
Ripping
Spooling
Spooling
Spooling
Encrypt PDF
Job Queue
Sets / Progress Status
Spool
Job Queue
Complete
Stop/Delete
1
1
(1) (2)(3)
Enter the password?
No
Yes
67
GIVING A PRINT JOB
PRIORITY/CANCELING A PRINT JOB
GIVING A PRINT JOB PRIORITY
When the machine is busy copying or printing a received fax or other job, you can give priority to a print job that is
waiting to be printed and print it ahead of the other jobs.
6
USEFUL INFORMATION
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
2
Give the desired job priority.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Job
Queue].
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
(3) Touch the key of the print job to which you
want to give priority.
(4) Touch the [Priority] key.
The job being printed stops and the job selected in (3) is
printed.
To check print information on the selected job, touch the [Detail] key.
JOB STATUS
Computer01
Computer02
0312345678
Copy
020 / 001
020 / 000
002 / 000
002 / 000
Printing
Waiting
Waiting
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Spool
Job Queue
Complete
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
1
1
Print Job
Scan to
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Job Queue
Sets / Progress Status
(4)(3)
(1)
(2)
68
CANCELING A PRINT JOB
A job being printed, a job waiting to be printed, or a spooled job can be canceled.
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
2
Cancel the job.
(1) Touch the [Print Job] tab.
(2) Change the print job status mode to [Spool]
or [Job Queue].
Touch this key to change modes. The selected mode will
be highlighted.
(3) Touch the key of the print job that you wish
to cancel.
(4) Touch the [Stop/Delete] key.
(5) A message appears to confirm the
cancelation. Touch the [Yes] key.
The selected job key is deleted and printing is canceled.
It is also possible to cancel printing with the [STOP] key ( ) on the operation panel. When the [STOP] key ( ) is
pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job.
If you do not want to cancel the selected print job...
Touch the [No] key in step (5).
JOB STATUS
Computer01
Computer02
0312345678
Copy
020 / 001
020 / 000
002 / 000
002 / 000
Printing
Waiting
Waiting
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Copy
002 / 000
Waiting
Spool
Job Queue
Complete
Detail
Priority
Stop/Delete
1
1
Print Job
Scan to
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Job Queue
Sets / Progress Status
(4)(3)
(1)
(2)
69
CHANGING TO ANOTHER PAPER SIZE AND
PRINTING WHEN PAPER RUNS OUT
If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded
in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when the [OK] key is touched
and paper is loaded in the machine. If you wish to print on paper in another tray because the desired size of paper is not
immediately available, follow the steps below.
1
Press the [JOB STATUS] key.
2
Display details on the print job for which
there is no paper.
(1) Touch the key of the job for which "Paper
Empty" appeared.
(2) Touch the [Detail] key.
3
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
4
Touch the key of the tray that has the
paper you wish to use.
Printing begins.
If you changed to a different paper size, printing may not take place correctly; for example part of the text or image may run
off the paper.
JOB STATUS
Computer01 020 / 001
Paper Empty
Priority
Spool
Job Queue
Complete
Detail
Stop/Delete
1
1
Print Job
Scan to
Fax Job
Internet Fax
Job Queue
Sets / Progress Status
(1)
(2)
Detail
OK
Computer01 020 / 000 Paper Empty
Data : File-01.tiff
Color / B/W : Full Color
Paper :
11x17
Plain
Paper Select
Document
Style:
Special
Modes:
Output :
2-Sided
(Book)
Detail
OK
Computer01 020 / 000 Paper Empty
Paper Select
Plain
Plain
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
Plain
8-½x11
Plain
8-½x11 8-½x11
11x17
8-½x14
Plain
70
PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATION LIST
7
PRINTER DRIVER
SPECIFICATIONS
Function PCL6 PCL5c PS
Windows
PPD
*1
Macintosh
PPD
*1
Frequently
used
functions
Copies 1-999 1-999 1-999 1-999 1-999
Orientation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
N-Up
Number
of
pages
2,4,6,8,9,16 2,4,6,8,9,16 2,4,6,8,9,16 2,4,6,9,16*
2,3
2,4,6,9,16
Order Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable Selectable
Border On/Off On/Off On/Off Yes Selectable
2-Sided Print Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fit To Page Yes Yes Yes No Yes*
4
Binding Edge Selectable Selectable Selectable No Yes*
5
Black and White
Print
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Staple*
6
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Punch*
6
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper Paper Size Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Custom Paper 1 size 1 size 1 size Yes*
2
Yes*
5
Paper Selection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Output tray Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Convenient
printer
functions
Pamphlet/Pamphlet
Staple*
7
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Margin Shift 10mm/20mm/
30mm
10mm/20mm/
30mm
10mm/20mm/
30mm
Yes Yes
Poster Printing Yes No Yes No No
Rotate 180
degrees
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*
5
Zoom/XY-Zoom Yes*
8
Yes*
8
Yes Yes*
8
Yes*
8
Mirror Image No No Yes Yes Yes*
9
71
*1 The specifications of each function in Windows PPD and Macintosh PPD vary depending on the operating system
version and the software application.
*2 Cannot be used in Windows NT 4.0.
*3 Only 2-Up and 4-Up printing can be used in Windows 98.
*4 Only Mac OS X v10.4 can be used.
*5 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.1.5.
*6 Can be used when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed. (To use the punch function, a punch module must
be also installed.)
*7 To use the pamphlet staple function, a saddle stitch finisher is required.
*8 The horizontal and vertical proportion cannot be set separately.
*9 Only Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2 can be used.
*10 Only covers can be inserted.
*11 Cannot be used in Mac OS 9.0 to 9.2.2.
*12 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10.2.8.
*13 1200x600 dpi can only be selected for black and white printing.
*14 This setting may not operate in some software applications and operating systems.
*15 The number of available resident fonts is 35 in Windows NT 4.0.
*16 True Type and Type1 can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter.
Special
functions
Different Paper Yes Yes Yes No Yes
*10
Transparency Inserts
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Carbon Copy Yes Yes Yes No No
Tab Printing Yes Yes Yes No No
Tandem Print Yes Yes Yes No Yes
*5,11
Retention Yes Yes Yes No Yes
*5
Document Filing Yes Yes Yes No Yes
*5,11
Color mode
adjusting
function
Color Adjustment Yes Yes Yes No Yes
*5,11,12
Text To Black/
Vector To Black
Yes Yes Yes No No
Advanced Color Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Functions to
combine text
and images
Watermark Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Image Stamp Yes No Yes No No
Overlay Yes Yes Yes No No
Image Quality Resolution 600x600 dpi/
300x300 dpi
600x600 dpi/
300x300 dpi
600x600 dpi/
1200x600 dpi *
13
600x600 dpi 600x600 dpi
Graphics Mode
Selection
Yes Yes No No No
Toner Save*
14
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Font Resident font 80 fonts 80 fonts 136 fonts 136 fonts*
15
35 fonts
Selectable
download font
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
bitmap,
TrueType,
Graphics
bitmap,
TrueType,
Type1
bitmap,
TrueType,
Type1
No*
16
Other functions
Auto Configuration Yes Yes Yes No Yes
*5,12
User Authentication
Yes Yes Yes No Yes
*5
Function PCL6 PCL5c PS
Windows
PPD
*1
Macintosh
PPD
*1
MX7000-US-PRT-Z2
Printer Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
Copier Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
• MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE . . . 5
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A
COPIER
BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
COPYING SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
ORIGINALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
• CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PAPER TRAYS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING
COPIES
MAKING COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO MAKE COPIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• MAKING A COPY USING THE DOCUMENT
GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
• USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER TO MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES . . . . . . . . 19
• AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING THE
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
COPY COLOR MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
• AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE . . . . . . . . . . 26
• SELECTING THE ORIGINAL TYPE AND
MANUALLY ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE . . . . 26
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . 28
• AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto
Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
• MANUALLY SELECTING THE RATIO (Preset
ratios/Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
• ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND
WIDTH SEPARATELY (XY Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
ORIGINAL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
• SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE . . . . . . . . . . 32
• STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL
SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
• OUTPUT MODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY . . . . 41
3
SPECIAL MODES
SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase)
. . . . . . . 49
COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND
DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS
AT ONCE (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR
COVERS (Covers/Inserts). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
• INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover
Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
• INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES
(Insert Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
• CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS
(Page Layout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts) . . . 72
COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO ONE
SHEET (Multi Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . 76
COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (Tab
Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
• RELATION BETWEEN THE ORIGINALS AND
THE TAB PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON
COPIES (Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
• GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING
STAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
• ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date) . . . . . . . 90
• STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
• PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
• PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text). . . . . . . . . . 98
• CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout) . . . 102
3
[Image Edit] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
• REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo
Repeat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
• CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Multi-Page
Enlargement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
• REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) . . . . . 110
• COPYING 11" x 17" ORIGINALS WITH NO
EDGE CUT-OFF (11" x 17" Full Bleed) . . . . . . . 111
• COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER
(Centering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
• REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY
(B/W Reverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
[Color Adjustments] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
• ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES
(RGB Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
• ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN
IMAGE (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
• WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN COPIES
(Suppress Background) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
• ADJUSTING THE COLOR (Color Balance) . . . . 122
• ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY
(Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
• ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY
(Intensity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING (Proof
Copy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode) . . 131
4
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN (Interrupt copy) . . 133
JOB STATUS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
• JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED
JOB SCREEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
• CANCELING A JOB THAT IS WAITING IN
THE QUEUE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
• GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE QUEUE . 138
• CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY JOB
WAITING IN THE QUEUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job Programs) .
. 139
• STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB
PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Please note
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.
Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
The explanations in this manual assume that a saddle stitch finisher, punch module, and inserter are installed on the machine.
For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
5
MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE
Printed manuals and manuals stored in PDF format on the machine's hard drive are provided with the machine. When
using the machine, read the appropriate manual for the feature you are using.
Printed manuals
Operation manuals in PDF format
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "How to download the manuals in PDF format" in the Quick Start Guide.
Icons used in the manuals
The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:
Manual name Contents
Safety Guide
This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely and lists the specifications of the machine
and its peripheral devices.
Software Setup
Guide
This manual explains how to install the software and configure settings to use the machine as a printer
or scanner.
Quick Start Guide
This manual provides easy-to-understand explanations of all the functions of the machine in a single
volume.
Detailed explanations of each of the functions can be found in the manuals in PDF format.
Troubleshooting
This manual explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked
questions regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you have
difficulty using the machine.
Manual name Contents
User's Guide
This manual provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and machine
maintenance.
Copier Guide
(this manual)
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
Printer Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the printer function.
Facsimile Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
Scanner Guide
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the
Internet fax function.
Document Filing
Guide
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The
document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive. The file can be called up as needed.
System Settings
Guide
This manual explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit
the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out from the
"System Settings".
This alerts you to a situation where there is a
risk of machine damage or failure.
This indicates the name of a system setting and provides a
brief explanation of the setting.
For detailed information on each system setting, see the
System Settings Guide.
When "System Settings:" appears:
A general setting is explained.
When "System Settings (Administrator):" appears:
A setting that can only be configured by an administrator is
explained.
This provides a supplemental explanation of a
function or procedure.
This explains how to cancel or correct an
operation.
6
This section provides information that you should know before using the machine as a copier.
BASE SCREEN OF COPY MODE
Touch the [COPY] key in the touch panel to open the base screen of copy mode.
The base screen shows messages and keys necessary for copying, and settings that have been selected.
(1) Mode Select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and
document filing modes.
If you wish to switch to copy mode, touch the [COPY]
key.
(2) [Color Mode] key
Touch this to change the color mode.
☞ COPY COLOR MODES (page 24)
(3) Output display
When one or more output functions such as sort, group,
staple sort, or saddle stitch have been selected, this
shows the icons of the selected functions.
☞ OUTPUT (page 36)
(4) [Exposure] key
This shows the current copy exposure and original type
settings. Touch this key to change the exposure or
original type setting.
☞ CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE (page 26)
(5) [Copy Ratio] key
This shows the current copy ratio. Touch this key to
adjust the copy ratio.
☞ REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM (page 28)
(6) [Original] key
Touch this key to enter the original size manually.
When an original is placed, the detected original size is
displayed. If the original size is set manually, the set size
appears.
☞ ORIGINAL SIZES (page 32)
(7) [Paper Select] key
Touch this key to change the paper (tray) that is used.
The tray, paper size, and paper type will appear. Trays 1
to 5 can also be touched in the paper size display to open
the same screen.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 14)
(8) Original feed display
This appears when an original is inserted in the
automatic document feeder.
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
AS A COPIER
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Ready to scan for copy.
Copy Ratio
0
11x17
3.
1. 2.
5.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
8½x11
100%
(9)(8)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(10)
(14)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(3)
7
(9) Paper select display
This shows the size of paper loaded in each tray.
For the bypass tray, the paper type appears above the
paper size.
The selected tray is highlighted.
The approximate amount of paper in each tray is
indicated by . Trays 1 to 5 can be touched to open
the same screen as when the [Paper Select] key is
touched.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 14)
(10) Number of copies display
This shows the number of copies set.
(11) [Special Modes] key
Touch this key to select special modes such as Margin
Shift, Edge Erase, and Dual Page Copy.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 44)
(12) [2-Sided Copy] key
Touch this key to select the 2-sided copying function.
☞ AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 19)
(13) [Output] key
Touch this to select an output function such as sort,
group, offset, staple sort, saddle stitch, or punch.
☞ OUTPUT (page 36)
(14) Customized keys
The keys that appear here can be changed to show
settings or functions that you prefer. The following keys
appear by factory default:
☞ Customizing displayed keys (page 8)
[File] key, [Quick File] key
Touch one of these keys to use the File function or Quick
File function of document filing mode. These are the
same [File] and [Quick File] keys that appear when the
[Special Modes] key is touched. For information on the
document filing function, see the "Document Filing
Guide".
The screen explained in this section appears when a saddle stitch finisher, punch module, inserter, paper pass unit, and
large capacity tray (MX-LCX2) are installed. The image will vary depending on the equipment installed.
8
Customizing displayed keys
Special mode keys and other keys can be displayed in the base screen. By assigning frequently used functions to these
keys, you can access the functions with a single touch. To change the function that is assigned to a key, use "Customize
Key Setting" in the Web pages.
When "Erase", "Margin Shift", and "Brightness" are assigned to the customized keys
Checking what special modes are selected
The key appears in the base screen when one or more special modes are selected.
The key can be touched to display the selected special modes. To close the screen, touch the [OK] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Customize Key Setting
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - "Customize Key Setting" in the Web page menu.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
Erase
Margin Shift
Brightness
These 3 keys can be changed
as desired.
OK
1
1
Function Review
Margin Shift
Erase
Shift:Right
Front:1/2inch/Back:1/2inch
Edge:1/2inch
Center:1/2inch
Covers/Inserts
Front:2-Sided/Back:Insert
Insertion A:10 Page/B:10 Page
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
9
COPYING SEQUENCE
This section explains the basic procedure for copying. Select settings in the order shown below to ensure that the copy
operation takes place smoothly.
For detailed procedures for selecting the settings, see the explanation of each setting in this manual.
Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic
document feeder, or on the document glass.
* Depending on the copy functions used, there are also cases
where functions are selected before the original is placed.
Basic copy settings
Select the basic copy settings.
The main settings are as follows:
• Color mode
☞
COPY COLOR MODES
(page 24)
• Exposure and original type
☞CHANGING THE
EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL IMAGE TYPE (page 26)
• Copy ratio
☞REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
(page 28)
• Original size
☞ORIGINAL SIZES (page 32)
• Paper Settings
☞PAPER TRAYS (page 14)
2-sided copy settings
Select settings as needed for 2-sided copying and 2-sided
scanning of the original.
☞ AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING (page 19)
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
OK
2-Sided Copy
10
Output settings
Select copy output settings.
The main settings are as follows:
•Sort mode
☞Sort mode (page 38)
• Group mode
☞Group mode (page 38)
• Offset mode
☞Offset function (page 38)
• Staple sort mode
☞Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 39)
• Pamphlet staple function
☞Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 39)
• Punch function
☞Punch function (page 40)
Special mode settings
Select special modes such as "Margin Shift" and "Erase".
☞ 3. SPECIAL MODES (page 44)
Number of copies (sets) setting
Set the number of copies (number of sets).
OK
Output
Sort
Right Tray
Offset
Offset
Tray
Staple
Sort
Group
Saddle
Stitch
Punch
Special Modes
1
2
Card Shot
Multi Shot
OK
Dual Page
Copy
Tandem
Copy
Tab Copy
Transparency
Inserts
Erase
Job
Build
Book Copy
Covers/Inserts
Margin Shift
Pamphlet Copy
7
Plain
8½x11
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
11
Start copying.
Start scanning the original(s) and making copies.
• When one or more special modes are selected, the key appears in the base screen. Touch the key to display a
list of the selected special modes. This lets you check what special modes are selected and the settings of each mode.
☞ Checking what special modes are selected (page 8)
• To store a copy job using the document filing function, select copy settings and then touch the [File] key or the [Quick File]
key. For more information on the document filing function, see the Document Filing Guide.
To cancel all settings, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
When the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) is pressed, all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base
screen.
To stop scanning of the original and copying, press the [STOP] key ( ).
When the [STOP] key ( ) is pressed, a message will appear asking you if you want to cancel the job. Touch the [Yes] key
in the message screen.
Start color copying. Start black and
white copying.
12
ORIGINALS
CHECKING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
When [Auto] appears in the [Original] key, the size of the placed original is automatically detected. The machine
automatically detects the original size when an original is placed and displays the size in the [Original] key in the base
screen.
Example of base screen
The original size is displayed.
(A) "Auto" appears when the automatic original detection function is operating.
(B) The original size is displayed. An icon shows the orientation of the original.
Standard sizes
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. The standard sizes are set in "Original Size
Detector Setting" in the system settings (administrator). The factory default setting is "Inch-1".
List of original size detector settings
Selections
Standard sizes (detected original sizes)
Document glass
Document feeder tray
(automatic document feeder)
Inch-1 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R,
5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13" (216 mm x 330 mm),
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2", A4, A3
AB-1 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
8-1/2" x 14", 11" x 17"
AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 mm x 330 mm
(8-1/2" x 13")
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
AB-3 A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 8K, 16K, 16KR, 8-1/2" x 11",
11" x 17", 216 mm x 330 mm (8-1/2" x 13")
• When the automatic original detection function is operating and the original is a non-standard size (an AB size or special
size), the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the
correct original size.
☞ SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE (page 32)
• When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, you can make it easier for the size to be detected by
placing a blank sheet of 8-1/2" x 11 (A4), 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5), or other standard size of paper on top of the original.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
(B)
(A)
13
Standard original placement orientations
Place originals in the document feeder tray or on the document glass so that the top and bottom of the original are
oriented as shown in the illustration. If the original is not oriented correctly and a function such as stapling is selected,
the staple positions may not be correct. For more information on placing the original, see "3. ORIGINALS" in the User's
Guide.
[Example 1]
[Example 2]
Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation Copy)
If the orientation of the original and paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to
match the paper. (When an image is rotated, a message is displayed.)
[Example]
This function operates in both auto paper selection mode and auto image mode. Rotation can be disabled using
"Rotation Copy Setting" in the System Settings (Administrator).
abc
abc
Document glassDocument feeder tray
Place the originals
with the corners
aligned here.
abc
abc
Document glassDocument feeder Document feeder tray
Place the originals
with the corners
aligned here.
The image is rotated
90 degrees
Orientation of
placed original
Orientation
of paper
The original seen
from behind
The paper seen
from behind
14
PAPER TRAYS
The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original
(automatic paper tray selection).
If the correct paper size is not selected or you wish to change the paper size, you can select the paper tray manually.
1
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
You can also touch the paper size display (A) to open the paper tray settings.
2
Select the tray that you want to use.
(1) Touch the key of the desired tray.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen and the selected tray
will be highlighted.
If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper,
that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue.
To return to automatic paper tray selection after selecting a tray manually, press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
System Settings (Administrator): Paper Tray
Use this setting to change the tray that is selected by default.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
(A)
Paper Select
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
OK
Plain
Plain
Plain
2. 8½x11
8½x11
3. 11x17
4. 8½x14
1.
Plain
8½x11
Plain
(2)(1)
15
This chapter explains the basic procedures for making copies, including selection of the copy ratio and other copy
settings.
MAKING COPIES
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE COPIES
This section explains how to make copies (1-sided copies of 1-sided originals) using the automatic document feeder.
2
BASIC PROCEDURE FOR
MAKING COPIES
1
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
2
Check the paper to be used and the
color mode.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) and color mode are
selected.
• To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 14)
• To change the color mode, touch the [Color Mode] key.
☞ COPY COLOR MODES (page 24)
Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.
Indicator
line
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
16
3
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Even if a color mode is selected, copying will take place in black and white if the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( )
is pressed.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
7
Plain
8½x11
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
or
17
MAKING A COPY USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS
To make a copy of a book or other thick original that cannot be scanned with the automatic document feeder, open the
automatic document feeder and place the original on the document glass. This section explains how to make a copy
(1-sided copy of a 1-sided original) using the document glass.
1
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.
2
Check the paper to be used and the
color mode.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) and color mode are
selected.
• To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 14)
• To change the color mode, touch the [Color Mode] key.
☞ COPY COLOR MODES (page 24)
Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.
Original size
detector
8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R)
B5R
8-1/2" x 14" (B4)
11" x 17" (A3)
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)
B5
mark
Document glass scale
Document glass scale
mark
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
18
3
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Normally copying will start.
Depending on the copy settings (2-sided copying, etc.), copying
may not begin until all originals have been scanned. In this
case, go to the next step.
Even if a color mode is selected, copying will take place in black and white if the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( )
is pressed.
5
Remove the original and place the next
original, and then press the [COLOR
START] key ( ) or the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key ( ).
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
For the second original and following originals, use the same
[START] key as you did for the first original.
6
Touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
7
Plain
8½x11
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
or
or
Read-End
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
19
AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING
USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER TO
MAKE 2-SIDED COPIES
Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided
originals
Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided
originals
1-sided copying of 2-sided originals
1
Place the originals face up in the
document feeder tray with the edges
aligned evenly.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
2
Touch the [2-Sided Copy] key.
3
Select the 2-sided copy mode.
(1) Touch the key of the desired mode.
: Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
: Automatic 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
: 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
To make 2-sided copies of a 1-sided portrait original placed horizontally, or to invert the reverse side with respect to
the front side when copying a 2-sided original, touch the [Binding Change] key.
☞ Using the [Binding Change] key (page 20)
Originals
Copies
Originals
Copies
Originals
Copies
Indicator
line
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
OK
2-Sided Copy
Binding
Change
(1) (2)
20
Using the [Binding Change] key
4
Check the paper to be used and the
color mode.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) and color mode are
selected.
• To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 14)
• To change the color mode, touch the [Color Mode] key.
☞ COPY COLOR MODES (page 24)
Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.
5
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• If you are only making a single copy, the copy can be made with the copy number display showing "0".
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.
6
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
Originals Binding Change is used Binding Change is not used
The reverse side
is upside down.
The reverse side
is not upside
down.
Select this when
the pages will be
bound into a
tablet.
Select this when
the pages will be
bound into a
booklet.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
7
Plain
8½x11
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
or
A
12
A
A
A
3
A
21
AUTOMATIC 2-SIDED COPYING USING THE
DOCUMENT GLASS
Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided
originals
1
Open the automatic document feeder,
place the original face down on the
document glass, and then gently close
the automatic document feeder.
• Align the corner of the original with the tip of the arrow mark
on the document glass scale.
• Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as
shown above.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object
underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.
2
Touch the [2-Sided Copy] key.
Originals
Copies
Original size
detector
8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R)
B5R
8-1/2" x 14" (B4)
11" x 17" (A3)
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)
B5
mark
Document glass scale
Document glass scale
mark
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
22
3
Select the 2-sided copy mode.
(1) Touch the [1-Sided to 2-Sided] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
The [2-Sided to 2-Sided] key and [2-Sided to 1-Sided] key cannot be used when copying from the document glass.
4
Check the paper to be used and the
color mode.
Make sure that the desired paper (tray) and color mode are
selected.
• To change the paper (tray), touch the [Paper Select] key.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 14)
• To change the color mode, touch the [Color Mode] key.
☞ COPY COLOR MODES (page 24)
Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not
selected automatically. In this event, change the paper size manually.
5
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
• Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
• A single copy can be made even if "0" appears for the number of copies.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.
6
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
OK
2-Sided Copy
Binding
Change
(1) (2)
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
7
Plain
8½x11
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
or
23
7
Remove the original and place the next
original, and then press the [COLOR
START] key ( ) or the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key ( ).
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
For the second original and following originals, use the same
[START] key as you did for the first original.
8
Touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
System Settings (Administrator): 2-Sided Copy
The default 2-sided copy mode can be changed.
or
Read-End
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
24
COPY COLOR MODES
The color mode of the [COLOR START] key ( ) is normally set to [Full Color] so that copying takes place in full
color mode when the [COLOR START] key ( ) is pressed. If color originals are mixed together with black & white
originals, set the color mode to [Auto] to have the color mode change appropriately for each original.
Touch the [Color Mode] key in the base screen to open the following screen.
Touch the key of the desired color mode and then touch the [OK] key.
Full Color
The original is copied in full color.
Auto
The machine automatically detects whether each original is color or black & white and
switches the mode appropriately (full color for a color original or black & white for a black &
white original).
Single Color
The original is copied in the selected color only.
All colors in the original are changed to the selected color, which can be selected from red,
green, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow.
2 Color
Only the red areas of the original are changed to the selected color; colors other than red are
copied in black. This lets you make copies that are more expressive than black and white
copies.
Red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, or yellow can be selected.
Color Mode
OK
Full Color
Auto 2 Color
Single Color
25
Selecting single color copying
When [Single Color] is selected for the color mode, the following screen appears. Touch the desired color and touch the
[OK] key.
Selecting 2 color copying
When [2 Color] is selected for the color mode, the following screen appears. Touch the desired color and touch the [OK]
key.
• When auto mode is used, there may be some originals for which switching between color and black & white does not take
place correctly. In this event, press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) as
appropriate to manually switch between color and black & white.
• Copying takes place in black & white when the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) is pressed, regardless of the color
mode setting.
System Settings (Administrator): Color Mode
This is used to change the default color mode setting.
System Settings (Administrator): Detect Standard in Auto Color Mode
When the color mode is set to auto, the discrimination point for detecting whether originals are color or black and white can
be set to one of 5 levels.
Color Mode
Single Color
OK
OK
R(Red) B(Blue)G(Green)
C(Cyan) Y(Yellow)M(Magenta)
Color Mode
2 Color
Select a color other than black.
OK
OK
R(Red) B(Blue)G(Green)
C(Cyan) Y(Yellow)M(Magenta)
26
CHANGING THE EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL
IMAGE TYPE
The exposure and original image type can be selected to obtain a clear copy.
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT OF THE EXPOSURE AND
ORIGINAL TYPE
Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as
appropriate for the original being copied. ("Auto" is displayed.)
This function automatically adjusts the image during black & white copying and full color copying to obtain the most suitable copy.
SELECTING THE ORIGINAL TYPE AND MANUALLY
ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE
If you wish to select the original type or manually adjust the exposure, touch the [Exposure] key in the base screen of
copy mode and follow the steps below.
1
Select the original image type.
Touch the appropriate original image type key for the original.
● Original image type select keys
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
Exposure
OK
Manual
Original Image Type
1 3 5
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Photo
Text/Photo
Map
Text
Printed
Photo
Light
Original
Auto
Mode Description
Tex t
Text/Prtd. Photo
Printed photo
Text/Photo
Map
Photo
Light Original
Use this mode for regular text documents.
This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue.
This mode is best for copying printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue.
This mode provides the best balance for copying an original which contains both text and
photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on.
This mode is best for copying the light color shading and fine text found on most maps.
Use this mode for originals with light pencil writing.
Use this mode to copy photos.
27
2
Adjust the exposure level.
Touch the key to make the copy darker.
Touch the key to make the copy lighter.
• Using a copy or printed page as an original
When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an
original, touch the [Copy of Copy] checkbox so that a
checkmark appears.
When [Copy of Copy] is selected, only the [Text], [Printed
Photo], and [Text/Printed Photo] original image type keys
can be selected.
• To enhance the color of a color copy...
Touch the [Color Tone Enhancement] checkbox so that a
checkmark appears.
• Guidelines for the exposure level when [Text] is selected:
1 to 2: Dark originals such as a newspaper
3: Normal density originals
4 to 5: Originals written in pencil or light colored text
• Restrictions when Color Tone Enhancement is selected
When "Color Tone Enhancement" is selected, the following functions cannot be used:
• [Copy of Copy]
• [Auto] and [Light Original] cannot be selected for the original image type.
• [Intensity] (in the special modes)
3
Touch the [OK] key.
If [Auto] is selected but the darkness or lightness of the image does not seem quite right...
If the image seems too light or too dark when [Auto] is selected, the exposure level can be adjusted using "Copy Exposure
Adjustment" in the system settings (administrator).
• System Settings (Administrator): Exposure Type
This is used to change the default original image type.
• System Settings (Administrator): Copy Exposure Adjustment
The exposure level used for automatic exposure adjustment can be adjusted.
1 53
Exposure
OK
Manual
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Photo
Text/Photo
Map
Text
Printed
Photo
Light
Original
Auto
Copy of Copy
Color Tone
Enhancement
Original Image Type
1 53
Exposure
OK
Manual
Text/
Prtd.Photo
Photo
Text/Photo
Map
Text
Printed
Photo
Light
Original
Auto
Copy of Copy
Color Tone
Enhancement
Original Image Type
28
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM
AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION (Auto Image)
This section explains the automatic ratio selection function (Auto Image), which automatically selects the ratio to match
the paper size.
When the paper tray is manually changed, the [Auto Image] key appears in the base screen of copy mode. Touch the
[Auto Image] key to have the reduction or enlargement ratio automatically selected based on the original size and the
selected paper size.
First place the original and select the paper tray, and then touch the [Auto Image] key.
• If the message "Rotate original from to " is displayed, change the orientation of the original as indicated in the
message.
• For a non-standard size original, the size must be entered in order to use Auto Image.
• To cancel automatic ratio selection...
Touch the [Auto Image] key so that it is no longer highlighted.
• To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Copy Ratio
This is used to change the default copy ratio.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
1.
8½x11
Original Paper Select
11x17
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
Auto Image
11x17
3.
2.
8½x11
The selected ratio will appear in the ratio display.
29
MANUALLY SELECTING THE RATIO (Preset
ratios/Zoom)
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode to select one of five preset enlargement ratios or five preset
reduction ratios (maximum 400%, minimum 25%).
In addition, the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
1
Set the ratio.
Touch a preset ratio key and/or the zoom keys to set the ratio.
There are two setting screens. Use the keys to switch
between the screens.
● 1st screen
• Enlargement keys (2 ratios): 121% and 129%
• Reduction keys (2 ratios): 64% and 77%
• [100%] key
● 2nd screen
• Enlargement keys (2 to 4 ratios)
200%, 400%, any ratio (max. of two)
• Reduction keys (2 to 4 ratios)
25%, 50%, any ratio (max. of two)
• [100%] key
• (A) keys
The keys marked (A) can be set to show any ratio using "Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios" in the system settings
(administrator).
• To quickly select a ratio, touch a reduction or enlargement key to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then
use the zoom keys for fine adjustment.
• The zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
Touch the key to increase the ratio, or the key to decrease the ratio. (If you continue to touch the /
key, the ratio will change automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will change rapidly.)
• If the message "Image is larger than the copy paper." appears when an enlargement ratio is selected, the image
may not fit on the paper.
Copy Ratio
OK
Auto Image XY Zoom
121%
129%
64%
77%
100%
%
Zoom
100
11x17
11x17
8½x11
8½x14 8½x11
8½x14
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x11
8½x14
5½x8½ 8½x11
11x17
11x17
1
2
Copy Ratio
200%
400%
300%
25%
50%
75%
350%
150%
100%
%
100
OK
Auto Image XY Zoom
Zoom
2
2
(A)
30
2
Touch the [OK] key.
After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
suitable for the ratio is selected.
To return the ratio to 100%...
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [Copy Ratio] key to display the ratio menu and then touch the [100%] key.
System Settings (Administrator): Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
Two enlargement preset ratios (101% to 400%) and two reduction preset ratios (25% to 99%) can be added. An added
preset ratio can also be changed.
Copy Ratio
OK
Auto Image XY Zoom
121%
129%
64%
77%
100%
%
Zoom
75
11x17
11x17
8½x11
8½x14 8½x11
8½x14
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x11
8½x14
5½x8½ 8½x11
11x17
11x17
1
2
31
ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH
SEPARATELY (XY Zoom)
The XY Zoom feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately.
Both the horizontal and vertical ratios can be set from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
Touch the [Copy Ratio] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio
1
Touch the [XY Zoom] key.
2
Set the horizontal and vertical ratios.
(1) Touch the [X] key.
The [X] key will be highlighted and the horizontal ratio can
be set.
(2)
Touch one of the preset ratio keys (A) and the
zoom keys (B) to set the X (horizontal) ratio.
(A) A touched preset ratio key will not be highlighted.
(B) The zoom keys can be touched to set the ratio from
25% to 400% in increments of 1%.
(3) Touch the [Y] key and set the Y (vertical)
ratio in the same way as the [X] key.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
After touching the [OK] key, make sure that a paper size
suitable for the ratio is selected.
To quickly select a ratio, touch a preset ratio key (A) to select a ratio close to the desired ratio and then use the zoom
keys (B) for fine adjustment.
When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both 25% to 200%.
To cancel an XY zoom setting...
To cancel an XY Zoom setting, touch the [XY Zoom] key or the [Cancel] key.
Original
Copy
Copy Ratio
OK
Auto Image XY Zoom
121%
129%
64%
77%
100%
%
Zoom
100
11x17
11x17
8½x11
8½x14 8½x11
8½x14
8½x11
5½x8½
8½x11
8½x14
5½x8½ 8½x11
11x17
11x17
1
2
Copy Ratio
OK
Cancel
XY Zoom
129%
200%
400%
50%
64%
77%
100%
%
Zoom
50
70
X
Y
%
(4)(1), (3)(2)
(A)
(B) (A)
32
ORIGINAL SIZES
SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE
When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size.
Touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
Specifying an inch original size
Touch the appropriate original size key and then the [OK] key.
Specifying an AB original size
Touch the [AB Inch] key, touch the appropriate original size key, and then touch the [OK] key.
Specifying a non-standard original size
1
Touch the [Size Input] key.
5½x8½
5½x8½R
8½x11
8½x14
8½x13(216x330)
8½x11R 11x17
Custom Size
Original
OK
Size Input
Inch
Auto
Manual
AB
Manual
(2)(1)
Original
OK
A5
A5R
B5
Size Input
A4R
A4
B5R B4
A3
Custom Size
Inch
Auto
Manual
AB
Manual
(3)(2) (1)
5½x8½
5½x8½R
8½x11
8½x14
8½x13(216x330)
8½x11R 11x17
Custom Size
Original
OK
Size Input
Inch
AB
8½x14
Auto
Manual
33
STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES
You can save special original sizes that you frequently use. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and
delete special original sizes.
Storing original sizes (editing/clearing)
Up to 9 special original sizes can be stored.
Touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and then follow the steps below.
2
Enter the original size.
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the keys. When the
document glass is used, a number from 2-1/2" to 17" (64
mm to 432 mm) can be entered.
When the automatic document feeder is used, a number
from 5-1/2" to 17" (140 mm to 432 mm) can be entered.
If the horizontal dimension of the original is less than
5-1/2" (140 mm), use the document glass.
(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the keys. When the document
glass is used, a number from 2-1/2" to 11-5/8" (64 mm to
297 mm) can be entered.
When the automatic document feeder is used, a number
from 5-1/8" to 11-5/8" (131 mm to 297 mm) can be
entered.
If the vertical dimension of the original is less than 5-1/8"
(131 mm), use the document glass.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen.
Make sure that the entered dimensions appear in the
[Original] key.
1
Touch the [Custom Size] key.
OK
OK
Cancel
(2 1/2~17)
inch
(2 1/2~11 5/8)
inch
17
X
Y
11
Original
Size Input
(3)(1), (2)
5½x8½
5½x8½R
8½x11
8½x14
8½x13(216x330)
8½x11R 11x17
Custom Size
Original
OK
Size Input
Inch
AB
8½x14
Auto
Manual
34
2
Store the original size.
(1) Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.
(2) Touch a key for storing a custom original
size.
Touch a key that does not show a size ( ).
If you wish to edit or clear a previously stored key...
Touch the key that you want to edit or clear. The following screen will appear.
• To edit the key, touch the [Modify] key and go to the next step.
• To clear the key, touch the [Delete] key. Make sure that the original size has been cleared and touch the [OK] key.
3
Enter the original size.
(1) Enter the X (horizontal) dimension of the
original.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the keys. A
dimension from 2-1/2" to 17 (64 mm to 432 mm) can be
entered.
(2) Enter the Y (vertical) dimension of the
original.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the keys. A dimension from
2-1/2" to 11-5/8" (64 mm to 297 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off.
To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
Original
OK
OK
X15½ Y 8½
Recall
Store/Delete
Custom Size
(1)(2)
Modify
Delete
Cancel
A custom size has already been stored
in this location.
OK
Cancel
Original
(2 1/2~17)
inch
(2 1/2~11 5/8)
inch
17
X
Y
11
(3)(1), (2)
35
Retrieving a stored original size
To retrieve a stored original size, touch the [Original] key in the base screen of copy mode and perform the steps below.
1
Touch the [Custom Size] key.
2
Retrieve the desired stored original size.
(1) Touch the [Recall] tab.
(2) Touch the key of the original size that you
wish to retrieve.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
To cancel the operation...
Press the [CLEAR ALL] key ( ).
5½x8½
5½x8½R
8½x11
8½x14
8½x13(216x330)
8½x11R 11x17
Custom Size
Original
OK
Size Input
Inch
AB
8½x14
Auto
Manual
X15½ Y 8½
Custom Size
Original
OK
OK
Recall
Store/Delete
(3)(1)(2)
36
OUTPUT
To select output functions and the output tray, touch the [Output] key in the base screen of copy mode. Output functions
that can be selected are sort, group, offset, staple sort, saddle stitch, and punch. All explanations of the settings below
assume that a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
(1) [Offset Tray] key ([Center Tray] key*)
Output is delivered to the offset tray. The [Offset Tray]
key is automatically selected when the [Staple Sort] key
is selected.
* When a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is not installed,
this key is the [Center Tray] key. In this case, the offset
function cannot be used.
(2) [Offset] key
This is used to offset each set of output from the previous
set.
The offset function operates when the checkbox is
selected and does not operate when the checkbox is
not selected . (The offset checkmark is automatically
cleared when the staple sort function is selected.)
☞ Offset function (page 38)
(3) [Sort] key
This is used to sort (collate) output into sets.
☞ Sort mode (page 38)
(4) [Staple Sort] key
This is used to sort output into sets, staple each set, and
deliver the sets to the tray. (Note that the sets will not be
offset in the output tray.) When this function is selected,
three keys will appear for selecting the staple position.
☞ Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 39)
(5) [Group] key
This is used to group copies by page.
☞ Group mode (page 38)
(6) Output display
An icon will appear to indicate the output mode.
(7) [Right Tray] key
Select this key to have output delivered to the right tray.
When the right tray is selected, offset, staple sort, saddle
stitch, and punch cannot be selected.
(8) [OK] key
Touch this key to close the output screen and return to
the base screen.
(9) [Saddle Stitch] key
This is used to staple and fold each set of copies at the
centerline.
☞ Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function (page 39)
When this key is touched, the saddle stitch setting screen
appears. (Only when "Automatic Saddle Stitch" is
enabled in the system settings (administrator).)
(10) [Punch] key
This is used to punch holes in the output.
☞ Punch function (page 40)
OK
Output
Sort
Right Tray
Offset
Offset
Tray
Staple
Sort
Group
Saddle
Stitch
Punch
(6) (7) (8)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
(10)
(1)
(2)
37
The above screen shows the keys that appear when a saddle stitch finisher is installed. The keys that appear will vary
depending on what peripheral devices are installed.
In addition, it may not be possible to select some keys depending what peripheral devices are installed. If your screen is
different from the above screen, see the screens that follow.
Example
The screen when a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is not installed.
OK
Output
Sort
Right Tray
Offset
Tray
Group
38
OUTPUT MODES
This section explains the output modes.
Sort mode
This is used to sort (collate) output into sets.
Example: Sorting the output into 5 sets
Group mode
This function groups copies by page.
Example: Groups of 5 copies of each page
Offset function
This function offsets each set of copies from the previous set in the output tray, making it easy to separate sets of copies.
•
The sort function is automatically selected when
originals are placed in the automatic document feeder.
• When the Quick File Folder for document filing is
full, copying of a large number of originals using the
sort function will be impeded. Delete unneeded files
from the Quick File Folder.
Sort
Output
Originals Output
Set the number of copies (5).
Touch the [Output] key.
Touch the [Sort] key.
Press the [COLOR START] key
( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key ( ).
The group function is automatically selected when an
original is placed on the document glass.
Group
Output
Originals Output
Set the number of copies (5).
Touch the [Output] key.
Touch the [Group] key.
Press the [COLOR START] key
( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE
START] key ( ).
• The offset function cannot be used in the center tray or the right tray.
• The offset function cannot be selected when the staple sort function is selected.
Off
set
f
unct
i
on
"ON" Off
set
f
unct
i
on
"OFF"
39
Staple sort function / Saddle stitch function
The staple sort function sorts output into sets, staples each set, and delivers the sets to the tray.
The saddle stitch function staples each set in 2 places at the centerline and folds the stapled set.
The relations between the stapling positions, paper orientation, permitted paper sizes for stapling, and number of sheets
that can be stapled are shown below.
For original placement orientations, see "Original placement orientation (for the staple sort and punch functions)" (page
40).
* Two sheets (one sheet when pamphlet stapling is performed) of paper up to 68 lbs. (256 g/m
2
) can be stapled as covers. When this
is done, the number of sheets that can be used is two less (one less for saddle stitch) than the stated maximum.
Stapling positions Vertically-oriented paper Horizontally-oriented paper
1 staple at top left corner
Applicable paper sizes
8-1/2" x 11", A4, B5, 16K
Number of sheets that can be
stapled: Max. 50 sheets*
Applicable paper sizes
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11"R, A3,
B4, A4R, 8K
Number of sheets that can be
stapled: Max. 30 sheets*
1 staple at bottom left
corner
2 staples at left edge
Saddle stitch (only with
saddle stitch finisher)
Saddle stitch cannot be used
when the paper is oriented
vertically
Applicable paper sizes
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",
8-1/2" x 11"R, A3, B4, A4R, 8K
Number of sheets that can be
stapled: Max. 15 sheets*
• The number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted.
• When Mixed Size Original in the special modes is used with the "Same Width" setting, the maximum number of sheets that
can be stapled is 30 regardless of the paper size.
• The saddle stitch function can only be used when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
4
5
Saddle stitchStaple sort
40
Punch function
If an optional punch module is installed, holes can be punched in output.
Paper that can be punched is 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" to 11" x 17" (15 lbs. to 68 lbs.) (B5R to A3 (55 g/m
2
to 256 g/m
2
)).
However, 12" x 18" (A3W) sized paper and special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used.
Original placement orientation (for the staple sort and punch functions)
When using the staple sort function or the punch function, the original must be placed as shown below to enable stapling
or punching in the desired position on the paper.
• The saddle stitch and hole punch functions cannot be used together.
• Tab paper can be punched manually using the inserter. For more information, see "INSERTER" in the User's Guide.
Staple sort Punch
Document feeder tray Document glass Document feeder tray Document glass
[Original 1] [Punch positions]
[Examples]
[Original 2] [Punch positions]
abc
abc
abc
abc
abc
abc
abc
abc
abc
abc
41
MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY
In addition to plain paper, the bypass tray allows you to make copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and
other special media.
For detailed information on paper that can be loaded in the bypass tray, see the Safety Guide. For precautions when
loading paper in the bypass tray, see "LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY" in the User's Guide.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
2
Place paper in the bypass tray.
Insert the paper with print side face down.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed",
load the paper with the print side face up*.
* If "Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings
(administrator), load the paper in the normal way (face up in
trays 1 to 5; face down in the bypass tray).
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure
to pull out the bypass tray extension. Pull the bypass tray
extension all the way out. If the bypass tray extension is not
pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be
correctly displayed.
3
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
42
4
Check the paper type setting for the
bypass tray. If you need to change the
setting, touch the paper type key.
If you do not need to change the paper size and type that
appear under "Bypass Tray", go to step 7.
5
Select the type of paper used in the
bypass tray.
Select the paper type that you will use.
6
Set the paper size.
[Auto-Inch] key
Touch this key when the loaded paper is an inch size (8-1/2" x
11", etc.). When the paper placed in the bypass tray is an inch
size, the paper size will be detected automatically and an
appropriate size set.
[Auto-AB] key
Touch this key when the loaded paper is an AB size (A4, etc.).
When the paper inserted in the bypass tray is an AB size, the
paper size will be detected automatically and an appropriate
size set.
[Custom Size] key
Touch this key when you know the size of the inserted paper
but it is not one of the inch or AB sizes.
When the [Custom Size] key is touched, the paper size entry
screen appears.
Touch the [X] key and enter the horizontal dimension of the
paper with the keys, and then touch the [Y] key and
enter the vertical dimension. When finished, touch the [OK]
key.
To use a paper size used in China, touch [8K], [16K], or [16KR].
2. 8½x11
8½x11
3. 11x17
4. 8½x14
1. 8½x11
Paper Select
OK
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
Paper Select
Cancel
Plain
Pre-Punched
Thin Paper
Pre-Printed
Color
Labels
Recycled
Heavy Paper 1
Transparency
Letter Head
Heavy Paper 2
Tab Paper
Envelope
Heavy Paper 1: 28+ - 56 lbs. (106 - 209 g/m
2
)
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
Select the paper type.
1
2
Heavy Paper 2: 56+ - 68 lbs. (210 - 256 g/m
2
)
Paper Select
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
OK
Type
Auto-Inch
Recycled
Custom Size
16K
16KR
X17 Y11
8K
Auto-AB
Size
12x18,11x17,8½x14
8½x11,8½x11R,5½x8½R
7¼x10½R,A3,A4,B4,B5
A3W,A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4
B5,B5R,216x330(8½x13)
11x17,8½x11
OK
OK
(2 1/2~17)
inch
(2 1/2~11 5/8)
inch
17
X
Y
11
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
Size Input
43
7
Select the bypass tray.
(1) Touch the paper size key of the bypass tray.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
8
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Scanning begins.
• If the originals were placed in the document feeder tray, the
originals are copied.
• If you placed the originals on the document glass, scan each
page one page at a time.
When using sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then press the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
When the inserter is installed, the "Extra" size paper loaded in the bypass tray will be delivered to the right tray.
2. 8½x11
8½x11
3. 11x17
4. 8½x14
1. 8½x11
Paper Select
OK
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Plain
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
(1)
(2)
or
44
This chapter explains Margin Shift, Erase, Dual Page Copy, and other special modes.
SPECIAL MODES
When the [Special Modes] key is pressed in the base screen, the special modes menu screen appears. The special
modes menu consists of two screens. Touch the keys to move between the screens. After selecting special
mode settings, touch the [OK] key in the special modes menu screen to complete the settings and return to the base
screen of copy mode.
Special modes menu (1st screen)
(1) [Margin Shift] key
☞ ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift) (page 47)
(2) [Erase] key
☞ ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase) (page
49)
(3) [Dual Page Copy] key
☞ COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND
DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy) (page 51)
(4) [Pamphlet Copy] key
☞ MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy) (page 53)
(5) [Job Build] key
☞ COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF ORIGINALS AT
ONCE (Job Build) (page 56)
(6) [Tandem Copy] key
☞ USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy) (page 58)
(7) [Covers/Inserts] key
☞ USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR COVERS
(Covers/Inserts) (page 61)
(8) [Transparency Inserts] key
☞ ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM (Transparency Inserts)
(page 72)
(9) [Multi Shot] key
☞ COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO ONE
SHEET (Multi Shot) (page 74)
(10) [Book Copy] key
☞ COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy) (page 76)
(11) [Tab Copy] key
☞ COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (Tab
Copy) (page 80)
(12) [Card Shot] key
☞ COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot) (page 83)
3
SPECIAL MODES
Special Modes
1
2
Card Shot
Multi Shot
OK
Dual Page
Copy
Tandem
Copy
Tab Copy
Transparency
Inserts
Erase
Job
Build
Book Copy
Covers/Inserts
Margin Shift
Pamphlet Copy
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
(7) (8) (9)
(10) (11)
(12)
☞ Special modes menu (2nd screen) (page 45)
45
Special modes menu (2nd screen)
(1) [Stamp] key
☞ PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON COPIES
(Stamp) (page 86)
(2) [Image Edit] key
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 104)
(3) [Color Adjustments] key
☞ [Color Adjustments] KEY (page 117)
(4) [Quick File] key
This saves a job in the Quick File folder of the document
filing function. For more information on Quick File, see
the "Document Filing Guide".
(5) [File] key
This saves a job in a folder of the document filing
function. For more information on File, see the
"Document Filing Guide".
(6) [Proof Copy] key
☞ CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING (Proof
Copy) (page 126)
(7) [Mixed Size Original] key
☞ COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original) (page 129)
(8) [Slow Scan Mode] key
☞ COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan Mode)
(page 131)
Special Modes
2
2
OK
Image Edit
File
Proof Copy
Color
Adjustments
Slow Scan
Mode
Mixed Size
Original
Stamp
Quick File
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
(7) (8)
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
Special modes can generally be combined with other special modes, however, there are some combinations that are not
possible. In this case, a message indicating that the combination is not possible will be displayed.
46
[OK] key and [Cancel] key
In some cases two [OK] keys and one [Cancel] key will appear in the special mode screens. The keys are used as
follows:
(A) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the base screen of copy mode.
(B) Enter the selected special mode settings and return to the special modes menu screen. Touch this key when you
wish to continue selecting other special mode settings.
(C) During selection of special mode settings, this key returns you to the special modes menu screen without saving the
settings. When settings have been completed, this cancels the settings and returns you to the special modes menu
screen.
Special Modes
OK
1/2
Margin Shift
Right Left Down Side 1
(0~1)
inch
1/2
Side 2
(0~1)
inch
OKCancel
(C)
(A)
(B)
47
ADDING MARGINS (Margin Shift)
This function is used to shift the copy image right, left or down to adjust the margin.
This is convenient when you wish to bind the copies with a string or in a binder.
Shifting the image to the right so the copies can be bound at the left edge with a string
Margin shift positions
1
1
Not using margin shift Using margin shift
The punch holes cut off
part of the image
The image is moved to
allow space for the string
holes so the image is not
cut off.
1
1
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Margin Shift] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
3
Set the margin shift.
(1) Touch the margin shift position.
Select one of the three positions.
(2) Set the amount of the margin shift with
.
0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Left
edge
Right
edge
Top edge
Special Modes
OK
1/2
Margin Shift
Right Left Down Side 1
(0~1)
inch
1/2
Side 2
(0~1)
inch
OKCancel
(1) (2) (3)
48
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.)
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
Rotation copy cannot be used in combination with margin shift.
To cancel the margin shift setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Margin Shift Setting
The default margin shift setting can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm). The factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
or
49
ERASING PERIPHERAL SHADOWS (Erase)
The erase function is used to erase shadows around the edges of copies that occur when copying thick originals or
books.
When a thick book is copied
Erase modes
Shadows appear here
Not using the erase
function
Using the erase
function
Shadows appear on the
copy.
Shadows do not appear on
the copy.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Erase] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
3
Select the erase settings.
(1) Touch the desired erase mode.
Select one of the three positions.
(2) Set the erasure width with .
0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Edge Erase Center Erase Edge + Center Erase
Special Modes
OK
1/2
Erase
Edge
Erase
Edge
(0~1)
inch
1/2
Center
(0~1)
inch
OKCancel
Center
Erase
Edge+Center
Erase
(2) (3)(1)
50
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.)
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio.
For example, if the erase width setting is 1" (20 mm) and the image is reduced to 50%, the erase width will be 1/2" (10 mm).
To cancel the erase setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Erase Width Adjustment
The default erase width can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm). The factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm).
or
51
COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A
BOUND DOCUMENT (Dual Page Copy)
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two document pages that are placed side by side on the
document glass. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document.
Copying the facing pages of a book or bound document
1
Place the original on the document glass.
Align the center of the original with the appropriate size mark .
2
Select 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size paper.
Select the paper as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 14).
5
6
56
Book or bound document
The facing pages are copied
onto 2 separate pages.
11" x 17"
(A3)
Size mark
The page on this
side is copied first.
Centerline of
A3 original
Centerline of
11" x 17" original
Centerline of original
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
11x17
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
52
3
Select Dual Page Copy.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 44)
(2) Touch the [Dual Page Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.)
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• When using dual page copy, the original must be placed on the document glass.
• To erase shadows caused by the binding of a book or other bound document, use the erase function.
However, note that [Center Erase] and [Edge + Center Erase] cannot be used.
To cancel dual page copy...
Touch the [Dual Page Copy] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
Special Modes
1
2
Card Shot
Multi Shot
OK
Dual Page
Copy
Tandem
Copy
Tab Copy
Transparency
Inserts
Erase
Job
Build
Book Copy
Covers/Inserts
Margin Shift
Pamphlet Copy
(2) (3)
or
53
MAKING COPIES IN PAMPHLET FORMAT
(Pamphlet Copy)
This function copies 2 original pages onto the front side and 2 original pages onto the reverse side of each sheet of
paper so that the copies can be folded at the centerline to form a pamphlet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
Pamphlet copy using 8 original pages
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
If the originals are 2-sided, place them in the document feeder tray.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Pamphlet Copy] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
7
2
2 3 4
5 6 7
5
3
7
5
4
Originals
7
2
7
5
3
5
4
7
2
7
5
3
4
5
Left binding Right binding
In pamphlet form
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page
5th page 6th page 7th page 8th page
Binding side
54
3
Select pamphlet copy settings.
(1) If the original is 1-sided, touch the [1-Sided]
key. If the original is 2-sided, touch the
[2-Sided] key.
(2) Select the binding edge ([Left Binding] or
[Right Binding]).
(3) To insert a cover, touch the [Cover Setting]
key.
If you do not want to add a cover, go to step 5.
4
Select cover settings.
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
key.
(2) Select paper settings for the cover.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the paper tray for the cover in the
tray selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
• If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.
• When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the cover cannot be copied on.
To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.
Special Modes
OK
Pamphlet Copy
1-Sided 2-Sided
Left
Binding
Right
Binding
Original
OK
Cover
Setting
Cancel
(1) (2) (3)
Cover Setting
Pamphlet Copy
OK
Cancel
Bypass
Tray
Paper Tray
11x17
Plain
Print on Cover(2-Sided)
Yes No
(2) (3)(1)
(A)
(B)
Pamphlet Copy
Cover Setting
OK
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
Plain
Plain
Plain
2. 8½x11
11x17
8½x11
3. 11x17
4. 8½x14
1.
Plain
8½x11
Plain
Plain
Inserter
55
5
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
6
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and
press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been
scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second
original and following originals, use the same [START] key as
you did for the first original.)
To cancel scanning of the original and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function.
• When the pamphlet copy function is selected, 2-sided copying mode is automatically selected. When settings are selected
that prevent 2-sided copying, the pamphlet copy function cannot be used.
• Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the
machine. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the
end if the number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the saddle stitch function can be used.
When pamphlet copy is used in combination with the saddle stitch function and the number of originals is greater than the
number of sheets that can be stapled, a message will appear showing the [Cancel] key, the [Continue] key, and the
[Divide] key.
To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key. To make pamphlet copies without stapling, touch the [Continue] key. To divide
the pages into sets that can be stapled, touch the [Divide] key.
If you selected cover insertion settings, it will not be possible to select "Divide". You can either continue pamphlet copying
without stapling, or cancel the job.
To cancel pamphlet copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Automatic Saddle Stitch
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, this setting can be enabled to have saddle stitch take place automatically when the
pamphlet copy function is selected.
Special Modes
OK
Pamphlet Copy
1-Sided 2-Sided
Left
Binding
Right
Binding
Original
OK
Cover
Setting
Cancel
or
56
COPYING A LARGE NUMBER OF
ORIGINALS AT ONCE (Job Build)
When copying a very large number of originals, this function allows you to divide the originals into sets and feed each
set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time.
Use this function when you wish to copy all of the originals as a single job but the number of originals exceeds the
maximum number that can be inserted.
This function is convenient when you wish to sort copies of a large number of originals into multiple sets. Because all
originals are copied as a single job, you are saved the trouble of sorting the copies that would be required if the originals
were divided into separate copy jobs.
When scanning originals in sets, divide the sheets so that no set has more than the number of paper that can be loaded,
and then scan from the set with the first page. The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining
sets.
Sorting the copies of a large number of originals into 2 sets
1
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
2
Select Job Build.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 44)
(2) Touch the [Job Build] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
1
1
1
101
1
Originals
Originals are
scanned in
separate sets
Indicator
line
Special Modes
1
2
Card Shot
Multi Shot
OK
Dual Page
Copy
Tandem
Copy
Tab Copy
Transparency
Inserts
Erase
Job
Build
Book Copy
Covers/Inserts
Margin Shift
Pamphlet Copy
(3)(2)
57
3
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
( ) to scan the first set of originals.
Scanning begins.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
4
Insert the next set of originals and press
the [COLOR START] key ( ) or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
For the second set and following sets, use the same [START]
key as you did for the first set.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ). All scanned data will be cleared.
5
Touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
If the Quick File Folder of document filing mode is full, copying in job build mode will be impeded. Delete unneeded files from
the Quick File Folder.
To cancel job build mode....
Touch the [Job Build] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
or
or
Read-End
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
58
USING TWO MACHINES TO MAKE A LARGE
NUMBER OF COPIES (Tandem Copy)
Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel.
Each machine prints half of the copies, reducing the time required to complete the job.
Master machine and slave machine
In the following explanation, the master machine is the machine that is used to scan the originals. The slave machine is
another machine specified in the master machine that only helps print the copies; it is not used to scan the originals.
Before using tandem copy
• To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network. Even if more machines are connected to the
network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.
• To use the tandem copy function, "Tandem Connection Setting" must be configured in the system settings
(administrator).
• When configuring the system settings in the master machine, the IP address of the slave machine is required. For the
port number, it is best to use the initial setting (50001). Unless you experience difficulty with this setting, do not
change the port number. The tandem settings should be configured by your network administrator. If the master
machine and slave machine will switch roles, configure the IP address of the master machine in the slave machine.
The same port number can be used for both machines.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select tandem copy.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 44)
(2) Touch the [Tandem Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Master machine
4 sets of copies are
made
2 sets of
copies
Network environment
Slave machine
2 sets of
copies
Special Modes
1
2
Card Shot
Multi Shot
OK
Dual Page
Copy
Tandem
Copy
Tab Copy
Transparency
Inserts
Erase
Job
Build
Book Copy
Covers/Inserts
Margin Shift
Pamphlet Copy
(3)(2)
59
3
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set. When the [COLOR START]
key ( ) or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) is
pressed, the copies will automatically be divided between the
master and slave machines.
If an odd number of copies is set, the master machine will print
the extra set.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and
press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been
scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second
original and following originals, use the same [START] key as
you did for the first original.)
The following screen appears when the [START] key is
pressed.
After the message appears, tandem copying begins.
If tandem copying is not possible, the following screen appears.
To have the master machine make all copies, touch the [OK]
key. To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key.
• To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• To cancel tandem copying...
Touch the [STOP] keys ( ) on both the master machine and the slave machine.
or
Starting tandem operation.
Please wait.
Tandem output is not allowed.
Output all sets using master machine?
(Cancel will delete the job.)
Cancel
OK
60
In this situation...
A punch module is installed on the master machine but not on the slave machine.
• Copying without punching: tandem copy is possible.
• Copying with punching: tandem copy is not possible.
In this way, if tandem copying is executed using a function that the slave machine does not have, a message will appear. To
have the master machine make all copies, touch the [OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [Cancel] key.
If a machine runs out of paper
If either the master machine or the slave machine run out of paper, the machine that ran out of paper will hold the job while
the machine that still has paper continues the job. When paper is added to the machine that ran out, the job resumes.
When user authentication is enabled
User authentication is enabled in the master machine: tandem copying is possible.
User authentication is enabled in the slave machine but not in the master machine: tandem copying is not possible.
If tandem copying is performed without setting the number of copies
A message will appear and the master machine and slave machine will each make one set of copies (total of two sets).
To cancel tandem copy...
Touch the [Tandem Copy] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Tandem Connection Setting
This must be configured to use the tandem function. This can also be used to disable the tandem function.
61
USING A DIFFERENT PAPER TYPE FOR
COVERS (Covers/Inserts)
A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the
automatic document feeder is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert at specified
pages.
Example of adding covers
Example of adding covers/inserts
Example of adding inserts
About the explanations of covers and
inserts
There are various ways of using covers and inserts. To
keep the explanations simple, covers and inserts are
explained separately. For specific examples, see
"Examples of covers and inserts" (page 142).
Preparations for using covers and inserts
• Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function.
• Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1-sided or 2-sided
copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have been
completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts.
• The originals must be scanned using the automatic document feeder. The document glass cannot be used.
• For covers, only one sheet can be inserted for the front cover and only one sheet can be inserted for the back cover.
For inserts, up to 100 sheets can be inserted. Note that two insert sheets cannot be inserted between the same two
pages.
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insert cannot be inserted between the front and reverse
sides of an original.
• If tab paper is loaded in both the inserter and a machine tray (tray 3 or the bypass tray), the tab paper in either (but not
both) the inserter or the machine tray can be used for covers/inserts.
Back
cover
Front cover
Originals
Inserts
Back
cover
Originals
Front
cover
Originals
Inserts
62
INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover Settings)
A different type of paper can be inserted at the positions corresponding to the front and back covers of a copy job.
This is useful for arranging documents in an attractive format and for using a different type of paper as a cover on an
estimate sheet or similar document.
Covers can be used in combination with inserts.
Copying on a front cover and inserting together with a back cover
1
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
The document glass cannot be used.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
3
Touch the [Front Cover] key.
5
4
2 3 4 51
3
2
1
AAA
AAA
Originals
Front cover paper Back cover paper
Front cover
Back cover
Copies
Indicator
line
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings
Tray Settings
Inserts Setting
Cover Setting
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
63
4
Select cover settings.
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
key.
If the [No] key is touched, only cover insertion will be
performed.
In this case, go to step (3).
(2) To copy on one side of the cover, touch the
[1-Sided] key. To copy on both sides of the
cover, touch the [2-Sided] key.
(3) Select paper settings for the cover.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the paper tray for the cover in the
tray selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
• If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied on, tab
paper can be inserted.
• When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the cover cannot be copied on.
To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.
5
If you wish to insert a back cover, touch
the [Back Cover] key.
The screen of step 4 appears. The procedures are the same as
for the front cover. Follow the procedures in step 4.
When following the procedures, substitute "Back Cover" for
"Front Cover".
Covers/Inserts
Cancel
Front Cover Setting
OK
Paper Tray
Print on Front Cover
Yes
8½x11
Plain
No
2-Sided1-Sided
Bypass
Tray
(3) (4)(1)(2)
(A)
(B)
Covers/Inserts
Front Cover
OK
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
Plain
Plain
Plain
2. 8½x11
8½x11
3. 11x17
4. 8½x14
1.
Plain
8½x11
Plain
Plain
Inserter
8½x11
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings
Tray Settings
Inserts Setting
Cover Setting
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
64
6
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
You can touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the [Insertion Type
B] key to select insert settings.
☞ INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES (Insert
Settings) (page 65)
To check your settings, touch the [Page Layout] key.
☞ CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
(page 69)
7
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying of the originals in the document feeder tray begins.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.
• The document glass cannot be used.
• Cover settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
To cancel cover sheet insertion...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings
Tray Settings
Inserts Setting
Cover Setting
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
or
65
INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN COPIES
(Insert Settings)
You can have different paper automatically inserted as inserts at specified pages of copies. Two types of paper can be
used as inserts, and the insertion positions can be specified separately for each.
Covers can be used in combination with inserts.
Example: Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5.
1
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
The document glass cannot be used.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
3
Touch the [Insertion Type A] key.
6
5
4
2 3 4 5 61
3
2
1
1
Originals
Copies
Insert A
Insert B
Indicator
line
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings
Tray Settings
Inserts Setting
Cover Setting
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
66
4
Select insert settings.
(1) If the insert will be copied on, touch the
[Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No] key.
If the [No] key is touched, only insert sheet insertion will
be performed.
In this case, go to step (3).
(2) To copy on one side of the insert, touch the
[1-Sided] key. To copy on both sides, touch
the [2-Sided] key.
(3) Select insert paper settings.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the insert is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the inserts, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the desired paper tray in the tray
selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
• If both sides of the insert will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not
copied on, tab paper can be inserted.
• When the insert paper is fed from the inserter, the insert cannot be copied on.
5
If you wish to insert a different type of
insert sheet, touch the [Insertion Type B]
key.
The screen of step 4 appears. Settings are selected in the
same way as for insert type A. Follow the procedures in step 4.
When following the procedures, substitute "Insert Type B" for
"Insert Type A".
Covers/Inserts
Cancel
Insertion Type A Settings
OK
Paper Tray Print on Insert Sheets
Yes
8½x11
Plain
No
2-Sided1-Sided
Bypass
Tray
(3) (4)(1)(2)
(B)
(A)
Covers/Inserts
Insertion Type A
OK
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
Plain
Plain
Plain
2. 8½x11
8½x11
3. 11x17
4. 8½x14
1.
Plain
8½x11
Plain
Plain
Inserter
8½x11
Special Modes
OK
OK
Cancel
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings
Tray Settings
Inserts Setting
Cover Setting
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
67
6
Touch the [Insertion Settings] key.
7
Specify the pages where inserts A and B
will be inserted.
(1) Touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the
[Insertion Type B] key.
Specify the page where the highlighted insert will be
inserted.
(A) This shows the tray selected for insert type A and the
paper size and type.
(B) This shows the tray selected for insert type B and the
paper size and type.
When the [Insertion Type A] key is highlighted, the insert
sheet insertion settings are applied to [Insertion Type A].
When the [Insertion Type B] key is highlighted, the insert
settings are applied to [Insertion Type B].
(2) Enter the page number where the insert
sheet will be inserted with the numeric
keys.
For more information, see "Inserts (copying of 1-sided
originals)" (page 147) and "Inserts (copying of 2-sided
originals)" (page 147).
The [CLEAR] key ( ) can be pressed to return the
setting of the selected item to the default value. If you
make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then
enter the correct number.
(3) Touch the [Enter] key.
(C) This shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100
insert sheets can be inserted. To insert multiple
inserts, touch the [Enter] key after entering each
insertion page number (insertion position) with the
numeric keys.
(4) To insert another insert sheet, repeat steps
(1) to (3).
(5) Touch the [OK] key.
• If both sides of the insert will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not
copied on, tab paper can be inserted.
• When the insert paper is fed from the inserter, the insert cannot be copied on.
Special Modes
OK
OK
Cancel
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings
Tray Settings
Inserts Setting
Cover Setting
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
Covers/Inserts
Insertion Settings
OK
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
10
Insertion
Total:4
8½x11
Plain
Tray 2
Bypass
Tray
8½x11
Plain
Enter
Insertion Page
(1) (5)(2)
(A)
(B) (C)(3)
68
8
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
To select cover settings, touch the [Front Cover] key or the
[Back Cover] key.
☞ INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (Cover Settings) (page
62)
To check your settings, touch the [Page Layout] key.
☞ CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
(page 69)
9
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying of the originals in the document feeder tray begins.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• Use the same size of paper for the inserts as for the copies.
• Up to 100 insert sheets can be added. Note that two insert sheets cannot be inserted between the same two pages.
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and reverse sides of
an original page.
• This function cannot be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.
• Cover/insert settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
To cancel cover sheet insertion...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings
Tray Settings
Inserts Setting
Cover Setting
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
or
69
CHANGING COVER/INSERT SETTINGS (Page Layout)
Cover settings and insert settings can be combined.
This section explains how to check completed cover and insert insertion page settings, and change or delete insertion
pages.
Changing insert A from page 4 to page 5
1
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Covers/Inserts] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
2
Touch the [Page Layout] key.
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4th page, insert A
7th page, insert B
9th page, insert B
12th page, insert A
5th page, insert A
7th page, insert B
9th page, insert B
12th page, insert A
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings
Tray Settings
Inserts Setting
Cover Setting
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
70
3
Example: Touch insert A at page 4
Touch the key of the page that you wish
to delete or change.
If you do not need to change the setting, touch the [OK] key
and go to step 6.
• Each key shows a print image icon and the insertion page.
• If there are multiple screens, touch the keys to move
through the screens.
To edit a cover, touch the [Front Cover] key or the [Back Cover]
key and go to step 4.
Touch the key of the insertion page that you want to edit or
clear. The following screen will appear.
• To delete the page, touch the [Delete] key. After deleting the
key, touch the [OK] key and go to step 6.
• To edit the page, touch the [Modify] key.
To edit an insert, touch the [Insertion Type A] key or the
[Insertion Type B] key and go to step 5.
• To cancel, touch the [Cancel] key.
Icons
: Copy on front side only
: Copy on reverse side only
: 2-sided copy
: Do not copy
For inserts, the insertion page also appears.
* represents a page number.
*/-: Copy only on front side at page *
*/*: 2-sided copy at page */*
<*: Insert without copying at page *
4
Change the front/back cover settings.
The settings are changed in the same way as they are initially
configured. See step 4 of "INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES
(Cover Settings)" (page 62) to change the cover settings.
After changing the settings, touch the [OK] key and return to
step 3.
To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
OK
1
1
Insertion
Type A
4/-
Insertion
Type B
7/-
Insertion
Type B
9/-
Insertion
Type A
12/-
Modify
the insertion?
ModifyDeleteCancel
Covers/Inserts
Cancel
Front Cover Setting
OK
Paper Tray
Print on Front Cover
Yes
8½x11
Plain
No
2-Sided1-Sided
Bypass
Tray
71
5
Change the settings for insert type A/B.
The settings are changed in the same way as they are initially
configured. See step 7 of "INSERTING INSERT SHEETS IN
COPIES (Insert Settings)" (page 65) to change the insert
settings.
After changing the settings, touch the [OK] key and return to
step 3.
6
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Covers/Inserts
Insertion Modify
OK
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
5
Insertion
Total:4
8½x11
Plain
Tray 2
Bypass
Tray
8½x11
Plain
Enter
Insertion Page
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Front
Cover
Back
Cover
Insertion
Type B
Insertion
Type A
Insertion
Settings
Tray Settings
Inserts Setting
Cover Setting
Covers/Inserts
Page Layout
72
ADDING INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON
TRANSPARENCY FILM
(Transparency Inserts)
When copying on transparency film, the sheets may stick together due to static electricity. The transparency inserts
function can be used to automatically insert a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the
sheets easy to handle.
It is also possible to copy on the inserts.
1
Load the transparency film.
• If you are using the bypass tray, load the transparency film
face down in the tray.
When placing the transparency film, the rounded corner of
the film should be:
• At the front and left if the film is oriented horizontally.
• At the back and left if the film is oriented vertically.
• After loading the transparency film, configure the bypass tray
settings as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE
BYPASS TRAY" (page 41).
• If you are using tray 3, see "Loading transparency film" in the
User's Guide. After loading transparency film in tray 3, select
tray 3 as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 14).
2
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
3
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Transparency Inserts] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
C
B
A
Inserts
Oriented
horizontally
Oriented
vertically
73
4
Select insert settings.
(1) Select whether or not the insert paper will
be copied on ([Yes] or [No]).
(2) Select insert paper settings.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the inserts is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
To change the paper tray for the inserts, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the paper tray for the inserts in the
tray selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
Select insert paper that is the same size as the transparency film.
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode.
• When performing 2-sided copying, only "2-sided to 1-sided" mode can be used.
To cancel the transparency inserts setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Transparency Inserts
Paper Tray
8½x11
Plain
Tray2
Print on Insert Sheets
Yes No
(2) (1) (3)
(A)
(B)
Transparency Inserts
Insertion Sheet
OK
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
Transparency
Plain
Plain
2. 8½x11
8½x11
3. 11x17
4. 8½x14
1.
Plain
8½x11
Plain
Plain
Inserter
8½x11
or
74
COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO
ONE SHEET (Multi Shot)
Multiple original pages can be copied onto a single sheet of paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two original
pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when you wish to
present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.
2in1 copying 4in1 copying
B
A
A B
D
C
B
A
AB
CD
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Multi Shot] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
75
3
Select the number of originals to be
copied onto one sheet of paper, the
layout, and the border.
(1) Touch the [2in1] key or the [4in1] key.
If needed, the images will be rotated.
(2) Select the layout.
Select the order in which the originals will be arranged on
the copy.
The arrows in the above diagram indicate how the images
are arranged.
(3) Select the border.
Solid lines, broken lines, or no lines can be selected.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass, change originals and
press the [START] key. Repeat until all pages have been
scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second
original and following originals, use the same [START] key as
you did for the first original.)
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
When using the multi shot function, the appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set based on the original size, paper size,
and the number of originals to be copied onto one sheet. The minimum possible reduction ratio is 25%. The original size,
paper size, and selected number of original pages may require that the ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take place at
25% in this case, part of the original images may be cut off.
To cancel a multi shot setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Multi Shot
2in1 4in1
Layout
Border
(1) (4)(3)
(2)
Layout
Number
of pages
2in1
4in1
or
76
COPYING A PAMPHLET (Book Copy)
This function is used to make a copy of the two facing pages of an open book or other bound document.
Copies made with this function can be folded at the center to create a booklet.
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.
1
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Book Copy] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
C
3
B
2
A
1
D
4
A
1
B
2
C
3
D
4
3
1
2nd pageBack cover
Originals
Cover
Inside of
cover
3rd page
1st page
4th page Inside of
back cover
Place the original
The copies are in the same
layout as the original.
How to place the original
77
2
Select book copy settings.
(1) Select the binding position ([Left Binding]
or [Right Binding]).
(2) To insert a cover, touch the [Cover Setting]
key.
If a cover will not be added, go to step 4.
Cover settings cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
3
Select cover settings.
(1) If the cover sheet will be copied on, touch
the [Yes] key. Otherwise, touch the [No]
key.
(2) Select paper settings for the cover.
(A) The currently selected paper tray for the cover is
displayed.
(B) The size and type of paper in the currently selected
tray is displayed.
In the example screen, 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size plain paper
is loaded in the bypass tray.
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the "Paper
Tray" key.
When the "Paper Tray" key is touched, a tray selection
screen appears. Select the desired paper tray in the tray
selection screen and touch the [OK] key.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
• If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used.
• When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the cover cannot be copied on.
To cancel cover settings...
Touch the [Cancel] key.
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Book Copy
Left
Binding
Right
Binding
Cover
Setting
(1) (2)
Book Copy
Cancel
Cover Setting
OK
Paper Tray
Print on Cover (2-sided)
Yes
11x17
Plain
No
Bypass
Tray
(2) (3)(1)
(A)
(B)
Book Copy
Cover Setting
OK
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
Plain
Plain
Plain
2. 8½x11
11x17
3. 11x17
4. 8½x14
1.
Plain
8½x11
Plain
Plain
Inserter
8½x11
78
4
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
5
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
Place the opened front cover and back cover face down.
6
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
( ) to scan the first original.
Scanning begins.
Scan the remaining original pages in the following order:
Opened inside of front cover and 1st page
Opened 2nd and 3rd page
·
·
·
Opened last page and inside of back cover
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
7
Place the next pair of opened pages and
press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Repeat this step until all original pages have been scanned.
For the second original and following originals, use the same
[START] key as you did for the first original.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Book Copy
Left
Binding
Right
Binding
Cover
Setting
or
or
79
8
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Copying will begin.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total
number of original pages is not a multiple of four.
• If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, the book copy function can be used in combination with the saddle stitch function.
• When book copy is selected, 2-sided copying is automatically selected. When settings are selected that prevent 2-sided
copying, the book copy function cannot be used.
To cancel book copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
Read-End
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
80
COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER
(Tab Copy)
Captions can be copied onto the tabs of tab paper. Prepare appropriate originals for the tab captions.
Tab copy is possible from both tray 3 and the bypass tray. The following explanation uses the bypass tray as an
example.
RELATION BETWEEN THE ORIGINALS AND THE TAB
PAPER
Tab copying with a left binding
Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper
• Document feeder tray
Insert the originals so that the side with no
tab text enters first.
Load the tab paper so that the tab on the
first sheet is toward you.
• Document glass
Place so that the side with the tab text is
on the left.
GHI
DEF
ABC
GHI
DEF
ABC
ABC
Prepare originals that
match the tab positions.
The image is shifted
by the width of the tab
1
Final image
Originals
1
Reverse
side
1
81
Tab copying with a right binding
Originals Placing the originals Loading tab paper
• Document feeder tray
Insert the originals so that the side with no
tab text enters first.
Load the tab paper so that the tab on the
first sheet is away from you.
• Document glass
Place so that the side with the tab text is
on the left.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Tab Copy] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
3
Set the tab width.
(1) Set the image shift width (tab width) with
the keys.
0" to 5/8" (0 mm to 20 mm) can be entered.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
1
Final image
Originals
1
Reverse
side
1
Special Modes
OK
Cancel
OK
Tab Copy
1/2
(0~5/8)
inch
Image Shift
CopyOriginal
(2)(1)
82
4
Load the tab paper.
• When using the bypass tray, place the paper with the print
side down.
Place the paper so that the sides with the tabs enter the
machine last.
After loading the tab paper, configure the bypass tray
settings as explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE
BYPASS TRAY" (page 41).
• If you are using tray 3, see "Loading tab paper" in the User's
Guide. After loading tab paper in tray 3, select tray 3 as
explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 14).
The width of the tab paper can be as wide as 8-1/2" x 11" paper (8-1/2") plus 5/8" (or A4 width (210 mm) plus 20 mm).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.)
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
To cancel tab copy...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Tab Copy Setting
The default image shift width can be set from 0" to 5/8" (0 mm to 20 mm). The factory default setting is "1/2" (10 mm)".
Reverse side
or
83
COPYING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD ON ONE
SHEET OF PAPER (Card Shot)
When copying a card, this function allows you to copy the front and reverse sides together onto a single sheet of paper.
This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper.
1
Select the paper to be used for card
shot.
Select the paper as explained in "PAPER TRAYS" (page 14).
2
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
3
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the [Card Shot] key.
☞ Special modes menu (1st screen) (page 44)
Front
Back
Originals
Copies
Example of an 8-1/2" x 11"
(A4) size portrait copy
Example of an 8-1/2" x 11"
(A4) size landscape copy
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
84
4
Select card shot settings.
(1) Enter the original size.
With the [X] key highlighted, enter the X (horizontal)
dimension of the original with the keys.
Touch the [Y] key and enter the Y (vertical) dimension of
the original with the keys.
(A) To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper
based on the entered original size, touch the [Fit to
Page] key.
(B) The [Size Reset] key can be pressed to return the
horizontal and vertical dimensions to the values set in
"Card Shot Settings" in the system settings
(administrator).
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode. Make
sure that the entered dimensions appear in the [Original]
key.
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
( ) to scan the front side of the card.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
6
Turn the card over and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ) or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) to
scan the reverse side of the card.
Use the same [START] key that you used for the front side of
the card.
To cancel scanning...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
7
Touch the [Read-End] key.
Copying will begin.
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
Special Modes
OK
Card Shot
OKCancel
Fit to
Page
Size Reset
(1~8 1/2)
inch
(1~8 1/2)
inch
X
Y
3
8
3
2
8
1
(2)(1)
(A)
(B)
or
or
Read-End
Place next original. Press [Start].
When finished, press [Read-End].
85
• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• Copying is only possible on standard size paper.
• XY Zoom cannot be used when using this function.
• The image cannot be rotated when using this function.
To cancel card shot...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 4.
System Settings (Administrator): Card Shot Settings
This is used to set the values to which the size returns when the [Size Reset] key is pressed. 1" to 8-1/2" (25 mm to 210 mm)
can be entered for both the horizontal and vertical dimensions.
The factory default settings are 3-3/8" (86 mm) for X (the width) and 2-1/8" (54 mm) for Y (the height).
86
PRINTING THE DATE AND A STAMP ON
COPIES (Stamp)
Use this function to print the date, a stamp, the page number, and text on copies.
Six printing positions are available: top left, top center, top right, bottom left, bottom center, and bottom right.
The printing positions are separated into areas that are used for the date, page number and text (A below), and areas
that are used for a stamp (B below).
When used in combination with other special modes
When Stamp is used in combination with the following special modes, the special modes are reflected in the stamp
content.
B
A
Top center
Top rightTop left
Bottom left Bottom right
Bottom center
Stamp Print area
Maximum number
of positions
Date A 1 position only
Stamp B 6 positions
Page
Numbering
A 1 position only
Text A 6 positions
• If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position, priority will be given in the
following order: right side, left side, center. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.
• Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
• Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting.
• Depending on the size of the paper, some printed content may be cut off or shifted out of position.
Special Modes Printing
Margin Shift Together with the image, the stamp content is shifted the amount of the margin width.
Dual Page Copy The stamp is printed on each copy sheet.
Pamphlet Copy
Book Copy
The stamp is printed on each page of the resulting pamphlet or book.
Multi Shot
Card Shot
The stamp is printed on each copy sheet.
Covers/Inserts
Use the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserted covers and
inserts.
When used in combination with "Erase", "Job Build", "Mirror Image", or "B/W Reverse", the stamp is printed in the set
position as usual.
87
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP
To select stamp settings, follow the steps below.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Stamp] key.
☞ Special modes menu (2nd screen) (page 45)
3
Select the print position.
Select from 6 positions: top left, top center, top right, bottom
left, bottom center, bottom right.
You can also skip this step and go directly to the next step. In
this case, the stamp items will be printed in the following
positions:
Date: Top right Stamp: Top left
Page number: Bottom center Text: Top left
Print positions
The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.
The above key is the top left key. The appearance of each key
varies depending on the position of the key.
• "Date" and "Page Numbering" cannot be selected in multiple positions. If the [Date] key or [Page Numbering] key is
touched when "Date" or "Page Numbering" has already been selected for a position, a message will appear asking
you if you wish to move that item to the selected position. To move the item, touch the [Yes] key. Otherwise, press
the [No] key.
• If you attempt to set "Date", "Text", or "Page Numbering" in a position where one of these items is already set, a
message will appear. To change the previously selected item to the new item, touch the [Yes] key. To keep the
previous item, touch the [No] key.
OK
Special Modes
Stamp
OK
Layout
Cancel
Date
Page
Numbering
Text
Stamp
1
2
Not selected, stamp setting has not
been selected.
Selected during selection of the stamp
setting.
Not available, stamp setting has already
been selected.
88
4
Select Stamp.
For detailed information on each of the stamp items, see the
following sections:
Date: ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)
(page 90)
Stamp: STAMPING COPIES (Stamp) (page 92)
Page numbering: PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering) (page 94)
Text: PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text) (page
98)
5
When you have finished selecting stamp
settings, touch the key.
6
Select settings for the original and
covers/inserts.
(1) Touch the [Original Orientation] key and
specify the orientation of the placed
original.
If 2-sided originals have been placed, touch the
key and specify the binding position (booklet binding or
tablet binding) of the originals.
(2) Select stamp settings for covers/inserts.
If you do not want to print the stamp items on
covers/inserts, touch the checkbox to remove the
checkmark .
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
To edit a stamp position or delete a stamp item, touch the
[Layout] key.
☞ CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout) (page
102)
• When copying on covers/inserts is not selected, printing will not take place even if a checkmark appears.
• This setting cannot be selected if insertion of covers and inserts is disabled in the system settings (administrator).
OK
Special Modes
Stamp
OK
Layout
Cancel
Date
Page
Numbering
Text
Stamp
1
2
OK
Special Modes
Stamp
OK
Layout
Cancel
Date
Page
Numbering
Text
Stamp
1
2
Special Modes
OK
OK
Stamp
Cancel
Original Orientation
Print on Covers/Inserts when Copying on Covers/Inserts
2-Sided Original Type
2
2
Layout
(2) (1)
(3)
89
7
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.
• If you selected printing in color, press the [COLOR START] key ( ). Even if a color is selected, pressing the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ) will print the stamp items in black and white.
• If a color print setting is selected, the copy will be counted as a full color copy even if it is black & white.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
To cancel Stamp...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
or
90
ADDING THE DATE TO COPIES (Date)
The date can be printed on copies. The position of the date, color, format, and page (first page only or all pages) can be
selected.
Example: Printing APRIL 1, 2006 in the top right corner of the paper.
1
Touch the [Date] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 87).
2
Set the date format.
(1) Touch the key that shows the desired date
format.
(2) If you selected [YYYY/MM/DD],
[MM/DD/YYYY], or [DD/MM/YYYY], touch the
[/], [.], [-], or [ ] key to select the separator.
3
Touch the [Print Color] key and select
the print color.
Touch the desired color and touch the [OK] key.
• If you selected a color other than [Bk (Black)], press the [COLOR START] key ( ). Pressing the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key ( ) will print the date in black and white.
• If the date is printed in color on a black and white copy, the copy will be included in the full color count.
APR/01/2006
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
OK
Date Change MM DD, YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
MM/DD/YYYY
YYYY/MM/DD
APR/01/2006
All Pages
First Page
Stamp
Date
(1) (2)
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
OK
Date Change MM DD, YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
MM/DD/YYYY
YYYY/MM/DD
APR/01/2006
All Pages
First Page
Stamp
Date
O
K
B(Blue)G(Green)R(Red)
Bk(Black)
Y(Yellow)M(Magenta)C(Cyan)
Stamp
Print Color
91
4
Check the displayed date. If you need to
change the date, touch the [Date
Change] key.
Set the date that you wish to use and touch the [OK] key.
• If you select a date that does not exist (such as Feb. 30), the [OK] key will be grayed out to prevent entry.
• Changing the date here will not change the date that is set in the machine using "Clock" in the system settings.
5
Select the pages that the date will be
printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 87) to complete the
copy procedure.
To cancel the date print setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
OK
Date Change MM DD, YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
APR/01/2006
All Pages
First Page
Stamp
Date
MM/DD/YYYY
YYYY/MM/DD
Stamp
Date Change
OK
04 012006
Year Month Day
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
OK
Date Change MM DD, YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY
APR/01/2006
All Pages
First Page
Stamp
Date
MM/DD/YYYY
YYYY/MM/DD
92
STAMPING COPIES (Stamp)
Text such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in white on a dark background as a "stamp" on copies.
The position, color, size, density, and pages (first page only or all pages) can be selected for a stamp.
Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the top left corner of a copy
The following 12 selections are available for the stamp text.
Three levels can be selected for the density of the stamp background.
Seven colors can be selected for the stamp color.
Two stamp sizes can be selected.
CONFIDENTIAL PRIORITY PRELIMINARY FINAL
FOR YOUR INFO. DO NOT COPY IMPORTANT COPY
URGENT DRAFT TOP SECRET PLEASE REPLY
1
Touch the [Stamp] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 87).
2
Touch the key of the stamp that you
wish to use.
CONFIDENTIAL
Cancel
OK
PRIORITYCONFIDENTIAL
DO NOT COPYFOR YOUR INFO.
DRAFTURGENT
FINALPRELIMINARY
COPYIMPORTANT
PLEASE REPLYTOP SECRET
Print Color
Larger
Smaller
All Pages
First Page
Size
Stamp
Stamp
Bk
21 3
93
3
Touch the [Print Color] key and set the
color and density.
Touch the color that you wish to use.
If you wish to darken the selected color, touch the key. If
you wish to lighten the selected color, touch the key.
When you have finished selecting the settings, touch the [OK]
key.
• If you selected a color other than [Bk (Black)], press the [COLOR START] key ( ). Pressing the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key ( ) will print the stamp in black and white.
• If the stamp is printed in color on a black and white copy, the copy will be included in the full color count.
4
Touch the [Larger Smaller] key to
select the size of the stamp.
5
Select the pages that the date will be
printed on and touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 87) to complete the
copy procedure.
The stamp text cannot be edited.
To cancel a stamp setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
Cancel
OK
PRIORITY
CONFIDENTIAL
DO NOT COPY
FOR YOUR INFO.
DRAFT
URGENT
FINAL
PRELIMINARY
COPY
IMPORTANT
PLEASE REPLY
TOP SECRET
Print Color
Bk
21 3
Larger
Smaller
All Pages
First Page
Size
Stamp
Stamp
Stamp
Print Color
OK
B(Blue)G(Green)R(Red)
Bk(Black)
Y(Yellow)M(Magenta)C(Cyan)
Exposure
1 2 3
Cancel
O
K
PRIORITY
CONFIDENTIAL
DO NOT COPY
FOR YOUR INFO.
DRAFT
URGENT
FINAL
PRELIMINARY
COPY
IMPORTANT
PLEASE REPLY
TOP SECRET
Print Color
Larger
Smaller
All Pages
First Page
Size
Stamp
Stamp
Bk
2
1 3
Cancel
O
K
PRIORITYCONFIDENTIAL
DO NOT COPYFOR YOUR INFO.
DRAFTURGENT
FINALPRELIMINARY
COPY
IMPORTANT
PLEASE REPLYTOP SECRET
Print Color
Larger
Smaller
All Pages
First Page
Size
Stamp
Stamp
Bk
21 3
94
PRINTING PAGE NUMBERS ON COPIES
(Page Numbering)
Page numbers can be printed on copies.
The position, color, format, and page number can be selected for page numbering.
Printing the page number at the bottom center of the paper.
1
Touch the [Page Numbering] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 87).
2
Select a format for the page number.
If the [1/5, 2/5, 3/5] key is selected,
"Page number / total pages" will be printed. "AUTO" is initially
selected for the total pages, which means that the number of
scanned original pages is automatically set as the total pages.
If you need to set the total pages manually, such as when a
large number of originals are divided into sets for scanning,
touch the [Manual] key to display the total pages entry screen.
Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric keys and
touch the [OK] key.
The [CLEAR] key ( ) can be pressed to return the setting of
the selected item to the default value. If you make a mistake,
press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct
number.
• When 2-sided copying is performed, the total pages is the total number of sides of the paper. If the final page is
blank, it is not counted. However, if a back cover will be added and the [Count Back Cover] checkbox is selected
, the final page is counted. (See step 7.)
• When used in combination with "Dual Page Copy", "Multi Shot", or "Card Shot", the number of sides of the paper
copied on is the total pages.
• When used in combination with "Pamphlet Copy" or "Book Copy", the total number of pages in the resulting
pamphlet or booklet is the total pages.
1
2
3
Page Number
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
Auto
Manual
(1),(2),(3)..
1,2,3..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
-1-,-2-,-3-..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
<1>,<2>,<3>..
OK
1
Page
Total Page
Page Numbering Format
Stamp
Page Numbering
Page Number
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
Auto
Manual
(1),(2),(3)..
1,2,3..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
-1-,-2-,-3-..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
<1>,<2>,<3>..
OK
1
Page
Total Page
Page Numbering Format
Stamp
Page Numbering
95
3
Touch the [Print Color] key.
Touch the color that you wish to use.
When you have finished selecting the settings, touch the [OK]
key.
• If you selected a color other than [Bk (Black)], press the [COLOR START] key ( ). Pressing the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key ( ) will print the page numbers in black and white.
• If page numbers are printed in color on black and white copies, the copies will be included in the full color count.
4
To configure page number settings,
touch the [Page Number] key.
If you do not need to configure page number settings, go to
step 9.
5
Select page number settings.
(1) Touch the [Manual] key.
(2) Set the first number, the last number, and
the "Printing Starts from Page" number.
Touch each key and enter a number with the numeric
keys (1 to 999).
The [CLEAR] key ( ) can be pressed to return the
setting of the selected item to the default value. If you
make a mistake, press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then
enter the correct number.
• A "Last Number" smaller than the "First Number" cannot be set.
• The "Last Number" is initially set to "Auto", which means that page numbers are automatically printed through the
last page based on the "First Number" and "Printing Start from Page" settings.
• If the "Last Number" is set to a number smaller than the "Total Pages", page numbers are not printed on pages after
the page set as the "Last Number".
• "Printing Starts from Page" is used to set the page number from which you want to begin printing page numbers.
For example, if "3" is set and 1-sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed beginning from the
3rd copy sheet (the 3rd original page). If 2-sided copying is being performed, page numbers will be printed
beginning from the front side of the 2nd copy sheet (the 3rd original page).
Page Number
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
Auto
Manual
(1),(2),(3)..
1,2,3..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
-1-,-2-,-3-..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
<1>,<2>,<3>..
OK
1
Page
Total Page
Page Numbering Format
Stamp
Page Numbering
OK
B(Blue)G(Green)R(Red)
Bk(Black)
Y(Yellow)M(Magenta)C(Cyan)
Stamp
Print Color
Page Number
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
Auto
Manual
(1),(2),(3)..
1,2,3..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
-1-,-2-,-3-..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
<1>,<2>,<3>..
OK
1
Page
Total Page
Page Numbering Format
Stamp
Page Numbering
OK
Auto
Manual
1
1
Covers/Inserts
Counting
Auto
First Number Last Number
Printing Starts from Page
Stamp
Page Number
(2)(1)
96
6
If covers/inserts will be inserted, touch
the [Covers/Inserts Counting] key if you
want to include the covers/inserts in the
page number count and want page
numbers printed on the covers/inserts.
7
Touch each item that you want counted
in the page numbers so that a
checkmark appears , and then touch
the [OK] key.
Items with a checkmark will be reflected in the print image
on the right side of the screen.
(A): Front cover image
(B): Insert image
(C): Back cover image
• When the checkboxes are selected , each inserted sheet of paper (front cover, insert, or back cover) will be
counted as one page in the case of 1-sided copying, or two pages in the case of 2-sided copying. However, when
the body sheets are 1-sided copies and the inserted sheets are 2-sided copies, each body sheet is counted as one
page and each inserted sheet is counted as two pages.
• Page numbers are printed on covers/inserts if the covers/inserts are counted and if they are copied on.
8
Touch the [OK] key.
9
Touch the [OK] key.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 87) to complete the
copy procedure.
OK
Auto
Manual
1
1
Covers/Inserts
Counting
Auto
First Number Last Number
Printing Starts from Page
Stamp
Page Number
OK
Count Front Cover
Count Inserts
Count Back Cover
Stamp
Covers/Inserts Counting
(1) (2)
(A)
(B) (C)
OK
Auto
Manual
1
1
Covers/Inserts
Counting
Auto
First Number Last Number
Printing Starts from Page
Stamp
Page Number
Page Number
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
Auto
Manual
(1),(2),(3)..
1,2,3..
P.1,P.2,P.3..
-1-,-2-,-3-..
1/5,2/5,3/5..
<1>,<2>,<3>..
OK
1
Page
Total Page
Page Numbering Format
Stamp
Page Numbering
97
• When Page Numbering is selected, copying in group mode is not possible. The mode automatically changes to sort mode.
• When the page number printing position is set to the right side or left side and pamphlet copy or book copy is used, the
print position is changed so that the page numbers always appear on the outer side of each opened page (the left and right
sides of the opened pages). If a stamp is set in the area where page numbering is set, the position of the stamp changes in
the same way as the page number.
If another stamp item is set in this changing position, the page numbers will alternate sides with this stamp item.
A stamp item that is in a position not affected by the changing page number position will be printed in its original set
position.
Example: When four pages are copied using pamphlet copy and the page number format is "1, 2, 3...", the result is as
follows:
In this example, the page number is set at the bottom of the page and the date is set at the top, and thus the
date does not move.
To cancel the page numbering setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
Date
Text
Stamp
4
AAA AAA
12
AAA AAA
3No.
APR/01/2006 APR/01/2006 APR/01/2006 APR/01/2006
CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIALCONFIDENTIAL
Print settings Side 1 Side 2
98
PRINTING TEXT ON COPIES (Text)
Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 30 frequently used text strings can be stored.
Example: Printing "April 2006 Planning Meeting" in the top left corner of the paper
1
Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 87).
2
Touch the [Recall] key.
The [Direct Entry] key can be touched to display the text entry
screen. To enter text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's
Guide. When all characters have been entered, touch the [OK]
key.
To store or delete a text string, touch the [Store/Delete] key.
☞ Storing, editing, and deleting text strings (page 100)
3
Specify the text to be printed.
(1) Touch the text string that you wish to
select.
You can touch the [5 10] key to switch the number of
keys displayed in the screen between 5 and 10. When
5-key display is selected, the entire text string appears in
each key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
April 2006 Planning Meeting
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
OK
Pre-Set
First Page
All Pages
Store/Delete
Recall
Direct Entry
Stamp
Text
Cancel
10
5
Recall
No.05
No.07
No.09
No.06
No.08
No.10
OK
1
3
Stamp
Text
No.01 AAA AAA
No.03 CCC CCC No.04 DDD DDD
No.02 BBB BBB
(1) (2)
99
4
Touch the [Print Color] key.
Touch the color that you wish to use. When you have finished
selecting the settings, touch the [OK] key.
• If you selected a color other than [Bk (Black)], press the [COLOR START] key ( ). Pressing the [BLACK &
WHITE START] key ( ) will print the page numbers in black and white.
• If the text is printed in color on a black and white copies, the copies will be included in the full color count.
5
Select the pages to be printed on and
touch the [OK] key.
Select printing on the first page only, or printing on all pages.
After touching the [OK] key, continue from step 5 of "GENERAL
PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 87) to complete the
copy procedure.
Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text Settings
(Stamp)] in the Web page menu.
To cancel a text setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
OK
Pre-Set
First Page
All Pages
Store/Delete
Recall
Direct Entry
Stamp
Text
AAA AAA
OK
B(Blue)G(Green)R(Red)
Bk(Black)
Y(Yellow)M(Magenta)C(Cyan)
Stamp
Print Color
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
OK
Pre-Set
First Page
All Pages
Store/Delete
Recall
Direct Entry
Stamp
Text
AAA AAA
100
Storing, editing, and deleting text strings
1
Touch the [Text] key in the stamp selection screen.
See steps 1 to 4 of "GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR USING STAMP" (page 87).
2
Touch the [Store/Delete] key.
3
Store a text string, or edit/delete a stored
text string.
• To store a text string, touch a key with no text stored.
A text entry screen will appear. A maximum of 50 characters
can be entered. To enter text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in
the User's Guide. When you have finished entering the text,
touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
• To edit or delete a text string, follow the instructions below.
To edit or delete a text string...
• When the key with the text string is touched, the following screen appears.
When the [Modify] key is touched, a text entry screen appears. The stored text string appears in the text entry
screen. Edit the text. To enter text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's Guide. When you have finished entering
the text, touch the [OK] key. The text entry screen will close.
• When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored text is deleted.
• Text settings can also be configured in the Web pages. Click [Application Settings], [Copy settings] and then [Text
Settings (Stamp)] in the Web page menu.
Cancel
Print Color
Bk(Black)
OK
Pre-Set
First Page
All Pages
Store/Delete
Recall
Direct Entry
Stamp
Text
10
5
Store/Delete
No.01 AAA AAA
No.03 CCC CCC No.04 DDD DDD
No.02 BBB BBB
No.05
No.07
No.08
No.09
No.10
No.06
Back
1
3
Stamp
Text
ModifyDeleteCancel
A text has been already stored to this
location. Change the text?
102
CHECKING THE STAMP LAYOUT (Layout)
After stamp items have been selected, you can check the print layout, change the print position, and delete stamp items.
1
Touch the [Layout] key.
The [Layout] key can only be touched when stamp items have been selected.
2
If the layout is correct, touch the [OK]
key.
Touch the key of the stamp item that you want to delete or
whose position you want to change.
A maximum of 14 characters appear in each key.
3
To change the position of the item,
touch the [Move] key. To delete the item,
touch the [Delete] key.
• If the [Move] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
destination position appears.
• If the [Delete] key is touched, the item is deleted. (Go to step
6.)
OK
Special Modes
Special Modes
OK
Layout
Cancel
Date
Page
Numbering
Text
Stamp
1
2
AAA AAA
CONFIDENTIAL
1,2,3..
DO NOT COPY
Stamp
Layout
OK
MoveDeleteCancel
Do you want to move or delete the
selected item?
103
4
Touch the key of the desired destination
position.
The touched position key is highlighted and the print position
changes.
The keys that show the print positions will appear as follows
depending on the state of the settings.
The above key is the top left key. The appearance of each key
varies depending on the position of the key.
If you wish to swap the position of the selected stamp item with the position of another stamp item, temporarily move
either one of the items to an unoccupied position and then switch the print positions.
5
Touch the [OK] key.
If you attempt to move the stamp item to a position that is
already occupied by another stamp item, a message will
appear asking you if you wish to overwrite the other stamp
item. To overwrite the other stamp item, touch the [Yes] key. To
cancel the move, touch the [No] key.
6
Touch the [OK] key.
Select the location to move the selected item.
OK
Stamp
Move
Not selected, stamp setting has not
been selected.
Selected during selection of the stamp
setting.
Not available, stamp setting has already
been selected.
Select the location to move the selected item.
OK
Stamp
Move
YesNo
An item has been already selected to
this location. Overwrite the item?
AAA AAA
CONFIDENTIAL
1
,2,3..
DO NOT COPY
Stamp
Layout
OK
104
[Image Edit] KEY
When the [Image Edit] key is touched in the 2nd special modes menu screen, the image edit menu screen opens.
Image edit menu screen
(1) [Photo Repeat] key
☞ REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat)
(page 105)
(2) [Multi-Page Enlargement] key
☞ CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Multi-Page
Enlargement) (page 107)
(3) [Mirror Image] key
☞ REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image) (page 110)
(4) [11x17 Full Bleed] key
☞ COPYING 11" x 17" ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE
CUT-OFF (11" x 17" Full Bleed) (page 111)
(5) [Centering] key
☞ COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER
(Centering) (page 113)
(6) [B/W Reverse] key
☞ REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W
Reverse) (page 115)
Special Modes
2
2
OK
Image Edit
File
Proof Copy
Color
Adjustments
Slow Scan
Mode
Mixed Size
Original
Stamp
Quick File
OK
Mirror
Image
B/W
Reverse
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Centering
11x17
Full Bleed
Photo Repeat
OK
Special Modes
Image Edit
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
105
REPEATING PHOTOS ON A COPY (Photo Repeat)
Photo Repeat is used to create repeated images of a photo-size original (3" x 5" size, 5" x 7" size, 2-1/2" x 4" size,
2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size or 2-1/8" x 3-5/8" size (130 mm x 90 mm size, 100 mm x 150 mm size, 70 mm x 100 mm size,
65 mm x 70 mm size or 57 mm x 100 mm size)) on a single sheet of copy paper as shown below. Up to 24 images
(when the image is 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" size (65 mm x 70 mm size)) can be repeated on a single sheet of paper.
• Original sizes up to 3" x 5" (130 mm x 90 mm)
• Original sizes up to 2-1/2" x 4" (70 mm x 100 mm)
• Original sizes up to 2-1/8" x 3-5/8"
(57 mm x 100 mm)
• Original sizes up to 5" x 7" (100 mm x 150 mm)
• Original sizes up to 2-1/2" x 2-1/2"
(65 mm x 70 mm)
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
4 copies are made.
Copying on 11" x 17"
(A3) size paper
8 copies are made.
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
8 copies are made.
Copying on 11" x 17"
(A3) size paper
16 copies are made.
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper (Ratio 95%)
10 copies are made.
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
2 copies are made.
Copying on
11" x 17" (A3) size
paper
4 copies are made.
Copying on 8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
size paper
12 copies are made.
Copying on 11" x 17"
(A3) size paper
24 copies are made.
1
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
• When placing a 3" x 5", 5" x 7", 2-1/2" x 4", 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" or
2-1/8" x 3-5/8" (130 mm x 90 mm, 100 mm x 150 mm,
70 mm x 100 mm, 65 mm x 70 mm or 57 mm x 100 mm)
photo size original, place the original with the long side
aligned against the left side of the document glass.
• When placing a business card size original, place the original
with the long side aligned against the far side of the
document glass.
106
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
(4) Touch the [Photo Repeat] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 104)
3
Select Photo Repeat settings.
(1) Touch the key showing the original type
and paper size combination that you want
to use.
Touch the keys to switch through the screens and
touch the desired repeat type key (8-1/2" x 11" or
11" x 17" (A4 or A3)).
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
When making repeat copies of a business card size original (up to 2-1/8" x 3-5/8" (57 mm x 100 mm)), only 8-1/2" x
11" (A4) can be selected for the paper size.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• Only 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) or 11" x 17" (A3) size paper can be used.
• The copy ratio is 100% when this function is used. (The ratio cannot be changed.) However, for a business card size
original (up to 2-1/8" x 3-5/8" (57 mm x 100 mm)), the images are reduced to 95%.
To cancel the photo repeat setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
OK
OK
Cancel
Image Edit
Photo Repeat
Original Size Repeat Type
A4/8½x11 A3/11x17
4 8
1
5
3x 5"
130x 90mm
(1) (2)
or
107
CREATING A LARGE POSTER (Multi-Page
Enlargement)
This function is used to enlarge an image of an original and print it as a composite image using multiple sheets of paper.
1
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
(4) Touch the [Multi-Page Enlargement] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 104)
Original
(8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size)
Copy (enlarged image on 8
sheets of 11" x 17" (A3) paper)
108
2
Set the enlargement size and the original
size.
(1) Select the size system that you wish to use
for multi-page enlargement.
Touch the keys to display the screen that shows
the desired group of sizes.
• 1st screen: Inch system
• 2nd screen: A system
• 3rd screen: B system
(2) Select the enlargement size.
(3) Select the size of the original to be used.
A suitable original placement orientation (A) and the
number of sheets of paper required for the enlarged
image (B) are displayed based on the selected original
size and enlargement size.
Check the placement orientation and number of sheets.
The following combinations of original sizes and
enlargement sizes are possible for multi-page
enlargement.
* The size that is twice A0 size.
An A size original cannot be enlarged to a B size, and a B size original cannot be enlarged to an A size.
3
Place the original face down on the
document glass in the orientation
indicated in the screen.
Ready to scan for copy. Copies will be
delivered in 2 parts.
OK
OK
Cancel
Image Edit
M.Page Enlarge
22x17
8½x14
22x34
34x44
44x68
11x17
8½x11
Enlargement Size
(Inch)
Original Size Original Orientation
1
3
(2) (A) (1)(3)
(B)
22" x 17" 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
22" x 34" 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
34" x 44" 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11"
44" x 68" 11" x 17"
A2 A3, A4, A5
A1 A3, A4, A5
A0 A3, A4
A0 x 2* A3
B3 B4, B5
B2 B4, B5
B1 B4, B5
B0 B4
Enlargement size Original size
Inch system
B systemA system
109
4
Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the [OK] key
to return to the base screen of copy mode.
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• Overlap of sections of image
• There will be a margin around the edges of each copy.
• Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy.
• If an original size is selected first, a message will appear indicating the enlargement sizes that can be selected. If an
enlargement size is selected first, a message will appear indicating the original sizes that can be selected.
• If a combination of settings is selected for which multi-page enlargement is not possible, invalid selection beeps will sound.
• The paper size, number of sheets required for the enlarged image, and the ratio are automatically selected based on the
selected original size and enlargement size.
(The paper size and ratio cannot be selected manually.)
• If no paper trays have the size of paper that was automatically selected, "Load XXX paper" will appear. Change the paper
in one of the trays or the bypass tray to the indicated size of paper.
To cancel the multi-page enlargement setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 2.
Original Orientation
OK
OK
Cancel
Image Edit
M.Page Enlarge
Original Size
1
3
22x17
8½x14
22x34
34x44
44x68
11x17
8½x11
Enlargement Size
(Inch)
or
110
REVERSING THE IMAGE (Mirror Image)
This feature is used to make a copy that is a mirror image of the original.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 104)
3
Select Mirror Image.
(1) Touch the [Mirror Image] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the [START]
key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then touch the
[Read-End] key. (For the second original and following originals,
use the same [START] key as you did for the first original.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
To cancel a mirror image setting...
Touch the [Mirror Image] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
Original Mirror image copy
OK
Mirror
Image
B/W
Reverse
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Centering
11x17
Full Bleed
Photo Repeat
OK
Special Modes
Image Edit
(1) (2)
or
111
COPYING 11" x 17" ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE
CUT-OFF (11" x 17" Full Bleed)
This feature lets you copy an entire 11" x 17" (A3) size original at full size with no image cut-off at the edges.
12" x 18" (A3W) size paper is used, which is slightly larger than 11" x 17" (A3) size.
1
Place the original face down on the
document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 104)
3
Select 11x17 Full Bleed.
(1) Touch the [11x17 Full Bleed] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
11" x 17" (A3) size original
12" x 18" (A3) full bleed copy
OK
Mirror
Image
B/W
Reverse
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Centering
11x17
Full Bleed
Photo Repeat
Special Modes
Image Edit
OK
(1) (2)
112
4
Load 12" x 18" (A3W) paper.
• Pull out the extension tray, adjust the guides to the width of
12" x 18" (A3W) paper, and place the paper in the bypass
tray.
After loading the paper, configure the bypass tray settings as
explained in "MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS
TRAY" (page 41).
• To load 12" x 18" (A3W) paper in tray 3, tray 4, or the large
capacity tray (MX-LCX3), see "2. LOADING PAPER" in the
User's Guide. After loading 12" x 18" (A3W) paper in one of
the above trays, select the tray as explained in "PAPER
TRAYS" (page 14).
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• The original must be placed on the document glass.
• The copy ratio is 100% when this function is used. The ratio cannot be changed.
• The punch function cannot be used.
To cancel 11x17 Full Bleed...
Touch the [11x17 Full Bleed] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
or
113
COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER (Centering)
This is used to center the copied image on the paper.
This lets you place the image in the center of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the
image is reduced.
Not using the centering function Using the centering function
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 104)
3
Select Centering.
(1) Touch the [Centering] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
OK
Mirror
Image
B/W
Reverse
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Centering
Photo Repeat
Special Modes
Image Edit
11x17
Full Bleed
OK
(1) (2)
114
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and
then touch the [Read-End] key. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• The image can be reduced when using the centering function, but not enlarged.
• When the original size or the paper size is displayed as a special size, this function cannot be used.
To cancel centering...
Touch the [Centering] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
or
115
REVERSING WHITE AND BLACK IN A COPY (B/W Reverse)
This is used to reverse black and white in a copy to create a negative image. This function can only be used for black
and white copying.
Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce
toner consumption.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Image Edit] key.
☞ [Image Edit] KEY (page 104)
3
Select B/W Reverse.
(1) Touch the [B/W Reverse] key so that it is
highlighted.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
4
Press the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key. Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
When using this function, the [COLOR START] key ( ) cannot be used.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
Originals B/W Reverse copy
A3
Full Bleed
OK
Mirror
Image
B/W
Reverse
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Centering
Photo Repeat
Special Modes
Image Edit
OK
(1) (2)
116
When this function is selected, the "Original Image Type" setting for exposure adjustment automatically changes to "Text".
To cancel B/W reverse...
Touch the [B/W Reverse] key in the screen of step 3 so that it is not highlighted.
117
[Color Adjustments] KEY
When the [Color Adjustments] key is touched in the 3rd special modes menu screen, the color adjustments menu screen
opens.
Color adjustments menu screen
(1) [RGB Adjust] key
☞ ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES (RGB
Adjust) (page 118)
(2) [Sharpness] key
☞ ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE
(Sharpness) (page 119)
(3) [Suppress background] key
☞ WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN COPIES
(Suppress Background) (page 120)
(4) [Color Balance] key
☞ ADJUSTING THE COLOR (Color Balance) (page
122)
(5) [Brightness] key
☞ ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY
(Brightness) (page 124)
(6) [Intensity] key
☞ ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY
(Intensity) (page 125)
OK
Suppress
Background
Intensity
Sharpness
BrightnessColor Balance
RGB Adjust
OK
Special Modes
Color Adjustments
Special Modes
2
2
OK
Image Edit
File
Proof Copy
Color
Adjustments
Mixed Size
Original
Stamp
Quick File
Slow Scan
Mode
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (6)
118
ADJUSTING RED/GREEN/BLUE IN COPIES (RGB Adjust)
This feature is used to strengthen or weaken any one of the three color components R (red), G (green), or B (blue).
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Color Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [RGB Adjust] key.
☞ [Color Adjustments] KEY (page 117)
3
Adjust red, green, or blue.
(1) Touch the key of the color that you wish to
adjust: [R (Red)], [G (Green)], or [B (Blue)].
Only one color can be adjusted. (If you adjust one color
and then adjust another color, the adjustment of the first
color is canceled.)
(2) Adjust the selected color.
Touch the [+] key to strengthen the selected color, or
touch the [-] key to weaken the color.
(3) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ).
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
To cancel an RGB adjust setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
R(Red)+
G(Green)+
B(Blue)+
OK
OK
Cancel
Color Adjustments
RGB Adjust
Only one color can be adjusted.
R(Red) G(Green)
B(Blue)
21
0-1-2
(1) (3)(2)
119
ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (Sharpness)
This is used to sharpen an image or make it softer.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Color Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Sharpness] key.
☞ [Color Adjustments] KEY (page 117)
3
Adjust the image.
(1) Touch the [Soft] key or the [Sharp] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ).
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
To cancel the sharpness setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
Soft
Sharp
OK
OK
Cancel
Color Adjustments
Sharpness
SharpSoft
(1) (2)
120
WHITENING FAINT COLORS IN COPIES (Suppress
Background)
This feature is used to suppress light background areas.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Color Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Suppress Background] key.
☞ [Color Adjustments] KEY (page 117)
3
Select the suppress background setting.
(1) Adjust the background suppression level.
Touch the [+] key to suppress only faint background.
Touch the [-] key to suppress faint to dark background.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
Light areas are
suppressed.
Level [+]
Level [-]
The lightness level at which
suppression takes place
can be adjusted.
OK
OK
Cancel
Color Adjustments
Suppress Background
Light areas of the original may be suppressed as background.
31
(1) (2)
121
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ).
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
To cancel a suppress background setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
122
ADJUSTING THE COLOR (Color Balance)
The color, tone, and density of color copies can be adjusted.
Each of the colors yellow, cyan, magenta, and black are
divided into 8 gradations from light to dark, and the
average density of each gradation can be adjusted,
or all eight gradations can be adjusted at once.
OK
OK
Cancel
Color Adjustments
Color Balance
Y
M
C
Bk
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
All
12345678
Dark
Light
C Cyan+ M Magenta+
Y Yellow+ B Black+
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Color Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Color Balance] key.
☞ [Color Adjustments] KEY (page 117)
123
3
Adjust the color balance.
Examples of color balance adjustment
(1) Select the color to be adjusted.
Select [Y] (yellow), [M] (magenta), [C] (cyan), or [Bk] (black).
If only the rectangular area around the letter in a key is
highlighted, the settings have been changed from the
factory default settings.
(2) Select the gradation to be adjusted.
Select the gradation with the keys.
Touch the keys to move the highlighting to one of
gradations "1" to "8" or "All".
To adjust all eight gradations at once, move the
highlighting to "All".
(3) Adjust the density.
To darken the density of the selected gradation, touch the
[+] key. To lighten the density, touch the [-] key. Each time
one of the keys is touched, the indicator frame moves up
or down one level.
(4)
To adjust other colors, repeat steps (1) to (3).
(5) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
To return the color balance values to the default settings...
Touch the key. The values of all eight gradations will return to the default color balance values.
The default color balance values are set in "Initial Color Balance Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ).
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
To cancel a color balance setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Initial Color Balance Setting
This is used to set the default values to which the color balance values return when the key is pressed.
Y
M
C
Bk
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OK
OK
Cancel
Color Adjustments
Color Balance
All
(1) (2), (3) (4)
The settings of all gradations
are moved toward +
The settings of all gradations
are moved toward -
124
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF A COPY (Brightness)
The brightness of color images can be adjusted.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Color Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Brightness] key.
☞ [Color Adjustments] KEY (page 117)
3
Adjust the brightness.
(1) Adjust the brightness.
Touch the [+] key to make the image brighter, or the [-]
key to make the image darker.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ).
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
To cancel a brightness setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
Darker Original Brighter
OK
OK
Cancel
Color Adjustments
Brightness
0-2 2
(1) (2)
125
ADJUSTING THE INTENSITY OF A COPY (Intensity)
This is used to adjust the intensity (saturation) of color images.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Color Adjustments] key.
(4) Touch the [Intensity] key.
☞ [Color Adjustments] KEY (page 117)
3
Adjust the intensity.
(1) Adjust the intensity setting.
Touch the [+] key to strengthen the intensity, or the [-] key
to weaken the intensity.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the special modes screen. Touch the
[OK] key to return to the base screen of copy mode.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ).
Copying will begin.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple original
pages, copying will take place as you scan each original. If you
have selected sort mode, change originals and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ). Repeat until all pages have
been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
This function cannot be used in combination with "Color Tone Enhancement" in the copy exposure settings.
To cancel an intensity setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
Weakening the
intensity
Original Strengthening
the intensity
OK
OK
Cancel
Color Adjustments
Intensity
0-2 2
(1) (2)
126
CHECKING COPIES BEFORE PRINTING
(Proof Copy)
This feature prints only one set of copies, regardless of how many sets have been specified. After the first set is checked
for errors, the remaining sets can be printed. Previously it was necessary to re-scan the original each time changes to
settings were required. However, this feature makes it possible to change settings for the scanned original without
scanning it again, allowing you perform copying more efficiently.
1
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2
Select copy settings in the base screen.
3
Select Proof Copy.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 44)
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the
screens.
(3) Touch the [Proof Copy] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
If OK
After adjustments are
made, 1 set is printed
for you to check
The remaining 4 sets
are printed
Adjust the
settings
If OK
1 set of copies is
printed for you to
check
"Proof Copy" is
selected and 5 sets of
copies are executed
The remaining 4
sets are printed
Special Modes
2
2
OK
Image Edit
File
Proof Copy
Color
Adjustments
Slow Scan
Mode
Mixed Size
Original
Stamp
Quick File
(4)(2)(3)
127
4
Set the number of copies (number of
sets) with the numeric keys.
If you will copy multiple originals using the document glass,
switch to sort mode after this step.
☞ Sort mode (page 38)
Up to 999 copies (sets) can be set.
If an incorrect number of copies is set...
Press the [CLEAR] key ( ) and then enter the correct number.
5
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
One set of copies is printed.
If you are using the document glass to copy multiple originals,
change originals and press the [START] key. Repeat until all
pages have been scanned and then touch the [Read-End] key.
One set of copies will be printed. (For the second original and
following originals, use the same [START] key as you did for
the first original.
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
6
Check the printed set of copies. If the
copies are acceptable, touch the [End]
key. If you need to change the settings,
touch the [Change] key.
When the [End] key is touched, the remaining sets are printed.
If you touched the [Change] key, go to the next step.
To cancel copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
7
Plain
8½x11
Special Modes
2-Sided Copy
or
EndChange
Press [End] to continue.
To make a proof copy again, press
[Start].
128
7
Change the settings.
(1) Touch the key of the setting that you want
to change.
The setting screen of the touched key opens. Change the
settings and touch the [OK] key.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
• To change the number of sets printed, set the desired number of copies (sets) with the numeric keys. After changing
the number of sets, touch the [End] key in the touch panel (not the [START] key) to print the sets.
• Special modes that can be adjusted are Margin Shift, Pamphlet Copy, Tandem Copy, Covers/Inserts, Transparency
Inserts, Multi-Shot, and Stamp.
• For Pamphlet Copy, Covers/Inserts, and Multi Shot, only changes to the settings of the functions can be made; the
functions cannot be newly added or deleted.
• For Transparency Inserts, settings can be changed and the function can be newly added; however, when the
function has been previously selected, it cannot be canceled.
8
Press the [COLOR START] key ( ) or
the [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
One set of copies is printed again using the adjusted settings.
Check the results. If further adjustments are needed, repeat
steps 6 through 8. (Repeating Proof Copy does not decrease
the remaining number of sets to be printed.)
9
Touch the [End] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode and the
remaining sets will be printed.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
If Proof Copy is executed while the machine is printing another job, the other job is interrupted and the proof copies are
printed. The previous job will resume after the proof copies are printed.
If the [End] key is touched to execute printing of the remaining sets while the machine is printing another job, the remaining
sets will be printed after all previously reserved jobs are completed.
Paper Select 2-Sided CopyColor Mode
Special ModesOutput
OK
Proof Copy
or
EndChange
Press [End] to continue.
To make a proof copy again, press
[Start].
129
COPYING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES
(Mixed Size Original)
Even when 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) originals are mixed in with 11" x 17" (A3) originals, all originals can be copied at once. When
scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original and uses paper appropriate for that size.
There are two settings for mixed size originals.
Same Width
Use this setting for originals that are different sizes but have sides that are the same length. The originals
are inserted in the document feeder tray with the sides that are the same length aligned together on the left.
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 11" • 8-1/2" x 14" and 8-1/2" x 11"R • 8-1/2" x 14" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
• 8-1/2" x 13" and 8-1/2" x 11"R • 8-1/2" x 13" and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" • 8-1/2" x 11"R and 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
• A3 and A4 • B4 and B5 • A4R and A5
Different Width
Use this setting when the originals are different sizes and do not have sides that are the same length. This
setting can only be used for the following combinations of sizes:
• 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 14" • 11" x 17" and 8-1/2" x 13" • 11" x 17" and 5-1/2 x 8-1/2"
• A3 and B4 • A3 and B5 • B4 and A4 • A4 and B5 • B4 and A4R • B4 and A5
• B5 and A4R • B5 and A5
1
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
● When "Same Width" is used
Place the originals with the sides that are the same length
aligned on the left.
● When "Different Width" is used
Place the originals with the corners aligned in the far left corner
of the document feeder tray.
11" x 17"
8-1/2" x 14"
11" x 17"
8-1/2" x 14"
Originals
Copies
11" x 17" (A3)
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
Place with the sides that are the same
length aligned on the left.
8-1/2" x 14"
(B4)
11" x 17" (A3)
8-1/2" x 14"
(B4)
Place the originals
aligned to the far left
corner.
130
2
Select the special modes.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the screens.
(3) Touch the [Mixed Size Original] key.
☞ Special modes menu (2nd screen) (page 45)
3
Select Mixed Size Original settings.
(1) Touch the [Same Width] key or the
[Different Width] key as appropriate for the
originals.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
4
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
• When [Different Width] is selected, the "1-Sided to 2-Sided" mode of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.
• When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used.
• The mixed size original function cannot be used to copy originals that are the same size but are placed in different
orientations (8-1/2" x 11" and 8-1/2" x 11"R (A4 and A4R), etc.).
To cancel the mixed size original setting...
Touch the [Cancel] key in the screen of step 3.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
The original feeding mode can be set to always scan mixed size originals.
OKCancel
Same Width
Different
Width
OK
Special Modes
Mixed Size Original
Place the same width
originals.
(1) (2)
or
131
COPYING THIN ORIGINALS (Slow Scan
Mode)
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent
thin originals from misfeeding.
1
Insert the originals face up in the
document feeder tray.
Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray.
Multiple originals can be placed in the document feeder tray.
The stack of originals must not be higher than the indicator line
on the tray.
If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
2
Select Slow Scan Mode.
(1) Touch the [Special Modes] key.
☞ SPECIAL MODES (page 44)
(2) Touch the keys to switch through the
screens.
(3) Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key so that it is
highlighted.
(4) Touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
3
Press the [COLOR START] key ( )
or the [BLACK & WHITE START] key
().
Copying will begin.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
D
C
B
A
D
C
B
A
Indicator
line
Special Modes
2
2
OK
Image Edit
File
Proof Copy
Color
Adjustments
Slow Scan
Mode
Mixed Size
Original
Stamp
Quick File
(4)(2)(3)
or
132
The "2-Sided to 2-Sided" and "2-Sided to 1-Sided" modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used.
To cancel the slow scan mode setting...
Touch the [Slow Scan Mode] key in the screen of step 2 so that it is not highlighted.
System Settings (Administrator): Original Feeding Mode
This is used to have scanning always take place in slow scan mode.
133
This chapter explains convenient copy functions such as interrupting a copy run, changing the order of reserved copy
jobs, and storing copy settings in a program.
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN
(Interrupt copy)
When you need to make an urgent copy and the machine is busy with a long copy run or other job, use interrupt copy.
Interrupt copy temporarily stops the job in progress and lets you perform the interrupt copy job first.
4
CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS
1
Touch the [Interrupt] key.
The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being
scanned.
2
Place the original.
Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face
down on the document glass.
3
Select copy settings and press the
[COLOR START] key ( ) or the
[BLACK & WHITE START] key ( ).
The interrupt copy job begins.
4
When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job resumes.
To cancel scanning and copying...
Press the [STOP] key ( ).
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
Copies in progress from tray 2.
Ready to scan for next copy job.
7
Interrupt
or
134
• If user authentication is enabled, the login screen will appear when the [Interrupt] key is pressed. Enter your user name
and password to log in. The number of copies made will be added to the count of the user that logged in.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Reserve] key may appear instead of the [Interrupt] key. Unlike
interrupt copy, reserve copy does not temporarily stop the job in progress. Instead, the reserve copy job begins when the
job in progress is finished.
• Interrupt copy cannot be used in combination with the following special modes:
Job Build, Tandem Copy, Book Copy, Card Shot, Multi-Page Enlargement, Proof Copy
• If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy job, 2-sided copying, sort copying, and staple sort copying cannot be
selected. If any of these functions are necessary, use the automatic document feeder.
135
JOB STATUS SCREEN
The job status screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed. The job status
screen shows the status of jobs by mode. When the [JOB STATUS] key is pressed, the job status screen of the mode
that was being used before the key was pressed appears.
Example: Pressing the key in copy mode
The job status display is in the lower left corner of the touch panel. The job status display can be touched to display the job
status screen.
Detail
Spool
Complete
Stop/Delete
Copy2
3
4
002 / 000
Waiting
Computer01
002 / 000
Waiting
0312345678 001 / 000
Waiting
Print Job
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
Priority
1
1
Job Queue
Copy1 020 / 001 Copying
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Copying
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
136
JOB QUEUE SCREEN AND COMPLETED JOB SCREEN
The job status screen consists of the job queue screen that shows copy and print jobs waiting to be printed and the job
currently in progress, the completed job screen that shows jobs that have been completed, and the spool screen that
shows print jobs that have been spooled and encrypted PDF jobs that are waiting for a password to be entered. This
section explains the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen, which are related to copy mode. The job status
screen switches between the job queue screen and the completed jobs screen each time the job status screen selector
key is touched.
(1) Job list (job queue screen)
Jobs waiting to be printed appear in the job queue as
keys. The jobs are printed in order from the top of the
queue. Each job key shows information on the job and
the current status of the job.
(2) Mode select tabs
Use these tabs to select the mode that is shown in the
job status screen.
The status of copy jobs can be checked by touching the
[Print Job] tab.
(3) Job status screen selector key
Touch this key to switch through the job queue screen,
the completed jobs screen, and the spool screen.
(4) [Detail] key (job queue screen)
Touch this key to display detailed information on a job.
(5) [Priority] key
Touch this key to give priority to a selected job.
(6) [Stop/Delete] key
Touch this key to stop or delete a selected job.
(7) Job list (completed jobs screen)
This shows up to 99 completed jobs. The result (status)
of each completed job is shown. Copy jobs that used the
document filing function are indicated as keys.
(8) [Detail] key (completed jobs screen)
When a job is shown as a key in the job list, the [Detail]
key can be touched to show detailed information on the
job.
(9) [Call] key
Touch this key to retrieve and use a copy job stored
using the document filing function.
Spool
Computer02 11:00 04/01 001/001 OK
Computer03 10:33 04/01 010/010 OK
Computer04 10:31 04/01 013/013 OK
Copy 10:03 04/01 001/001 OK
Computer05 10:01 04/01 003/003 OK
Copy 10:00 04/01 010/010 OK
file-01 10:30 04/01 010/010 OK
Copy 10:13 04/01 001/001 OK
Print Job
Jobs Completed Set Time Sets Status
Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
Detail
Call
1
2
Job Queue
Complete
4
5
1
2
3
6
7
8
Detail
Spool
Complete
Stop/Delete
Copy
2
3
4
002 / 000
Waiting
Computer01 002 / 000
Waiting
0312345678 001 / 000
Waiting
Print Job
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
Priority
1
1
Job Queue
Copy
1
020 / 001
Copying
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
137
Job key display
Each job key shows the position of the job in the job queue and the current status of the job.
(1) Indicates the number (position) of the job in the job
queue.
When the job currently being printed is finished, the job
moves up one position in the job queue.
This number does not appear in keys in the completed
jobs screen.
(2) Mode icon
The icon appears when the job is a copy job. In the
completed jobs screen, a color bar appears next to the
icon to indicate whether the job was executed in color or
black & white. (However, the color bar icon does not
appear in the key of a job stored using the document
filing function.)
(3) Job name
"Copy" appears for a copy job.
When user authentication is enabled, the name of the
user that performed the job appears.
(4) Number of copies (sets) entered
This shows the number of copies (sets) specified.
(5) Number of completed copies
This shows the number of copies (sets) completed. "000"
appears while the job is waiting in the job queue.
(6) Status
Shows the job status.
CANCELING A JOB THAT IS WAITING IN THE QUEUE
To cancel a job that is waiting in the queue, touch the job key and then the [Stop/Delete] key. The following screen will
appear. Touch the [Yes] key.
The job will be deleted from the queue.
Copy2 002/000 Waiting
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
(5) (6)
Message Status
"Copying" Copying is in progress.
"Waiting" The job is waiting to be executed.
"Toner
Empty"
The toner cartridge is out of toner.
Replace the toner cartridge with a
new cartridge.
"Paper
Empty"
The paper used for the job has run
out. Add paper or change to a
different paper tray.
"Limit" The copy page limit has been
exceeded. Check with the
administrator of the machine.
"Error" An error occurred while the job was
being executed. Clear the error
condition.
If the job in progress is a copy job, you can also press the [STOP] key ( ) to display the above screen.
To cancel, touch the [Yes] key.
Yes
No
Delete the job?
Copy
138
GIVING PRIORITY TO A JOB IN THE QUEUE
If a copy job is begun when there are already multiple jobs in the queue, the copy job will appear at the end of the queue.
However, if you have an urgent copy job, you can give priority to the job and have it executed first.
Touch the key of the urgent job and then touch the [Priority] key. The job will move to the top of the queue and copying
will begin.
The job that was in progress will be moved to the second position in the queue and will wait. The job will resume when
the priority job is finished.
CHECKING INFORMATION ON A COPY JOB WAITING
IN THE QUEUE
Detailed information can be displayed on a copy job waiting in the queue.
Touch the key of the job that you wish to check and then touch the [Detail] key. The job information screen will appear.
[Paper Select] key
If a copy job is stopped because the paper ran out, the [Paper Select] key can be pressed to change to a different paper
tray.
When the [Paper Select] key is pressed, the paper tray selection screen appears.
☞ PAPER TRAYS (page 14)
Touch the key of the tray that has the size of paper that you wish to use and then touch the [OK] key. The stopped copy
job will resume.
3
4
Computer02 002 / 000
Waiting
1
Computer01 020 / 001
Printing
0312345678 001 / 000
Waiting
Internet Fax
1
1
2
002 / 001
Waiting
3
4
Computer02 002 / 000 Waiting
2
Computer01 020 / 001 Waiting
0312345678 001 / 000
Waiting
Internet Fax
1
1
1
002 / 001 Copying
Detail
Spool
Complete
Stop/Delete
Copy
Print Job
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
Scan to Fax Job
Priority
Job Queue
Detail
Spool
Complete
Stop/Delete
Copy
Print Job
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
Scan to Fax Job
Priority
Job Queue
(1)
(2)
Copy 002 / 000
Waiting
Computer01 002 / 000
Waiting
0312345678 001 / 000
Waiting
Detail
Spool
Complete
Stop/Delete
Print Job
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
Scan to Fax Job
Priority
Job Queue
Copy
Internet Fax
1
1
020 / 001
Copying
OK
Detail
Copy 020 / 000 Waiting
Color / B/W: Full Color
2-Sided
Copy:
Exposure: 1 5
3
Output:
Paper:
8½x11
Plain
Special
Modes:
Copy Ratio: X100% Y100%
Paper Select
2
3
4
1
(1) (2)
139
STORING COPY OPERATIONS (Job Programs)
A job program is a group of copy settings stored together. When copy settings are stored in a job program, the settings
can be retrieved and used for a copy job by means of a simple operation.
For example, suppose 11" x 17" (A3) size CAD drawings are copied once a month for archive purposes using the
following settings:
(1) The 11" x 17" (A3) size CAD drawings are
reduced to 8-1/2" x 11"(A4) size.
(2) The drawings have fine lines that do not
show clearly, and thus a dark exposure
setting (level 4) is used.
(3) To reduce paper use by half, 2-sided
copying is used.
(4) Margin shift is used so that holes can be
punched for filing.
When a job program is not stored When a job program is stored
Set 11" x 17" (A3) to 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) reduction
Change the exposure setting
Select 2-sided copying
Select margin shift
Select punch hole settings
Press the [START] key.
Press the [#/P] key ( ).
Touch the stored program key.
Press the [START] key.
Considerable time is required to copy the drawings each
month because the above settings must be selected.
In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting
the settings, so some copies must be redone.
The settings are stored in a job program, so they can be
selected by the touch of a key. This is simple and takes no time.
In addition, the settings are all stored so there are no chances
for mistakes, and thus no need to redo copies due to setting
mistakes.
• Up to 48 job programs can be stored. The job programs are retained even if an interruption occurs in the power supply.
• Job programs can also be stored in the Web pages. Click [Job program] and then [Copy] in the Web page menu to store a
job program.
11" x 17" (A3) size CAD drawings
Copies
or
Exit
Job Programs
Press program number.
1 2 3
Recall Store/Delete
1
4
4
5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
or
140
STORING (EDITING/DELETING) A JOB PROGRAM
The procedures for storing copy settings in a job program and deleting a job program are explained below.
1
Press the [#/P] key ( ).
2
Touch the [Store/Delete] tab.
3
Touch a numeric key.
Numeric keys in which job programs are already stored are
highlighted.
• To store a job program, touch a numeric key that is not
highlighted.
• To edit or delete a job program, touch the key in which the
job program is stored (highlighted key).
Editing or deleting a job program...
When a highlighted numeric key is touched, the following screen appears.
The [Store] key can be touched to delete the stored settings and store new settings. Go to the next step.
When the [Delete] key is touched, the stored settings are deleted. After the deletion is finished, touch the [Exit] key to
return to the base screen.
When "Disabling Deletion of Job Programs" is enabled in the system settings, a stored job program cannot be edited
or deleted.
LOGOUT
1 2 3
4
1
4
5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12
Exit
Job Programs
Press program number.
Recall Store/Delete
1 2 3
Recall Store/Delete
4
7
10 11 12
8 9
5 6
1
4
Exit
Job Programs
Press program number.
StoreDeleteCancel
A
job program has been already stored
in this location.
141
4
Select the copy settings that you wish to
store in the job program and touch the
[OK] key.
To assign a name to the program, touch the [Program Name]
key. A text entry screen will appear.
Up to 10 characters can be entered for the name.
To enter text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" in the User's Guide.
When you have finished, touch the [OK] key.
You will return to the base screen with the stored information
reflected in the screen.
The number of copies cannot be stored.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
Program Name
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
To store, make selections and press
[OK], to delete, press [Cancel].
Cancel OK
142
APPENDIX
Examples of covers and inserts
The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the following
pages.
Covers
• 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals
• 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
Inserts
• 1-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals
• 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals
• 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals
Symbols used for covers and inserts
The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand.
The numbers that appear indicate what original a copy corresponds to, and will vary depending on the settings.
Type
Symbol Meaning
Icon
appearing
in display
Type
Symbol Meaning
Icon
appearing
in display
Front cover
Front cover when not
copied on.
Inserts
Insert when not copied on.
Front cover when one side
is copied on.
Insert when one side is
copied on.
Front cover when a 2-sided
original is copied on one
side of the cover. (One
page is not copied.)
Insert when a 2-sided
original is copied on one
side of the insert. (One
page is not copied.)
Front cover when both
sides are copied on.
Insert when both sides are
copied on.
Back cover
Back cover when not
copied on.
Other symbols
1-sided original or output
page of regular 1-sided
copying.
Back cover when a 1-sided
original is copied on one
side of the back cover.
2-sided original or output
page of regular 2-sided
copying.
Back cover when a 2-sided
original is copied on one
side of the back cover.
(One page is not copied.)
1-sided original or output
page of regular 1-sided
copying.
Back cover when both
sides are copied on.
Output page of 2-sided
copying when only 1 side is
copied on due to lack of
originals.
1
3
1
3
1
2
3
4
1
6
1
2
6
6
6
5 5
143
Covers (1-sided copying of 1-sided originals)
1-sided copies are made of the following 1-sided originals.
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page
Cover copying condition
Resulting copies
Front cover Back cover
No copying No copying
1-sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
1-sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3 4 5 6
1
2 3 4 5
6
1
2 3 4
6
5
1
2 3 4 5
6
1
2 3 4
6
5
1
2
3 4 5
6
1
2
3 4
6
5
144
Covers (2-sided copying of 1-sided originals)
2-sided copies are made of the following 1-sided originals.
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page
Cover copying condition
Resulting copies
Front cover Back cover
No copying No copying
1-sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
1-sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
6
5
1 2
3
4
5
6
1 2
3
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
6
5
145
Covers (1-sided copying of 2-sided originals)
1-sided copies are made of the following 2-sided originals.
1st page 2nd page 3rd page
Cover copying condition
Resulting copies
Front cover Back cover
No copying No copying
1-sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
1-sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3 4 5 6
1
2 3 4 5
6
1
2 3 4
6
5
1
2 3 4 5
6
1
2 3 4
6
5
1
2
3 4 5
6
1
2
3 4
6
5
146
Covers (2-sided copying of 2-sided originals)
2-sided copies are made of the following 2-sided originals.
1st page 2nd page 3rd page
Cover copying condition
Resulting copies
Front cover Back cover
No copying No copying
1-sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
No copying
No copying
1-sided
copying
No copying
2-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
6
1
2
3
4
6
5
1
3
4
6
1
3
4
6
5
1
2
3
4
6
1
2
3
4
6
5
147
Inserts (copying of 1-sided originals)
1-sided and 2-sided copying of the following 1-sided originals. The example of adding an insert at the 3rd sheet is
shown. (when "Insertion Page" is set to "3" in the insertion settings of the insert settings in the special modes)
Inserts (copying of 2-sided originals)
1-sided and 2-sided copying of the following 2-sided originals. The example of adding an insert at the 3rd sheet is
shown. (when "Insertion Page" is set to "3" in the insertion settings of the insert settings in the special modes)
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page 6th page
Insert
copying
condition
Resulting copies (1-sided copying)
Resulting copies
(2-sided copying)
No copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1st page 2nd page 3rd page
Insert
copying
condition
Resulting copies (1-sided copying)
Resulting copies
(2-sided copying)
No copying
1-sided
copying
2-sided
copying
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4 5 6
1
2
3 4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4 5 6
1
2
3 5
6
1
2
3
4
5 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
MX7000-US-CPY-Z2
Copier Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
• MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE . . . 3
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
• EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
• INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
• AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
• SIDE AND BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
• OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
TOUCH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
• SYSTEM BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PRINT/SEND STATUS (JOB STATUS). . . . . . . . . . . 15
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF . . . . . . . . . . . 16
• ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
• [POWER SAVE] KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
USER AUTHENTICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
• AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER. . . . . . . 18
• AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME /
PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
HOME SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2
LOADING PAPER
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . 24
• NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS . . . . . . . . 24
• THE MEANING OF "R" IN PAPER SIZES . . . . . . 24
• USEABLE PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 AND TRAY 2. . . . . . 27
• LOADING PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
• CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 3 AND TRAY 4. . . . . . 30
• LOADING PAPER AND CHANGING THE
PAPER SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
• LOADING PAPER (MX-LCX2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
• LOADING PAPER (MX-LCX3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
• CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE (MX-LCX3). . . . . 36
LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY . . . . . . . . 38
• IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE
BYPASS TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3
ORIGINALS
PLACING THE ORIGINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
• PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC
DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
• PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE
DOCUMENT GLASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
FINISHER / SADDLE STITCH FINISHER . . . . . . . . . 49
• PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
• SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
• FINISHER / SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
PUNCH MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
INSERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
• PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
• LOADING PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
• MANUALLY OPERATING THE INSERTER. . . . . 60
5
MAINTENANCE
REGULAR MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
• CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER . . . . . . . . . . 62
• CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE
PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
• CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER . . . . . 66
• CLEANING THE LASER UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES. . . . . . . . . 71
REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX. . . . . . . . . . 74
6
ENTERING TEXT
FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
• ENTERING TEXT FROM AN EXTERNAL
KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Please note
• Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the manual, please
contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem
is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during the use of the product or its
options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for any damage that occurs due
to use of the product.
Warning
• Reproduction, adaptation or translation of the contents of the manual without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under copyright laws.
• All information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Illustrations and the operation panel and touch panel shown in this manual
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard equipment.
The explanations in this manual assume that a saddle stitch finisher, punch module, and inserter are installed on the machine.
For some functions and procedures, the explanations assume that devices other than the above are installed.
MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE MACHINE
Printed manuals and manuals stored in PDF format on the machine's hard drive are provided with the machine. When
using the machine, read the appropriate manual for the feature you are using.
Printed manuals
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine
due to product improvements and modifications.
Manual name Contents
Safety Guide
This manual contains instructions for using the machine safely and lists the specifications of the machine
and its peripheral devices.
Software Setup
Guide
This manual explains how to install the software and configure settings to use the machine as a printer
or scanner.
Quick Start Guide
This manual provides easy-to-understand explanations of all the functions of the machine in a single
volume.
Detailed explanations of each of the functions can be found in the manuals in PDF format.
Troubleshooting
This manual explains how to remove paper misfeeds and provides answers to frequently asked
questions regarding the operation of the machine in each mode. Refer to this manual when you have
difficulty using the machine.
4
Operation manuals in PDF format
The manuals in PDF format provide detailed explanations of the procedures for using the machine in each mode. To
view the PDF manuals, download them from the hard drive in the machine. The procedure for downloading the manuals
is explained in "How to download the manuals in PDF format" in the Quick Start Guide.
Icons used in the manuals
The icons in the manuals indicate the following types of information:
Manual name Contents
User's Guide
(This manual)
This manual provides information, such as basic operation procedures, how to load paper, and machine
maintenance.
Copier Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the copy function.
Printer Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the print function.
Facsimile Guide This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the fax function.
Scanner Guide
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the scanner function and the
Internet fax function.
Document Filing
Guide
This manual provides detailed explanations of the procedures for using the document filing function. The
document filing function allows you to save the document data of a copy or fax job, or the data of a print
job, as a file on the machine's hard drive. The file can be called up as needed.
System Settings
Guide
This manual explains the "System Settings", which are used to configure a variety of parameters to suit
the aims and the needs of your workplace. Current settings can be displayed or printed out from the
"System Settings".
This alerts you to a situation where
there is a risk of machine damage or
failure.
This indicates the name of a system setting and provides a brief
explanation of the setting.
For detailed information on each system setting, see the System
Settings Guide.
When "System Settings:" appears:
A general setting is explained.
When "System Settings (Administrator):" appears:
A setting that can only be configured by an administrator is
explained.
This provides a supplemental
explanation of a function or procedure.
This explains how to cancel or correct
an operation.
Warning
This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human death or injury.
Caution
This alerts you to a situation where there is a risk of human injury or property damage.
5
This chapter provides basic information about the machine. Please read this chapter before using the machine.
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
EXTERIOR
(1) Finisher / saddle stitch finisher*
This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch
finisher can automatically staple output at the center line
and fold the pages to create a pamphlet.
☞ FINISHER / SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (page 49)
(2) Punch module*
This is used to punch holes in output.
☞ PUNCH MODULE (page 57)
(3) Inserter*
Paper loaded in the inserter can be inserted into output
from the machine as covers and inserts.
☞ INSERTER (page 58)
(4) Automatic document feeder
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both
sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 44)
(5) Front cover (upper)
Open this to replace a toner cartridge or clear a paper
misfeed from the paper pass unit.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page 71)
(6) Front cover (lower)
Open this to switch the main power on and off.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 16)
☞ 5. MAINTENANCE (page 62)
(7) Operation panel
This is used to select functions and enter the number of
copies.
☞ OPERATION PANEL (page 10)
(8) Right Tray
Output can be delivered to this tray.
(9) Output tray (center tray)
Output is delivered to this tray.
* Peripheral device.
1
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
(1) (2) (3)
(4) (5) (7) (8) (9)(6)
When a finisher /
saddle stitch finisher
is not installed
When a finisher is
installed
6
(10) Tray 1 (left side)
This holds paper. Up to 1200 sheets of paper can be
loaded.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 AND TRAY 2 (page
27)
(11) Tray 2 (right side)
This holds paper. Up to 800 sheets of paper can be
loaded.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 AND TRAY 2 (page
27)
(12) Tray 3
This holds paper. Transparency film, tab paper, and
other special media can also be loaded. Up to 500 sheets
of paper can be loaded.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 3 AND TRAY 4 (page
30)
(13) Tray 4
This holds paper. Up to 500 sheets of paper can be
loaded.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 3 AND TRAY 4 (page
30)
(14) Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray (MX-LCX2) is
installed)*
This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 paper can be loaded.
Up to 3500 sheets of paper can be loaded.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE CAPACITY
TRAY) (page 33)
(15) Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray (MX-LCX3) is
installed)*
This holds paper. 8-1/2" x 11" to 12" x 18" (B5 to A3W)
paper can be loaded. Up to 3000 sheets of paper can be
loaded.
☞ TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE CAPACITY
TRAY) (page 33)
* Peripheral device.
(10) (11)(12) (14) (15)
(13)
7
INTERIOR
(16) Paper pass unit*
This transfers output to the finisher or saddle stitch
finisher.
(17) Toner cartridges
These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out
in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that ran out must
be replaced.
☞ REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES (page 71)
(18) Fusing unit
Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto
the paper.
(19) Transfer belt
During full color printing, the toner images of each of the
four colors on each of the photoconductive drums are
combined together on the transfer belt. During black and
white printing, only the black toner image is transferred
onto the transfer belt.
(20) Right side cover
Open this cover to operate the fusing unit pressure
adjusting lever and to remove a misfeed.
☞ Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers (page 43)
(21) Paper reversing section cover
This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open
this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
(22) Bypass tray
Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be
sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
☞ LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY (page 38)
(23) Main power switch
This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this
switch in the "on" position.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 16)
(24) Waste toner box
This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
☞ REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX (page 74)
(25) Waste toner box compartment cover
Open this to remove a paper misfeed from trays 1 to 4, or
to replace the waste toner box.
(26) Right side cover release lever
To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to
open the right side cover.
* Peripheral device.
(22)(21)(19) (20)(18)(16) (17)
(25)
(26)
(24)(23)
When a finisher /
saddle stitch finisher is
not installed
Caution
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself
when removing a paper misfeed.
Do not touch or damage the transfer belt. This may
cause a defective image.
Your service technician will collect the waste toner
box.
8
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT
GLASS
(1) Document feeding area cover
Open to remove a misfed original.
(2) Original guides
These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 44)
(3) Document feeder tray
Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be
placed face up.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL (page 44)
(4) Original exit tray
Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
(5) Scanning area
Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned
here.
☞ REGULAR MAINTENANCE (page 62)
(6) Original size detector
This detects the size of an original placed on the
document glass.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT
GLASS (page 46)
(7) Document glass
Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot
be fed through the automatic document feeder.
☞ PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT
GLASS (page 46)
(1) (5) (6) (7)(2) (3) (4)
9
SIDE AND BACK
(1) USB connector (A type)
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB
memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
(2) USB connector (B type )
A computer can be connected to this connector to use
the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
(3) LAN connector
Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the
machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
(4) Service-only connector
(5) Power plug
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Caution
This connector is for use only by service technicians.
Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the
machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be
less than 118" (3 m) in length.
10
OPERATION PANEL
(1) Touch panel
Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected
item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
☞ TOUCH PANEL (page 12)
(2) [HOME] key
Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently
used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
☞ HOME SCREEN (page 23)
(3) [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
Press this key to display the system settings menu
screen. The system settings are used to configure paper
tray settings, store addresses for transmission
operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine
easier to use.
☞ System Settings Guide
(4) Numeric keys
These are used to enter the number of copies, fax
numbers, and other numerical values.
(5) [CLEAR] key ( )
Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
(6) PRINT mode indicators
• READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights
steadily while printing is taking place.
(7) IMAGE SEND mode indicators
• LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax
or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of
an image in scan mode.
• DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot
be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has
not been sent.
(8) [JOB STATUS] key
Press this key to display the job status screen. The job
status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
☞ PRINT/SEND STATUS (JOB STATUS) (page 15)
LOGOUT
LINE
PRINT
IMAGE SEND
DATA
DATA
READY
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
HOME
JOB STATUS
(4) (5)(2) (3)(1)
(6) (7) (8)
11
(9) [LOGOUT] key ( )
Press this key to log out after you have logged in and
used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial
line.
☞ USER AUTHENTICATION (page 18)
(10) [#/P] key ( )
When using the copy function, press this key to use a job
program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
(11) [CLEAR ALL] key ( )
Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that
have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.
(12) [STOP] key ( )
Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an
original.
(13) [BLACK & WHITE START] key ( )
Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and
white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
(14) [COLOR START] key ( )
Press this key to copy or scan an original in color.
This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax.
(15) [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator
Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off
mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine
is in auto power shut-off mode.
☞ [POWER SAVE] KEY (page 17)
(16) [POWER] key ( )
Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 16)
(17) Main power indicator
This lights up when the machine's main power switch is
in the "on" position.
☞ TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF (page 16)
LOGOUT
LINE
PRINT
IMAGE SEND
DATA
DATA
READY
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
HOME
JOB STATUS
(11) (13)(12) (14)(9) (10) (15) (16) (17)
12
TOUCH PANEL
The touch panel (screen) shown in this manual is a descriptive image. The actual screen is slightly different.
Using the touch panel
Example 1
(1) Mode select keys
Use these keys to switch between copy, image send, and document filing modes.
(2) Settings for each function are easily selected and canceled by touching the keys on the screen with your finger.
When an item is selected, a beep will sound and the item will be highlighted to confirm the selection.
(3) Keys that are grayed out cannot be selected.
Example 2
(1) If the initial state of a key in a screen is highlighted,
the key is selected. To change the selection, touch
one of the other keys to highlight that key.
(2) The keys can be used to increase or
decrease a value. To make a value change quickly,
keep your finger on the key.
(3) Touch this key to cancel a setting.
(4) Touch the [OK] key to enter and save a setting.
Example 3
(1) Some items in the special modes screen are selected
by simply touching the key of the item.
To cancel a selected item, touch the highlighted key
once again so that it is no longer highlighted.
(2) When settings extend over multiple screens, touch
the key or the key to switch through the
screens.
If you touch a key that cannot be selected, a double beep will sound. However, in a system settings screen, a beep will not
sound if you touch a key that cannot be selected.
Job status screen.
Detail
Spool
Complete
Stop/Delete
Copy2
3
4
002 / 000
Waiting
Computer01 002 / 000
Waiting
0312345678 001 / 000
Waiting
Print Job
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
Priority
1
1
Job Queue
Copy1 020 / 001 Copying
IMAGE SEND
DOCUMENT
FILING
COPY
(3)
(1)
(2)
Beep
Tone
Special Modes
OK
1/2
Margin Shift
Right Left Down Side 1
(0~1)
inch
1/2
Side 2
(0~1)
inch
OKCancel
(3) (4)(2)(1)
Special Modes
1
2
Card Shot
Multi Shot
OK
Dual Page
Copy
Tandem
Copy
Tab Copy
Transparency
Inserts
Erase
Job
Build
Book Copy
Covers/Inserts
Margin Shift
Pamphlet Copy
(1) (2)
13
Example 4
When at least one special mode is selected, the
key appears in the base screen.
The key can be touched to display a list of the
selected special modes.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
OK
1
1
Function Review
Margin Shift
Erase
Shift:Right
Front:1/2inch/Back:1/2inch
Edge:1/2inch
Center:1/2inch
Covers/Inserts
Front:2-Sided/Back:Insert
Insertion A:10 Page/B:10 Page
The above explanations do not apply to the system settings. For information on the screens and procedures for using the
system settings, see the System Settings Guide.
System Settings (Administrator): Keys Touch Sound
This is used to adjust the volume of the beep that sounds when keys are touched. The key touch sound can also be turned
off.
14
SYSTEM BAR
The system bar appears at the bottom of the touch panel.
The items that appear in the system bar are explained below.
(1) Job status display
The first four jobs in progress or reserved are indicated
by icons. The icons are as follows.
The status of the first job is indicated as shown in (A).
The color appearing in the job status display depends on
the job status as indicated in the table below.
The job status display can be touched to show the job
status screen.
(2) USB device display
This appears when a USB memory or other USB device
is connected to the machine.
(3) Brightness adjustment key
Touch this key to adjust the brightness of the touch
panel.
When touched, the following screen appears next to the
key.
Touch the [+] key or the [-] key to adjust the brightness.
When finished, touch the brightness adjustment key
again to close the screen.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
Printing
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
(2) (3)
(A) (1)
Print job Copy job
Scan to E-mail
job
Scan to FTP job
Scan to
Network Folder
job
Scan to
Desktop job
Fax
transmission
job
Fax reception
job
PC-Fax
transmission
job
Internet fax
transmission
job
Internet Fax
reception job
PC-I-Fax
transmission
job
Broadcast job Scan to HDD
file print job
Tandem
copy/print job
Job status
display
Machine Configuration
Green
A print, scan or other job is being
executed normally.
Yellow
The machine is warming up or on
standby, or a job is being canceled.
Red
A paper misfeed or other error
condition has occurred.
Gray The machine has no jobs.
15
PRINT/SEND STATUS (JOB STATUS)
This screen appears when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.
The screen shows lists of the jobs that are reserved and in progress, and jobs that have been completed. This screen is
used to check jobs, move a job to the top of the job queue, or delete a job.
(1) Mode select tabs
Use these tabs to select print mode, scan mode, fax
mode, or Internet fax mode.
• The [Print Job] tab shows copy, print, received fax,
received Internet fax, and self print jobs.
• The [Scan to] tab shows transmission jobs that use the
scanner function.
• The [Fax Job] tab shows transmission (and reception)
jobs that use the fax and PC-Fax functions.
•
The [Internet Fax] tab shows transmission (and reception)
jobs that use the Internet fax and PC-I-fax functions.
For more information on the job status screen in each
mode, see the manual for each mode.
(2) Job list
• This shows jobs that are reserved and in progress (job
queue), and jobs that have been completed.
When the [Print Job] tab is touched in the mode select
tabs, the job status screen selector key changes and
the "Spool" list appears.
A brief description of each job and its status appears in
the list.
•
The "Spool" screen shows spooled print jobs and
encrypted PDF jobs waiting for password entry. To move
an encrypted PDF job from the spool list to the job queue,
touch the key of the job and enter the job password.
(3) Job status screen selector key
This switches the job list display between spooled jobs,
the job queue, and completed jobs.
"Spool": This shows spooled print jobs and encrypted
PDF jobs waiting for password entry. "Spool"
appears when print jobs are displayed.
"Job Queue": This shows reserved jobs and the job in
progress.
"Complete": This shows completed jobs.
(4) "Paper Empty" display
Add paper.
When the status is "Paper Empty", the specified size of
paper for the job is not loaded in any of the trays. In this
case, the job will be held until the required size of paper
is loaded. Other jobs that are waiting will be printed (if
possible) ahead of the held job. (However, other jobs will
not be printed if the paper ran out while printing was in
progress.)
If you need to change the paper size because the
specified paper size is not available, touch the key of the
job in the job list (2) to select it, touch the [Detail] key
described in (6), and select a different paper size.
(5) keys
These change the page of the displayed job list.
(6) [Detail] key
This shows detailed information on a selected job.
When a job has been stored using Quick File or File in
document filing mode, or when a broadcast transmission
has been performed in image send mode, the job
appears as a key in the completed jobs screen. You can
touch the [Detail] key to show details on the completed
job, and you can also touch the [Call] key to reprint or
resend the job.
(7) [Priority] key
A reserved job in the "Job Queue" screen can be printed
ahead of all other reserved jobs by selecting the job and
then touching this key.
In the print job queue, select the print or copy job to
which you wish to give priority and touch this key. The job
in progress stops and printing of the selected job begins.
When the selected job is completed, the interrupted job
resumes.
(8) [Stop/Delete] key
Use this key to cancel the job currently in progress or a
selected reserved job. Note that printing of received
faxes and received Internet faxes cannot be canceled.
(9) [Call] key
A job that appears in the completed jobs screen as a key
can be touched followed by the [Call] key to reprint or
resend the job. This is the same [Call] key that appears
when the [Detail] key is touched.
Spool
Complete
Job Queue
Detail
Call
Detail
Spool
Complete
Stop/Delete
2
3
4
002 / 000
Computer01 002 / 000
0312345678 001 / 000
Print Job
Job Queue Sets / Progress Status
Scan to Fax Job Internet Fax
Priority
1
1
Job Queue
1
020 / 001
Paper Empty
Waiting
Waiting
Copying
Copy
Copy
(1)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(8)
(5)
(4)
(9)
"Complete"
job screen
16
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF
The machine has two power switches. The main power switch is at the lower left after the front cover (lower) is opened.
The other power switch is the [POWER] key ( ) on the operation panel at the top right.
Main power switch
When the main power switch is switched on, the main
power indicator on the operation panel lights up.
[POWER] key
Turning on the power
(1) Switch the main power switch to the "on" position.
(2) Press the [POWER] key ( ) to turn on the power.
Turning off the power
(1) Press the [POWER] key ( ) to turn off the power.
(2) Switch the main power switch to the "off" position.
"On" position
"Off" position
LOGOUT
Main power indicator
[POWER] key
• Before switching off the main power switch, make sure that the DATA indicator for printing and the DATA and LINE
indicators for image send are not lit or blinking on the operation panel.
Switching off the main power switch or removing the power cord from the outlet while any of the indicators are lit or blinking
may damage the hard drive and cause data to be lost.
• Switch off both the [POWER] key ( ) and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine
failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax function, always keep the main power switch in the "on" position.
17
ENERGY SAVE FUNCTIONS
This product has the following two energy save functions that conform to the Energy Star guidelines to help conserve
natural resources and reduce environmental pollution.
Preheat Mode (low power mode)
Preheat mode automatically lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and thereby reduces power consumption if the
machine remains in the standby state for the interval of time set in "Preheat Mode Setting" in the system settings
(administrator).
This keeps the fusing unit at a lower temperature and reduces power consumption while the machine is on standby.
The machine automatically wakes up and returns to normal operation when a print job is received, a key is pressed on
the operation panel, or an original is placed.
Auto power shut-off mode (Sleep mode)
Auto power shut-off mode automatically shuts off power to the display and the fusing unit if the machine remains in the
standby state for the interval of time set in "Auto Power Shut-Off Timer" in the system settings (administrator). This
mode provides the lowest level of power consumption. Considerably more power is saved than in preheat mode,
however, the wakeup time is longer. This mode can be disabled in the system settings (administrator).
The machine automatically wakes up and resumes normal operation when a print job is received or when the blinking
[POWER SAVE] key
() is pressed.
[POWER SAVE] KEY
Press the [POWER SAVE] key () to put the machine in auto power shut-off mode or wake it up from auto power
shut-off mode. The [POWER SAVE] key
() has an indicator that indicates whether or not the machine is in auto power
shut-off mode.
When the [POWER SAVE]
key ( ) indicator is off in the
standby state
The machine is ready to be used.
If the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) is pressed when the indicator is off, the indicator will blink
and the machine will enter auto power shut-off mode after a brief interval.
When the [POWER SAVE]
key ( ) indicator is blinking
The machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
If the [POWER SAVE] key ( ) is pressed when the indicator is blinking, the indicator will
turn off and the machine will return to the ready state after a brief interval.
LOGOUT
[POWER SAVE]
key / indicator
18
USER AUTHENTICATION
When the administrator of the machine has enabled user authentication, either of the two screens shown below will appear.
If either screen appears, enter the user number or login name and password that you received from the administrator.
When controlled by user number When controlled by login name and password
(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP
authentication is used.)
AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER
The following procedure is used to log in using a user number received from the administrator of the machine.
User Authentication
OK
Admin Login
User Authentication
OK
Login Name
User Name
Password
Auth to:
Login Locally
1
Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits)
with the numeric keys.
Each entered digit will be displayed as " ".
2
Touch the [OK] key.
After the entered user number is authenticated, the user count
screen will appear briefly.
When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
When the user number is an 8-digit number, this step is not necessary. (Login takes place automatically after the user
number is entered.)
User Authentication
OK
Admin Login
Usage status: used/remaining pages
Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Full color : 87,654,321/12,345,678
2-color : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Single color: 87,654,321/12,345,678
19
If an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row...
If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect user number is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the user number that you should use with the administrator of the machine.
3
When you have finished using the
machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key ( ).
• However, note that the [LOGOUT] key ( ) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
• If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key ( ) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.
The administrator can clear the locked state.
This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.
LOGOUT
20
AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME / PASSWORD
The following procedure is used to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the
machine or the administrator of the LDAP server.
1
Touch the [Login Name] key or the
key.
If the [Login Name] key is touched, a screen for selecting the
user name appears. Go to the next step.
If the key is touched, an area for entering a "Registration
No." appears [---].
Use the numeric keys to enter your registration number that
has been stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator). After entering the registration number, go to
step 3.
2
Select the user name.
(A) [Direct Entry] key
Use this key if you have not been stored in "User List" in
the system settings (administrator) and are only using
LDAP authentication.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter your login name.
To enter text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" (page 76).
(B) User selection keys
Touch your user name that has been stored in "User List"
in the system settings (administrator).
(C) [Back] key
Touch this key to return to the login screen.
(D) Index tabs
All users appear on the [All Users] tab. Users are grouped
on the other tabs according to the search characters
entered when each user was stored.
LDAP authentication can be used when the administrator of the server provides LDAP service on the LAN (local area
network).
User Authentication
OK
Login Name
User Name
Password
Auth to:
Login Locally
Device Account Mode User Selection
1
2
Back
User 0012
User 0010
User 0008
User 0006
User 0004
User 0002
User 0011
User 0009
User 0007
User 0005
User 0003
User 0001
All Users ABCD EFGHI JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ
Admin Login
Direct Entry
User
ABC
12 186
(B) (C)
(D)
(A)
21
3
Touch the [Password] key.
A text entry screen for entering the password will appear.
Enter your password that is stored in "User List" in the system
settings (administrator).
If you are logging in to an LDAP server, enter the password that
is stored with your LDAP server login name.
Each entered character will be displayed as " ". When you
have finished entering the password, touch the [OK] key.
When authentication is by LDAP server and you have different
passwords stored in "User List" in the system settings
(administrator) and in the LDAP server, use the password
stored in the LDAP server.
• When an LDAP server has been stored, [Auth to:] can be changed.
• If you are logging in using a user selection key...
The LDAP server was stored when your user information was stored, and thus the LDAP server will appear as the
authentication server when you select your login name. Go to step 4.
• When logging in using the [Direct Entry] key...
Touch the [Auth to:] key.
Select the LDAP server and touch the [OK] key.
User 0001
User Authentication
OK
Login Name
User Name
Password
Auth to:
Login Locally
Auth to:
Direct Entry
User Authentication
OK
Login Name
User Name
Password
Login Locally
Authenticate to:
OK
Login Locally
Server 2
Server 1
Server 3
Server 4
Server 5
Server 6
Server 7
22
If an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row...
If "A Warning when Login Fails" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), the machine will lock for 5 minutes if
an incorrect login name or password is entered 3 times in a row.
Verify the login name and password that you should use with the administrator of the machine.
4
(Different items will appear in the screen when LDAP
authentication is used.)
Touch the [OK] key.
After the entered login name and password are authenticated,
the user count screen will appear briefly.
When page limits have been set in "Pages Limit Group List" in
the system settings (administrator), the number of pages
remaining will appear. (The remaining number of pages that the
user can use in each mode (copy, scan, etc.) appears.) The
amount of time that this screen appears can be changed using
"Message Time Setting" in the system settings (administrator).
5
When you have finished using the
machine and are ready to log out, press
the [LOGOUT] key ( ).
• However, note that the [LOGOUT] key ( ) cannot be used to log out when a fax number is being entered in fax
mode, as the key is used for fax number entry.
• If a preset duration of time elapses after the machine is last used, the Auto Clear function will activate. When Auto
Clear activates, logout takes place automatically. However, when PC Scan mode is used, logout does not take
place when the [LOGOUT] key ( ) is pressed and Auto Clear does not operate. Change to a different mode on
the machine and then log out.
• The administrator can clear the locked state.
This is done from [User Control] and then [Default Settings] in the Web page menu.
• When LDAP authentication is used, the [E-mail Address] key may appear, depending on the authentication method. If the
[E-mail Address] key appears in step 3, touch the key.
A text entry screen will appear. Enter your e-mail address. To enter text, see "6. ENTERING TEXT" (page 76).
System Settings (Administrator): User Registration
This is used to store names of users of the machine. Detailed information such as the login name, user number, and password are
also stored. Ask the administrator of the machine for the information that you need to use the machine.
User 0001
Auth to:
User Authentication
OK
Login Name
User Name
Password
Login Locally
Usage
status: used/remaining pages
Black-white : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Full color : 87,654,321/12,345,678
2-color : 87,654,321/12,345,678
Single color: 87,654,321/12,345,678
LOGOUT
Password
E-mail Address
Auth to:
Server 2
User 0002
User Authentication
OK
Login Name
User Name
23
HOME SCREEN
When the [HOME] key is pressed on the operation panel, the home screen appears in the touch panel.
Shortcuts to functions can be registered as keys in the home screen. When a shortcut key is touched, the screen for that
function appears. Register frequently used functions in the home screen to quickly and conveniently access those
functions. When user authentication is used, the home screen of "Favorite Operation Group" can be displayed.
Register keys that you wish to show in the home screen in the Web pages.
(1) Title
This shows the title of the home screen.
(2) Shortcut key
A registered function appears as a shortcut key.
The key can be touched to select the registered function.
(3) User name
This shows the name of the logged in user.
The user name appears when user authentication is
enabled on the machine.
04/01/2006 11:40
Home Screen
Total Count
Document Filing
Control
Address Control
Paper Tray Settings
(3)
(1)
(2)
• System Settings (Administrator): Home Screen Settings
Registration is performed in [System Settings] - [Operation Settings] - [Home Screen Settings] in the Web page menu.
• System Settings (Administrator): Home Screen List
Registration is performed in "Home Screen List" in [User Control] in the Web page menu.
24
IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER
This section provides information that you should know before loading paper in the paper trays.
Be sure to read this section before loading paper.
NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS
The trays are identified by the names indicated below. For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can
be loaded in each tray of the machine, see the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray Settings" in the
System Settings Guide.
THE MEANING OF "R" IN PAPER SIZES
Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the vertical or the horizontal orientation. To differentiate between
vertical and horizontal orientations, paper sizes in the horizontal orientation will be followed by an "R" (for example,
8-1/2" x 11"R, A4R).
Sizes that can be placed only in the horizontal orientation (12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", A3W, A3, B4)
do not include the "R" in their size indication.
2
LOADING PAPER
Horizontal orientation
"R" is appended.
Vertical orientation
"R" is not appended.
Can be placed only in the
horizontal orientation
"R" is not appended.
Bypass tray
Tray 5 (when a large
capacity tray is installed)
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
8-½" x 11"R
(A4R)
8-½" x 11"
(A4)
11" x 17"
(A3)
25
USEABLE PAPER
Various types of paper are sold. This section explains what plain paper and what special media can be used with the
machine. For detailed information on the sizes and types of paper that can be loaded in each tray of the machine, see
the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
Plain paper, special media
Plain paper that can be used
• SHARP standard plain paper (21 lbs. (80 g/m
2
)). For paper specifications, see the specifications in the Safety Guide.
• Pain paper other than SHARP standard paper (16 lbs. to 28 lbs. (60 g/m
2
to 105 g/m
2
))
Recycled paper, colored paper and pre-punched paper must meet the same specifications as plain paper. Contact
your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department for advice on using these types of paper.
Types of paper that can be used in each tray
The following types of paper can be loaded in each tray.
*1 "Heavy paper 1" is heavy paper up to 56 lbs. (209 g/m
2
), and "Heavy paper 2" is heavy paper up to 68 lbs. (256 g/m
2
).
*2 When using glossy paper, set the paper type to heavy paper. This will bring out the glossy quality of the paper.
*3 Thin paper from 15 lbs. to 16 lbs. (55 g/m
2
to 59 g/m
2
) can be used.
Print side face up or face down
Paper is loaded with the print side face up or face down depending on the paper type and tray.
Trays 1 to 5
Load the paper with the print side face up.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face down*.
Bypass tray
Load the paper with the print side face down.
However, if the paper type is "Letter Head" or "Pre-Printed", load the paper with the print side face up*.
* If "Disabling of Duplex" is enabled in the system settings (administrator), load the paper in the normal way (face up in
trays 1 to 5; face down in the bypass tray).
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass tray
Tray 5 (large
capacity tray)
Plain paper Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted
Pre-printed Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted
Letter head Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted
Heavy paper 1*
1
– Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted
Heavy paper 2*
1
– – – Permitted –
Labels – Permitted – Permitted –
Glossy paper*
2
– Permitted Permitted Permitted Permitted
Transparency film – Permitted – Permitted –
Tab paper – Permitted – Permitted –
Envelopes – – – Permitted –
Thin paper*
3
– – – Permitted –
26
Paper that cannot be used
• Special media for inkjet printers
(fine paper, glossy paper, glossy film, etc.)
• Carbon paper or thermal paper
• Pasted paper
• Paper with clips
• Paper with fold marks
• Torn paper
• Oil-feed transparency film
• Thin paper less than 15 lbs. (55 g/m
2
)
• Paper that is 69 lbs. (257 g/m
2
) or heavier
• Irregularly shaped paper
• Stapled paper
• Damp paper
• Curled paper
• Paper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture
absorption
Non-recommended paper
• Iron-on transfer paper
• Japanese paper
• Reverse side of paper already printed on by another
printer or copier.
• Perforated paper
• Various types of plain paper and special media are sold. Some types cannot be used with the machine. Contact your
dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department for advice on using these types of paper.
• The image quality and toner fusibility of paper may change due to ambient conditions, operating conditions, and paper
characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SHARP standard paper. Contact your dealer or nearest SHARP
Service Department for advice on using these types of paper.
• The use of non-recommended or prohibited paper may result in skewed feeding, misfeeds, poor toner fusing (the toner
does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed off), or machine failure.
• The use of non-recommended paper may result in misfeeds or poor image quality. Before using non-recommended paper,
check if printing can be performed properly.
27
TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 1 AND TRAY 2
LOADING PAPER
Up to 1200 sheets of 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size paper can be loaded in tray 1. Up to 800 sheets of 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size
paper can be loaded in tray 2.
For detailed information on the paper that can be loaded, see the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray
Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
1
Pull out tray 1 - tray 2.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.
2
Fan the paper.
Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
3
● Tray 1
Load paper in the left and right trays.
Load the paper with the print side face up. The stack must not
be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1200 sheets).
● Tray 2
Raise the paper guide and load the paper with the print side
face up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line
(maximum of 800 sheets).
Be sure to return the paper guide to its original position after
loading the paper.
Indicator line
Indicator line
28
CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE
To change the paper size of tray 1 - tray 2, follow the steps below.
This section only explains how to change the paper size. For the procedures for opening/closing the tray and loading
paper, see "LOADING PAPER" (page 27).
4
Gently push tray 1- tray 2 into the
machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.
If you loaded a different type of paper than was loaded previously, change the paper type setting as explained in
"Paper Tray Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings
Change these settings when you change the size or type of paper loaded in a tray.
1
Remove the paper size guide.
With the base of the tray pressed all the way down, hold down
the hook at the bottom on the paper size guide and pull the
paper size guide up slightly.
Before changing the paper size of tray 2, raise the paper guide.
Hook
Tray 1 Tray 2
Transparent sheet Paper guide
29
2
Attach the paper size guide and
transparent sheet appropriately for the
size of paper to be used.
(1)
Align the bottom of the paper size guide with
the appropriate slot on the base of the tray.
Align the paper size guide with the slot for the paper size
to be used (indicated by the paper size mark).
(2) Align the holes at the top of the paper size
guide with the protrusions that secure the
paper size guide.
Align with the holes for the paper size to be used
(indicated by the paper size mark).
(3) Push in the paper guide so that it locks into
place.
Push the paper size guide in until the hook at the bottom
locks into place. (You will hear a "click" when the hook
locks.) Move the paper size guide slightly to verify that it
has locked into place.
When attaching the paper size guide, make sure that the top and bottom of the guide are aligned to the same paper size. If
the top and bottom of the paper size guide are not aligned to the same paper size, skewed feeding and misfeeds will result.
• When attaching the paper size guide, place the transparent sheet in direct contact with the base of the tray in the
correct orientation as shown.
• The slot or hole with the "LT" mark is for 8-1/2" x 11" size.
3
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the far
paper guide to the paper size to be used.
Be sure to adjust the far paper guide to the same size as the
near paper guide.
When removing and attaching the far paper size guide, take
care not to hit the front cover of the machine.
Adjusting only one paper guide may result in skewed feeding or misfeeds.
4
Set the paper size and paper type.
Be sure to change the paper size and paper type settings as explained in "Paper Tray Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
If the paper size setting is not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take
place on the wrong size or type of paper or a misfeed may occur.
Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings
Change these settings when you change the size or type of paper loaded in a tray.
A4
LT
LT
A4
(1)
(2)
Transparent sheet
Transparent
sheet
30
TRAY SETTINGS FOR TRAY 3 AND TRAY 4
LOADING PAPER AND CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE
Up to 500 sheets of 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R to 12" x 18" (A5R to A3W) size paper can be loaded in tray 3. Up to 500 sheets of
7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R to 12" x 18" (B5R to A3W) size paper can be loaded in tray 4.
For detailed information on the paper that can be loaded, see the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray
Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
1
Pull out the paper tray.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.
To load paper, go to step 3. To load a different size of paper, go
to the next step.
2
Adjust the guide plates A and B by
squeezing their lock levers and sliding
them to match the vertical and
horizontal dimensions of the paper to be
loaded.
The guide plates A and B are slidable. Slide each guide plate
while squeezing its lock lever.
3
Fan the paper.
Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
4
Insert the paper into the tray.
Load the paper with the print side face up. The stack must not
be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 500 sheets).
A
B
Indicator line
31
Loading tab paper and transparency film in tray 3
In addition to plain paper, tab paper, transparency film, and other special media can be loaded in tray 3.
To load tab paper or transparency film in tray 3, follow the steps below.
Loading tab paper
To use tab paper, the special guide must be attached as explained below.
5
Gently push the paper tray into the
machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.
• If you loaded a different type of paper than was loaded previously, change the paper type setting as explained in
"Paper Tray Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
• If you loaded 8K, 16K, or 16KR size paper, or loaded a non-standard size of paper in tray 3, change the paper size
setting as explained in "Paper Tray Settings" in the System Settings Guide. If the paper size setting is not
configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take place on the wrong
size or type of paper or a misfeed may occur.
Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings
Change these settings when you change the size or type of paper loaded in a tray.
1
Take out the tab paper guide.
The guide is stored inside tray 3 as shown. When finished
using tab paper, be sure to replace the guide.
32
Loading transparency film
When loading transparency film, load the film in the vertical orientation with the rounded corner at the top right.
2
Pull out the tray and attach the guide.
Slide the guide plate to the position of the bottom edge of the
tab paper and attach the guide so that it covers the guide plate.
3
Insert the tab paper into the tray.
Place the tab paper with the print side face up so that the tab is
to the left.
[Example]
Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond with the originals as shown below.
4
Gently push the tray in and set the paper
type to tab paper.
Change the paper type setting to tab paper as explained in
"Paper Tray Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
Front
side
1st sheet
4th sheet
2nd sheet
3rd sheet
3rd sheet
2nd sheet
1st sheet
4th sheet
Bottom
To p
Originals Tab Paper
33
TRAY SETTINGS OF TRAY 5 (LARGE
CAPACITY TRAY)
LOADING PAPER (MX-LCX2)
Up to 3500 sheets of 8-1/2" x 11" or A4 size paper (21 lbs. (80 g/m
2
)) can be loaded in the large capacity tray
(MX-LCX2).
For detailed information on the paper that can be loaded, see the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray
Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
The paper size of the large capacity tray (MX-LCX2) can only be changed by a service technician. If you need to change
the paper size, consult your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
1
Pull out the paper tray.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.
2
Fan the paper.
Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
3
Place the paper in the center of the
paper table.
Load the paper with the print side face up. The stack must not
be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3500 sheets).
Indicator
line
34
LOADING PAPER (MX-LCX3)
Up to 3000 sheets of 8-1/2" x 11" to 12" x 18" (B5 to A3W) size paper can be loaded in the large capacity tray (MX-LCX3).
For detailed information on the paper that can be loaded, see the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray
Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
4
Gently push the paper tray into the
machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.
If you loaded a different type of paper than was loaded previously, change the paper type setting as explained in
"Paper Tray Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings
Change these settings if you have loaded a different type of paper in the tray.
1
Press the operation button.
The operation button indicator will blink and the tray's paper
table will descend to the paper loading position. Wait until the
operation button indicator turns off.
Do not remove the tray before the indicator turns off. Attempting to pull the tray out when the indicator is blinking or
solidly lit may damage the tray.
2
Pull out the paper tray.
Gently pull the tray out until it stops.
3
Fan the paper.
Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned,
multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
35
4
Place the paper in the center of the
paper table.
The paper should be loaded with the print side face up.
When a certain amount of paper is placed on the paper table,
the paper table will automatically descend slightly and then
stop. Continue loading paper in this way.
The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line.
A maximum of 3000 sheets of paper can be loaded in the tray.
Caution
When placing paper, do not insert your fingers into the openings in the paper table.
Do not insert spare paper or other objects into openings inside the tray.
5
Gently push the paper tray into the
machine.
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine. After the tray
is pushed in, the paper table will rise. While the paper tray
rises, the operation button indicator will blink. After the paper
tray finishes rising, the indicator will light solidly.
If you loaded a different type of paper than was loaded previously, change the paper type setting as explained in
"Paper Tray Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings
Change these settings if you load a different type of paper in the tray.
Indicator line
36
CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE (MX-LCX3)
To change the paper size of the large capacity tray (MX-LCX3), follow the procedure below.
This procedure only explains how to change the paper size. For the procedures for opening/closing the tray and loading
paper, see "LOADING PAPER (MX-LCX3)" (page 34).
1
Loosen the paper guide screw.
2
Slide the plate of the paper guide.
Slide the plate until the red line appears at the center of the size
window of the plate.
3
Adjust the paper guide to the paper size
that will be used.
Slide the paper guide forward or backward until the size mark
of the paper to be used ( or ) appears in the size window of
the plate.
4
Secure the paper guide.
(1) Slide the plate of the paper guide.
Slide the plate until the paper size to be used appears in
the size window of the plate.
(2) Tighten the paper guide screw.
5
Repeat steps 1 through 4 to adjust the
far paper guide to the paper size to be
used.
Be sure to adjust the far guide to the same paper size as the
near guide.
Adjusting only one paper guide may result in skewed feeding or misfeeds.
Plate
(1)
(2)
11
37
6
Change the right paper guide to the
paper size to be used.
(1) While holding up the paper guide lock, slide
the paper guide to the paper size to be
used.
(2) Release the paper guide lock.
(3) Move the paper guide slightly to the right
and left so that it locks into place.
You will hear a "click" when the paper guide locks.
7
Set the paper size and paper type.
Be sure to change the paper size and paper type settings as explained in "Paper Tray Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
If the paper size setting is not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take
place on the wrong size or type of paper or a misfeed may occur.
Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.
System Settings: Paper Tray Settings
Change these settings when you change the size or type of paper loaded in a tray.
38
LOADING PAPER IN THE BYPASS TRAY
The bypass tray can be used to print on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. Up to
100 sheets of paper can be loaded (up to 40 sheets of heavy paper) for continuous printing similar to the other trays.
For detailed information on the paper that can be loaded, see the specifications in the Safety Guide and "Paper Tray
Settings" in the System Settings Guide.
1
Open the bypass tray.
When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure
to pull out the bypass tray extension. Pull the bypass tray
extension all the way out. If the bypass tray extension is not
pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded paper will not be
correctly displayed.
Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray.
2
Set the bypass tray guides to the width
of the paper.
3
Insert the paper along the bypass tray
guides all the way into the bypass tray
until it stops.
Load the paper with the print side face down.
• Do not force the paper in.
• If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the
width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased.
39
4
Touch the [Paper Select] key.
5
Touch the paper type key of the bypass
tray.
(A) Shows the size of paper loaded in the bypass tray.
(B) Shows the currently selected paper type.
6
Select the type of paper used in the
bypass tray.
Select the paper type to be used.
Color Mode
Special Modes
Plain
2-Sided Copy
Output
File
Quick File
Copy Ratio
100%
11x17
3.
1. 2.
8½x118½x11
Original Paper Select
Auto
8½x11
Plain
Auto
8½x11
Full Color
Exposure
Auto
8½x14
4.
8½x11
Plain
2. 8½x11
8½x11
Paper Select
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
OK
Plain
Plain
3. 11x17
4.
8½x14
1.
Plain
8½x11
Plain
(B)
(A)
Paper Select
Cancel
Plain
Pre-Punched
Thin Paper
Pre-Printed
Color
Labels
Recycled
Heavy Paper 1
Transparency
Letter Head
Heavy Paper 2
Tab Paper
Envelope
Heavy Paper 1: 28+ - 56 lbs. (106 - 209 g/m
2
)
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
Select the paper type.
1
2
Heavy Paper 2: 56+ - 68 lbs. (210 - 256 g/m
2
)
40
7
Example: recycled paper has been selected
Set the paper size.
[Auto-Inch] key
When the paper inserted in the bypass tray is a standard inch
size (8-1/2" x 11", etc.), the paper size will be detected
automatically and the appropriate paper size set.
[Auto-AB] key
When the paper inserted in the bypass tray is a standard AB
size (A4 size, etc.), the paper size will be detected
automatically and the appropriate paper size set.
[Custom Size] key
Touch this key when you know the size of the inserted paper
but it is not one of the standard inch or AB sizes.
When the key is touched, the paper size entry screen appears.
Touch the [X] key and enter the horizontal dimension of the
paper with the keys, and then touch the [Y] key and
enter the vertical dimension. When finished, touch the [OK]
key.
• When [Envelope] is selected, specify the size of the envelope. When finished, touch the [OK] key.
• If tab paper is selected, check the size. Touch the [Auto-Inch] key or the [Auto-AB] key. When you have finished
checking/changing the setting, touch the [OK] key.
• To use a paper size used in China, touch [8K], [16K], or [16KR].
8
Select the bypass tray.
(1) Touch the paper size key of the bypass tray.
(2) Touch the [OK] key.
Paper Select
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
OK
Type
Auto-Inch
Recycled
Custom Size
16K
16KR
X17 Y11
8K
Auto-AB
Size
12x18,11x17,8½x14
8½x11,8½x11R,5½x8½R
7¼x10½R,A3,A4,B4,B5
A3W,A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4
B5,B5R,216x330(8½x13)
11x17,8½x11
OK
OK
(2 1/2~17)
inch
(2 1/2~11 5/8)
inch
17
X
Y
11
Bypass Tray Type/Size Setting
Size Input
Paper Select
Paper Tray
Bypass Tray
OK
Recycled
Plain
Plain
2.
3.
4.
1.
Plain
Plain
8½x11
8½x11
11x17
8½x14
8½x11
(1) (2)
41
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING THE BYPASS TRAY
• When using plain paper other than SHARP standard paper or special media other than SHARP-recommended
transparency film, or when printing on the reverse side of previously used paper, the paper must be loaded one sheet
at a time. Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds.
• Before loading paper, straighten any curling in the paper.
• When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and
reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result.
Inserting paper
Inserting tab paper
To print on tab paper, load tab paper in the bypass tray with the print side face down.
Inserting transparency film
Place paper that is 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (A5) or smaller in the horizontal
orientation.
• Use only tab paper that is made of paper. Tab paper made of a material other than paper (film, etc.) cannot be used.
• To print on the tabs of tab paper...
In copy mode, use "Tab Copy" in the special modes. In print mode, use the tab print function. For more information on
these functions, see the Copier Guide and the Printer Guide.
• Use SHARP-recommended transparency film. When inserting
transparency film in the bypass tray, the rounded corner
should be at the front left when the film is oriented horizontally,
or at the far left when the film is oriented vertically.
• When loading multiple sheets of transparency film in the
bypass tray, be sure to fan the sheets several times before
loading.
• When printing on transparency film, be sure to remove each
sheet as it exits the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the
output tray may result in curling.
Face down
Horizontally Vertically
42
Loading envelopes
When inserting envelopes in the bypass tray, place them aligned to the left side in the orientation shown below.
Only the front side of envelopes can be printed on. Be sure to place the front side face down.
Important points when using envelopes
• Do not print on both sides of an envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality.
• Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician.
• Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure.
• Do not use the following envelopes:
Envelopes with metal clasps, plastic hooks, or ribbon hooks; envelopes closed with string, envelopes with windows or
backing, envelopes with an uneven front surface due to embossing, double-layer envelopes, envelopes with an
adhesive for sealing, hand-made envelopes, envelopes with air inside, envelopes with creases or fold marks, torn or
damaged envelopes
• Envelopes with an incorrectly aligned corner gluing position on the back cannot be used as creasing may result.
• Print quality is not guaranteed in the area 13/32" (10 mm) around the edges of
the envelope.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large
step-like change of thickness, such as on four-layer parts or parts less than
three layers.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on envelopes having peel off flaps for sealing the
envelopes.
Can be used
Cannot be used
43
Fusing unit pressure adjusting levers
It may happen that creases, color deviations, or smudging may occur even when envelopes within the specifications are
used. This problem can be alleviated by shifting the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers from the regular pressure
position to the low pressure position. To shift the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers, follow the steps below.
1
Pull out the right side cover.
While pushing up the right side cover release lever, gently open
the cover.
2
Move the fusing unit pressure adjusting
levers (two) to the low pressure position
as shown.
Caution
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when operating the fusing unit pressure adjusting levers.
Be sure to return the levers to the regular position when you have finished feeding envelopes. Otherwise, inadequate
toner adherence, paper misfeeds, and other problems may occur.
3
Gently close the right side cover.
A
B
Regular
position
Low pressure position
A: Front side of
fusing unit
B: Rear side of
fusing unit
44
This chapter explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder and on the document glass.
PLACING THE ORIGINAL
PLACING ORIGINALS IN THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT
FEEDER
This section explains how to place originals in the automatic document feeder.
Allowed original sizes
When a non-standard size original is placed in copy mode, see "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE" in the Copier
Guide.
When a non-standard size original is placed for fax or scanner transmission, see "IMAGE SETTINGS" in the Facsimile
Guide or Scanner Guide.
Allowed original weights
1-sided scanning: 9 lbs. to 34 lbs. (35 g/m
2
to 128 g/m
2
)
2-sided scanning: 15 lbs. to 34 lbs. (50 g/m
2
to 128 g/m
2
)
To scan originals from 9 lbs. to 14 lbs. (35 g/m
2
to 49 g/m
2
), use "Slow Scan Mode" in the special modes. Scanning
without using "Slow Scan Mode" may result in original misfeeds.
When "Slow Scan Mode" is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
3
ORIGINALS
Minimum original size Maximum original size
Standard sizes
(Minimum size that can be automatically detected)
8-1/2" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)
A5: 210 mm (height) x 148 mm (width)
Non-standard sizes
(Minimum size that can be specified manually)
5-1/8" (height) x 5-1/2" (width)
131 mm (height) x 140 mm (width)
Standard sizes
(Maximum size that can be automatically detected)
11" (height) x 17" (width)
A3: 297 mm (height) x 420 mm (width)
12" x 18" size paper (A3W) cannot be used.
Non-standard sizes
(Maximum size that can be specified manually)
Copy mode: 297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)
Image send mode: 11" (height) x 31-1/2" (width)
297 mm (height) x 800 mm (width)
1
Make sure an original does not remain
on the document glass.
Open the automatic document feeder, make sure that an
original is not on the document glass, and then gently close the
automatic document feeder.
45
2
Adjust the original guides to the size of
the originals.
3
Place the original.
Make sure the edges of the originals are even.
Insert the originals face up all the way into the document feeder
tray.
Insert a number of originals that does not exceed the indicator
line on the document feeder tray.
Up to 150 sheets can be inserted.
• Originals of different sizes can be placed together in the automatic document feeder. In this case, select "Mixed Size
Original" in the special modes of the mode you are using. For the procedures for inserting mixed size originals and the
sizes that can be inserted, see the Copier Guide, the Scanner Guide, and the Facsimile Guide.
• Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.
• If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or pasteup glue, wait until the originals are dry before making
copies. Otherwise the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.
• Do not use the following originals. Incorrect original size detection, original misfeeds, and smudges may result.
Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should
not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be damaged, crumpled, folded,
loosely pasted together, or have cut-out holes. Originals with multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole
punched paper may not feed correctly.
• When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that
the punched edge is at a position away from the feed slot of the
document feeder tray.
Indicator
line
Hole
positions
Feed slot
46
PLACING THE ORIGINAL ON THE DOCUMENT GLASS
This section explains how to place the original on the document glass.
Allowed original sizes
When a non-standard size original is placed in copy
mode, see "SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SIZE" in the
Copier Guide.
When a non-standard size original is placed for fax or
scanner transmission, see "IMAGE SETTINGS" in the
Facsimile Guide or Scanner Guide.
Maximum original size
Standard sizes
11" (height) x 17" (width)
A3: 297 mm (height) x 420 mm (width)
Non-standard sizes
297 mm (height) x 432 mm (width)
1
Open the automatic document feeder.
2
Place the original.
Place the original face down in the far left corner of the
document glass.
The original should always be placed in the far left corner,
regardless of its size.
Align the top left corner of the original with the tip of the mark.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector.
Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector and prevent
correct detection of the original size.
If you are placing a small non-standard size original on the document glass, it is convenient to place a blank sheet of
8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (A4 or B5) paper on top of the original to facilitate detection of the original size.
3
Close the automatic document feeder.
Original size
detector
8-1/2" x 11"R (A4R)
B5R
8-1/2" x 14" (B4)
11" x 17" (A3)
8-1/2" x 11" (A4)
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"
(A5)
B5
mark
Document glass scale
Document glass scale
mark
47
Placing a thick book
When scanning a thick book or other thick original, follow the steps below to press the book down.
(1) Push up the far side of the automatic
document feeder.
The hinges supporting the automatic document feeder
will release and the rear side of the automatic document
feeder will rise.
(2) Slowly close the automatic document
feeder.
(2)
(1)
Caution
• Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing the automatic document feeder may damage it.
• Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.
The automatic document feeder cannot be closed correctly in this state. To return the automatic document feeder to its
normal state, open it completely and then close it.
48
This chapter describes the peripheral devices that can be used with the machine and explains how to use the finisher,
saddle stitch finisher, and inserter.
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Peripheral devices can be installed on the machine to increase its range of functionality.
The peripheral devices are generally optional, however, some models include certain peripheral devices as standard
equipment.
(As of April, 2006)
4
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Product name Product number Description
Large capacity tray
MX-LCX2
Additional tray. A maximum of 3500 sheets of paper can be
loaded in the tray.
MX-LCX3
Additional tray. Supports wide sizes such as 12" x 18" (A3W). Up
to 3000 sheets can be loaded.
Finisher MX-FNX3
Output device that enables the use of the staple function and
offset function.
Saddle stitch finisher MX-FNX4
Output device that enables use of the staple function, offset
function and pamphlet copy function.
Paper pass unit MX-RBX2 This is required to install a finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
Punch module MX-PNX2B
Punches holes in copies and other output. Requires a finisher or
saddle stitch finisher.
Inserter MX-CFX1
Paper loaded in the inserter can be inserted into output as
covers and inserts. Manual stapling and hole punching is also
possible from the inserter.
Barcode font kit AR-PF1 Adds barcode fonts to the machine.
PS3 expansion kit MX-PKX1
Enables the machine to be used as a Postscript compatible
printer.
Internet fax expansion kit MX-FWX1 Adds an Internet fax function.
Facsimile expansion kit MX-FXX1 Adds a fax function.
Application integration module MX-AMX1
The application integration module can be combined with the
network scanner function to append a metadata file to a scanned
image file.
When a finisher and inserter are installed on the machine, a punch module is also required.
49
FINISHER / SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
The finisher and saddle stitch finisher are equipped with the offset function, which offsets each set of output from the
previous set, and the staple sort function, which staples each set of output. The saddle stitch finisher is also equipped
with the pamphlet staple function, which automatically staples and folds each set of output at the centerline.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
PART NAMES
(1) Stapler compiler
This temporarily stacks paper to be stapled.
(2) Output trays (upper tray, lower tray)
Stapled and offset output is delivered to these trays.
The trays are slidable. For large-size output (12" x 18",
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", A3W, A3, B4),
extend the tray.
(3) Saddle stitch tray
Stapled and folded output is delivered to this tray.
(4) Saddle stitch tray guide
This guides the output as it is delivered to the tray. Before
printing, attach the saddle stitch tray guide in the
appropriate position below for the paper size to be used.
(5) Top cover
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
(6) Front cover
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge or remove
a staple jam.
(1)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(3)
(4)
Finisher
11" x 17"/8-1/2" x 14"
(A3/B4)
8-1/2" x 11"R
(A4R)
• A paper pass unit is required to install a finisher or saddle stitch finisher.
• Do not place heavy objects on the finisher / saddle stitch finisher or press down on the finisher / saddle stitch finisher.
• Use caution when you turn on the power and when printing is taking place, as the output tray may move up and down.
• A saddle stitch finisher and a finisher cannot be installed simultaneously.
50
SUPPLIES
The finisher and saddle stitch finisher require the following staple cartridge:
• Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples x 3 cartridges) (for both the finisher and saddle stitch finisher)
AR-SC2
The saddle stitch finisher also requires the following special staple cartridge for the saddle stitch unit.
• Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x 3 cartridges)
AR-SC3
51
FINISHER / SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MAINTENANCE
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the procedure below
to replace the staple cartridge.
Replacing the cartridge in the finisher
1
Open the front cover.
2
Squeeze the green parts of the staple
case and pull the case up and then out.
3
Remove the empty staple cartridge.
Press the lock button to release the staple case cover and then
remove the staple cartridge.
When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed.
4
Insert a new staple cartridge into the
staple case.
Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
Do not remove the seal from the cartridge before inserting the cartridge into the case.
52
5
Pull the seal that holds the staples
straight out.
6
Push the staple case firmly back in.
Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
7
Close the front cover.
Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
53
Replacing the staple cartridges in the saddle stitch unit
1
Open the front cover.
2
Grasp the handle on the saddle stitch
unit and pull it slowly out until it stops.
3
Pull the staple unit in the saddle stitch
unit out and then rotate it up.
4
Grasp the left and right side of each
empty staple cartridge and remove the
cartridges.
5
Load new staple cartridges.
Replace both staple cartridges.
Remove the cover from each staple cartridge and then install
the cartridge.
6
Pull the staple unit of the saddle stitch
finisher forward and then rotate it back
to its original position.
54
7
Push the saddle stitch unit in.
8
Close the front cover of the saddle stitch
finisher.
Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
55
Removing a staple jam from the finisher
To remove a staple jam, remove the staple case from the finisher unit and then follow the steps below.
To remove or reinsert the staple case of the finisher unit, see "Replacing the cartridge in the finisher" (page 51).
1
Lower the lever at the front end of the
staple case and remove the jammed
staple.
Remove the leading staple if it is bent. If bent staples remain, a
staple jam will occur again.
2
Return the lever to its original position.
Make a test print or copy in staple sort mode to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
56
Removing a staple jam from the saddle stitch unit
To remove a staple jam from the saddle stitch unit, remove the staple cartridge and then follow the steps below. To
remove the staple cartridge from the saddle stitch unit or replace the saddle stitch unit, see "Replacing the staple
cartridges in the saddle stitch unit" (page 53).
1
Remove the staple cartridge from the
staple unit.
2
Press (A) down and pull up knob (B).
3
Remove the jammed staples and then
return knob (B) to its original position.
4
Replace the staple cartridge.
Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
(A)(B)
(B)
57
PUNCH MODULE
A punch module can be installed to punch holes in output. To install a punch module, a finisher or saddle stitch finisher
is required.
Discarding punch waste
Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box.
Follow the steps below to discard the punch waste.
1
Open the front cover of the punch
module.
2
Pull out the punch waste box and
discard the punch waste.
Discard the punch waste in a plastic bag or other container,
taking care not to let the waste scatter.
3
Replace the punch waste box.
If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not
be possible using the punch function.
4
Close the cover of the punch module.
58
INSERTER
The inserter enables blank sheets or printed sheets to be added to copy and print output as covers or inserts without
performing printing. The inserter also allows feeding of heavy paper that cannot be fed from the other trays.
Sets of printed paper that have not been stapled or punched can be fed one at a time from the inserter for stapling or
punching.
☞ MANUALLY OPERATING THE INSERTER (page 60)
To use the inserter to insert covers or inserts, paper settings for the inserter must be configured in "Paper Tray Settings"
in the system settings.
PART NAMES
(1) Paper tray
Place blank or printed paper here to be inserted.
(2) Paper guide
When loading paper, adjust this guide to the width of the
paper.
(3) Top cover
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
(4) Inserter operation panel
Stapling and punching can be performed directly from the
inserter operation panel without using the machine
operation panel.
(5) Paper guide lever
Release the paper guide lock to remove misfed paper.
Special media that can be used in the inserter
Special media such as heavy paper up to 61 lbs. (256 g/m
2
), transparency film, tab paper, or thin paper can be loaded in
the inserter. For detailed information on paper, see the Safety Guide.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
To install an inserter, a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is required. To install an inserter on a finisher, a punch module is
required.
59
LOADING PAPER
When loading paper in the inserter, load the paper face up. Up to 100 sheets can be inserted. If the paper has a top
edge and bottom edge, load in the same top-bottom orientation as the original. Adjust the paper guide on the paper tray
to the width of the paper.
When loading tab paper in the inserter, the reverse side of the tab paper should face up. The top side is inserted first.
The relation of copies and tab sheets is shown below.
Reverse side
Loaded tab paper
Inserted first.
Copies
Copy results
Reverse
side
1st sheet
4th sheet
1st
sheet
2nd
sheet
3rd
sheet
4th
sheet
5th
sheet
Tab paper 4th sheet (reverse side)
Tab paper 1st sheet (reverse side)
5th sheet
Reverse
side
Reverse
side
Reverse
side
60
MANUALLY OPERATING THE INSERTER
The inserter can be used for stapling or punching without performing a copy operation. These functions are selected at
the operation panel of the inserter.
(1) [PUNCH] key ( )
When a punch module is installed on the finisher or
saddle stitch finisher, punch holes can be added to blank
paper or printed paper. The indicator lights when this
function is selected.
(2) [STAPLE] key ( ) / indicator
When this function is selected, each set of output is
stapled and delivered to the finisher or saddle stitch
finisher tray. (Note that the sets are not offset.) Press this
key until the icon indicator of the desired staple position
lights up. ( (pamphlet stapling) can only be selected
when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.)
(3) [START] key ( ) / indicator
After selecting punch or staple settings with the key of (1)
or (2), place the paper to be punched or stapled on the
paper tray of the inserter and press this key.
(1) (2) (3)
• Do not use tab paper when operating the inserter manually.
• The punch and staple functions cannot be used when a malfunction has occurred in the finisher or saddle stitch finisher, or
the inserter, finisher, saddle stitch finisher, or punch module has been disabled in the system settings (administrator).
1
Load paper in the inserter.
Load the paper face up. When performing pamphlet stapling,
place the paper so that the opened pages are face up as
shown.
Adjust the paper guide to the size of the paper.
2
Press the desired output mode key.
To perform stapling or pamphlet stapling, touch the [STAPLE]
key ( ). To perform punching, touch the [PUNCH] key
( ). The indicator of the selected mode lights up.
Pamphlet stapling can only be used when the saddle stitch finisher is installed.
Stapling and punching cannot be used in combination with pamphlet stapling.
7
8
Paper
guide
61
Alarm display
If the indicator of the [START] key ( ) is off or blinks after loading paper, operation will not begin when the [START]
key ( ) is pressed. For more information on blinking and lit indicators, see "Alarm display of the inserter" in the
Troubleshooting.
3
Touch the [START] key ( ).
Make sure that the [START] key ( ) indicator is illuminated
green and then press the [START] key ( ).
62
This chapter explains how to clean the machine and replace the toner cartridges and the waste toner box.
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
To ensure that the machine continues to provide top quality performance, periodically clean the machine.
CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC
DOCUMENT FEEDER
If the document glass or document backplate sheet becomes dirty, the dirt will appear as dirty spots, colored lines, or
white lines in the scanned image. Always keep these parts clean.
Wipe the parts with a clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After wiping with the moistened cloth,
wipe the parts dry with a clean dry cloth.
Document glass Document backplate sheet
5
MAINTENANCE
Warning
Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical
components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.
Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine. These may degrade or discolor the
housing.
63
Scanning area
If colored lines or white lines appear in images scanned using the automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area
(the thin long glass next to the document glass).
To clean this area, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder. After using the glass cleaner,
be sure to return it to its storage position.
Examples of lines in the image
1
Open the automatic document feeder
and remove the glass cleaner.
2
Clean the document scanning area on
the document glass with the glass
cleaner.
One scanning area is on the document glass and the other is
inside the automatic document feeder.
Black lines White lines
64
3
Clean the document scanning area in
the automatic document feeder with the
glass cleaner.
(1) Open the scanning area cover on the
automatic document feeder.
Push in the release switch to release the cover.
(2) Clean the scanning area in the automatic
document feeder.
(3) Close the cover.
4
Replace the glass cleaner.
65
CLEANING THE MAIN CHARGER OF THE
PHOTOCONDUCTIVE DRUM
If black lines or colored lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass and automatic document feeder,
use the charger cleaner to clean the main charger that charges the drum.
1
Open the front cover (lower).
2
Open the inner cover.
3
Clean the main charger.
(1) Slowly pull out the green knob (charger
cleaner) as far as it will go.
(2) After the green knob (charger cleaner) is
pulled out, slowly push it all the way back
in.
4
Repeat step 3 with each of the other
charger cleaners.
There are a total of 4 places to be cleaned in the machine as
shown.
5
Close the inner cover.
Charger cleaner
66
CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER
If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of
the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.
6
Close the front cover (lower).
• If this does not solve the problem, pull the knob out and push it back in 2 more times.
• When pulling and pushing the knob to clean the charger, pull and push the knob slowly from one end to the other.
67
CLEANING THE LASER UNIT
When the laser unit inside the machine becomes dirty, line patterns (colored lines) may form in the printed image.
Identifying lines (colored lines) caused by a dirty laser unit
• Colored lines always appear in the same place. (The lines are never black.)
• The colored lines are parallel to the direction of paper feeding.
• Colored lines appear not only on copies but also on print jobs from a computer. (The same lines appear on both
copies and print jobs.)
If the above problems occur, follow the steps below to clean the laser unit.
1
Open the front cover (lower).
2
Take out the cleaning tool for the laser
unit.
The cleaning tool is attached to the front cover (lower).
3
Make sure that the cleaner at the tip of
the cleaning tool is not dirty.
If the cleaner is dirty, remove the cleaner and replace it with a
clean one. For the procedure for replacing the cleaner, see
steps 4 through 6. If the cleaner is not dirty, go to step 7.
4
Open the inner cover and take out a
replacement cleaner.
Replacement cleaners are stored on the inner cover.
Grasp the end of the cleaner and pull it out of the cover.
Cleaner
68
5
Remove the dirty cleaner from the tip of
the cleaning tool.
(1) Firmly grasp the tool close to where the
cleaner is attached.
(2) Use your other hand to press down on the
hook that secures the cleaner and remove
the cleaner.
Put the removed cleaner back on the inner cover. After replacing the cleaner, be sure to close the inner cover.
6
Attach the new cleaner to the cleaning
tool.
(1) Align the cleaner hook with the attachment
hole in the cleaning tool.
(2) Hold the cleaner firmly and push the
cleaning tool in.
69
7
Clean the laser unit.
(1) Point the cleaner down and slowly insert
the tool into the hole that you wish to clean.
Be sure to point the cleaner down.
(2) Insert the cleaning tool all the way into the
hole and then pull it back out.
Pull the cleaning tool out until you feel the tip of the tool
leave the cleaning surface of the laser unit.
(3) Repeat step (2) two or three times and then
remove the cleaning tool.
8
Repeat step 7 to clean all holes in the
laser unit (4 holes).
There are a total of 4 holes to be cleaned in the laser unit,
including the hole cleaned in step 7. Clean all holes.
Holes to be cleaned
70
9
Replace the cleaning tool.
(1) Point the cleaner up and hook the end of the
tool (the end without the cleaner) onto the
holder on the right.
(2) Align the holder with the hole in the center
of the cleaning tool and slowly press up
from below.
(3) Fit the holder into the hole in the tip (the end
with the cleaner) of the cleaning tool.
10
Close the front cover (lower).
71
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES
Be sure to replace the toner cartridge when the message "Change the toner cartridge." appears.
In copy mode
• If any one of the toner colors runs out (including black toner), color printing will not be possible. If Y, M, or C toner runs out
but Bk toner remains, black and white printing will still be possible.
• Be sure to install 5 toner cartridges (Y/M/C/Bk1/Bk2).
OK
Change the toner cartridge.
( )
Ready to scan for copy.
( Change the toner cartridge.)
Ready to scan for copy.
( Toner supply is low.)
Colors that are running low or have run out of toner are indicated in ( ).
: Yellow toner, : Magenta toner, : Cyan toner,
, : Black toner
Replace the toner cartridges of the indicated colors.
Y
M C
Bk1 Bk2
If you continue to use the machine without replacing
the cartridge, the following message will appear
when the toner runs out.
When the message appears in the message display,
replace the toner cartridge for the indicated color.
72
1
Locations of color toner cartridges
Open the front cover (upper).
If a finisher / saddle stitch finisher is not installed, open the toner cover as shown.
2
Pull the toner cartridge toward you.
Pull the cartridge slowly toward you, keeping it level.
If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out.
3
Remove a new toner cartridge and shake
it 5 or 6 times as shown.
(B)(A) (C) (D)
(A): Yellow (B): Magenta (C): Cyan
(D): Black 1 (E): Black 2
(E)
73
4
Insert the new toner cartridge
horizontally, pushing it in until it locks.
Push the cartridge firmly in until it clicks into place.
A toner cartridge of a different color cannot be installed. Be sure to install a toner cartridge of the same color.
5
Close the front cover (upper).
After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically
enters image adjustment mode. Do not open the front cover
(upper) during this time.
Caution
• Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.
• If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality
and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine. Be sure to use a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge.
• Keep the used toner cartridge in a plastic bag (do not discard it). Your service technician will collect the used toner
cartridge.
• To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, continually touch the [COPY] key during printing or when the machine
is idle. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while the key is touched. When the percentage falls to
"25-0%", obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.
• Depending on your conditions of use, the color may become faint or the image blurred.
74
REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX
The waste toner box collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the waste toner box becomes full,
"Replace used toner container." will appear. Follow the procedure below to replace the waste toner box.
1
Open the waste toner box compartment
cover.
2
Remove the waste toner box.
3
Place the cover on the removed waste
toner box.
The cover is included with the new toner waste box. Remove
the cover from the new waste toner box and attach it as shown.
• Waste toner cannot be reused. Using waste toner may cause degraded image quality and machine failure.
• Do not discard the waste toner box. Place it in a plastic bag and keep it until your service technician comes to
perform maintenance. Your service technician will collect the waste toner box.
4
Install the new waste toner box.
75
5
Close the waste toner box compartment
cover.
After closing the cover, make sure that the message no longer
appears.
Caution
• Do not throw the waste toner box into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store the waste toner box out of the reach of small children.
When replacing the waste toner box, be aware that it may soil your clothes or the immediate surroundings.
76
This chapter explains the text entry screen.
FUNCTIONS OF THE MAIN KEYS
6
ENTERING TEXT
Key Description
This changes the text entry screen from the lower case screen to the upper case screen. The upper case
screen will continue to appear until the [Caps] key is touched again so that it is no longer highlighted. The
[Caps] key is convenient when you wish to enter all capital letters.
This key temporarily changes the keys in the text entry screen to upper case when lower case letters
appear, or to lower case when upper case letters appear.
Touch a letter key after touching the [Shift] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [Shift] key
will no longer be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
The [Shift] key is convenient when you only need to enter one upper case letter or one lower case letter, or
when you need to enter one of the symbols assigned to the numeric keys.
To cancel selection of the [Shift] key, touch the [Shift] key again. The [Shift] key will no longer be highlighted.
Touch this key to enter a line break when entering the body text of an e-mail message.
Touch this key to delete the characters to the left of the cursor one character at a time.
Touch this key to temporarily change the key layout of character entry mode to a different language. Select
the key layout that you wish to use.
Touch this key to enter a space between letters.
This temporarily changes the entry screen to the accented letter and symbol entry screen. Touch a letter
key after touching the [AltGr] key to enter that letter. After the letter is entered, the [AltGr] key will no longer
be highlighted and the original text entry screen will appear.
To cancel selection of the [AltGr] key, touch the [AltGr] key again. The [AltGr] key will no longer be highlighted.
These keys move the cursor left and right.
These keys move the cursor to the line above or below the current line during entry of the body text of an e-mail message.
Touch this key to select character entry mode.
Touch this key to select symbol entry mode. Symbol mode is used to enter symbols and accented letters.
Use this to retrieve a previously stored subject for e-mail or other pre-set text.
Touch this key to return to the previous setting screen without entering text.
Touch this key to enter the text that currently appears and return to the previous setting screen.
Caps
Shift
Enter
Other Language
Space
AltGr
Characters
Symbols
Pre-Set Select
Cancel
OK
77
ENTERING TEXT FROM AN EXTERNAL KEYBOARD
An external keyboard can only be used as a alternative for the text entry screen that appears in the machine's touch
panel.
The layout of the keys in the text entry screen in the touch panel differs slightly from the layout of the keys on the
external keyboard.
Use a SHARP-recommended external keyboard.
For the recommended keyboards, please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department.
• " " in the text entry screen indicates how many characters can be entered. A number of characters greater than " "
cannot be entered.
• The key layouts that can be selected vary depending on the language selected in "Display Language Setting" in the
system settings (administrator).
MX7000-US-USR-Z2
User's Guide
MX-5500N
MX-6200N
MX-7000N
MODEL:
